all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos | label |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 834.62 KiB | / January 01 2016 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 4.15 MiB | / January 01 2016 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.52 MiB | / January 01 2016 | |||
1 2 |
|
Users Manual 3 | Users Manual | 3.91 MiB | / January 01 2016 | |||
1 2 |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 1.14 MiB | / January 01 2016 | |||
1 2 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 667.08 KiB | / January 01 2016 | |||
1 2 |
|
Label | ID Label/Location Info | 412.42 KiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Agent Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 188.93 KiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 159.10 KiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Confidentiality Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 181.66 KiB | ||||
1 2 |
|
Confidentiality Request Letter Short Term | Cover Letter(s) | 22.97 KiB | ||||
1 2 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 | Test Setup Photos | / January 01 2016 | ||||||
1 2 |
|
Tune Up Procedure | Parts List/Tune Up Info | 5.21 KiB | ||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 | Cover Letter(s) |
1 2 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 834.62 KiB | / January 01 2016 |
GMA 350/350c pilots guide Copyright 2011, 2015 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. This manual reflects the operation of GMA 350/350c units. Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later Mod status levels. Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A. Tel: 913/397.8200 Fax: 913/397.8282 Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A. Tel: 503/391.3411 Fax 503/364.2138 Garmin (Europe) Ltd, Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K. Tel: 44/0870.8501241 Fax: 44/0870.8501251 Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan Tel: 886/02.2642.9199 Fax: 886/02.2642.9099 Web Site Address: www.garmin.com Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited. Garmin is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin. 2015 The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. September, 2015 190-01134-12 Rev. G Printed in the U.S.A. LIMITED WARRANTY This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within this period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty does not cover failures due to abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs. In addition, Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the law of any country. THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you. Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit the Garmin Web site at http://
www.garmin.com or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800-800-1020. CAUTION: Incorrect aircraft wiring could short the left channel or both channels to ground if a monaural headset is plugged into the stereo jacks. If wired incorrectly, fail-safe operation will not work. Transmitter Grant of Equipment Authorization FCC ID: IPH-0163700 IC: 1792A-0163700 IC M/N: GMN-00871 NOTE This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference which may cause undesired operation NOTE This device does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could result in permanent damage to the equipment, and void your warranty and your authority to operate this device under Part 15 regulations. Industry Canada Statement This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Cet appareil est conforme aux normes RSS sans licence dIndustrie Canada. Son fonctionnement est soumis aux conditions suivantes: (1) cet appareil ne doit pas causer dinterfrences et (2) doit accepter toute interfrence,y compris les interfrences pouvant entraner un fonctionnement indsirable de lappareil. Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that necessary for successful communication. Conformment la rglementation dIndustrie Canada, le prsent metteur radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne dun type et dun gain maximal (ou infrieur) approuv pour lmetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de rduire les risques de brouillage radiolectrique lintention des autres utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type dantenne et son gain de sorte que la puissance isotrope rayonne quivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dpasse pas lintensit ncessaire ltablissement dune communication satisfaisante. FCC Statement for Mobility Device This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator and your body. This transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. CONTrOls 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 GMA 350 Controls 22 23 24 25 GMA 350c (Bluetooth) Controls 26 NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated. 1 MKR/MUTE Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver audio. Deactivates automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal is received. Also, stops play of recorded COM audio. 6 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel 2 COM1 When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable monitored COM muting during primary COM reception. 3 COM2 When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable monitored COM muting during primary COM reception. 4 NAV1 When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard. 5 NAV2 When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard. 6 Selects and deselects audio from a telephone or entertainment device connected to the Front Panel Jack. Audio from a telephone connected to the rear of the audio panel is used if a device is not connected to the Front Panel Jack. Press and hold to enable/disable muting during reception. 7 MUS1 Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUS1 muting during reception. 8 MUS2 Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUS2 muting during reception. 9 MAN SQ Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, squelch is controlled manually. 10 Volume Indicator Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale. 11 Front Panel Jack Used for an entertainment or telephone input. 12 MIC1 Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be added by pressing the COM2 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode. When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using COM1, the copilot is using the COM2. 7 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide 13 MIC2 Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be added by pressing the COM1 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode. When in Split-COM mode, the pilot is using COM1, the copilot is using the COM2. 14 PLAY Press once to play the latest recorded memory block. Press while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent press thereafter plays the previous block of memory. 15 AUX When selected, audio from the AUX inputs can be heard. 16 PILOT Controls the pilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle 3D Audio on/off for all headset positions. 17 COPLT Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle copilot configuration between crew and passenger. 18 PASS Controls the passenger intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable passenger muting during reception. 19 SPKR Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM, NAV, AUX, and MKR receiver audio can be heard on the speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during PA. 20 Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob Turn to move the cursor (flashing white or blue annunciator) to the desired source. 21 Volume (VOL) Control Knob Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the selected source (indicated by the flashing white or blue annunciator). When the volume control cursor is not active press to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor is active, press twice (once to cancel the cursor, twice to activate Blue-
Select mode). 8 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel 22 Bluetooth Connection Annunciator (GMA 350c only) A flashing blue annunciator indicates the unit is discoverable. A solid blue annunciator indicates an active Bluetooth connection. 23 Key Annunciator (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the audio source. Press the key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE. 24 MUS1 Key Annunciator (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the MUS1 audio source. Press the MUS1 key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE. 25 MUS2 Key Annunciator (GMA 350c only) Assigns the Bluetooth device to the MUS2 audio source. Press the MUS2 key until the annunciator turns blue. The key annunciator will cycle from OFF to WHITE to BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source and BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE. 26 Control Knob Press and Hold (GMA 350c only) Press and hold for two seconds to enable the GMA 350c as discoverable for pairing. The Bluetooth Annunciator with flash to indicate that the unit is discoverable. The unit will remain discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once a successful pair is established, the audio Bluetooth paired is played. 9 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide FEATUrEs ANd OPErATION The GMA 350/350c Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection. The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS), a marker beacon receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by Avionics Squelch (ASQ). When no audio is detected, ASQ processing further reduces the amount of background noise. The MAN SQ Key toggles between manual and automatic intercom system (ICS) squelch. In automatic ICS squelch mode, threshold adjustments are handled automatically by the system. In manual ICS squelch mode, individual threshold adjustments can be made for the pilot, copilot, and passenger microphones by the crew. The ability to adjust individual thresholds for each ICS position further reduces the amount of background noise from the radios. Pushbutton keys control audio selection. When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated. Annunciator brightness is adjusted automatically by photocell dimming. Key brightness is adjusted by the radio dimming bus control. Three Aux inputs are available for additional avionics or audio devices. Upon installation, the unit may be configured in various ways depending on aircraft type and the needs of the pilot. POwEr-UP The GMA 350/350c performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to those in use before the unit was last turned off. 10 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel MONO/sTErEO HEAdsETs Stereo headsets are recommended when using the GMA 350/350c. Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears. If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears audio in the left ear only. TrANsCEIvErs NOTE: Transceiver functions may also be accessed via Voice Recognition commands. Refer to the Voice Recognition section for more information. Audio from the #1 or #2 COM receiver can be selected independently by pressing the respective Key(s) (COM1 or COM2). Pressing MIC1 or MIC2 selects the #1 or #2 transmitter and simultaneously selects the related COM receiver (COM1 or COM2) allowing received audio to be heard. The other COM receiver can be added by pressing the respective key. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission, audio from the other COM radio is muted. ENABLING/DISABLING MONITORED COM MuTING Press and hold COM1 or COM2 to enable/disable monitored COM muting during reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission. The aural message Monitor Mute Enable/Disable is heard. 11 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide SpLIT-COM MODE NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM frequencies are too close together, interference may be heard during transmission on the other radio. During Split-COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios. Pressing both MIC Keys simultaneously initiates Split-COM Mode
(i.e., COM1/COM2). The respective COM1/MIC1 or COM2/MIC2 annunciators are illuminated indicating Split-COM operation. Split-COM operation is cancelled by pressing one of the selected MIC Keys again. In Split-COM mode, the pilot uses COM1 and the copilot uses COM2. COM2 Radio is Selected Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit 12 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel TRANSMIT INDICATIONS During COM transmission, the active transceiver (MIC1 or MIC2) Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second. During Split-COM transmission, the MIC1 annunciator flashes when the pilots microphone PTT is pressed. The MIC2 annunciator flashes when the copilots microphone PTT is pressed. Annunciator Flashes During Transmission COM Radio Transmit Indication rECEIvErs NOTE: Receiver functions may also be accessed via Voice Recognition commands. Refer to the Voice Recognition section for more information. Pressing the NAV1 and/or NAV2 Key(s) selects/deselects the receiver audio for the corresponding navigation radio source. The selected audio source can be heard over the headset and the speaker (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously. Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver 13 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide MARkER BEACON RECEIVER The marker beacon receiver detects any marker beacon signal within the reception range of the aircraft. When a marker beacon signal is detected, the lamps illuminate, and an associated keyed-tone is heard when MKR audio is selected. Marker beacon lamps operate independently of any audio selection and cannot be turned off. Marker Beacon key & Lamps The marker beacon signal sensitivity threshold can be set to High, Low, or User Selectable (toggle switch required). The receiver detects the three marker tones (outer, middle, and inner). Audio Frequency 400 Hz
(Outer) 1300 Hz
(Middle) 3000 Hz
(Inner) Audio keying Lamp Actuated Blue Amber White The GMA 350/350c provides three states of marker beacon operation;
On, Muted, and Deselected. The MKR/MUTE key annunciator indicates when marker beacon audio is selected. Marker beacon audio is not heard when the annunciator is off or when the annunciator is on with the marker beacon audio muted. 14 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel Turning Marker Beacon audio on With the MKR/MUTE annunciator off, press the MKR/MUTE Key to activate marker beacon audio and illuminate the MKR/MUTE annunciator. MuTing Marker Beacon audio During marker beacon audio reception, press the MKR/MUTE Key to mute the audio. The MKR/MUTE annunciator remains lit, but the current marker tone is silenced. Audio muting deactivates automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal is received. deselecTing Marker Beacon audio To deselect marker beacon audio, press the MKR/MUTE Key twice during marker beacon reception or once if a marker beacon signal is not detected. INTErCOM sysTEM (ICs) NOTE: Intercom functions may also be accessed via Voice Recognition commands. Refer to the Voice Recognition section for more information. The GMA 350/350c includes a six-position intercom system (ICS), two MUSIC inputs, and one telephone/entertainment input for the pilot, copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot, Copilot, and Passenger audio isolation. Intercom Controls 15 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide Press the PILOT, COPLT, and/or PASS Keys to distribute as required. If the annunciators are lit, those positions will share intercom audio. If an annunciator is NOT lit that position is isolated from the others. COpILOT CONFIGuRED AS CREW OR pASSENGER NOTE: When the copilot position is configured as a passenger, the COpLT Key is disabled and the copilot headset is treated as a passenger for intercom and entertainment audio distribution. The copilot position can be configured as crew (COPLT Key enabled) or as a passenger (COPLT Key disabled). Pressing and holding the COPLT Key toggles the copilot position configuration between passenger and crew. The aural message Copilot as Passenger or Copilot as Crew is heard. INTERCOM MODES NOTE: In the following modes the copilot position is configured as crew. NOTE: In the default ICS configuration, only the pilot and copilot positions can hear aircraft alerts. 16 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel all inTercoM Mode In All Intercom mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear each other and hear the aircraft audio. Aircraft Audio pILOT COpLT pASS ICS keys Mode Operation PiloT isolaTe Mode In Pilot Isolate mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot and Passengers also hear each other. Aircraft Audio pILOT COpLT pASS ICS keys Mode Operation 17 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide Passenger/crew isolaTe Mode In Passenger/Crew Isolate mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio and each other. The Passengers hear each other. Aircraft Audio pILOT COpLT pASS ICS keys Mode Operation coPiloT isolaTe Mode In Copilot Isolate mode the Pilot and Passengers hear the aircraft audio and each other. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode. Split-COM Mode
(Optional) Aircraft Audio COpLT pILOT pASS ICS keys Mode Operation 18 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel all isolaTe Mode In All Isolate mode the Pilot hears the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode. The Passengers hear each other. Aircraft Audio Split-COM
(Optional) pILOT COpLT pASS ICS keys Mode Operation PiloT & coPiloT isolaTe Mode In Pilot & Copilot Isolate mode the Pilot and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode. Split-COM
(Optional) Aircraft Audio pILOT pASS COpLT ICS keys Mode Operation 19 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide PiloT & Passenger isolaTe Mode In Pilot & Passenger Isolate mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers hear each other. Aircraft Audio pILOT COpLT pASS ICS keys Mode Operation coPiloT & Passenger isolaTe Mode In Copilot & Passenger Isolate mode the Pilot can hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM mode. The Passengers hear each other. Aircraft Audio Split-COM
(Optional) pILOT COpLT pASS ICS keys Mode Operation 20 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel INTERCOM VOLuME AND SquELCh The VOL/CRSR Knob controls selection and volume or manual squelch adjustment for audio sources that may not be adjustable anywhere else in the system. The small knob controls the volume or squelch. Turning the large knob activates and/or moves the cursor (flashing white annunciator/
or flashing blue annunciator in Blue-Select Mode) to select the audio source to adjust. The cursor will time-out after a few seconds and the position of the cursor will always default back to the PILOT Key. Pressing the small knob cancels the cursor. Blue-selecT Mode (TelePhone/enTerTainMenT disTriBuTion) The music (MUS1/MUS2) and telephone/entertainment (
) audio are distributed using the Blue-Select Mode. The following example indicates that the pilot, copilot, and passengers will all hear the telephone/entertainment audio. Blue-Select Mode (Telephone/Entertainment Distribution) The Blue-Select Mode is entered by pressing the small knob when the volume control cursor (flashing white annunciator) is not active. If the volume control cursor is active, press the small knob twice. The first press will cancel the volume control cursor, the second will activate Blue-Select Mode. 21 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide The annunciator over the Key will be flashing blue. Any combination of the annunciators over the PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons may be blue. Select the desired button to turn the blue annunciator on or off to distribute the telephone/entertainment audio to selected crew/passenger positions. Turn the large knob to select MUS1 or MUS2 and select the crew positions to receive the music audio. Selecting any key other than PILOT, COPLT, PASS, MUS1, MUS2, will cancel Blue-Select Mode. Pressing the small knob will or also cancel Blue-Select Mode. After approximately 20 seconds with no input, the Blue-Select Mode will automatically cancel. adjusTing inTercoM VoluMe When the cursor is on PILOT, COPLT, or PASS, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the intercom volume for the listener. adjusTing Manual squelch When the cursor is on MAN SQ, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the ICS Squelch Threshold (the volume level that must be exceeded to be heard over the intercom). adjusTing sPeaker VoluMe When the cursor is on SPKR, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the speaker volume of the selected sources (COM, NAV, AUX, MKR). adjusTing Mkr, auX,
, and Music VoluMe When the cursor is on MKR, AUX,
, MUS1 or MUS2, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the individual volume of the selected source. 22 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On for Manual Squelch Relative Volume/
Squelch Scale Volume or Manual Squelch Cursor Volume/Squelch Control SpEAkER All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected. Speaker key Passenger address Mode (Pa Mode) Press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds to initiate Passenger Address Mode. PA Mode is annunciated by a rapid blinking of the SPKR annunciator. When in PA Mode the crew can use the PTT Push-
to-Talk button to deliver announcements over the speaker, to the passenger headsets, or both depending on configuration. 23 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide sPliT-Pa Mode During Split-PA Mode the pilot can continue to use the radio(s) while the copilot delivers PA announcements. To initiate Split-PA Mode, first enter Split-COM Mode by pressing both MIC Keys simultaneously, then press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds. 3d AUdIO 3D Audio is useful when multiple audio sources are present. By using different responses in each ear, 3D audio processing creates the illusion that each audio source is coming from a unique location or seat position. Because this feature uses different signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for stereo intercom and stereo headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener will still hear all audio sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation. With a single COM selected and 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source at the 12 oclock position. If both COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11 oclock and COM2 at the 1 oclock position. All other intercom positions are processed to sound like their relative seat location. By default, the GMA 350/350c assumes the pilot sits in the left seat. A Garmin authorized service center can make changes to the default configuration. enaBling 3d audio Press and hold the PILOT Key to toggle 3D audio processing on and off for all headset positions. When 3D Audio is enabled, the aural message 3D audio left is heard in the left ear followed by 3D audio right in the right ear. If the aural messages are not heard in only the left and then the right ear respectively, the cause may be aircraft wiring or headset settings. Refer to the following table if a headset or aircraft wiring problem is suspected. 24 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel 3D Audio Troubleshooting Cause(s) Solution(s) 1) Use a stereo headset Symptom(s) 3D audio left message heard in both ears. 3D audio right message not heard 3D audio left message heard in both ears, followed by 3D audio right message heard in both ears Symptom(s) 3D audio right message heard in both ears. 3D audio left not heard 3) 1) 1) Mono headset in use 2) Stereo headset in use with mono/stereo switch set to mono 3) Aircraft wiring has left audio wired to both left and right channels of stereo headset jack 1) Mono headset in use 2) Stereo headset in use with mono/stereo switch set to mono Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/right shorted together) Cause(s) Incorrect aircraft wiring (right channel used for mono instead of left or left/
right swapped) 2) 3) Set mono/stereo switch on headset to stereo If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to function. 1) Use a stereo headset 2) Set mono/stereo switch on headset to stereo 3) 1) If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to function. Solution(s) See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to function. 25 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide 3D Audio Troubleshooting 1) Stereo headset is on 1) Verify correct orientation from backwards 2) Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/right channels swapped) 2) 1) Aircraft wired for 1) mono intercom the left/right indication on each side of the headset or the position of the boom MIC
(usually attached on left side). If the headset is backwards, the left/right position information will be swapped. See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to function. See a service center to wire the installation for stereo headsets. 1) Incorrect aircraft wiring (right channel used for mono instead of left, or left/
right swapped) 1) See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to function. 3D audio left message heard in right ear only followed by 3D audio right message heard in left ear only 3D audio left message heard in left ear only, no audio heard in right ear. 3D audio right message heard in right ear only, no audio heard in left ear 3D Audio Troubleshooting ClEArANCE rECOrdEr ANd PlAyEr The GMA 350/350c contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest block. 26 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory block. The Play function can also be accessed via Voice Recognition commands. Refer to the Voice Recognition section for more information. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM signal is detected during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted. Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block. Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks. Stops Play Marker Mute key vOICE rECOGNITION Voice Recognition allows the pilot (and optionally copilot) to control the GMA 350/350c using spoken commands. To activate Voice Recognition, push and hold the Push-to-Command (PTC) button while speaking a command. When the Push-to-Command button is released, the GMA 350/350c will respond. If a command is correctly interpreted by the GMA 350/350c, a positive acknowledgement chime will be played, and the pilot should verify that the correct button selection is indicated by the triangular annunciator lights. Alternatively, some commands will be indicated by a voice response from the GMA 350/350c. If the desired modes are not indicated by annunciator lights or a voice response, the pilot should repeat the command by using the Push-to-Command button, or by manually using the front panel controls of the GMA 350/350c. 27 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide If a command is incorrectly interpreted by the GMA 350/350c, a negative acknowledgement tone will be played. The pilot should repeat the command by using the Push-to-Command button, or by manually using the front panel controls of the GMA 350/350c. In the event of any abnormal Voice Recognition operation, the front panel controls may be used to override Voice Recognition and manually control the GMA 350/350c. The following table lists the available Voice Recognition commands, the associated actions, and the voice response if applicable:
Control Example phrase COM one MIC one COM one MIC COM two MIC two COM two MIC Split COM COM NAV AuX Monitored COM mute OR Mute Monitored COM Disable monitored COM mute Monitored COM mute disable Disable mute monitored COM OR Mute monitored COM disable NAV one NAV two AUX OR Auxiliary Action Toggles COM1 audio Selects MIC1/COM1 audio Selects MIC1/COM1 audio Toggles COM2 audio Selects MIC2/COM2 audio Selects MIC2/COM2 audio Selects split COM mode Mutes monitored COM on primary COM reception (refer to Page 8). Voice Response: Monitor mute enable. Disables monitored COM mute on primary COM reception (refer to Page 8). Voice Response: Monitor mute disable. Toggles NAV1 audio Toggles NAV2 audio Toggles AUX audio 28 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel Control Example phrase Action Telephone Phone OR Jack Telephone mute Mute telephone Phone mute Mute phone Jack mute OR Mute Jack Disable telephone mute Mute telephone disable Disable phone mute Mute phone disable Disable jack mute Mute jack disable Telephone mute disable Disable mute telephone Phone mute disable Disable mute phone Jack mute disable OR Disable mute jack MUSIC one MUSIC two MUSIC one mute OR Mute MUSIC one Disable MUSIC one mute MUSIC one mute disable Disable mute MUSIC one OR Mute MUSIC one disable Toggles
(TEL/JACK) input Mutes TEL/JACK on radio reception. Voice Response: Tel and jack mute enable. Disables TEL/JACK mute on radio reception. Voice Response: Tel and jack mute disable. Toggles MUS1 input Toggles MUS2 input Mutes MUS1 on radio reception Voice Response: Music one mute enable Disables MUS1 mute on radio reception. Voice Response: Music one mute disable. 29 MuSIC 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide Control Example phrase Action MuSIC ICS Isolation MUSIC two mute OR Mute MUSIC two Disable MUSIC two mute MUSIC two mute disable Disable mute MUSIC two OR Mute MUSIC two disable Pilot Copilot Passenger OR Pass Passenger mute Pass mute Mute passenger OR Mute pass Disable passenger mute Disable pass mute Disable mute passenger Disable mute pass Passenger mute disable Pass mute disable Mute passenger disable OR Mute pass disable Copilot is passenger OR Copilot is pass Copilot Configuration Copilot is crew 30 Mutes MUS2 on radio reception. Voice Response: Music two mute enabled. Disables MUS2 mute on radio reception. Voice Response: Music two mute disabled. Toggles PILOT button Toggles COPLT button Toggles PASS button Mutes passengers during radio reception. Voice Response: Passenger mute enable. Disables muting of passengers during radio reception. Voice Response: Passenger mute disable. Configures Copilot as a passenger. Voice Response: Copilot as passenger. Configures Copilot as flight crew. Voice Response: Copilot as crew. 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel Control Example phrase Action Manual Squelch Manual squelch OR Man squelch Manual squelch threshold up Man squelch threshold up Manual squelch volume up OR Man squelch volume up Manual squelch threshold down Man squelch threshold down Manual squelch voume down OR Man squelch volume down Toggles manual squelch mode Increases manual squelch threshold Decreases manual squelch threshold NOTE: Finer manual squelch adjustment may be made using the dual concentric knobs on the GMA 350/350c. The voice command Up or Down is equivalent to three clicks of the inner knob. Speaker (SpkR) Speaker pA Marker Beacon
(MkR/MuTE) COM Clearance Recorder Cursor Volume Adjustments P - A Marker Mute marker OR Marker mute Play Read back OR Say again Cursor off Cursor cancel OR Cancel cursor
(Desired selection*) volume up
(Desired selection*) volume down Toggles SPKR on/off Toggles PA on/off Same action as pressing MKR/
MUTE (refer to page 4). Same action as pressing PLAY
(refer to page 5). Cancels cursor when cursor is flashing Increases volume of desired selection Decreases volume of desired selection 31 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide Control Volume Example phrase Action Displays the current volume but does not change it
(Desired selection*) volume Adjustments
* Desired selection = Speaker, pilot, copilot, passenger, pass, marker, aux, auxiliary, telephone, phone, jack, music one, or music two. NOTE: Finer volume adjustment may be made using the dual concentric knobs on the GMA 350/350c. The voice command Up or Down is equivalent to three clicks of the inner knob. Distribution
(Blue Mode) Distribute telephone to (desired position(s) **) OR Distribute phone to (desired position(s) **) OR Distribute jack to (desired position(s) **) Distribute music one to (desired position(s) **) Distribute music two to (desired position(s)**) Distributes TEL/JACK to desired positions. Distributes MUS1 to desired position(s) Distributes MUS2 to desired position(s)
** Desired position(s) = All, none, pilot, copilot, passenger, pass, or any combination of pilot, copilot, passenger, or pass. NOTE: The word to may be omitted from distribution phrases. 3D Audio Three-D audio Standard audio Enables 3D audio (refer to page 21) Voice Response: Three-D audio left, three-D audio right Enables standard audio (disables 3D audio) Voice Response: Standard Audio Voice Recognition Commands 32 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel ENTErTAINMENT INPUTs The GMA 350/350c provides three stereo telephone/entertainment inputs:
The telephone/entertainment (
) Key controls a telephone or entertainment device connected to the rear of the audio panel or to the Front Panel Jack. The MUS1 and MUS2 Key controls the Entertainment Music audio input. The Front Panel Jack can be used as an entertainment input or a telephone input (in which case, it operates simultaneously with the rear telephone interface). The Front Panel Jack is a 3.5-mm stereo jack that is compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3s, CD players, and cell phones. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the Front Panel Jack. Distribution of the entertainment inputs are configured in Blue-Select Mode. Blank Page TELEphONE AND ENTERTAINMENT MuTING Telephone and entertainment muting can be enabled or disabled by the user, however it is always muted during alerts. enaBling/disaBling MuTing Press and hold the MUS1, MUS2, or (
) Key for two seconds to toggle muting on and off. The aural message Music 1 Mute Enable/
Disable, Tel Mute Enable/Disable, or Bluetooth Mute Enabled/
Disabled is heard. 33 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide BlUETOOTH (GMA 350c ONly) NOTE: Pairing is only necessary during the first attempt to connect a Bluetooth device to the GMA 350c. Once paired, the GMA 350c and the device will connect automatically. pAIRING A BLuETOOTh DEVICE WITh ThE GMA 350c Press and hold the inner knob for two seconds. The Bluetooth Annunciator flashes to indicate the unit is discoverable and the aural message Bluetooth discoverable is heard. The GMA 350c will remain discoverable for 90 seconds or until a successful pair is established. Once paired, the Bluetooth Annunciator turns steady blue and the aural message Bluetooth connected/paired is heard. ASSIGNING AN AuDIO SOuRCE TO ThE BLuETOOTh DEVICE Press the , MUS1, or MUS2 key until the annunciator turns blue
(the audio from the Bluetooth source will not be heard until this step is complete). The key annunciator cycles OFF-WHITE-BLUE. WHITE selects the wired audio source. BLUE selects the Bluetooth audio source. The BLUE source assignment will persist through Bluetooth audio connection disruptions. NOTE: The Bluetooth audio can only be assigned to one source at a time. Once the Bluetooth audio is assigned to an audio source, the remaining entertainment audio sources will only cycle between OFF and WHITE. Bluetooth audio will maintain a separate volume level and Blue Select distribution from the wired audio source. If the Bluetooth connection is supporting a phone call, all intercom positions listening to that source can also speak on the call through the headset MICs. 34 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel ADDITIONAL BLuETOOTh CONTROL FuNCTIONS In addition to the 2 second press and hold of the inner knob discussed above, the knob has two additional functions that are intended to be seldom or never used. The following functions are available if needed for troubleshooting:
Press and hold the inner knob for 5 seconds to turn off the Bluetooth radio. The aural message Bluetooth off is heard. This function electrically turns off the radio, not just the audio source selection. In the event that Bluetooth radio interference with communication or navigation equipment is suspected, the Bluetooth radio can be powered off without powering off the entire audio panel. A subsequent 5 second press and hold turns the radio back on. Press and hold the inner knob for 10 seconds to clear the memory of paired devices (up to 10 are stored). Once cleared, the aural message Bluetooth list cleared is heard. This function is used as a troubleshooting method when a device is not pairing, or to remove a device that is no longer needed. CONNECTING BLuETOOTh TO A GARMIN VIRB The GMA 350c supports Bluetooth wireless delivery of pilot headphone audio to versions of the Garmin VIRB action camera that support Bluetooth mic audio input for recording. Pairing a Garmin VIRB to the GMA 350c works like pairing other Bluetooth audio devices. Once connected, pilot headphone audio will be delivered to the VIRB via Bluetooth. In a connection to the Garmin VIRB, the GMA is the source. Therefore, selecting an entertainment button is not required. The PILOT annunciator turns blue to indicate this connection. 35 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide FAIl-sAFE OPErATION If there is a failure of the GMA 350/350c or when power is not applied, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilots headset and microphone directly to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during Fail-safe operation. 36 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots GuideGMA 350/350c Audio Panel GMA 350/350c Audio Panel 37 190-01134-12 Rev. GGarmin GMA 350/350c Pilots Guide Garmin International, Inc. 1200 East 151st Street Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A. Toll free: 800.800.1020 or 866.739.5687 p: 913.397.8200 f: 913.397.8282 Garmin AT, Inc. 2345 Turner Road SE Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A. Toll free: 800.525.6726 p: 503.391.3411 f: 503.364.2138 Garmin (Europe) Ltd Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road Hounsdown Business Park Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K. Toll free (within U.K.) 0808.2380000 p: 44/0870.8501241 f: 44/0870.8501251 Garmin Corporation No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan p: 886/2.2642.9199 f: 886/2.2642.9099 www.garmin.com 2011, 2015 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries 190-01134-12 Rev. G
1 2 | Users Manual 1 | Users Manual | 4.15 MiB | / January 01 2016 |
GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide Map Trafc Terrain Weather Charts Flight Plan Procedures Nearest Waypoint Info Services Utilities System 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:06:43 PM 2015 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. This manual reflects the operation of System Software version , or later. Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to later software versions. Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A. Tel: 913/397.8200 Fax: 913/397.8282 Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A. Tel: 503/391.3411 Fax 503/364.2138 Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9LR, U.K. Tel. +44 (0) 87 0850 1243 Fax +44 (0) 23 8052 4004 Garmin Singapore Pte. Ltd., 46 East Coast Road, #05-06 Eastgate, Singapore 428766 Tel : (65) 63480378 Fax : ( 65 ) 63480278 At Garmin, we value your opinion. For comments about this guide, please e-mail:
Techpubs.Salem@Garmin.com www.garmin.com Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited. This part shall comply with Garmin Banned and Restricted Substances document, 001-00211-00. Garmin, FliteCharts, and SafeTaxi are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. Garmin SVT and Smart Airspace are trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin. NavData is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; StormScope and SkyWatch are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications; Sirius and XM are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.; Iridium is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications Inc.; United States radar data provided by NOAA; European radar data collected and provided by Meteo France. SD and SDHC Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC; the Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Garmin is under license.
2015 Printed in the U.S.A. 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2
/2015 2:06:43 PM LIMITED WARRANTY All Garmin avionics products are warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for:
two years from the date of purchase for new Remote-Mount and Panel-Mount products; one year from the date of purchase for new portable products and any purchased newly-overhauled products;
six months for newly-overhauled products exchanged through a Garmin Authorized Service Center;
and 90 days for factory repaired or newly-overhauled products exchanged at Garmin in lieu of repair. Within the applicable period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts or labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches, nicks and dents; (ii) consumable parts, such as batteries, unless product damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship;
(iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, ood, re, or other acts of nature or external causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modied or altered without the written permission of Garmin. In addition, Garmin reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any country. THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO STATE. IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement product) the product or software or offer a full refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY. Online Auction Purchases: Products purchased through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage. Online auction conrmations are not accepted for warranty verication. To obtain warranty service, an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original retailer is required. Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction. International Purchases: A separate warranty may be provided by international distributors for devices purchased outside the United States depending on the country. If applicable, this warranty is provided by the local in-country distributor and this distributor provides local service for your device. Distributor warranties are only valid in the area of intended distribution. Devices purchased in the United States or Canada must be returned to the Garmin service center in the United Kingdom, the United States, Canada, or Taiwan for service. To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit the Garmin web site at http://www.garmin.com or contact Garmin Customer Service at 866-739-5687. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide i Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:06:43 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain function. The GTN 725/750 Terrain Proximity feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during ight. The Terrain Proximity feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance and is not certied for use in applications requiring a certied terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained from third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data. WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes. WARNING: The Garmin GTN 725/750 has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication shown by the GTN 725/750. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated information available in the cockpit. WARNING: The altitude calculated by GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and could vary signicantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the output from the GDC 74A/B Air Data Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always use pressure altitude displayed by pressure altimeters in the aircraft. WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the GTN 725/750 system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using an outdated database do so entirely at their own risk. WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to enhance situational awareness. Index ii Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM WARNING: Trafc information shown on the GTN 725/750 is provided as an aid in visually acquiring trafc. Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conicting trafc. WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions. WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product may be signicantly older than the indicated weather product age. WARNING: For safety reasons, GTN 725/750 operational procedures must be learned on the ground. WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide. Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During ight operations, carefully compare indications from the GTN 725/750 to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation. CAUTION: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin GTN 725/750 utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the GTN 725/750 can be misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide iii Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix CAUTION: The Garmin GTN 725/750 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modications could void both the warranty and the pilots authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations. CAUTION: The GTN displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reective coating that is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner that is specied as safe for anti-reective coatings. NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information. Always conrm TFR information through ofcial sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Trafc Control. NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the GTN bezel and displays, are subject to change and may not reect the most current GTN software. Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment. NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with Californias Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65. NOTE: Canadian installations: In accordance with Canadian Radio Specications Standard 102 (RSS 102), RF eld strength exposure to persons from an antenna connected to this device should be limited to 60 V/m for controlled environment and 28 V/m for uncontrolled environment. NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions have not been qualied to be used as an airport moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview are intended to improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations should only be used by the ight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface. Index iv Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who y with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the following:
It is the pilots responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System. Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements
(DQRs) by virtue of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database and can be viewed at http://y.garmin.com by selecting "Type 2 LOA Status."
Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to y any and all terminal procedures that may be presented by the system. It is the pilots responsibility to operate in accordance with established AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment. NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmins database exclusion list as discussed in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at www.ygarmin.com by selecting "Database Exclusions List."
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.ygarmin.com by selecting "Aviation Database Alerts."
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support. NOTE: Garmin requests the ight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identied terrain, obstacles and xes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to FlyGarmin.com and select "Aviation Data Error Report."
Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide v Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM NOTE: The GTN touchscreen may not respond to touch commands if condensation or moisture accumulate on the touchscreen. To obtain accessories for your unit, please contact your Garmin dealer. Help us better support you by completing our on-line registration form today! Registration ensures that you will be notied of product updates and new products and provides lost or stolen unit tracking. Please, have the serial number of your unit handy, connect to our web site (www.garmin.com) and look for our Product Registration link on the Home page. The display surface is coated with a special anti-reective coating which is very sensitive to skin oils, waxes and abrasive cleaners. It is very important to clean the lens using an eyeglass lens cleaner which is specied as safe for anti-
reective coatings and a clean, lint-free cloth. AC 90-100A Statement of Compliance:
The Garmin navigational unit meets the performance and functional requirements of AC 90-100A. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC limits for Class B digital devices. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Furthermore, there is no Direct-To guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by relocating the equipment or connecting the equipment to a different circuit than the affected equipment. Consult an authorized dealer or other qualied avionics technician for additional help if these remedies do not correct the problem. Operation of this device is subject to the following conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index vi Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM Product Registration and Support Help us better support you by completing your online registration today!
Have the serial number of your product handy and connect to the Garmin web site (www.garmin.com). Look for the Product Registration link on the Home page. Also, be sure to record your serial number in the space provided. If you have any questions, the Garmin Product Support department may be reached Monday through Friday, 7:00 AM to 7:00 PM Central Time. US: 913-397-8200 US Toll Free: 1-866-739-5687 Canada Toll Free: 1-866-429-9296 Part Number 190-01007-03 Record of Revisions Revision Date Description 1 A B C D E F G H J 01/24/11 02/04/11 03/16/11 11/29/12 02/28/13 03/25/13 08/26/13 08/01/14 10/17/14 7/2015 Initial Release Production Release Update information Updates for software version 3.0 Updates for software version 4.0 Updates for software version 4.10 Updates for software version 5.0 Updates for software version 5.11 Updates for software version 5.12 Updates for software version 6.00 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide vii Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index viii Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM Table of Contents 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.1.1 1.1.2 LIMITED WARRANTY ......................................................................................... i Product Registration and Support ....................................................................vii Welcome ..................................................................................................... xxvii About This Guide ......................................................................................... xxvii Electronic Document Features ...................................................................... xxvii Conventions ............................................................................................... xxviii 1 Getting Started ................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Model Descriptions ..............................................................................1-1 GTN 725 .............................................................................. 1-1 GTN 750 .............................................................................. 1-2 1.2 About This Pilots Guide .......................................................................1-2 Conventions ......................................................................... 1-2 Using the Touchscreen .......................................................... 1-2 1.3 Product Description ..............................................................................1-3 Secure Data Card ................................................................. 1-4 Inserting an SD Card .........................................................1-4 Pilot Controls ....................................................................... 1-4 Volume/Squelch Knob ........................................................... 1-4 Large/Small Concentric Knobs ............................................... 1-5 HOME Key ............................................................................ 1-5 Direct-To Key ........................................................................ 1-5 Touchscreen Keys ................................................................. 1-6 1.4 Unit Power Up .....................................................................................1-6 Start-Up Screens ................................................................... 1-6 Database Verication and Fuel Settings ................................. 1-7 1.5 System Operation...............................................................................1-11 1.5.1 Using the Touchscreen Key Controls .................................... 1-11 1.5.2 System Page ....................................................................... 1-11 1.5.2.1 System Setup Values ........................................................... 1-12 1.5.2.2 Units Settings Values .......................................................... 1-13 Alerts Settings Values ......................................................... 1-13 1.5.2.3 1.5.2.4 Audio Values ...................................................................... 1-13 Backlight Values ................................................................. 1-13 1.5.2.5 1.5.2.6 Connext Setup.................................................................... 1-14 1.3.1 1.3.1.1 1.3.2 1.3.2.1 1.3.2.2 1.3.2.3 1.3.2.4 1.3.2.5 1.4.1 1.4.2 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide ix Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM 1.11.1 1.11.2 1.5.2.7 1.5.3 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.6.3 Voice Commands................................................................ 1-14 Dual GTN Installations ........................................................ 1-15 1.6 Direct-To Navigation ..........................................................................1-16 Direct-To a Waypoint .......................................................... 1-16 Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint ......................................... 1-16 Direct-To a Nearest Airport ................................................. 1-16 1.7 Selecting Com/Nav Frequencies ..........................................................1-17 Flight Planning ..................................................................................1-19 1.8 1.8.1 Creating a Flight Plan ......................................................... 1-19 1.9 IFR Procedures ...................................................................................1-20 1.10 Dead Reckoning .................................................................................1-21 1.11 FastFind Predictive Waypoint Entry .....................................................1-22 FastFind With Waypoint Info ........................................................1-22 FastFind With A Flight Plan ................................................. 1-23 2 Audio and Transponder Controls (Optional) ...................................... 2-1 2.1 Transponder Operation .........................................................................2-1 Select Transponder ................................................................ 2-2 IDENT .................................................................................. 2-2 Standby ................................................................................ 2-2 Ground ................................................................................ 2-3 On ....................................................................................... 2-3 Altitude Reporting ................................................................ 2-3 VFR ...................................................................................... 2-3 Selecting a Squawk Code ..................................................... 2-4 Flight ID ............................................................................... 2-5 GDL 88 ADS-B Reporting ...................................................... 2-5 Extended Squitter Transmission ............................................. 2-7 2.2 Audio Panel Operation .........................................................................2-8 2.2.1 Mic Selection ...................................................................... 2-10 2.2.1.1 Mic Window Mic Selection .................................................. 2-10 Audio Panel Page Mic Selection .......................................... 2-10 2.2.1.2 2.2.2 Monitor .............................................................................. 2-11 Passenger Address .............................................................. 2-11 2.2.3 3D Audio ............................................................................ 2-11 2.2.4 2.2.5 Cabin Speaker Selection and Volume ................................... 2-12 Marker Audio and Volume .................................................. 2-13 2.2.6 2.2.7 Marker Hi Sense ................................................................. 2-14 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7 2.1.8 2.1.9 2.1.10 2.1.11 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index x Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM 2.3 Marker Beacon Annunciations............................................. 2-14 2.2.8 Audio Split Mode ............................................................... 2-15 2.2.9 2.2.10 Playback Controls ............................................................... 2-16 Intercom Setup ..................................................................................2-17 Set Pilot, Co-Pilot, & Passenger Volume and Squelch ........... 2-20 2.3.1 Co-Pilot is Passenger .......................................................... 2-21 2.3.2 2.3.3 Music 1 and Music 2 Setup ................................................. 2-22 Telephone Setup ................................................................. 2-23 2.3.4 2.3.5 Bluetooth Setup ................................................................. 2-24 2.4 Telligence Voice Command .............................................................2-25 3 NAV/COM (GTN 750 NAV/COM) .......................................................... 3-1 3.1 Volume ................................................................................................3-2 3.2 Squelch ...............................................................................................3-2 3.3 Com Window and Tuning .....................................................................3-3 Com Frequency Finding ........................................................ 3-5 Find Recent Frequencies ....................................................... 3-6 Find Nearest Frequencies ...................................................... 3-6 Find Flight Plan Frequencies .................................................. 3-9 Find User Frequencies ........................................................... 3-9 Simple Frequency Entry ....................................................... 3-10 Adding a New User Frequency ............................................ 3-11 Emergency Frequency ......................................................... 3-13 Stuck Microphone .............................................................. 3-14 Remote Frequency Selection Control ................................... 3-14 Reverse Frequency Look-Up ................................................ 3-14 3.4 Com Frequency Monitoring ................................................................3-15 3.5 NAV (VOR/Localizer/Glideslope) Receiver Operations ..........................3-16 Ident Audio and Volume ..................................................... 3-16 3.5.1 Nav Tuning Window ............................................................ 3-17 3.5.2 3.5.3 Nav Frequency Finding ....................................................... 3-18 4 Flight Plans ......................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Creating a New Flight Plan ..................................................................4-2 Creating a New Flight Plan in the Catalog ............................. 4-2 Creating a New Flight Plan from the Active Flight Plan .......... 4-3 4.2 Active Flight Plan Page.........................................................................4-4 Waypoint Options ................................................................. 4-5 Activate Leg ......................................................................... 4-6 3.3.1 3.3.1.1 3.3.1.2 3.3.1.3 3.3.1.4 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 4.2.1 4.2.1.1 4.1.1 4.1.2 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide xi Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 4.3 4.2.1.2 Insert Before ........................................................................ 4-7 4.2.1.3 Insert After ........................................................................... 4-9 4.2.1.4 Remove ................................................................................ 4-9 4.2.1.5 Load Procedures ................................................................. 4-10 4.2.1.6 Waypoint Info..................................................................... 4-11 Airways .............................................................................. 4-12 4.2.2 4.2.3 Load Hold at Waypoint ...................................................... 4-16 Hold at Waypoint ................................................................ 4-16 4.2.3.1 Removing a Hold ................................................................ 4-17 4.2.3.2 Load Search and Rescue Patterns (Optional) ........................ 4-18 4.2.4 4.2.4.1 Creating a Parallel Track Pattern .......................................... 4-20 Creating a Sector Search Pattern ......................................... 4-22 4.2.4.2 Creating an Expanding Square Pattern ................................ 4-23 4.2.4.3 4.2.4.4 Creating an Orbit Pattern .................................................... 4-24 Flight Plan Menu ...............................................................................4-25 Store Flight Plan ................................................................. 4-26 4.3.1 Invert Flight Plan ................................................................ 4-26 4.3.2 4.3.3 Parallel Track ...................................................................... 4-27 Edit Data Fields .................................................................. 4-30 4.3.4 Flight Plan Catalog Route Options ...................................... 4-32 4.3.5 Catalog Route Option - Activate.......................................... 4-33 4.3.5.1 4.3.5.2 Catalog Route Option - Invert & Activate ............................. 4-33 Catalog Route Option - Preview .......................................... 4-34 4.3.5.3 Catalog Route Option - Edit ................................................ 4-34 4.3.5.4 4.3.5.5 Catalog Route Option - Copy .............................................. 4-35 Catalog Route Option - Delete ............................................ 4-36 4.3.5.6 Delete Flight Plan ............................................................... 4-37 4.3.6 Delete Flight Plan from Catalog .......................................... 4-37 4.3.6.1 4.3.6.2 Delete Active Flight Plan ..................................................... 4-38 Preview Flight Plan ............................................................. 4-38 4.3.7 Previewing the Active Flight Plan ........................................ 4-38 4.3.7.1 4.3.7.2 Previewing a Flight Plan in the Catalog ............................... 4-39 4.4 Graphically Editing a Flight Plan .........................................................4-39 Import Flight Plans with Connext .......................................................4-39 4.5 4.5.1 Operation ........................................................................... 4-40 4.5.2 Potential Errors ................................................................... 4-41 Import Flight Plans with an SD Card ...................................................4-43 4.6.1 Potential Errors ................................................................... 4-45 4.6 Index xii Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:06:44 PM 5 Direct-To .............................................................................................. 5-1 5.1 Direct-To Navigation ............................................................................5-1 5.2 Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint ...........................................................5-3 5.3 Direct-To a Nearest Airport ...................................................................5-4 5.4 Removing a Direct-To Course ...............................................................5-6 5.5 Direct-To Map Waypoint .......................................................................5-7 5.6 Off-Route Direct-To Course ..................................................................5-8 5.7 Graphically Editing a Direct-To Route....................................................5-8 5.8 Direct-To a User-Dened Hold ..............................................................5-8 5.9 Direct-To a Search and Rescue Pattern................................................5-11 6 Procedures .......................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Basic Approach Operations ..................................................................6-2 6.2 Selecting a Departure ...........................................................................6-4 6.3 Selecting an Arrival ..............................................................................6-7 6.4 Selecting an Approach .......................................................................6-10 6.5 Approaches with Procedure Turns .......................................................6-14 Flying the Missed Approach ...............................................................6-14 6.6 6.7 Flying an Approach with a Hold ..........................................................6-15 6.8 Flying a DME Arc Approach ................................................................6-16 6.9 Radial-to-Fix (RF) Approaches ............................................................6-16 6.10 Vectors to Final ..................................................................................6-17 6.11 ILS Approaches (GTN 750 Only) .........................................................6-18 6.12 RNAV Approach Procedures ...............................................................6-19 Flying the LPV Approach ..................................................... 6-20 Flying the LP Approach ....................................................... 6-21 6.13 Points to Remember for All Procedures ...............................................6-23 6.14 Points to Remember for Localizer or VOR-based Approaches ...............6-24 6.15 Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the King KAP140/KFC225 ...................6-25 7 Charts .................................................................................................. 7-1 7.1 Chart Page ..........................................................................................7-3 Airport Selection ................................................................... 7-4 Info ...................................................................................... 7-5 Information .......................................................................... 7-5 Approaches .......................................................................... 7-6 Departures ........................................................................... 7-7 Arrivals ................................................................................ 7-8 Airport Info .......................................................................... 7-9 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.1.4 7.1.5 7.1.6 7.1.7 6.12.1 6.12.2 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide xiii Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:06:45 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 7.1.8 7.5.1 7.5.2 7.5.3 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 7.2.5 7.2.6 7.2.7 Full/Split Screen .................................................................. 7-10 7.2 Chart Menu Options ..........................................................................7-11 Chart Layers - All ................................................................ 7-12 Chart Layers - Header ......................................................... 7-12 Chart Layers - Plan ............................................................. 7-12 Chart Layers - Prole .......................................................... 7-13 Chart Layers - Minimums .................................................... 7-13 Invert Colors....................................................................... 7-14 Geo-Referenced Aircraft Position ......................................... 7-14 7.3 ChartView Cycle Number and Revision ...............................................7-15 7.4 FliteCharts ......................................................................................7-16 7.5 SafeTaxi .........................................................................................7-17 Using SafeTaxi ................................................................. 7-18 Hot Spot Information .......................................................... 7-18 SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision ................................. 7-19 8 Waypoint Info ..................................................................................... 8-1 8.1 Waypoint Selection ..............................................................................8-3 8.2 Airport .................................................................................................8-4 Info ...................................................................................... 8-4 8.2.1 Preview ................................................................................ 8-5 8.2.2 Procedures ........................................................................... 8-6 8.2.3 Runways .............................................................................. 8-7 8.2.4 Frequencies .......................................................................... 8-8 8.2.5 Weather (WX) Data .............................................................. 8-9 8.2.6 NOTAM Pages .................................................................... 8-10 8.2.7 8.2.8 Helipads ............................................................................. 8-10 8.3 Intersection (INT) ...............................................................................8-11 8.4 VOR ..................................................................................................8-12 8.5 NDB ..................................................................................................8-13 8.6 User Waypoints (User) ........................................................................8-14 Select User Waypoint By Name ........................................... 8-15 Select User Waypoint From A List ........................................ 8-15 Edit User Waypoint ............................................................. 8-15 Delete User Waypoint ......................................................... 8-15 8.7 Create Waypoint ................................................................................8-16 Mark On Target .................................................................. 8-17 Waypoint Location Based on Lat/Lon Coordinates ............... 8-18 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 8.7.1 8.7.2 Index xiv Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:06:45 PM Waypoint Location Based on Two Radials .......................................8-19 8.7.3 8.7.4 Waypoint Location Based on Radial and Distance ...........................8-20 8.8 Import User Waypoints (SD Card) .......................................................8-21 9 Map ..................................................................................................... 9-1 9.1 Map Menu ..........................................................................................9-3 9.1.1 Map Overlays ....................................................................... 9-4 9.1.1.1 Overlay Priority ..................................................................... 9-4 Topo .................................................................................... 9-5 9.1.1.2 Airways ................................................................................ 9-5 9.1.1.3 9.1.1.4 Terrain ................................................................................. 9-7 9.1.1.5 NEXRAD (Optional) .............................................................. 9-8 Charts (Optional) .................................................................. 9-9 9.1.1.6 StormScope (Optional) ...................................................... 9-11 9.1.1.7 9.1.1.8 Radar (Optional) ................................................................. 9-12 Trafc (Optional) ................................................................. 9-12 9.1.1.9 9.1.2 Map Setup ......................................................................... 9-13 9.1.2.1 Map ................................................................................... 9-15 9.1.2.2 Aviation ............................................................................. 9-23 Land .................................................................................. 9-25 9.1.2.3 Airspace ............................................................................. 9-25 9.1.2.4 9.1.2.5 Trafc (Optional) ................................................................. 9-27 9.1.2.6 Weather (Optional) ............................................................. 9-28 Change User Fields ............................................................. 9-29 9.1.3 9.1.4 Map Detail ......................................................................... 9-32 9.2 Map Panning .....................................................................................9-34 9.3 Map Controls .....................................................................................9-37 Pan Map Mode................................................................... 9-37 Create Waypoint ................................................................. 9-37 Graphically Edit Flight Plan Mode ....................................... 9-38 Adding a Waypoint Within an Existing Flight Plan ................ 9-38 Adding a Waypoint to the End of an Existing Flight Plan ...... 9-40 Removing a Waypoint from an Existing Flight Plan .............. 9-40 Creating a Flight Plan Without an Existing Flight Plan .......... 9-40 9.4 CDI (GTN 750 only) ...........................................................................9-42 9.5 OBS ...................................................................................................9-43 9.6 Map Symbols .....................................................................................9-44 10 Trafc ................................................................................................ 10-1 9.3.1 9.3.2 9.3.3 9.3.3.1 9.3.3.2 9.3.3.3 9.3.3.4 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide xv Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:06:45 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 10.3.1 10.3.2 10.3.3 10.3.4 10.3.5 10.3.6 10.3.7 10.1 Trafc Pop-Up ....................................................................................10-1 10.2 Trafc Test .........................................................................................10-2 10.3 Trafc Information Service (TIS) (Optional) ..........................................10-3 TIS Symbology .................................................................... 10-4 Trafc Page ........................................................................ 10-5 Displaying Trafc on the Trafc Page .................................... 10-6 Altitude Display .................................................................. 10-6 TIS Limitations .................................................................... 10-7 TIS Alerts ............................................................................ 10-9 TIS System Status ............................................................. 10-10 10.4 TAS Trafc (Optional)........................................................................10-12 TAS Symbology ................................................................. 10-13 10.4.1 10.4.2 Displaying and Operating Trafc (TAS Systems) ....................10-14 10.4.2.1 Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Mode ............ 10-14 10.4.2.2 Range Ring ...................................................................... 10-15 Altitude Display ................................................................ 10-15 10.4.3 10.4.4 Trafc System Status ......................................................... 10-16 10.5 ADS-B Trafc ....................................................................................10-18 Trafc Applications - SURF, AIRB, etc. ................................ 10-20 10.5.1 10.5.2 ADS-B Trafc Menu........................................................... 10-20 10.5.2.1 ADS-B Status .................................................................... 10-20 10.5.2.2 TCAS Status ..................................................................... 10-21 10.5.2.3 Test .................................................................................. 10-21 10.5.2.4 Motion Vector .................................................................. 10-21 10.5.2.5 Vector Duration ................................................................ 10-24 10.5.2.6 Altitude Filter ................................................................... 10-24 10.5.2.7 On Scene Mode ................................................................ 10-25 10.5.3 Rotorcraft Trafc Page Orientation ..................................... 10-25 10.6 RYAN TCAD 9900BX with the GDL 88 ..............................................10-26 Ryan TCAD Description ..................................................... 10-26 10.6.1 Altitude Mode .................................................................. 10-27 10.6.2 TCAD Control Menu ......................................................... 10-28 10.6.3 10.6.3.1 Trafc Audio ..................................................................... 10-29 10.6.3.2 Field Elevation .................................................................. 10-29 10.6.3.3 Baro ................................................................................. 10-30 10.6.3.4 Operate ............................................................................ 10-30 10.6.3.5 Ground Mode ................................................................... 10-30 10.6.3.6 Approach Mode ............................................................... 10-30 Index xvi Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:06:45 PM 10.7 TCAD 9900B Operation ...................................................................10-31 10.7.1 Select Local Barometric Pressure ....................................... 10-31 10.7.2 Select Active Shield ........................................................... 10-32 10.7.3 TCAD 9900B Trafc Menu................................................. 10-32 10.7.3.1 Trafc Audio ..................................................................... 10-32 10.7.3.2 Shield Setup ..................................................................... 10-33 10.7.3.3 Approach Mode ............................................................... 10-34 10.8 TCAD 9900BX Operation .................................................................10-35 10.8.1 Select Local Barometric Pressure ....................................... 10-35 10.8.2 Select Altitude Filter .......................................................... 10-36 10.8.3 TCAD 9900BX Trafc Menu .............................................. 10-36 10.8.3.1 Trafc Audio ..................................................................... 10-37 10.8.3.2 Shield Setup ..................................................................... 10-37 10.8.3.3 Approach Mode ............................................................... 10-38 10.8.3.4 Ground Mode ................................................................... 10-38 11 Terrain ............................................................................................... 11-1 11.1 Terrain Congurations ........................................................................11-1 11.2 General Database Information............................................................11-2 Database Versions .............................................................. 11-2 HTAWS Database Requirements .......................................... 11-2 Database Updates .............................................................. 11-2 Terrain Database Areas of Coverage .................................... 11-3 Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage ................................. 11-4 11.3 Terrain Proximity ................................................................................11-5 11.3.1 Displaying Terrain Proximity ................................................ 11-6 11.3.1.1 Terrain Page 120 Arc or 360 Rings ................................... 11-7 11.3.1.2 Display Flight Plan on Terrain Page ...................................... 11-7 11.3.1.3 Display Terrain and Obstacle Legend ................................... 11-7 Terrain Limitations .............................................................. 11-8 11.3.2 11.4 Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-B) Optional .................11-9 TAWS-B Requirements ........................................................ 11-9 TAWS-B Limitations ............................................................ 11-9 Computing GPS Altitude for TAWS .................................... 11-10 Baro-Corrected Altitude Versus GSL Altitude ...................... 11-10 Using TAWS-B .................................................................. 11-11 Displaying TAWS-B Data ................................................... 11-11 TAWS-B Page ................................................................... 11-13 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3 11.4.4 11.4.5 11.4.6 11.4.7 11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide xvii Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:06:45 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 11.4.7.1 Terrain Page Layers ........................................................... 11-13 11.4.7.2 Terrain Page View ............................................................. 11-14 11.4.7.3 Terrain Page TAWS-B Selections ........................................ 11-14 11.4.8 TAWS-B Alerts .................................................................. 11-15 11.4.8.1 TAWS-B Alerting Colors and Symbology ............................ 11-16 11.4.8.2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert ............................................. 11-18 11.4.8.3 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance ................................... 11-18 11.4.8.4 Premature Descent Alerting .............................................. 11-19 11.4.8.5 Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS-B PDA/FLTA Alerting .................. 11-20 11.4.8.6 Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert (NCR) ................. 11-20 11.4.8.7 Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) ........................................... 11-22 11.4.8.8 TAWS-B Not Available Alert .............................................. 11-22 11.4.8.9 TAWS-B Failure Alert......................................................... 11-22 11.4.9 TAWS-B System Status ...................................................... 11-22 11.5 HTAWS (Optional) ............................................................................11-23 11.5.1 Introduction ..................................................................... 11-23 11.5.1.1 Overview .......................................................................... 11-23 11.5.1.2 Operating Criteria ............................................................. 11-23 11.5.1.3 Limitations ....................................................................... 11-24 11.5.2 HTAWS Operation............................................................. 11-24 11.5.2.1 HTAWS Alerting ................................................................ 11-24 11.5.2.2 Power Up ......................................................................... 11-25 11.5.3 HTAWS Page .................................................................... 11-25 11.5.3.1 View Selection .................................................................. 11-26 11.5.3.2 HTAWS Inhibit .................................................................. 11-27 11.5.3.3 External HTAWS Inhibit Control ......................................... 11-28 11.5.3.4 Reduced Protection Mode ................................................. 11-28 11.5.3.5 HTAWS Manual Test ......................................................... 11-29 11.5.3.6 HTAWS Legend ................................................................. 11-29 11.5.3.7 Flight Plan Overlay ........................................................... 11-31 HTAWS Symbols ............................................................... 11-31 11.5.4 11.5.5 HTAWS Alerts ................................................................... 11-33 11.5.5.1 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance ................................... 11-33 11.5.5.2 HTAWS Voice Call Out Aural Alert ..................................... 11-34 11.5.5.3 HTAWS Voice Call Out Selection ........................................ 11-35 11.5.5.4 HTAWS Not Available Alert ............................................... 11-37 11.5.5.5 HTAWS Failure Alert.......................................................... 11-37 11.5.5.6 HTAWS Alert Summary...................................................... 11-37 Index xviii Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:06:45 PM 11.5.6 Pilot Actions ..................................................................... 11-39 11.6 TAWS-A (Optional)...........................................................................11-40 11.6.1 Introduction ..................................................................... 11-40 11.6.1.1 Displaying TAWS-A Data ................................................... 11-42 TAWS-A Display ............................................................... 11-43 11.6.2 11.6.3 TAWS-A Alerts .................................................................. 11-46 11.6.3.1 TAWS-A Alerts Summary ................................................... 11-47 11.6.3.2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert ............................................. 11-51 11.6.3.3 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance ................................... 11-52 11.6.3.4 Premature Descent Alerting .............................................. 11-52 11.6.3.5 Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS-A PDA/FLTA Alerting .................. 11-53 11.6.3.6 Excessive Closure Rate Alert ............................................. 11-54 11.6.3.7 Flight Into Terrain Alert ..................................................... 11-56 11.6.3.8 Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert (NCR) ....................11-58 11.6.3.9 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert ....... 11-59 11.6.3.10 Inhibiting GPWS Alerts (EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR) ............... 11-61 Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) ........................................... 11-61 11.6.4 11.6.5 TAWS-A System Status ..................................................... 11-62 TAWS-A Abnormal Operations .......................................... 11-62 11.6.6 12 Weather ............................................................................................ 12-1 12.1 SiriusXM Weather Products (Optional) .....................................................................12-2 12.1.1 Displaying SiriusXM Weather .............................................. 12-3 12.1.2 Weather Legend ................................................................. 12-4 12.1.3 Weather Map Orientation ................................................... 12-5 12.1.4 SiriusXM Weather Symbols and Product Age ....................... 12-6 12.1.5 NEXRAD ............................................................................ 12-9 12.1.5.1 Reectivity ....................................................................... 12-10 12.1.5.2 NEXRAD Limitations ......................................................... 12-11 12.1.5.3 Animating NEXRAD .......................................................... 12-12 Echo Tops ......................................................................... 12-14 12.1.6 Cloud Tops ....................................................................... 12-15 12.1.7 12.1.8 Cell Movement ................................................................. 12-16 12.1.9 SIGMETs and AIRMETs ..................................................... 12-17 12.1.10 County Warnings .............................................................. 12-18 12.1.11 Freezing Level................................................................... 12-19 12.1.12 METARs ........................................................................... 12-20 12.1.13 Cyclone ............................................................................ 12-21 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide xix Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:06:45 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 12.2.1 12.2.2 12.2.3 12.2.4 12.2.5 12.1.14 Lightning .......................................................................... 12-22 12.1.15 Weather Forecast ............................................................. 12-23 12.1.16 Winds Aloft ...................................................................... 12-25 12.1.17 Icing ................................................................................ 12-26 12.1.18 Turbulence ....................................................................... 12-27 12.1.19 AIREP/PIREP ..................................................................... 12-28 12.2 StormScope Weather ......................................................................12-29 StormScope (Optional) .................................................... 12-29 Clearing the StormScope Page ........................................ 12-31 Changing the StormScope Display View .......................... 12-31 Changing the Storm Data Display Range ........................... 12-31 Displaying StormScope Data on the Map Page ................ 12-32 12.3 Weather Radar ................................................................................12-33 Garmin GWX Radar Description ........................................ 12-33 12.3.1 12.3.1.1 Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar ..................... 12-33 12.3.1.2 Antenna Beam Illumination .............................................. 12-34 12.3.1.3 Radar Signal Attenuation .................................................. 12-35 12.3.2 Radar Signal Reectivity ................................................... 12-36 12.3.2.1 Precipitation ..................................................................... 12-36 12.3.2.2 Ground Returns ................................................................ 12-37 12.3.2.3 Angle of Incidence ............................................................ 12-37 12.3.3 Operating Distance ........................................................... 12-38 12.3.3.1 Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL) (GWX 68) .... 12-38 12.3.3.2 Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL) .......(Other Radars)
........................................................................................ 12-38 12.3.4 Basic Antenna Tilt Setup ................................................... 12-39 12.3.5 Weather Mapping and Interpretation ................................ 12-40 12.3.5.1 Weather display Interpretation .......................................... 12-40 12.3.5.2 Thunderstorms ................................................................. 12-41 12.3.5.3 Tornadoes ........................................................................ 12-43 12.3.5.4 Hail .................................................................................. 12-43 12.4 GWX Radar Operation in Weather Mode ..........................................12-44 Viewing Weather on the Weather Radar Page ................... 12-45 Conguring Weather Radar Page ...................................... 12-46 Vertically Scanning a Storm Cell ........................................ 12-47 Adjusting the Antenna Tilt Angle ....................................... 12-48 Adjusting the Bearing Line ................................................ 12-49 Adjusting Gain ................................................................. 12-50 12.4.1 12.4.2 12.4.3 12.4.4 12.4.5 12.4.6 Index xx Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:06:45 PM 12.4.7 Sector Scan ...................................................................... 12-51 12.4.8 Weather Radar Menu ....................................................... 12-52 12.4.8.1 Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH) .............. 12-52 12.4.8.2 Weather Alert ................................................................... 12-53 12.4.8.3 Antenna Stabilization ....................................................... 12-54 12.4.8.4 Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT) - GWX 70 only ................ 12-54 12.4.8.5 Turbulence Detection - GWX 70 only ................................. 12-54 12.4.8.6 Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) - GWX 70 only ............. 12-54 12.5 Connext Weather .............................................................................12-55 Using Connext Satellite Weather Products ......................... 12-57 12.5.1 Connext Weather Menu .................................................... 12-57 12.5.2 12.5.3 Connext Settings .............................................................. 12-58 12.5.3.1 Connext Data Request ...................................................... 12-58 12.5.3.2 Connext Data Request Coverage Region ........................... 12-59 12.5.3.3 Connext Weather Map Orientation .................................... 12-60 Register With Connext ...................................................... 12-61 12.5.4 Connext Weather Product Age .......................................... 12-62 12.5.5 12.5.6 TFRs ................................................................................. 12-63 12.5.7 Precipitation (PRECIP) Data .............................................. 12-64 12.5.7.1 Animating Precipitation Data ............................................ 12-64 12.5.8 Lightning .......................................................................... 12-65 12.5.9 Infrared Satellite Data ....................................................... 12-66 12.5.10 METARs ........................................................................... 12-66 12.5.11 PIREPs ............................................................................. 12-68 12.5.12 Winds Aloft ...................................................................... 12-69 SIGMETs and AIRMETs ..................................................... 12-70 12.5.13 12.6 FIS-B Weather ..................................................................................12-71 12.6.1 FIS-B Operation ................................................................ 12-74 12.6.2 FIS-B NEXRAD .................................................................. 12-75 12.6.2.1 NEXRAD Abnormalities ..................................................... 12-75 12.6.2.2 NEXRAD Limitations ......................................................... 12-75 12.6.2.3 NEXRAD Intensity ............................................................. 12-76 12.6.2.4 NEXRAD .......................................................................... 12-76 FIS-B TFRs ........................................................................ 12-80 12.6.3 FIS-B METARs ................................................................... 12-81 12.6.4 12.6.5 FIS-B PIREPs ..................................................................... 12-82 FIS-B Winds and Temperatures Aloft .................................. 12-84 12.6.6 12.6.7 FIS-B SIGMETs and AIRMETs ............................................. 12-85 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide xxi Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:06:46 PM 13 Nearest ............................................................................................. 13-1 13.1 Select a Nearest Page ........................................................................13-2 13.2 Nearest Airport ..................................................................................13-2 13.3 Nearest Intersection (INT) ..................................................................13-4 13.4 Nearest VOR ......................................................................................13-6 13.5 Nearest NDB ......................................................................................13-8 13.6 Nearest User Waypoint .......................................................................13-9 13.7 Nearest Airspace ..............................................................................13-10 13.8 Nearest ARTCC ................................................................................13-13 13.9 Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) ..................................................13-15 13.10 Nearest Weather Frequency (WX Freq) ..............................................13-17 14 Services/Music .................................................................................. 14-1 14.1 Music ................................................................................................14-2 14.2 Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services ........................................14-3 14.3 Music Operation ................................................................................14-4 Browsing Channels and Categories ..................................... 14-5 14.3.1 Selecting an SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel by Number ... 14-6 14.3.2 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Volume .......................................... 14-7 14.3.3 14.3.4 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel Presets ............................ 14-8 14.3.4.1 Saving a Preset ................................................................... 14-8 14.3.4.2 Recalling a Preset ............................................................... 14-8 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting ................. 14-9 14.3.5 14.4 Iridium Phone Operation (Optional) ..................................................14-11 14.4.1 Status .............................................................................. 14-11 14.4.2 Making a Phone Call ........................................................ 14-12 Answering a Phone Call ................................................... 14-14 14.4.3 Suppress Visuals ............................................................... 14-15 14.4.4 14.4.5 Phone Volume .................................................................. 14-16 14.4.6 SMS Text Operation .......................................................... 14-16 14.4.6.1 SMS Text Messaging Menu ............................................... 14-17 14.4.6.2 Composing a SMS Text Message ....................................... 14-17 14.4.6.3 A Failed SMS Text Message ............................................... 14-18 14.4.7 Position Reporting ............................................................ 14-19 14.4.7.1 Status .............................................................................. 14-20 14.4.7.2 Position Reporting Status .................................................. 14-20 14.4.8 Contacts .......................................................................... 14-21 14.4.8.1 Creating a Contact ........................................................... 14-21 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index xxii Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:06:46 PM 15.4.1 15.4.2 15.5.1 15.5.2 15.1.1 15.1.2 15.1.3 15.1.4 15.1.5 15.1.6 15.1.7 15.1.8 14.4.8.2 Using a Contact ............................................................... 14-22 15 Utilities ............................................................................................. 15-1 15.1 Vertical Calculator (VCALC) ................................................................15-3 Target Altitude .................................................................... 15-5 Altitude Type ...................................................................... 15-5 Vertical Speed (VS) Prole ................................................... 15-6 Target Offset ...................................................................... 15-7 Before/After Target Waypoint .............................................. 15-7 Target Waypoint ................................................................. 15-8 Display VCALC Messages .................................................... 15-9 Restore VCALC Defaults ...................................................... 15-9 15.2 Flight Timers ....................................................................................15-10 15.3 RAIM Prediction ...............................................................................15-11 15.4 Trip Planning ...................................................................................15-12 Point-To-Point Mode ......................................................... 15-14 Flight Plan Mode .............................................................. 15-19 15.5 Fuel Planning ...................................................................................15-22 Point-To-Point Mode ......................................................... 15-23 Flight Plan Mode .............................................................. 15-26 15.6 DALT/TAS/Winds ..............................................................................15-28 15.7 Clean Screen Mode ..........................................................................15-33 15.8 Scheduled Messages ........................................................................15-34 15.9 Checklists ........................................................................................15-36 15.9.1 Checklists Menu ............................................................... 15-36 15.9.2 Viewing Checklists............................................................ 15-37 16 System ............................................................................................. 16-1 16.1 System Status ....................................................................................16-3 Serial Number and System ID .............................................. 16-4 16.1.1 Version Information ............................................................ 16-4 16.1.2 16.1.3 Database Information ......................................................... 16-4 16.1.3.1 Database Info ..................................................................... 16-7 16.1.3.2 Database Sync Operation .................................................... 16-7 16.1.3.3 Database Sync Setup ........................................................ 16-10 16.1.3.4 Standby Databases ........................................................... 16-11 16.1.3.5 Resolving Database Conicts ............................................ 16-12 16.2 GPS Status .......................................................................................16-13 GPS Status Page ............................................................... 16-13 16.2.1 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide xxiii Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:06:46 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 16.2.2 16.2.3 16.3.1 16.3.2 16.3.3 16.6.1 16.6.2 16.6.3 Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS) .................... 16-17 Circle of Uncertainty ......................................................... 16-18 16.3 External LRUs ..................................................................................16-19 GDL 69 (and GDL 69A) Status .......................................... 16-19 GDL 88 Status .................................................................. 16-21 GSR 56 Status .................................................................. 16-22 16.4 Setup...............................................................................................16-23 Date/Time ........................................................................ 16-24 16.4.1 Com Channel Spacing ...................................................... 16-25 16.4.2 Reverse Frequency Look-Up .............................................. 16-25 16.4.3 Nearest Airport Criteria ..................................................... 16-26 16.4.4 16.4.5 Crossll ............................................................................ 16-28 16.4.5.1 GTN-to-GTN Crosslling ................................................... 16-28 16.4.5.2 GTN-GNS Crosslling ....................................................... 16-29 CDI Scale Selection ........................................................... 16-30 16.4.6 16.5 Alerts Settings .................................................................................16-32 16.6 Units Settings ..................................................................................16-34 Setup Units ...................................................................... 16-34 Setting a User-Congured (Manual) Nav Angle ................. 16-35 Position Format Selection .................................................. 16-38 16.7 User Fields .......................................................................................16-40 16.8 Audio ..............................................................................................16-43 16.9 Backlight Settings ............................................................................16-45 16.10 Connext Setup - GSR 56 ..................................................................16-46 16.11 Connext Setup - Flight Stream 210 ...................................................16-46 16.11.1 Operation ......................................................................... 16-47 16.11.2 Pairing a Device ................................................................ 16-48 16.12 Connext Setup GMA 35c ..............................................................16-48 16.13 Voice Command ..............................................................................16-50 17 Messages .......................................................................................... 17-1 18 Symbols ............................................................................................. 18-1 18.1 Map Page Symbols.............................................................................18-1 18.2 SafeTaxi Symbols ..........................................................................18-2 18.3 Trafc Symbols ...................................................................................18-3 18.4 Terrain Obstacle Symbols ...................................................................18-5 18.5 HTAWS Obstacle Symbols...................................................................18-5 18.6 Basemap Symbols ..............................................................................18-6 Index xxiv Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:06:46 PM 18.7 Map Tool Bar Symbols ........................................................................18-7 18.8 Miscellaneous Symbols ......................................................................18-7 18.9 Stormscope Symbols ..........................................................................18-9 19 Appendix ........................................................................................... 19-1 19.1 Glossary ............................................................................................19-1 19.2 SD Card Use and Databases ...............................................................19-9 Jeppesen Databases ......................................................... 19-10 Garmin Databases ............................................................ 19-11 19.3 Demo Mode ....................................................................................19-14 19.4 Glove Qualication Procedure ..........................................................19-17 Index .................................................................................................... Index-1 19.2.1 19.2.2 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide xxv Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:06:46 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index xxvi Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:06:46 PM Welcome Welcome to the GTN era of navigation. The Garmin GTN supports airway navigation and exible ight planning, including arrival and departure procedures and precision approaches. All of these advanced features are easily accessed with an easy-to-use touchscreen display, another rst for general aviation. You can be condent in knowing that this product has been designed to meet or exceed industry performance standards and is supported through a global network of Garmin Aviation Distributors. About This Guide Take a little time to review the various sections of this guide to familiarize yourself with it. First, read this section and the Getting Started section as an introduction to quickly get you started with the GTN. The other sections are not meant to necessarily be read in order, but provide detailed information on the subject they contain as you need them. Do take the time to review the information before using the product to assist you in getting the most out of your avionics. Generally, a feature will be described in a section that provides a brief description, a graphic functional diagram, and step-by-step procedures. If read cover-to-cover sequentially, the information may seem repetitive. The guide is designed as a reference and learning tool where you will generally skip around the document learning about a particular feature or function after becoming familiar with the unit. Electronic Document Features Versions of this guide are saved in the Adobe Portable Document Format
(pdf) and have features that help the user navigate more easily through the document. The cover icons, Table of Contents, Index, and side tabs (i.e., FPL, Map, Trafc, etc.) are hyperlinks that will take you directly to the selected item. Versions of aviation products in the pdf format are available at www.garmin. com/manuals. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide xxvii Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 27 7/9/2015 2:06:46 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Conventions The GTN display dynamically tailors the number and position of the controls for each function and are engaged by merely touching them. Touch Drag Touch the key with your nger. Touch the list or location on the map with your nger. Continue lightly holding your nger to the display surface and drag your nger in the intended direction to scroll through the list or move the location on the map. In this pilots guide, keys are noted by bold text. An image of the key used will be shown to the left of a procedure. Keys are outlined areas on the display. Figures in the guide will identify the available controls. A key may have a name of a control, such as Enter, Terrain, or Back. A key may also be an information eld, such as a numeric value that can be changed. Graphic Of Key Text Description Of Key Operation While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Terrain Map Overlay key to toggle the view of Terrain data. Graphic Of Key With Numeric Value Text Description Of Key When the Fuel on Board value is selected, touch the Fuel on Board key to display the Fuel on Board values. List Keys. Touch To Select. Scroll Bar Indicates More Selections Available. Touch Finger To An Item In The List And Drag Your Finger To View More Selections. Selected Field Type Touching the Back key returns to the previous display. The Cancel key cancels any information selected or entered and returns to the previous display. Index xxviii Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 28 7/9/2015 2:06:46 PM 1 1.1 GETTING STARTED Model Descriptions This guide covers the operation of the GTN 725 and 750. In general, all models will be referred to as the GTN 7XX, except where there are physical or operational differences. The GTN units are 6.25 inches wide and 6 inches high. The display is a 708 by 600 pixel, 6.9 inch diagonal color LCD with touchscreen controls. The units include one removable SD data card for the databases and software upgrades. The GTN 7XX simplies your workload with an easy-to-use touch panel that provides a visual display of both controls and functions. The required controls are displayed for the selected function. Keys on the display allow you to access and control their functions by a simple touch on the interactive display. The GTN 7XX can integrate a variety of avionics that will not only simplify operation, but also save panel space. The GTN 725 and 750 have their own GPS/SBAS navigator and ight planning functions. The GTN 750 adds VHF Com and VHF Nav radios. Selected optional external equipment allows you to display and control active trafc systems, XM Entertainment Radio, XM Weather, audio panel, and a Mode S transponder directly from the GTN 7XX display, and more. When the optional audio panel and/or transponder are not installed, the area on the upper portion of the display is used for congurable navigation information. 1.1.1 GTN 725 The GTN 725 has a GPS/SBAS engine and is TSO C146c certied for primary domestic, oceanic, and remote navigation including en route, terminal, and non-precision approaches, and approaches with vertical guidance, such as LPV and LNAV/VNAV. The GTN 725 can simultaneously give aviators vital approach information and weather and trafc data in relation to their position on a large, color moving map display. Thanks to a high-contrast color display, the information can be easily read from wide viewing angles even in direct sunlight. Its color moving map features a built-in database that shows cities, highways, railroads, rivers, lakes, coastlines, and a complete Jeppesen database. The Jeppesen database (that can be updated with a front-loading data card) contains all airports, VORs, NDBs, Intersections, FSSs, Approaches, DPs/STARs, and SUA information. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:06:47 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Navigation Information Figure 1-1 GTN 725 Upper Display Without Optional Transponder or Audio Panel Pilots will enjoy the GTN 725 as a exible and powerful navigator, especially when it is coupled with trafc, lightning detection, and weather interfaces. With the PC-based FDE prediction program, the GTN 725 may be used for oceanic or remote operations. For the latest in graphic and text weather information, the GTN 725 can interface to XM Satellite Radios XM Weather Service via the Garmin GDL 69/69A datalink receiver. 1.1.2 GTN 750 The GTN 750 includes all of the features of the GTN 725, and also includes a TSOd airborne VHF communications transceiver and TSOd airborne VOR/
Localizer and Glideslope receivers. Navigation Information Figure 1-2 GTN 750 Upper Display Without Optional Transponder or Audio Panel 1.2 1.2.1 About This Pilots Guide Conventions Bold text indicates a control. The small right knob is the smaller, inner knob of the two concentric rotary knobs on the lower, right corner of the bezel. The large right knob is the larger, outer knob. Large, Outer Knob Small, Inner Knob Figure 1-3 Large/Small Concentric Knobs A graphic of a control on the side of the page refers to the control you should use for the associated step as shown below. Using the Touchscreen 1.2.2 Most of the controls are operated by touching the display. Highlighted icons and keys may be simply touched to make a selection. A list of menu items may be scrolled by touching the screen and retaining pressure while sliding your Index 1-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:06:47 PM nger up or down. Map displays may be panned by touching the screen and retaining pressure while sliding your nger in the desired direction. You can return to the previous page or exit the current function by touching the Back key. Quickly return to the Home page by pressing the HOME key. Press and hold the HOME key to reach the Map page. 1.3 Product Description This section provides an overview of the GTN 7XX product and a quick look at some important features. The GTN 7XX presents a full-color moving map with navigation information to the pilot through a large-format display. Controls are a combination of rotary knobs and push-keys on the bezel with the color display providing information as well as a touchscreen controls. The GTN 7XX has a 708 x 600 pixel, 6.9 inch LCD display. Active Com Frequency Volume, Squelch On/
Off, and Nav ID On/Off Standby Com Frequency Audio Panel Controls (opt) Active Nav Frequency Standby Nav Frequency Xpdr Panel Controls (opt) SD Card Function Keys Locking Screw HOME Key Photo Sensor Home Page Direct-To Key Large and Small Knobs Annunciations Dual Rotary Knob Function Hints Figure 1-4 GTN 750 Front Panel Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:06:48 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts 1.3.1 Secure Data Card The GTN 7XX uses a Secure Digital (SD) card to load and store various types of data. For basic ight operations, the SD card is required for Terrain, FliteChart, and ChartView database storage. An SD card is used for Obstacle, Basemap, SafeTaxi, Aviation, and ChartView database updates. NOTE: Do Not remove or insert the SD card while in ight. Ensure the GTN 7XX is powered off before inserting or removing an SD card. NOTE: Refer to SD Card Use and Databases in the Appendix for instructions on updating databases. 1.3.1.1 Inserting an SD Card 1. Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the label side of the card should face the right edge of the display bezel). Wpt Info 1.3.2 2. To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch. Pilot Controls The GTN 7XX controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and the time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the bezel and on the touchscreen display. Controls are comprised of dual concentric knobs, volume/squelch knob, bezel keys, and active touch areas on the display. 1.3.2.1 Volume/Squelch Knob The Volume knob located in the top left corner of the bezel controls audio volume for the selected Com radio or Nav receiver and external audio input devices that are controlled via the GTN interface to the optional remote-mounted audio panel, if installed. When the Com radio is active, press the Volume knob momentarily to disable automatic squelch control for the Com radio. When the Nav radio is active, press the Volume knob momentarily to enable/disable the ident tone for the Nav radio. Figure 1-5 Volume/Squelch Knob Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 1-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:06:48 PM 1.3.2.2 Large/Small Concentric Knobs The large right and small right knobs are used for data entry, such as in the Waypoint or Direct-To functions, and to set the frequencies for the NAV/COM radios in units so equipped. Figure 1-6 Large/Small Concentric Knobs 1.3.2.3 HOME Key Pressing the HOME key displays the Home page, the main screen for accessing the GTN features. Pressing and holding the HOME key will open the Map page from any other page. Figure 1-7 HOME Key Page Or Function Name Touch The Key To Access The Function Figure 1-8 Home Page 1.3.2.4 Direct-To Key The Direct-To key provides access to the direct-to function, which allows you to enter a waypoint and establishes a direct course to the selected destination. Figure 1-9 Direct-To Key Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:06:48 PM 1.3.2.5 Touchscreen Keys Touchscreen keys are placed at the lower portion of the display. The keys vary depending on the page selected. Touch the key to perform the function or access the described information. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav Figure 1-10 Touchscreen Key Control Example FPL 1.4 Unit Power Up The GTN 7XX System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses. The GTN 7XX and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that exercise the processor, memory, external inputs, and outputs to ensure safe operation. 1.4.1 Start-Up Screens During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed. All system annunciations should disappear typically within the rst 30 seconds after power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become momentarily illuminated on the GTN 7XX display bezel. The splash screen displays the following information:
Copyright Database List and System version Instrument Panel Self-Test Current database information includes valid operating dates, cycle number, and database type. When this information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to continue. Databases that are not current will be shown in amber. During the startup process the user may be asked if they would like to update to newer databases. Additional information on database updates can be found in section 16.1.3.1, Database Info. Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 1-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:06:48 PM 1 - Copyright 2 - SW & Database Versions & Dates Figure 1-11 System Startup Pages 3 - Panel Self-Test 1.4.2 Database Verication and Fuel Settings 1. When the System and Database Version page appears, check to ensure databases are current. Then, touch Continue. Software and GPS Engine Versions Check To Ensure Required Databases Are Present And Current Check For Any Messages Touch To Continue To Home Page Figure 1-12 System Startup Pages 2. When the Instrument Panel Self-Test and Fuel Setting page appears, check to ensure that the CDI/HSI outputs and other displayed data are correct on the external interfaced equipment. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:06:49 PM 3. Touch each of the Fuel value keys and set the appropriate values as desired. Fuel capacity is shown in either gallons or pounds as set in the Units feature of System mode. NOTE: When the GTN is interfaced with a digital fuel computer the pilot may not be able to manually edit the fuel ow and fuel on board data on the Self-Test. Start-Up Instrument Panel Test Conditions Touch To Set Current Fuel Quantity Touch To Set Fuel Flow Touch To Continue To Home Page Figure 1-13 Instrument Panel Self-Test & Fuel Settings Page 4. When the Fuel on Board value is selected, touch the Fuel on Board key to display the Fuel on Board values. Touch the Full or Tabs keys to display those values after they have been set. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 1-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:06:49 PM Selected Fuel on Board Capacity Touch Keys To Select Fuel Capacity Values Touch To Display Fuel Full Capacity Touch To Set Fuel Full or Tab Capacity Touch To Delete Characters Touch To Display Fuel Tabs Capacity Touch To Accept Fuel on Board Values Figure 1-14 Fuel On Board Page 5. Touch the Set Full/Tabs key to set the fuel values for Fuel Full Capacity and Fuel Tab Capacity. After setting the fuel values, touch the Back and then the Enter keys to return to the Instrument Panel Self Test page. Touch To Set Fuel Full Capacity Touch To Return To Fuel On Board Display Touch To Set Fuel Tab Capacity Figure 1-15 Fuel Capacity Setup Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:06:49 PM 6. On the Instrument Panel Self Test page, touch the Fuel Flow key and then use the numeric keypad to set those values. Touch the Enter key after selecting the Fuel Flow values. Selected Fuel Flow Value Touch Keys To Select Fuel Flow Values Touch To Cancel Selection And Return To Previous Page Touch To Delete Characters Touch To Accept Fuel Flow Values Figure 1-16 Fuel Flow Setup Page 7. Touch the Back key to return to the Fuel on Board page. Touch the Enter key to accept the fuel values and return to the Instrument Panel Self-Test page. Then, touch the Continue key to advance to the Home page. Figure 1-17 Home Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 1-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:06:49 PM 1.5 1.5.1 System Operation Using the Touchscreen Key Controls Except for the knobs, the HOME, and Direct-To keys on the bezel, the controls for the GTN 7XX are located on the display and activated by touch. Back to Previous Page Touchscreen Keys - Touch to Toggle Activation Touch to Zoom In and Out Figure 1-18 On-Screen Keys and Active Display Areas 1.5.2 System Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain GTN 7XX system settings are managed on the System page. The Weather following features are available:
System Status GPS Status External LRUs Setup Alerts Settings User Fields Units Settings Audio Backlight Connext Setup Voice Commands Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:06:49 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts GPS Status Page &
SBAS Providers Information on External LRUs View System Status Values and SW Versions Set Alert Values Select Audio Settings Select System Setup Values Select User Fields Set System Units Of Measurement Select Voice Command Setup Select Backlight Setting Select Connext Setup Figure 1-19 System Page System Setup Values 1. From the Home page, touch System and then Setup. 2. Select the desired Time Format and Local Offset by touching the Time Format (12 Hour, 24 Hour, and/or UTC) keys and selecting the appropriate Local Time Offset after touching the Local Offset key. 3. Touch the Com Channel Spacing key to toggle between 8.33 and 25.0 kHz channel spacing. 4. For Nearest Airport ltering, touch the Runway Surface key and select the desired type of surface that will appear in the Nearest Airport list. 5. Touch the Minimum Runway Length key to select the minimum runway length allowed for the Nearest Airport. Selecting 0 feet will show all airports regardless of runway length. 6. Touch the Crossll key to enable or disable crossll with a second GTN unit. 7. Select the CDI and ILS CDI Capture method with the Selected CDI and ILS CDI Capture keys. 1.5.2.1 Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 1-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:06:50 PM 1.5.2.2 Units Settings Values 1. From the Home page, touch System and then Units. 2. Touch the desired item key and select the desired value. 3. Continue to select the desired Units values and then touch the Back or HOME key to exit. 1.5.2.3 Alerts Settings Values 1. From the Home page, touch System and then Alerts. 1.5.2.4 1.5.2.5 2. Touch the Alert type key to toggle its active status. A lighted green bar under the label indicates that it is active. 3. Set arrival alerting. Touch the Arrival key. Touch the Proximity key and select the desired value with the keypad. 4. Touch the Airspace Altitude Buffer key and select the desired value for airspace alerting. 5. Continue to select the desired Alerts values and then touch the Back or HOME key to exit. Audio Values 1. From the Home page, touch System and then Audio. 2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the volume of key click sounds. Backlight Values 1. From the Home page, touch System and then Backlight. 2. Touch the arrow keys to increase or decrease the Manual Offset of the backlight brightness. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:06:50 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 1.5.2.6 Connext Setup 1. From the Home page, touch System and then Connext Setup. 2. This page is used to setup Connext devices that are connected to the GTN. 1.5.2.7 Voice Commands 1. From the Home page, touch System and then Voice FPL Direct-To Commands. 2. This page is used to turn voice recognition on or off, and to view voice command history. Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 1-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:06:50 PM 1.5.3 Dual GTN Installations Dual GTN units when connected in the aircraft may be set up to communicate and share information by Crosslling or synchronizing information between the two units. The following Crossll information is always synchronized between both GTN units:
User Waypoints Flight Plan Catalog Alerts (trafc pop-up acknowledgement, missed approach waypoint pop-
up acknowledgement, altitude leg pop-up acknowledgement) External sensors (transponder status and commands, synchro heading) System setup:
User-dened NAV frequencies to store favorites Date/Time convention Nearest airport criteria Units (Nav angle, Fuel, and Temperature) User-dened COM frequencies to store favorites CDI Scale setting ILS CDI Capture setting This data is crosslled only if crossll is turned on by the pilot:
Active navigation (ight plan) NOTE: In dual GTN installations with crossll on, the OBS course will only be updated in real time on the GTN that is receiving the new OBS course. The course will be transferred to the other GTN when OBS is exited. NOTE: There is an installer option to turn on a system message that will be provided anytime crossll is turned off to alert the pilot that ight plans are not being crosslled. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:06:50 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 1.6 Direct-To Navigation Press the Direct-To key to quickly navigate from your present position directly to a selected waypoint, ight plan waypoint, or nearest airport. 1.6.1 Direct-To a Waypoint 1. Press Direct-To. 2. Touch the Waypoint Identier eld and select the characters for the desired waypoint with the large and small right knobs or the touch keypad. 3. Touch Activate or press the small right knob. Text near the small right knob indicates its current function. OR 1.6.2 Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint 1. Press Direct-To. 2. Touch the FPL tab and then the desired Flight Plan waypoint. 3. Touch Activate or press the small right knob. OR 1.6.3 Direct-To a Nearest Airport 1. Press Direct-To. 2. Touch the NRST APT tab and then the desired airport from the Nearest Airport list. Touch the Up or Down keys as needed to show more of the list. 3. Touch Activate or press the small right knob. OR FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 1-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:06:51 PM 1.7 Selecting Com/Nav Frequencies Active Com Frequency Volume and Squelch Frequency Monitor Annunciation Active Nav Frequency Standby Nav Frequency Standby Com Frequency Com Standby Editing Window Find Frequency Key Numeric Keypad Standby Frequency Monitor Key Figure 1-20 Com Radio Frequency Selection Page Enter Key Standby Frequency Backspace Key Frequency Transfer
(Flip/Flop) Key Large and Small Knobs
(Frequency Adjust) To switch between Com and Nav frequency selection Tuning control normally remains in the Com window and will return after 30 seconds of inactivity. If you wish to select a Nav frequency, press the small right knob momentarily to make the Nav window active for editing. The Standby Nav frequency will be highlighted briey to indicate that it is active for editing. The standby frequency in blue is active for editing by the large and small right knobs. Method 1: Select a Nav/Com frequency using the small and large right rotary knobs 1. Turn the large right knob to select the desired megahertz
(MHz) value. For example, the 118 portion of the frequency 118.30. 2. Turn the small right knob to select the desired kilohertz
(kHz) value. For example, the .30 portion of the frequency 118.30. 3. Touch the Com or Nav window to ip/op the Active and Standby frequencies. You can also press and hold the small right knob to transfer the standby frequency to the active window. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:06:51 PM Method 2: Select a Nav/Com frequency using the numeric keypad 1. Touch the Standby window. A pull down keypad will appear with the current Standby frequency highlighted. 2. Touch the numeric keys to add the desired values and touch Enter to accept the displayed value and place it into the Standby window. 3. Touching the XFER key will place the selected frequency directly into the Active window. To transfer the standby frequency to the active frequency 1. Touch the Active (top) frequency window. Airport Identier and Type Shown for the Selected Frequency The "+" Sign Indicates More Stations Associated With This Frequency Active Com Frequency
(Touch to Flip/Flop) Standby Com Frequency Figure 1-21 Com Radio Frequency Windows (Touch Active to Flip/Flop) 2. Each touch of the Active window will ip/op the Active and Standby frequencies. 3. The identier and frequency type will be shown for the selected Com and Nav frequencies for the nearest stations that are in the database when the unit is receiving a valid position input. Remote Frequency Selection Control On units congured for remote Com frequency Recall, pressing the remote recall switch will load the next preset Com frequency into the units Standby frequency window. The remote recall switch can be pressed multiple times to scroll the entire preset frequency list through the Standby frequency box (the list will wrap from the bottom of the list back up to the top, skipping any empty preset positions). The standby frequency isnt activated until a Com FLIP/FLOP switch (either bezel-mounted or remote (COM RMT XFR) is pressed. Remote Frequency Selection only functions on units congured for a remote Com Frequency recall switch. NOTE: Frequencies must be stored in the User Frequency List prior to utilizing the remote channel select switch. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 1-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:06:51 PM 1.8 1.8.1 Flight Planning Creating a Flight Plan 1. From the Home page, touch the Flight Plan key. The Active Flight Plan page will be displayed. 2. If there is already an Active Flight Plan, touch Menu and then the Delete key to clear the existing ight plan. If there is not an Active Flight Plan, continue to the next step. 3. Touch Add Waypoint. Use the alphanumeric keypad to select the Waypoint Identier for the rst leg in your ight plan and then touch Enter. 4. Touch the next Waypoint Identier eld. Use the alphanumeric keypad to select the Waypoint Identier for the rst leg in your ight plan and then touch Enter. 5. Continue entering waypoints to complete the ight plan. 6. Touch the Menu key and then touch Store. 7. The screen will now display the Flight Plan Catalog and show the new ight plan. Flight plans are listed by the Departure and Destination waypoints. NOTE: The destination waypoint is the last airport in the ight plan. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:06:51 PM 1.9 IFR Procedures Departures (SIDs), arrivals (STARs), non-precision and precision approaches are available using the PROC (Procedures) key. Select an Approach 1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 2. Touch the Approach key and then touch the Airport key to select the desired airport if it is not present. 3. Touch the Approach key, if necessary. Select the desired approach. 4. Touch the Transition key and then touch the key for the desired transition. 5. Touch the Load Approach key to load the approach at the end of the active ight plan. The Active Flight Plan page will be displayed. 6. Or, touch the Load Approach & Activate key for the ight plan to go Direct-To the selected transition or provide guidance on the nal approach course for vectored approaches. FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 1-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:06:51 PM 1.10 Dead Reckoning Dead reckoning is a feature that enables the GTN to provide limited navi-
gation using the last known position and speed after a loss of GPS navigation while on an active ight plan. CAUTION: Navigation using dead reckoning is only an estimate and should not be used as the sole means of navigation. Use other means of navigation, if possible. Dead reckoning becomes active after a loss of GPS position while navigating using an active ight plan and the ight phase is either En Route (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN). DR will be overlayed on the ownship icon. The To/From ag is removed from the CDI. The Dead Reckoning annunciator (DR) appears on the lower left side of the map display and will replace ENR or OCN when a GPS position is unavailable and the unit is in Dead Reckoning mode. All external outputs dependent on GPS position are agged. Terrain will be noted as not available and new terrain advisory pop-ups will not occur. Trafc and StormScope information will not be shown on the Map page, but will continue to be available on their own dedicated pages. XM weather will still be available on the Map page. Dead Reckoning mode will continue until GPS position is restored, when GPS navigation is restored Dead Reckoning mode is exited. The DR annunciations will be removed and GPS information will be used to compute navigation related information for the current ight phase. Dead Reckoning is only allowed in En Route and Oceanic phases of ight. If the unit is in a Terminal or Approach phase of ight when Dead Reckoning takes place, No GPS Position will be displayed on the map pages and all navigation data will be dashed. If you are operating in Dead Reckoning mode and a transition to Terminal or Approach phases of ight would occur from the projected Dead Reckoning position, Dead Reckoning mode will be discontinued. No GPS Position will be displayed on the map pages and all navigation data will be dashed. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:06:52 PM 1.11 FastFind Predictive Waypoint Entry FastFind provides the pilot with a shortcut to the nearest waypoint with an identier that starts with the typed letters. As a result, the GTN can predict the pilot's entry within as little as one key press. FastFind predictions are shown in the top right-hand corner of the keypad display. Touching the FastFind eld will select the predicted waypoint. If the FastFind prediction is not what the pilot is looking for, keep typing until the desired waypoint is displayed. 1.11.1 FastFind With Waypoint Info 1. Use the alphanumeric keypad to begin selecting characters for the desired waypoint. Selected Wpt Characters Predicted Wpt Figure 1-22 Select Characters for FastFind to Predict a Waypoint - KP Selected Selected Wpt Characters Predicted Wpt Figure 1-23 Select Characters for FastFind to Predict a Waypoint - KPA Selected 2. After selecting the desired waypoint, touch the FastFind key. Complete Wpt Selection Touch to Select Displayed Wpt Figure 1-24 Select Characters for FastFind to Predict a Waypoint - KPAE Selected Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 1-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:06:52 PM 1.11.2 FastFind With A Flight Plan When creating a new ight plan or searching for a waypoint, the GTN will search for waypoints closest to the current GPS position. When adding waypoints in the middle of the ight plan, the GTN will search halfway between the previous and next waypoints. When adding waypoints at the end of the ight plan, the GTN will search for waypoints closest to the last waypoint in the ightplan. 1. When the aircraft is located in KSLE, and the last waypoint in the ight plan is "DRK", the GTN will search for waypoints nearest "DRK". 2. Typing K, will result in "KPRC" being displayed as the FastFind prediction because it is the nearest waypoint to "DRK" that starts with "K". Selected Wpt Characters Predicted Wpt Figure 1-25 Using FastFind to Predict a Waypoint in a Flight Plan Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 1-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:06:52 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index 1-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:06:52 PM 2 AUDIO AND TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
(OPTIONAL) The GTN 7XX can perform the control and display for a remotely mounted audio panel (such as the GMA 35) and a transponder (such as one of the GTX family of transponders) functions. See your dealer for more information. 2.1 Transponder Operation The GTN 7XX will operate as a control head for remotely connected optional, compatible transponders. NOTE: The transponder control panel on the GTN will not contain the Ground key when the GTN is interfaced with a GTX 33/330 with software version 8.00, or later. Active Transponder Selection Active Transponder Ident Key Transponder Mode Keys Touch To Toggle Extended Squitter Transponder Control Code Key, Code Display, and Mode Reply Annunciation Squawk Code Backspace Key VFR Squawk Code (1200) Key Squawk Code Window Numeric Keypad Green Bar Indicates
"Active" Condition Touch To Enter Flight ID Enter Key Context Sensitive Instructions For Rotary Knob Figure 2-1 XPDR Control Display Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:06:52 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Active XPDR Mode Ident VFR XPDR 1 XPDR 2 Flight ID 1200 Standby Ground On Altitude Reporting Figure 2-2 XPDR Functional Diagram 2.1.1 Select Transponder 1. Touch the Active XPDR key to activate the desired transponder by stepping through the available transponders. Active Transponder Figure 2-3 Active Transponder Indication 2. The active transponder will be shown on the key. 2.1.2 IDENT 1. Touch the IDENT key once to reply with an identifying squawk code. 2. The IDENT key will show a green ID in the top right corner of the key to indicate active Ident. 2.1.3 Standby Touch the Standby key to place the transponder into Standby mode. The transponder will still be powered, but will not transmit information. The active transponder indication and Ident annunciation will be grayed to show they are disabled. Active XPDR and IDENT Disabled Transponder Operation "Standby" Mode Figure 2-4 Transponder Mode "Standby" Indication Index 2-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:06:52 PM 2.1.4 Ground Touch the Ground key to place the transponder into Ground mode. Mode S replies will be allowed in Ground mode. Active XPDR and IDENT Enabled Transponder Operation "Ground" Mode Figure 2-5 Transponder Mode "Ground" Indication NOTE: Ground mode is not available with GTX 33/330 software version 8.00 or later. The GTN will automatically transition to Ground mode when the aircraft is on the ground. 2.1.5 2.1.6 2.1.7 On Touch the On key for Mode A operation. The transponder is
"On" and will transmit its squawk code when interrogated. Transponder Operation "ON" Mode Figure 2-6 Transponder Mode "ON" Indication Altitude Reporting 1. Touch the Altitude Reporting key for Mode C operation. 2. The transponder will be "On" and will transmit its squawk code and altitude when interrogated. An "ALT" annunciation will appear when the squawk code is transmitted. VFR Touch the VFR key to set the VFR squawk code (1200). VFR (1200) Transponder Squawk Code Figure 2-7 Transponder VFR Squawk Code Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:06:53 PM 2.1.8 Selecting a Squawk Code The selected squawk code will always be in use. As you change a squawk code, the original code will be used until you are nished selecting the new code. Squawk Code 1200 7500 7600 7700 Description Default VFR code in the USA Hijacking Loss of Communications Emergency Table 2-1 XPDR Special Squawk Codes 1. Touch the transponder squawk code window at the top of the display. 2. The XPDR page will be displayed. The Squawk Code value will be active for selection for use by the active Transponder. Active Squawk Code Selection Transponder Is In Standby Mode Figure 2-8 XPDR Squawk Code Selection Display 3. Touch the numeric keypad, or use the rotary knobs, to select the desired Squawk Code. Squawk Code Character Selected For Editing Figure 2-9 Selected XPDR Squawk Code Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-4 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:06:53 PM 2.1.9 4. Then, touch Enter or press the small right knob. 5. The selected Squawk Code will be shown in the XPDR window at the top of the display. Flight ID 1. While viewing the transponder page, touch the Flight ID key. 2. Touch the numeric keypad, or use the rotary knobs, to select the desired Flight ID number and then press Enter. The selected number will be shown in the Flight ID key. 2.1.10 GDL 88 ADS-B Reporting The GDL 88 is a remote-mount ADS-B transceiver that sends ADS-B out messages to ATC and other aircraft and communicates ADS-B In data to panel-
mounted avionics for the display of trafc and weather. Reference the GDL 88 Pilot Guide for a full description of GDL 88 functions. When a GTN is interfaced to a GDL88 transceiver for ADS-B Out functions the GTN can control some aspects of the ADS-B Out message and the GTN may provide position information to the GDL88. The display and control of the information sent depends on the equipment installed and how it is congured. Some installations allow control by the pilot of the information sent, while others do not. The Anonymous Mode, when armed, will replace the identifying information in the ADS-B Out message with a temporary randomized number for privacy while the position information will still be provided. The call sign will be sent as
"VFR." To enable Anonymous Mode, the Squawk Code must be set to the VFR code (based on the GDL 88 conguration) and the Anonymous key must be selected. Viewing the ADS-B Control Panel Without Integrated Transponder Control 1. Touch the Transponder window to view the ADS-B control panel. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:06:53 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-6 Altitude Reporting Status Touch To Toggle Anonymous Mode Touch To View ADS-B Control Panel Touch To Select Flight ID Figure 2-10 ADS-B Control Panel 2. Touch the ADS-B window again to return to the previous display. Viewing the ADS-B Control Panel With Integrated Transponder Control 1. Touch the Transponder window to view the ADS-B control panel. Touch To View Transponder and ADS-B Control Panel Touch To Toggle Anonymous Mode Touch To Select Flight ID Figure 2-11 ADS-B/Transponder Control Panel 2. Touch the Anonymous Mode key to toggle arming the Anonymous mode. 3. While viewing the transponder page, touch the Flight ID key. 4. Touch the numeric keypad, or use the rotary knobs, to select the desired Flight ID number and then press Enter. Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:06:54 PM NOTE: Changing the ight ID while in anonymous mode wouldn't actually change the ight ID because a randomized ID is being broadcast. If the ANONYMOUS key is armed, change the squawk code to the VFR code to activate Anonymous mode. 2.1.11 Extended Squitter Transmission The GTX 33ES is a remote mount transponder that functions as a transponder and also sends ADS-B Out message to ATC and other aircraft. The GTN can act as a control for a GTX 33 transponder including Extended Squitter functions. When Enable ES is selected, the GTX 33/330 turns on Extended Squitter (ES) transmissions. Squawk Code Backspace Key VFR Squawk Code (1200) Key Squawk Code Window Numeric Keypad Green Bar Indicates
"Active" Condition Touch To Enter Flight ID Enter Key Transponder Mode Keys Touch To Toggle Extended Squitter Figure 2-12 Transponder Control Panel With Extended Squitter Capability 1. While viewing the Transponder (XPDR) page, touch the Enable ES key to toggle Extended Squitter Off and On. 2. Touch the Flight ID key and use the keypad to select a Flight ID and then touch Enter. 3. After selecting a Flight ID, the selected value will be shown in the Flight ID key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:06:54 PM 2.2 Audio Panel Operation The GTN 7XX can operate as a control head for remotely connected compatible audio and intercom equipment (such as the Garmin GMA 35). Audio Panel Controls Touch To Display Mic Selection: 1, 2 or 3 Intercom Setup
"+" Indicates Additional Audio Source Monitoring (Nav, DME, or ADF) Mon Selection:
1, 2 or 3 Monitor and Mic Selections Activates Split Mode Recorder Playback Control Cabin Speaker Select & Vol Marker Audio And Volume 3D Audio Figure 2-13 Audio Panel Controls Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:06:54 PM 1 m o C 2 m o C 3 m o C 1 v a N 2 v a N E M D F D A i s o d a R d e r o t i n o M l n o i t c e e S C M I 1 m o C 2 m o C 3 m o C r e g n e s s a P s s e r d d A s s e r d d A r e g n e s s a P 1 m o C i s o d a R t o l i P m o c r e t n I w e r C s l o r t n o C k c a b y a P l e d o M t i l p S l e m u o V r e k a e p S r e k a e p S n b a C i i o d u A r e k r a M l e m u o V r e k r a M e s n e S i H r e k r a M i o d u A D 3 i s o d a R t o l i P
-
o C s s e r d d A r e g n e s s a P 1 m o C n o i t c e l e S c i M
&
o d a R i l e n a P o d u A i 1 2 3 1 2 3 e m u o V l h c l e u q S Q S
/
L O V t o l i P n o M c i M p u t e S m o c r e t n I e m u o V l h c l e u q S 1 c i s u M 2 c i s u M e n o h p e e T l t o l i P
-
o C p u o r G r e g n e s s a P h t i w u n e M i o d u A h t o o t e u B l Q S
/
L O V t o l i P
-
o C Figure 2-14 Audio Panel Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:06:54 PM 2.2.1 Mic Selection Mic selection can be determined by two methods: the Mic window or by the Audio Panel page. 2.2.1.1 Mic Window Mic Selection 2.2.1.2 1. Touch the Mic window to toggle between Mic 1 and Mic 2. 2. Note that the selected Mic is automatically monitored. 3. If Mic 3 or Passenger Address (PA) are selected, touching the Mic window will revert to toggling between Mic 1 and Mic 2. Audio Panel Page Mic Selection 1. Touch the Audio Panel key at the top of the display. Mic Selection: 1, 2 or 3 Selected Mic Passenger Address Mic Selection Figure 2-15 Audio Panel MIC Selection 2. Touch the desired Mic (Com 1, Com 2, or Com 3) from the MIC Selection list on the right side of the display. 3. The selected Mic will be shown in the Mic window. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:06:54 PM 2.2.2 Monitor The Monitor function indicates which radios are being listened to. 1. Monitor is automatically selected for the associated Com Mic Radio (1, 2, or 3). For example, when Com 1 is selected, Mon 1 is automatically active. 2. Touch the Mon key to toggle between the automatically selected monitored channel (selected Mic) and the other channels. 2.2.3 Passenger Address The Passenger Address key toggles the passenger address system on and off. Touch the Passenger Address key to toggle the passenger address system on and off. 2.2.4 3D Audio Advanced processing adjusts audio in the headset to mimic how the human ear normally hears and registers sounds in space. This 3-D Audio feature makes it seem as though different audio sources are coming from different directions around you. Now its much easier to focus on and understand one particular source from among many. For example, COM 1 will seem to be coming from the left while COM 2 will seem to be coming from the right. When 3D Audio is disabled, balance is restored. NOTE: The stereo/mono headsets must be in the stereo position in order for 3D audio to function. Touch the 3D Audio key to toggle the 3D Audio function on and off. This is currently done such that audio sources will either be 30 degrees to your left (330 degrees), 30 degrees to your right, and directly in front (0 degrees). The following table details the left/right balance of the audio level depending on the selected Com:
Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:06:54 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Active Com 1,2,3 1,2 1,3 2,3 1 2 3 1 330 330 330 N/A 0 N/A N/A 2 0 30 N/A 330 N/A 0 N/A 3 30 N/A 30 30 N/A N/A 0 Table 2-2 3D Audio Left/Right Balance 2.2.5 Cabin Speaker Selection and Volume The Cabin Speaker key turns the cabin speaker on and off. The Speaker Charts Volume key sets the volume level. 1. Touch the Cabin Speaker key to toggle the cabin speaker on and off. 2. Touch the Speaker Volume key to set the Cabin Speaker volume. Touch the Speaker Volume arrows to set the volume. Percent Of Maximum Volume Graphic Scale Showing Volume Touch To Decrease Volume Touch To Increase Volume Figure 2-16 Cabin Speaker Volume Selection Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:06:55 PM 2.2.6 Marker Audio and Volume The optional Marker Beacon Receiver uses an audio indicator to alert you when the aircraft passes over a Marker Beacon transmitter. The audio from the Marker Beacon Receiver can be heard unless disabled by selecting Marker Audio. When Marker is selected (green bar shown), the tones for Marker Beacons are heard. When Marker is not selected (green bar not shown), the tones for Marker Beacons are not heard. The GMA 35 marker beacon receiver and indicators are part of the ILS system. The marker beacon lamps operate independently of any audio selection and cannot be turned off. The GMA 35 can drive external marker lamps if required and also provides an autopilot middle marker sense output. Prior to beginning an ILS approach, select high or low marker sensitivity with the Marker Hi Sense key. The lighted green bar in the key illuminates for high sensitivity and remains off for low sensitivity. Touching the Marker Audio key prior to an approach allows the marker audio tones to be heard in the headsets. When the green bar in the Marker Audio key shows, the marker audio will be heard when available. The Audio Panel key will change to a Mute key. Touching the Mute key while audio is heard will mute the marker audio until the next beacon is received. The marker beacon signal sensitivity threshold can be set in Conguration mode. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for adjustment. 1. While the Audio Control page is displayed, touch the Marker Audio key to hear the current Marker Beacon tones. 2. Touch the Marker Audio key again to disable Marker Beacon tones. 3. Touch the Marker Volume key to set the Marker Beacon tone volume. Touch the Marker Volume arrows to set the volume. Percent Of Maximum Volume Graphic Scale Showing Volume Touch To Decrease Volume Touch To Increase Volume Figure 2-17 Audio Panel Marker Beacon Tone Volume Selection Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:06:55 PM 2.2.7 Marker Hi Sense The Marker Hi Sense setting allows detecting the outer Marker Beacon from a greater distance. 1. While the Audio Control page is displayed, touch the Marker Hi Sense key to activate greater Marker Beacon sensitivity. 2. Touch the Marker Hi Sense key again to return to normal sensitivity. 2.2.8 Marker Beacon Annunciations A visual annunciation of marker beacons will be shown on the display when the aircraft ies over a marker beacon. The annunciation will appear in the lower left of the display. Icon (Blink) Blink Interval Icon (Standard) Current Beacon Inner Marker Middle Marker Outer Marker The marker beacon alternates between the standard icon and the blink icon at the blink interval corresponding to the current beacon. 250 ms 333 ms 750 ms Table 2-3 Marker Beacons Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:06:55 PM 2.2.9 Audio Split Mode In Split Mode the pilot uses one radio for MIC audio while the copilot uses a different radio. The pilot and copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios. The pilot can still listen to their individually selected radios. In the Split mode, the pilot and co-pilot may talk and listen independently to the radios (or PA) as selected. Split Mode Annunciation Select Audio Split Mode Crew Intercom Activation Touch And Drag Finger To Scroll List of Radio Selections Touch To Scroll List of Radio Selections Figure 2-18 Audio Panel Split Mode Controls Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather 1. While the Audio Control page is displayed, touch the Split Nearest Mode key to display the Crew Intercom selections. 2. Touch the Split Mode key again to toggle the Crew Intercom selection off. 3. Touch the Crew Intercom key to toggle activation of the Crew Intercom allowing the Pilot and Co-Pilot to talk to each other. 4. Touch the desired Pilot and Co-Pilot Radio selections. Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:06:55 PM 2.2.10 Playback Controls The voice recorder feature records all the audio heard on any selected COM radio that is selected for transmission (the MIC selected COM) and not others selected for monitoring only. Playback is heard by anyone listening on the selected radios. The Clearance Recorder can record up to 2.5 minutes of Com audio. 1. While the Audio Control page is displayed, touch the Playback Controls key to display the Playback Control selections. Graphic Scale Showing Volume Percent Of Maximum Volume Touch To Decrease Volume Heavy Outline Indicates The Upper Left Rotary Knob Controls Volume Number Of Recordings Made Before The Current Selection Touch To Increase Volume Recording Time Line Playback Controls Number Of Recordings Made After The Current Selection Figure 2-19 Audio Panel Playback Controls 2. Touch the Playback Volume arrows to set the volume. 3. Touch the Backward, Play, or Forward keys to control the playback of the currently selected recording. 4. Touch the Previous or Next keys to select a recording. 5. Touch the Back key to return to the Audio Panel page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:06:55 PM 2.3 Intercom Setup The GTN 7XX can operate as a control head for remotely connected compatible intercom equipment. The Internal Communication System (ICS) has several modes of operation that are selected on the display of the GTN 7XX to control communication in the aircraft. Passengers cannot transmit over the active Com radio, even if equipped with a PTT key. Depending on the installation and aircraft, the pilot and co-pilot positions on this page may be reversed (such as congured for rotorcraft). 1. Touch the Intercom window at the top of the display to display the Intercom Setup page. Touch To Display Intercom Setup Touch To Congure Co-Pilot Volume And Squelch Selected Intercom Mode Touch To Congure Pilot Volume And Squelch Touch To Congure Passenger Volume And Squelch Touch Source To Congure Figure 2-20 Intercom Setup 2. Touch the arrow between the intercom recipients to activate communication between those recipients. The arrow will be green when communication is active. Touch the arrow again to deactivate communication. Detailed information is shown in the Intercom Modes table. 3. Touch the key for a function to the make the desired changes to their setup. Then, touch the Back key to return to the Intercom Setup page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:06:56 PM Mode Pilot Hears Co-Pilot Hears Selected radios, pilot Selected radios, co-pilot Passengers Hear Passengers Selected radios, pilot, co-pilot Selected radios, pilot, co-pilot Passengers Selected radios, pilot, co-pilot Selected radios, co-pilot, pilot, passengers Co-pilot, passengers Selected radios, pilot, passengers Selected radios, co-pilot Pilot, passengers Selected radios, pilot Selected radios, co-pilot, passengers Co-pilot, passengers Selected radios, pilot, co-pilot, passengers Selected radios, pilot, co-pilot Selected radios, pilot, passengers Selected radios, pilot, passengers Selected radios, co-pilot, passengers Selected radios, pilot, co-pilot, passengers Selected radios, pilot, co-pilot, passengers Selected radios, pilot, co-pilot, passengers Selected radios, pilot, co-pilot, passengers Table 2-4 Intercom Modes Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:06:56 PM Intercom Setup Pilot VOL/SQ Volume Squelch Co-Pilot VOL/SQ Volume Squelch Music 1 & Music 2 Music Setup Pilot Co-Pilot Passenger Mute Music During... Radio Intercom Music Volume Telephone Telephone Setup Pilot Co-Pilot Passenger Telephone Volume Group Co-Pilot with Passenger Menu Figure 2-21 Intercom Setup Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:06:56 PM 2.3.1 Set Pilot, Co-Pilot, & Passenger Volume and Squelch In the Intercom Setup function, the Volume and Squelch may be set separately for the Pilot, Copilot, and Passenger intercoms. 1. While viewing the Intercom Setup page, touch the Pilot, Co-Pilot, or Passenger VOL/SQ keys to set the Volume and Squelch for the selected item. Heavy Outline Indicates The Upper Left Rotary Knob Controls Volume Touch To Decrease Volume Touch To Select Manual Or Auto Squelch Touch To Increase Volume With Manual Squelch, Touch To Increase Squelch With Manual Squelch, Touch To Decrease Squelch Figure 2-22 Pilot Audio Setup 2. Touch the Volume arrows to set the desired Volume level. 3. Touch the Auto Squelch key to allow the unit to set the Squelch level automatically. When enabled, the Auto Squelch key will display a green bar. 4. Touch the Squelch arrows to set the desired Squelch level. 5. Touch the Back key to return to the Intercom Setup page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:06:57 PM 2.3.2 Co-Pilot is Passenger When the GTN 7XX is installed with a GMA 35, the GTN can place the GMA into "Co-Pilot is Passenger" mode. While in this mode, the GMA 35 treats the copilot headset as a passenger headset and the co-pilot only hears what the other passengers hear. This applies to intercom audio, alerts (if congured for the passengers), selected audio (if congured for passengers), and music/telephone distribution. "Co-Pilot is Passenger" mode allows simpler audio control for the pilot when the co-pilot is just a passenger and not involved in ying the aircraft. 1. To activate "Co-Pilot is Passenger" mode, open the Intercom Setup page and touch Intercom. 2. Touch Menu, to display the Intercom Menu, and then touch Group Co-Pilot with Passenger to enable "Co-Pilot is Passenger" mode. Selected Intercom Conguration Set Co-Pilot as Passenger Figure 2-23 Set Co-Pilot as a Passenger in Intercom NOTE: This feature should not be used for multi-crew aircraft. When the co-pilot is treated as a passenger, co-pilot position may not hear audio alerts or radios. NOTE: While this mode is active, the co-pilot intercom and audio controls are unavailable because the co-pilot intercom/audio is controlled by the passenger controls. Split mode is also unavailable. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:06:57 PM 2.3.3 Music 1 and Music 2 Setup The GMA 35 provides two music interfaces. Operation depends on the state of the music distribution. 1. While viewing the Intercom Setup page, touch the Music 1 or Music 2 keys to set their setup. Heavy Outline Indicates The Upper Left Rotary Knob Controls Volume Touch To Decrease Volume Touch To Select Music Recipients Touch To Select Source That Will Mute Music Touch To Increase Volume Percent Of Maximum Volume Graphic Scale Showing Volume Figure 2-24 Music 1 Setup 2. Select the recipients for Music Distribution by touching any combination of the Pilot, Co-Pilot, or Passenger keys. 3. Touch the Radio and/or Intercom keys to select the function that, when active, Music will be muted. 4. Touch the Volume arrows to set the desired Volume level. NOTE: At every power cycle, the mute music during radio selection will be active. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:06:57 PM 2.3.4 Telephone Setup The GMA 35 provides a 2-way telephone interface. Operation depends on the state of the telephone distribution. Telephone communication is much like using the intercom, allowing both parties to talk at once. NOTE: Garmin recommends when using the GSR 56 Iridium phone system that the audio only be activated when on a phone call. The telephone channel may be disabled in Conguration mode. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for details. 1. While viewing the Intercom Setup page, touch the Telephone key to set its setup. Heavy Outline Indicates The Upper Left Rotary Knob Controls Volume Touch To Decrease Volume Touch To Select Telephone Recipients Touch To Increase Volume Percent Of Maximum Volume Graphic Scale Showing Volume Figure 2-25 Telephone Setup 2. Select the recipients for Telephone Distribution by touching any combination of the Pilot, Co-Pilot, or Passenger keys. 3. Touch the Volume arrows to set the desired Telephone Volume level. NOTE: Telephone audio distribution is retained across power cycles for the passengers, however, pilot and co-pilot telephone distribution will default to OFF over power cycles. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:06:58 PM 2.3.5 Bluetooth Setup The GMA 35c provides a Bluetooth audio connection to a portable device. Operation depends on the state of the Bluetooth Audio Distribution. 1. While viewing the Intercom Setup page, touch the Bluetooth key to access its setup. Figure 2-26 Audio Bluetooth Setup 2. Select the recipients for Bluetooth Distribution by touching any combination of the Pilot, Co-Pilot, or Passenger keys. 3. Touch the Radio and/or Intercom keys to select the function that, when active, will mute the Bluetooth audio. 4. Touch the Volume arrows to set the desired Volume level. NOTE: At every power cycle, the mute Bluetooth during radio selection will be active. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:06:58 PM 2.4 Telligence Voice Command Garmin's Telligence Voice Command voice recognition feature allows the pilot (and optionally copilot) to control the GTN 7XX connected to a GMA 35 using spoken commands. To activate Voice Recognition, push and hold the Push-to-Command (PTC) button while speaking a command. When the Push-to-Command button is released, the GTN 7XX and/or the audio panel will respond. If a command is understood by the GMA, a positive acknowledgement chime will be played, and the relevant information will be displayed to reect the change (if applicable). The pilot should verify that the correct response has occurred. If a command is not understood by the GMA or the GTN is unable to complete the requested action, a negative acknowledgement tone will be played. The pilot should repeat the command by using the Push-to-
Command button, or by manually using the GTN 7XX touch screen. In the event of any abnormal Voice Recognition operation, the front panel controls and touch screen may be used to override Voice Recognition and manually control the GTN 7XX. NOTE 1: If Telligence Voice Command malfunctions and needs to be disabled, remove power to the GMA 35 audio panel. This will force the audio panel into the fail-safe mode. The pilot will be able to communicate using the COM 2 radio only. The following table lists the available Voice Recognition commands, the associated actions, and the voice response if applicable:
Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-25 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:06:58 PM Control Example Phrase Action COM one MIC one COM one MIC COM two MIC two COM two MIC COM three MIC three COM three MIC Split COM OR "Split Mode"
NAV one NAV two MUSIC one mute OR Mute MUSIC one Disable MUSIC one mute MUSIC one mute disable Disable mute MUSIC one OR Mute MUSIC one disable MUSIC two mute OR Mute MUSIC two Disable MUSIC two mute MUSIC two mute disable Disable mute MUSIC two OR Mute MUSIC two disable Speaker OR "Cabin Speaker"
Toggles COM1 audio Selects MIC1/COM1 audio Selects MIC1/COM1 audio Toggles COM2 audio Selects MIC2/COM2 audio Selects MIC2/COM2 audio Toggles COM3 audio Selects MIC3/COM3 audio Selects MIC3/COM3 audio Toggles split COM mode Toggles NAV1 audio. Toggles NAV2 audio. Mutes Music 1 on radio reception. Disables Music 1 mute on radio reception. Mutes Music 2 on radio reception. Disables Music 2 mute on radio reception. Toggles Cabin Speaker on/off. COM
(see Note 4) NAV
(see Note 4) MUSIC Speaker Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-26 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:06:58 PM Control Example Phrase Action COM Clearance Recorder
(see Note 4) Play Read back OR Say again Opens Audio Clearance Recorder and plays the last received radio transmission. If the Say Again command is repeated while a prior recording is being played then the clearance recorder will play the next prior recording. The Say Again command can thus be used in a repeated manner to back up through the recordings. PA Marker Beacon Volume Adjustments
(see Note 4) P - A OR "Passenger Address" Toggles PA on/off. Marker OR "Marker Beacon"
(Desired selection*) volume up
(Desired selection*) volume down
(Desired selection*) volume Same action as pressing Marker Audio. Increases volume of desired selection. Decreases volume of desired selection. Displays the current volume but does not change it.
* Desired selection: "Speaker", pilot, copilot, passenger, pass, "phone", marker, telephone, music one, or music two. NOTE 2: Finer volume adjustment may be made using the Volume knob on the GTN 7XX. The voice command Up or Down is equivalent to ve clicks of the Volume knob. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 2-27 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 27 7/9/2015 2:06:58 PM Control Example Phrase Action Distribution Distribute telephone to (desired position(s) **) OR Distribute phone to (desired position(s) **) Distribute music one to
(desired position(s) **) Distribute music two to
(desired position(s)**) Distributes Telephone to desired positions. Distributes MUS1 to desired position(s). Distributes MUS2 to desired position(s).
** Desired position(s): All, none, pilot, copilot, passenger, pass, or any combination of pilot, copilot, passenger, or pass. NOTE 3: The word to may be omitted from distribution phrases. 3D Audio Three-D audio Enables 3D audio Voice Response: Three-D audio left, three-D audio right. Enables standard audio
(disables 3D audio) Voice Response: Standard Audio. Table 2-5 Voice Recognition Commands Standard audio NOTE 4: Some installations may use an alternate set of command categories. This set of categories includes: COM, NAV, COM Clearance Recorder, and Volume Adjustments. In the Volume Adjustments category, the commands are: "Speaker", "pilot", "co-pilot", "passenger", and
"pass". NOTE 5: All of the listed commands may not be available in all installations, including some rotorcraft. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 2-28 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 28 7/9/2015 2:06:58 PM 3 NAV/COM (GTN 750 NAV/COM) The GTN 750 features a digitally-tuned VHF Com radio and digitally-tuned Nav/localizer and glideslope receivers. The GTN 750s Com radio operates in the aviation voice band, from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz, in 25 kHz steps (default). For European operations, a Com radio conguration of 8.33 kHz steps is also available. Active Com Frequency Volume and Squelch On/Off Knob Active Nav Frequency Standby Nav Frequency Backspace Key Frequency Transfer
(Flip/Flop) Key Large and Small Knobs
(Frequency Adjust) Standby Com Frequency Com Standby Editing Window Find Frequency Key Numeric Keypad Frequency Monitor Key Figure 3-1 Nav/Com Controls Find Xfer Monitor Keypad Recent Nearest - Filter - Com - Nav Flight Plan User Airport VOR Airport FSS ARTCC Figure 3-2 Nav/Com Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 3-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:06:58 PM 3.1 Volume Com radio volume is adjusted using the Volume knob. Turn the Volume knob clockwise to increase volume, or counterclockwise to decrease volume. The level will be maintained until changed. 1. Turn the Volume knob to set the Com volume. Percent Of Maximum Volume Graphic Scale Showing Volume Figure 3-3 Com Volume Setting 2. A bar graph showing the relative volume level will indicate the selected level and will disappear a few seconds after releasing the Volume knob. 3.2 Squelch The Com radio features an automatic squelch to reject many localized noise sources. You may override the squelch function by pressing the Volume knob. This facilitates listening to a distant station or setting the desired volume level. To override the automatic squelch, press the Volume knob momentarily. Press the Volume knob again to return to automatic squelch operation. A SQ indication appears above the active Com frequency window in the upper left corner of the display when automatic squelch is overridden. Com Control Text Receive Annunciation Squelch Annunciation Active Com Frequency
(Touch to Flip/Flop) Standby Com Frequency Figure 3-4 Com Controls While receiving a transmission, an RX indication appears in the Com frequency window to the immediate right of Com. A TX indication appears at this location while you are transmitting. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 3-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:06:59 PM 3.3 Com Window and Tuning Communication frequencies are selected by using the large and small right knobs or by touching the value in the standby Com frequency eld and using the displayed keypad. The standby frequency always appears below the active frequency. The active frequency is the frequency currently in use for transmit and receive operations. Once a frequency is selected in the standby eld, it may be transferred to the active frequency by touching the active frequency eld. NOTE: The Com window is normally active for adjustment, unless the NAV window is made active by pressing the small right knob. The active state automatically returns to the Com window after 30 seconds of inactivity. To select a Com frequency using the small and large right knobs:
1. If the tuning cursor is not currently in the Com window, press the small right knob momentarily. The Standby Com frequency will be highlighted to indicate that it is active for editing. 2. Turn the large right knob to select the desired megahertz
(MHz) value. For example, the 118 portion of the frequency 118.30. 3. Turn the small right knob to select the desired kilohertz
(kHz) value. For example, the .30 portion of the frequency 118.30. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 3-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:06:59 PM Foreword To select a Com frequency using the numeric keypad:
1. Touch the Standby window. Getting Started 2. A pull down keypad will appear with the current Standby frequency highlighted. Backspace - Frequency Clear Key Com Standby Editing Window Find Frequency Key Numeric Keypad Frequency Monitor Key Frequency Transfer
(Flip/Flop) Key Enter Key Figure 3-5 Com Standby Frequency Numeric Keypad 3. Touch the numeric keys to add the desired values and touch Enter to accept the displayed value and place it into the Standby Com window. 4. Touching the Xfer key will place the selected frequency directly into the Active window. To make the standby frequency the active frequency:
1. Touch the Com active frequency (top) window. 2. The Active (top) and Standby frequencies will ip/op. Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 3-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:06:59 PM 3.3.1 Com Frequency Finding The GTN 750s frequency nding feature allows you to quickly select any displayed database Com frequency as your standby frequency. The following are some examples of selecting Com frequencies from some of the main GPS pages. To select a Com frequency for a User created frequency, Recent selected frequency, Nearest airport, or from your Flight Plan:
1. While viewing the numeric keypad touch the Find key. Categories for User, Recent, Nearest, and Flight Plan are available. 2. Touch Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or User. Selected Frequency for Nearest Airport Selected Frequency Category Touch to Select Nearest List Figure 3-6 Com Nearest Airport Frequency 3. Touch the desired Com frequency to select it and place it into the Com Standby window. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 3-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:06:59 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 3.3.1.1 Find Recent Frequencies 1. While viewing the Find results, touch the Recent tab. A list of the recently selected frequencies will be displayed. Recent Frequency Category Selected Frequency Category Touch Frequency From Recent List To Select Standby Frequency Figure 3-7 Recent Com Frequency List 2. Touch the desired frequency to select it and place it into the Standby window. 3.3.1.2 Find Nearest Frequencies 1. While viewing the Find results, touch the Nearest key. A list of the nearest airport Com frequencies will be displayed. Selected Frequency Category Selected Frequencies For Nearest Airport Figure 3-8 Com Nearest Airport Frequency Index 3-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:06:59 PM 2. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to show the available frequencies. Touch A Frequency Key To Place It In The Standby Window Figure 3-9 Nearest Airport Multiple Frequency List 3. Touch the Filter key to lter the Nearest List by Airports, FSS, or ARTCC. Figure 3-10 Nearest Com Frequency List 4. Touch the desired Frequency List. Then, touch the desired frequency to load it into the Standby window. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 3-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:07:00 PM 5. Some frequencies will have more information detail available. Touch the key that shows "More Information."
Touch For More Information Figure 3-11 More Information Is Available For Some Frequencies 6. More detailed information is shown on the display. Touch the frequency key to load it into the Standby window. Touch To Insert Into Standby Window Additional Information Narrative Figure 3-12 More Frequency Detail Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 3-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:07:00 PM 3.3.1.3 Find Flight Plan Frequencies 1. While viewing the Find results, touch the Flight Plan tab. A list of Com or Nav frequencies associated with the active ight plan will be displayed. Selected Frequency Category Selected Frequency Category Touch To Select Frequency From List For Nearest Airport Figure 3-13 Flight Plan Frequency List 2. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to show the available frequencies, if present. 3. Touch the desired frequency to select it and place it into the Standby window. 3.3.1.4 Find User Frequencies 1. While viewing the Find results, touch the User tab. A list of User-created frequencies will be displayed. 2. Touch the desired frequency to load it into the Standby window. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 3-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:07:00 PM 3.3.2 Simple Frequency Entry Frequencies can be entered on the GTN without the leading one and/or trailing zero(s). As a result, the pilot can touch 2, 1, and 5 for 121.50. If a number is pressed that is not valid for the cursor location, the pilot is presented with a conrmation pop-up upon selecting the typed frequency. Frequency entry can be accomplished by typing every digit in the frequency or by leaving off the leading one and/or trailing zero(s). The frequency that will be entered is always displayed in the cursor window. 1. Touch the Standby frequency eld and then touch the 2 key. Figure 3-14 Simplied Frequency Entry Without Leading Number 2. Touch the 7 key. Figure 3-15 Second Frequency Number 3. Touch the 2 key. Figure 3-16 Final Frequency Without Trailing Number 4. Touch Enter. Entered Frequency Value Figure 3-17 Completed Frequency Entry Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 3-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:07:00 PM 3.3.3 Adding a New User Frequency 1. While viewing the numeric keypad touch the Find key at the bottom of the display. 2. Touch the User tab and then touch the Add User Frequency key. Add User Frequency User Frequency Selection Figure 3-18 Add New User Frequency 3. The Add New User Frequency information window will now be displayed. Touch the Name key to select a name for the User frequency. User Frequency Name User Frequency Value Figure 3-19 Add New User Frequency Detail Window Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 3-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:07:01 PM 4. Select the characters from the alphanumeric keypad for the desired name. Touch the Enter key to accept the displayed Name. User Frequency Name Alphanumeric Keypad Cursor Movement Backspace Figure 3-20 Select a Name for the New User Frequency 5. Touch the Frequency key and select the characters from the keypad for the desired frequency. Touch the Enter key to accept the displayed frequency. Figure 3-21 Select a Frequency Value for the New User Frequency Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 3-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:07:01 PM 6. Touch the Enter key to accept the displayed name and frequency. The new User Frequency will be added to the list. The list can store up to 15 user frequencies. User Frequency Name User Frequency Value Touch to Add Another User Frequency Touch to Edit/Remove the User Frequency Figure 3-22 Completed New User Frequency 3.3.4 Emergency Frequency The GTN 750s emergency frequency select provides a quick method of selecting 121.50 MHz as the active frequency in the event of an in-ight emergency. The emergency frequency select is available whenever the unit is on, regardless of GPS or cursor status, or loss of the display. To quickly tune and activate 121.50, press and hold volume knob or the remote Com ip-op key for approximately two seconds. NOTE: Pressing and holding the remote Com FLIP/FLOP key for approximately two seconds, on units so congured, will lock the COM board, preventing further changes in Com frequency until the Com board is unlocked, by pressing the remote Com FLIP/FLOP key again for two seconds. The following message will notify the pilot that the Com board has been locked: COM LOCKED TO 121.5 MHZ. HOLD REMOTE COM TRANSFER KEY TO EXIT. NOTE: Under some circumstances if the Com system loses communication with the main system, the radio will automatically tune to 121.50 MHz for transmit and receive regardless of the displayed frequency. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 3-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:07:01 PM 3.3.5 Stuck Microphone Whenever the GTN 750 is transmitting, a TX indication appears in the Com window. If the push-to-talk key on the microphone is stuck or accidentally left in the keyed position, or continues to transmit after the key is released, the Com transmitter automatically times out (or ceases to transmit) after 30 seconds of continuous broadcasting. You will also receive a Com push-to-talk key stuck message as long as the stuck condition exists. 3.3.6 Remote Frequency Selection Control On units congured for remote Com frequency Recall, pressing the remote recall switch will load the next preset Com frequency into the units Standby frequency box. The remote recall switch can be pressed multiple times to scroll the entire preset frequency list through the Standby frequency box (the list will wrap from the bottom of the list back up to the top, skipping any empty preset positions). The standby frequency isnt activated until a Com FLIP/FLOP switch (either bezel-mounted or remote (COM RMT XFR) is pressed. Remote Frequency Selection only functions on units congured for a remote Com Frequency recall switch. NOTE: For software prior to version 5.00, frequencies must be stored in the User Frequency List prior to utilizing the remote channel select switch. 3.3.7 Reverse Frequency Look-Up When the Reverse Frequency Look-Up feature is enabled in System-Setup, the identier and frequency type will be shown for the selected Com and Nav frequencies for the nearest stations that are in the aviation database when the unit is receiving a valid position input. Station Identiers with a + sign will have more stations associated with this frequency than just the type displayed. Identier and Type Shown for the Selected Frequency The + Sign Indicates More Stations Associated With This Frequency Figure 3-23 Reverse Frequency Look-Up NOTE: It can take up to 2 minutes for the RFL frequency to change after crossing the half way point when ying from one airport to another that both use the same frequency. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 3-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:07:01 PM 3.4 Com Frequency Monitoring The Frequency Monitoring function allows you to listen to the Standby frequency in the Com radio, while monitoring the Active frequency for activity. 1. Touch the Monitor key to listen to the standby frequency. A small MON annunciation is displayed to the right of the Standby frequency. A green bar will show on the Monitor key. When the Active frequency receives a signal, the unit will switch automatically to the Active frequency and then switch back to the standby frequency when activity ceases. Frequency Monitor Annunciation Standby Frequency Clear Key Com Standby Editing Window Frequency Monitor Key Frequency Transfer
(Flip-Flop) Key Figure 3-24 Com Frequency Monitoring 2. The Monitor function is deactivated when you touch the Monitor key again and the green bar is extinguished. NOTE: The Com radio Monitoring function is different than the Monitor function of the Audio Panel. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 3-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:07:01 PM 3.5 NAV (VOR/Localizer/Glideslope) Receiver Operations The GTN 750 includes digitally-tuned Nav/localizer and glideslope receivers with the desired frequency selected on the Nav window, along the top right-hand side of the display. Frequency selection is performed by pressing the small right knob to activate Nav Standby frequency editing and then turning the small and large right knobs or keypad to select the desired frequency. Nav Control Text Active Nav Frequency Touch To Flip/Flop NAV / STBY Touch To Edit STBY Standby Nav Frequency Figure 3-25 Nav Frequency Window 3.5.1 Ident Audio and Volume Nav ident is enabled by pressing the Volume knob when the Nav window is active. When Nav ident is enabled, the ID annunciation will appear in the active Nav window and Morse code tones will be heard. When the Nav function is enabled, the Nav Standby channel window will highlight briey and then turn to blue text. The Nav Standby frequency will be active for editing for about 30 seconds before the Com Standby frequency becomes active for editing. Nav Ident Is Active Nav Standby Frequency Highlighted To Indicate It Is Active for Frequency Selection Figure 3-26 Nav Standby Frequency Window and Ident is Active Nav audio volume is adjusted using the Volume knob. Turn the Volume knob clockwise to increase volume, or counterclockwise to decrease volume. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 3-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:07:02 PM 3.5.2 Nav Tuning Window Nav frequencies are selected with the tuning cursor in the standby Nav frequency eld, and using the small and large right knobs to dial in the desired frequency. The keypad may also be used for frequency entry after touching the Standby window. The standby frequency always appears below the active frequency. The active frequency is the frequency currently in use. The GTN will automatically decode Morse code and display the Ident for the active frequency above it. The RFL (reverse frequency lookup) Identier is displayed below the frequency and is only dependent on GPS position and database information. NOTE: Tuning is normally active in the Com window, unless placed in the Nav window by pressing the small right knob. When the tuning cursor is in the Nav window, it automatically returns to the Com window after 30 seconds of inactivity. The active frequency in either window cannot be accessed directly only the standby frequency is active for editing. To select a VOR/localizer/ILS frequency:
1. Touch the small right knob momentarily to make the Nav Standby frequency value active for editing. The window will be highlighted momentarily. 2. Turn the large right knob to select the desired megaHertz
(MHz) value. For example, the 117 portion of the frequency 117.80. 3. Turn the small right knob to select the desired kiloHertz
(kHz) value. For example, the .80 portion of the frequency 117.80. 4. Touch the Nav active (top) frequency to make the standby frequency. 5. The Active (top) and Standby frequencies will switch. Nav Frequencies In The Database Will Display The Ident Based on GPS Position Nav Frequencies Will Automatically Decode Morse Code And Display The Ident Figure 3-27 Automatic Nav Frequency Ident Decoding Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 3-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:07:02 PM 3.5.3 Nav Frequency Finding The GTN 750s frequency nding feature allows you to quickly select any displayed database Nav frequency as your standby frequency. To select a Nav frequency for a User created frequency, Recent selected frequency, Nearest airport, or from your Flight Plan:
1. While viewing the numeric keypad touch the Find key at the bottom of the display. Categories for User, Recent, Nearest, and Flight Plan are available. 2. Touch the User, Recent, Nearest, or Flight Plan key. Active Nav Frequency Key Nearest Nav Frequency List Is Selected Touch To Select For Standby Nav Frequency Nearest Nav Frequency List Touch to Filter Nearest List Figure 3-28 Nearest Airport Nav Frequency Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 3-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:07:02 PM OR 3. Touch the desired Nav frequency to select it and place it into the Nav Standby window. 4. Touch the Filter key to narrow the list by category, such as Airport and VOR, and then select a given frequency. Touch To Select Nearest Frequency List Type Figure 3-29 Nearest Nav Frequency List Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 3-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:07:02 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index 3-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:07:02 PM 4 FLIGHT PLANS The GTN 7XX lets you create up to 99 different ight plans, with up to 100 waypoints in each ight plan. The Flight Plan function is accessed by touching the Flight Plan key on the Home page. The Flight Plan function allows you to create, store, edit, and copy ight plans. Active FPL Waypoint Options Menu Add Waypoint Catalog Store Delete Preview Parallel Track Invert Edit Data Fields Select Waypoint Find Recent Nearest Flight Plan User Search by Name Search by City Activate Leg Insert Before Insert After Load SAR*
Hold at Waypoint Load Procedures**
Load Airway***
Waypoint Info Remove
* "Load SAR" is only shown when the Search and Rescue feature is enabled by the installer
** "Load Procedures" is shown for airports
***"Load Airway" is shown for waypoints on a published airway Figure 4-1 Flight Plan Functional Diagram NOTE: Navigation is provided for xed wing aircraft above 30 kts and for rotorcraft above 10 kts. NOTE: The Chart feature provides a digital representation of a paper chart and provides no vertical or lateral course guidance. Flight Plan and Procedures are separate from Charts, and do provide vertical and lateral course guidance for the loaded route or procedure shown on the Flight Plan page. The term Chart Unavailable means that the chart cannot be viewed on the Charts due to either a chart not being published, or an error in the Chart database, but does not preclude its availability or inclusion of the procedure in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The absence of a chart for a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach does not preclude its availability or inclusion in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The absence of a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach under the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system does not preclude the ability to view the Chart for that procedure under the Chart feature. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:07:02 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 4.1 4.1.1 Creating a New Flight Plan Creating a New Flight Plan in the Catalog 1. From the Home page, touch Flight Plan. 2. Touch Menu and then the Catalog key. 3. Touch the Create New Catalog Route key at the end of the ight plan list in the Catalog. Touch To Create New Flight Plan Figure 4-2 Create a New Catalog Route (Flight Plan) 4. Touch the Add Waypoint key and select a waypoint identier with the alphanumeric keypad. Then, touch Enter. Selected Flight Plan Waypoint Figure 4-3 Select a Waypoint for the New Flight Plan Index 4-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:07:03 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain NOTE: If a ight plan that includes a procedure that has been modied by the pilot is saved into the ight plan catalog, the GTN cannot check the accuracy of that procedure when that ight plan is used on a later ight. It is recommended that ight plans with modied procedures not be saved in the ight plan catalog. 4.1.2 Creating a New Flight Plan from the Active Flight Plan 1. From the Home page, touch Flight Plan. Figure 4-4 Create New Flight Plan by Clearing Active Flight Plan 2. If there is already an Active Flight Plan, touch Menu and then the Delete and OK keys to delete the existing active ight plan. The stored ight plan in the Catalog will not be deleted. 3. Touch the Add Waypoint key and select a waypoint identier with the alphanumeric keypad. Then, touch Enter. 4. Touch the Add Waypoint key and select the waypoint identier Weather with the keypad for the next waypoint. Touch Enter. 5. Continue adding waypoints as needed. 6. Touch Menu and then touch Store to store the ight plan in the Catalog. The screen will now display the Flight Plan Catalog and show the new ight plan. Flight plans are listed by the Departure and Destination waypoints. Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:07:03 PM 4.2 Active Flight Plan Page The Active Flight Plan Page provides information and editing functions for the ight plan currently in use for navigation. Once you have activated a ight plan, the Active Flight Plan Page shows each waypoint for the ight plan, along with the Desired Track (DTK), Distance (DIST) for each leg and Cumulative Distance (CUM). The data elds are user-selectable and may be changed to display Cumulative Distance (CUM), Distance (DIST), Desired Track (DTK), En Route Safe Altitude (ESA), or Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA). Cumulative Dist Between Current Position and Next Wpt *
DIST Between Legs *
DTK Between Legs *
Origin and Destination Waypoints Active Leg Navigation Parallel Track Active Flight Plan Menu Options Up/Down Keys to Scroll FPL Figure 4-5 Active Flight Plan Page
* The eld types may be changed using the Edit Fields function in the Flight Plan page Menu. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:07:03 PM 4.2.1 Waypoint Options 1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired ight plan waypoint. The Waypoint Options window will be shown. Greyed Options Are Not Available Touch Key To Select Option Waypoint Options List Figure 4-6 Active Flight Plan Wpt Options with SAR Available 2. Touch one of the options to perform the selected action. Cancel the option selection by touching the Back key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:07:03 PM 4.2.1.1 Activate Leg The Activate Leg option allows you to change the active leg of a ight plan. 1. On the Waypoint Options menu, touch the desired TO waypoint and then the Activate Leg key to select the TO waypoint as the active leg for navigation. Current Leg Current TO Wpt Touch to Select As New TO Wpt and To Activate Leg Figure 4-7 Active Flight Plan Activate Leg Option 2. Touch the OK key to set the selected leg as the Active Leg, or Cancel to not select it. Activate Leg Option Was Selected Touch OK To Activate Leg Touch Cancel To Cancel The Operation And Return To the Flight Plan View Figure 4-8 Active Flight Plan Activate Leg Option Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:07:03 PM 4.2.1.2 Insert Before The Insert Before option allows you to insert a new waypoint into the active ight plan before the selected waypoint. 1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in the ight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed. Option Will Insert New Waypoint Before This Selected Flight Plan Waypoint Insert Before Option Was Selected Figure 4-9 Active Flight Plan Insert Waypoint Before Option 2. Touch the Insert Before key to select a new waypoint before the selected waypoint. 3. Select a waypoint identier with the alphanumeric keypad. Choose New Waypoint To "Insert Before" The Selected Flight Plan Waypoint Figure 4-10 Use the Alphanumeric Keypad to Select Waypoint to Insert Before Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:07:04 PM 4. Then, touch Enter to conrm the selection, or touch Cancel to cancel any changes. The new ight plan will be shown. New Waypoint Inserted Before The Selected Flight Plan Waypoint Figure 4-11 New Waypoint Is Inserted Before the Selected Waypoint Selected Flight Plan Waypoint New Flight Plan Waypoint Figure 4-12 Flight Plan Before and After New Waypoint Inserted Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:07:04 PM 4.2.1.3 Insert After The Insert After option allows you to insert a new waypoint into the active ight plan after the selected waypoint. 1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in the ight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed. 2. Touch the Insert After key to select a new waypoint after the selected waypoint. 3. Select a waypoint identier with the alphanumeric keypad. Then, touch Enter to conrm the selection, or touch the Cancel key to cancel the operation and return to the Waypoint Options window. 4.2.1.4 Remove Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc The Remove option allows you to remove the selected waypoint from the Charts active ight plan. 1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in the ight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed. 2. On the Waypoint Options menu, touch the Remove key to delete the selected waypoint from the active ight plan. Waypoint Selected To Be Removed Touch OK To Remove Waypoint Touch Cancel To Cancel The Operation And Return To the Flight Plan View Figure 4-13 Active Flight Plan Remove Waypoint Option Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:07:04 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 4.2.1.5 Load Procedures The Load Procedure selection from the Waypoint Options will start the Procedures function. See the Procedures section for complete information. 1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in the ight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed. 2. Touch the Load Procedures key to go to the Procedure function for adding procedures to the selected ight plan. Touch to Select a Departure Touch to Select an Arrival Touch to Select an Approach Figure 4-14 Load Procedures Wpt Option NOTE: In software version 5.13 and earlier, for some procedures, due to very small position differences in the database, consecutive ight plan legs do not match up. The total effect on navigational guidance is negligible. The LOC BC 13 at KSLE via UBG shown below is an example of this. Procedure Flight Plan Leg Discrepancy Figure 4-15 Procedure Flight Plan Leg Position Difference Index 4-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:07:05 PM 4.2.1.6 Waypoint Info The Waypoint Info option allows you to view information about the selected waypoint. See the Waypoint Info section for complete information. 1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in the ight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed. 2. One Waypoint Options menu, touch the Waypoint Info key to view information about the selected waypoint. Distance & Bearing To Airport From Current Position Airport Identier, City,
& Type Airport Lat/Lon Waypoint Info Page Tab Airport Information Touch To View Airport Charts Figure 4-16 Active Flight Plan Wpt Info 3. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:07:05 PM 4.2.2 Airways Airways may be added as legs in ight plans with any waypoint that is part of an airway, such as a VOR. 1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired airway entry waypoint in the ight plan. The Waypoint Options list will then be displayed. Touch VOR Entry Wpt To Insert Airway Figure 4-17 Active Flight Plan with VOR Entry Wpt 2. Touch the Load Airway key to select an airway for the selected entry waypoint. Touch To Insert Airway Figure 4-18 Select Load Airway from the Waypoint Options Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:07:05 PM 3. Touch the desired airway to select it. Touch To Insert Selected Airway Figure 4-19 Select an Airway from the List 4. Scroll through the list and touch the desired exit point from the airway. The Airway list can be sorted by distance or alphabetically. Touch the Sort Alpha key to toggle the sort setting. Touch To Select Exit Waypoint Figure 4-20 Select an Exit Waypoint for the Airway Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:07:05 PM 5. Conrm the airway information and then touch Load to insert the selected airway into the ight plan. Use the In and Out keys, and drag the map with your nger to view the airway detail. If changes are desired, touch the Airway or Exit Waypoint keys to select alternate choices. Airway Waypoint List Entry Waypoint Selected Airway Map Preview Of Airway Waypoints Touch To Select Exit Waypoint Touch To Load Airway Into FPL Figure 4-21 Airway Information 6. After loading the airway, it is inserted into the ight plan. The airway waypoints are shown below the Airway key on the display. Touch the airway to make any changes. Entry Waypoint Selected Airway. Touch To Edit. Selected Airway Waypoints Figure 4-22 Airway Waypoints in the Flight Plan Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:07:05 PM 7. Touch the Airway key to display the Airway Options. Make the desired choice or touch Back. Airway Detail Shown Touch To Collapse Airway Waypoints Touch To Select New or Change Current Airway Touch To Remove Airway From Flight Plan Figure 4-23 Airway Options 8. Touch the Collapse All Airways key to collapse the list of points along the airway. Touch the Collapse All Airways key again to toggle the display of airway detail back on. Touch To Expand Airway Waypoints Figure 4-24 Airways Collapsed In Flight Plan Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:07:06 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 4.2.3 Load Hold at Waypoint NOTE: This feature is available in software version 6.00 and later. 4.2.3.1 Hold at Waypoint Holding patterns may be added to existing waypoints within the ight plan. 1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in the ight plan. The Waypoint Options list will then be displayed. FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Option Will Hold At This Waypoint Hold At Waypoint Option Selected Figure 4-25 Active Flight Plan with Hold At Waypoint Option 2. Touch the Hold At Waypoint key to open the Hold at Waypoint dialog window. Touch To Select Hold Course Touch To Select Course Direction Touch To Select Turn Direction Touch To Select Leg Length Type Touch To Use Selections To Create A Hold At The Selected Waypoint Touch To Enter Leg Length Touch To Select EFC Time Figure 4-26 Creating a User-Dened Hold Index 4-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:07:06 PM 3. Touch the Course key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the inbound or outbound course. 4. Touch the Direction key to select between Inbound or Outbound for the course direction. 5. Touch the Turn key to select between Left or Right for the turn direction. 6. Touch the Leg Type key to select between Time or Distance for the leg type. 7. Touch the Leg Time or Leg Distance key to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the length of the leg. 8. Touch the Expect Further Clearance key to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the time for a reminder. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts 9. Touch the Load Hold key to add the hold into the ight plan. Wpt Info 4.2.3.2 Removing a Hold 1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the hold to be removed. The Hold Options window is displayed. 2. Touch the Remove key. 3. Touch the OK key in response to Remove Holding Pattern?
The holding pattern is removed. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel key. Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:07:06 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc 4.2.4 Load Search and Rescue Patterns (Optional) NOTE: This feature is available in software version 6.00 and later. NOTE: Turn smoothing may result in SAR coverage being different than intended. The ight crew should always verify that the SAR pattern created conforms to the specic mission requirements. Search and Rescue Patterns may be added to existing waypoints within the active ight plan. Only one SAR pattern can exist in the active ight plan. Loading another SAR pattern into the active ight plan when one already exists will remove the rst SAR pattern. NOTE: Flight plans cannot be stored in the catalog if they contain a SAR pattern. Charts 1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in the ight plan. The Waypoint Options list will then be displayed. Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Option will initiate SAR pattern from this waypoint Load SAR Option Was Selected Figure 4-27 Active Flight Plan with Load SAR Option 2. Touch the Load SAR key to open the Search and Rescue Patterns page. 3. Touch the SAR Pattern key to select between Parallel Track, Sector Search, Expanding Square, or Orbit for the SAR pattern type. The available patterns can be congured by the installer and all of the listed pattern types may not be available. 4. Conrm the SAR pattern information and then touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the active ight plan or touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected Index 4-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:07:06 PM pattern to the active ight plan and go direct-to the initial waypoint. 5. The SAR pattern waypoints are shown below the SAR key on the display. Touch the SAR pattern to make any changes. Initial Waypoint SAR Key. Selected Pattern. Touch To Edit. Selected SAR Pattern Waypoints Figure 4-28 SAR Pattern Waypoints in the Flight Plan 6. Touch the SAR key to display the Search & Rescue Options. Make the desired choice or touch the Back key. SAR Key SAR Pattern Detail Shown Touch To Collapse SAR Pattern Touch To Insert Wpt Before SAR Wpts Touch To Edit SAR Pattern Parameters Touch To Remove SAR Pattern Figure 4-29 Search & Rescue Options Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:07:07 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 7. Touch the Collapse Search Pattern key to collapse the list of the points along the SAR pattern. Touch the Collapse Search Pattern key again to toggle the display of SAR pattern detail back on. SAR Pattern Collapsed Figure 4-30 SAR Pattern Collapsed in Flight Plan 4.2.4.1 Creating a Parallel Track Pattern The Parallel Track SAR pattern starts at the initial waypoint and follows the initial track for the length of the rst parallel track leg. A 90 turn in the initial turn direction leads to the spacing leg with a length equal to the track spacing. Another 90 turn leads to the second parallel track leg. The turns at the end of the second parallel track leg are in the opposite direction as the previous parallel track leg. The parallel track pattern terminates once the desired number of parallel track legs have been own. Selected Initial Waypoint Touch To Select SAR Pattern Touch To Select Initial Track Touch To Select Initial Turn Direction Touch To Select Leg Length Touch To Select Track Spacing Distance Touch To Select Number of Legs Touch To Load Selected Pattern To Active FPL Figure 4-31 Search and Rescue Parallel Track Pattern Page Touch To Load Selected Pattern To The Active FPL And Go Direct-
To The First Wpt In The Pattern Index 4-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:07:07 PM 1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Parallel Track as the pattern type. 2. Touch the Initial Track key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the initial course. 3. Touch the Initial Turn Direction key to select between Left or Right as the initial turn direction. 4. Touch the Leg Length key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the length of the parallel track legs. 5. Touch the Track Spacing key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the desired spacing between the parallel track legs. 6. Touch the Leg Count key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the desired number of parallel track legs. 7. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the active ight plan. 8. Touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected pattern to the active ight plan and go direct-to the initial waypoint. Or Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:07:07 PM 4.2.4.2 Creating a Sector Search Pattern The Sector Search SAR pattern starts at the initial waypoint and follows the initial track for the desired leg length. A 60 turn in the initial turn direction is followed by another leg with the desired leg length, another 60 turn, and then a leg back to the initiating waypoint. The next sector starts with a leg continuing on the same course outbound from the initiating waypoint and is followed by the same sequence of legs and turns. The third sector follows the same pattern. Selected Initial Waypoint Sector Search Pattern Selected Touch To Select Initial Track Touch To Select Initial Turn Direction Touch To Select Leg Length Touch To Load Selected Pattern To Active FPL Touch To Load Selected Pattern To Active FPL & Go Direct-To Initial Wpt Figure 4-32 Search and Rescue Sector Search Pattern Page 1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Sector Search as the pattern type. 2. Touch the Initial Track key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the initial course. 3. Touch the Initial Turn Direction key to select between Left or Right as the initial turn direction. 4. Touch the Leg Length key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the length of the parallel track legs. 5. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the active ight plan. 6. Touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected pattern to the active ight plan and go direct-to the initial waypoint. Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Or Symbols Appendix Index 4-22 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:07:07 PM 4.2.4.3 Creating an Expanding Square Pattern The Expanding Square SAR pattern starts at the initial waypoint and follows the initial track for a distance equal to the track spacing. All turns in the expanding square pattern are in the initial turn direction. All legs in the expanding square pattern are separated by the track spacing distance. Selected Initial Waypoint Expanding Square Pattern Selected Touch To Select Initial Track Touch To Select Initial Turn Direction Touch To Select Track Spacing Distance Touch To Select Number of Legs Touch To Load Selected Pattern To Active FPL Touch To Load Selected Pattern To Active FPL & Go Direct-To Initial Wpt Figure 4-33 Search and Rescue Expanding Square Pattern Page 1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Expanding Square as the pattern type. 2. Touch the Initial Track key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the initial course. 3. Touch the Initial Turn Direction key to select between Left or Right as the initial turn direction. 4. Touch the Track Spacing key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the desired spacing between the parallel track legs. 5. Touch the Leg Count key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the desired number of legs. 6. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the active ight plan. OR 7. Touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected pattern to the active ight plan and go direct-to the initial waypoint. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:07:07 PM 4.2.4.4 Creating an Orbit Pattern The Orbit SAR pattern is a xed radius turn around the specied center waypoint. Automatic waypoint sequencing will be suspended while ying the orbit pattern. Selected Initial Waypoint Orbit Search Pattern Selected Touch To Select Initial Turn Direction Touch To Select Radius Touch To Load Selected Pattern To Active FPL Touch To Load Selected Pattern To Active FPL & Go Direct-To Initial Wpt Figure 4-34 Search and Rescue Orbit Pattern Page 1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Orbit as the pattern type. 2. Touch the Initial Turn Direction key to select between Left or Right as the turn direction. 3. Touch the Radius key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and Enter to select the radius of the orbit pattern. 4. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the active ight plan. OR 5. Touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected pattern to the active ight plan and go direct-to the rst waypoint in the pattern. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:07:08 PM 4.3 Flight Plan Menu The Flight Plan Menu provides access to functions to manage your ight plans. The functions included are: View Catalog, Store Flight Plan, Delete Flight Plan, Preview Flight Plan, Parallel Track, Invert Flight Plan, and Edit Data Fields. Touch the Menu key to access the Flight Plan Menu options:
View Catalog, Store Flight Plan, Delete Flight Plan, Preview Flight Plan, Parallel Track, Invert Flight Plan, and Edit Data Fields. Touch To Store The Active Flight Plan Touch To Delete The Active Flight Plan Touch To Invert The Active Flight Plan Touch To Add Parallel Track Course Offsets Touch To View List Of Stored Flight Plans Touch To View A Map And A List Of Waypoints For The Active Flight Plan Touch To Edit The Active Flight Plan Information Fields Figure 4-35 Flight Plan Menu Menu Catalog Store Delete Preview Route Options Activate Invert & Activate Preview Edit Copy Delete Parallel Track Invert Direction Offset Activate Edit Data Fields Column 1 Column 2 Column 3 Restore Defaults Figure 4-36 Flight Plan Menu Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-25 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:07:08 PM Charts Wpt Info Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 4.3.1 Store Flight Plan A ight plan must be saved to the Catalog to be used in future ights. The Store Flight Plan function will save the Active Flight Plan to the Catalog. NOTE: If a ight plan that includes a procedure that has been modied by the pilot is saved into the ight plan catalog, the GTN cannot check the accuracy of that procedure when that ight plan is used on a later ight. It is recommended that ight plans with modied procedures not be saved in the ight plan catalog. 1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key. The Flight Plan Menu will be displayed. 2. Touch the Store key to store the current Active Flight Plan into the Catalog. The ight plan will be named by the beginning and ending waypoints. 3. When a duplicate ight plan is created, a warning dialog will appear and the ight plan will be saved with a numeral at the end of the destination waypoint. Duplicate Flight Plan Original Flight Plan Duplicate Flight Plan Figure 4-37 Duplicate Flight Plan Naming 4.3.2 Invert Flight Plan The Invert Flight Plan option allows you to reverse the Active ight plan and use it for navigation guidance back to your original departure point. The original ight plan stored in the catalog is not affected. 1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key. The Flight Plan Menu will be displayed. Index 4-26 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:07:08 PM 2. Touch the Invert key to invert the current Active Flight Plan. 4.3.3 Parallel Track Parallel Track allows you to create a parallel course offset of 1 to 99 NM to the left or right of your current ight plan. After setting a parallel track to your current ight plan, a magenta parallel track line will be drawn offset from the original by the selected distance. The original course line will be drawn in grey. The aircraft will navigate to the parallel track course line and external CDI/HSI guidance will be driven from the parallel track. When you reach the end of the ight plan, a message will state, Parallel offset terminating in X seconds. The message will be given when the aircraft reaches the offset distance from the end of the parallel track. This will give the pilot sufcient time to intercept the original course. Figure 4-38 Parallel Track Description NOTE: Parallel track will be cancelled when graphically editing a ight plan. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-27 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 27 7/9/2015 2:07:08 PM NOTE: Certain leg types (such as approach) or leg geometries (changes in desire track greater than 120 degrees), combined with large offset values do not support parallel track. Default direction and offset values may result in the status indicating that parallel track is not supported. The user must enter the desired parallel track offset and distance to determine whether that ight plan, combined with the offset and distance, support parallel track. 1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and then the Parallel Track key. Touch To Set PTK Direction PTK Status Touch To Cancel Settings Touch To Set PTK Distance Touch To Activate PTK Settings Figure 4-39 Parallel Track Selection 2. Touch the Direction key to toggle the Parallel Track to be Left or Right of the current Flight Plan. 3. Touch the Offset key to select the Parallel Offset from the current Flight Plan. Select the desired distance on the numeric keypad. Touch Enter when nished. 4. Touch the Activate key. A magenta "-P" indication will appear to the right of the waypoint name on the Active Flight Plan page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-28 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 28 7/9/2015 2:07:09 PM Active FPL Leg PTK Active Symbol Figure 4-40 Parallel Track Shown in the Active Flight Plan Page 5. To deactivate Parallel Track, while viewing the Active Flight Plan touch the Menu key. With the Flight Plan Menu displayed, touch the Parallel Track key. PTK Status Touch To Deactivate PTK Settings Figure 4-41 Deactivating Parallel Track 6. Touch the Deactivate key to cancel Parallel Tracking. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-29 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 29 7/9/2015 2:07:09 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 4.3.4 Edit Data Fields The Active Flight Plan Page shows each waypoint for the ight plan, along with the Desired Track (DTK), Distance (DIS) for each leg and Cumulative Distance (CUM). The data elds are user-selectable and may be changed to display Cumulative Distance (CUM), Distance (DIS), Desired Track (DTK), En Route Safe Altitude (ESA), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), or Estimated Time En route (ETE). Cumulative Dist Between Current Position and Next Wpt DIST Between Legs DTK Between Legs Origin and Destination Waypoints Current Flight Plan Leg Figure 4-42 Flight Plan Data Fields 1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and then the Edit Data Fields key. Touch To Select Field Types Current Field Types Touch To Restore Original Default Types Figure 4-43 Flight Plan Edit Data Fields Page Index 4-30 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 30 7/9/2015 2:07:09 PM 2. Touch one of the eld keys to select from the list. Selected Field Type Figure 4-44 Flight Plan Data Fields List 3. Touch the Up or Down keys as needed, or touch and drag the list, to scroll through the list. Touch the desired Field Type to set it for the selected eld. 4. Continue as desired for the other elds. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-31 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 31 7/9/2015 2:07:09 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 4.3.5 Flight Plan Catalog Route Options The Flight Plan Catalog allows you to create, edit, activate, delete and copy ight plans. The catalog can hold up to 99 ight plans of up to 100 waypoints each. Flight plans are named by the Departure and Destination waypoint. Any time you activate a ight plan, a copy of the ight plan is automatically transferred to Active Flight Plan page and overwrites any previously active ight plan. 1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and then the Catalog key. The list of currently stored ight plans will be displayed. Flight Plan Catalog Total Flight Plan Name Flight Plan Comment Touch To Create New Catalog Route
(Flight Plan) Touch Up/
Down Keys To Scroll List Figure 4-45 Flight Plan Catalog 2. Touch a ight plan to display the Route Options. Selected Flight Plan Flight Plan Route Options Figure 4-46 Flight Plan Catalog Route Options Index 4-32 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 32 7/9/2015 2:07:09 PM 3. Touch the Route Option key for the desired option to act on the selected ight plan. 4.3.5.1 Catalog Route Option - Activate 1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired ight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be displayed. 2. Touch the Activate key and then touch OK. The selected ight plan will be activated. 4.3.5.2 Figure 4-47 Touch OK to Replace the Existing Active Flight Plan 3. The Active Flight Plan page will now be displayed. Catalog Route Option - Invert & Activate 1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired ight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be displayed. 2. Touch the Invert & Activate key and then touch OK. The selected ight plan will be inverted and activated. Figure 4-48 Touch OK to Invert and Activate the Selected Flight Plan Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-33 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 33 7/9/2015 2:07:10 PM 4.3.5.3 4.3.5.4 Catalog Route Option - Preview 1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired ight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be displayed. 2. Touch the Preview key. A map view of the ight plan and list of the waypoints will be displayed. 3. Touch the Back key to return to the Flight Plan Catalog. Catalog Route Option - Edit 1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired ight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be displayed. 2. Touch the Edit key. The ight plan will be displayed. Make any changes necessary by touching the desired waypoint and using the Waypoint Options. Selected Waypoint Waypoint Options List Figure 4-49 Use Waypoint Options to Edit the Selected Flight Plan 3. Touch the Back key to return to the Flight Plan Catalog. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-34 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 34 7/9/2015 2:07:10 PM 4.3.5.5 Catalog Route Option - Copy 1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired ight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be displayed. 2. Touch the Copy key. You will be prompted to copy the selected ight plan. Figure 4-50 Flight Plan Catalog Route Copy Option 3. A copy of the selected ight plan will now be listed. If any changes are required for the copy, it can be used as a starting point for a similar ight plan. Use the Edit Route option to make the desired changes. Duplicate Copy Of Selected Flight Plan Figure 4-51 Copied Flight Plan 4. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-35 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 35 7/9/2015 2:07:10 PM 4.3.5.6 Catalog Route Option - Delete 1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired ight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be displayed. 2. Touch the Delete key and then touch OK. Figure 4-52 Delete the Selected Flight Plan from the Catalog 3. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-36 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 36 7/9/2015 2:07:10 PM 4.3.6 Delete Flight Plan There are two methods for deleting a ight plan. Deleting the selected ight plan from the Catalog using the Route Options completely removes the ight plan. Deleting the Active Flight Plan using the Delete Flight Plan key on the Flight Plan menu clears the waypoints from the Active Flight Plan, but does not remove the ight plan from the Catalog. 4.3.6.1 Delete Flight Plan from Catalog 1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and then the View Catalog key. The list of currently stored ight plans will be displayed. Selected Flight Plan Touch Delete To Remove The Waypoint From The Catalog Figure 4-53 Select a Flight Plan from the Catalog 2. Touch the Delete and then the OK key. The selected ight plan will be removed from the Catalog. Figure 4-54 Delete a Flight Plan from the Catalog Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-37 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 37 7/9/2015 2:07:10 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 4.3.6.2 Delete Active Flight Plan 1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and then the Delete Flight Plan key. Figure 4-55 Delete a Flight Plan from the Active Flight Plan 2. Touch OK to clear the waypoints from the Active Flight Plan. The ight plan will not be removed from the Catalog. 4.3.7 Preview Flight Plan The Preview Flight Plan function provides a summary of a ight plan. A preview of the Active Flight Plan can be selected from the Flight Plan Menu's Preview Flight Plan key or selecting a ight plan from the catalog and choosing Preview from the Route Options menu. 4.3.7.1 Previewing the Active Flight Plan 1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and then the Preview key. A preview of the Active Flight Plan will be shown. Flight Plan Waypoint List Current Dest Waypoint Map View of Flight Plan Legs Current Aircraft Position On Current Leg of Active Flight Plan Figure 4-56 Active Flight Plan Preview Index 4-38 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 38 7/9/2015 2:07:11 PM 2. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan page. 4.3.7.2 Previewing a Flight Plan in the Catalog 1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and then the Catalog key. The list of currently stored ight plans will be displayed. 2. Touch the desired ight plan. The Route Options will now be displayed. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL 3. Touch the Preview key to display a preview of the selected Direct-To ight plan. 4. Touch the Back key to return to the Flight Plan Catalog. 4.4 Graphically Editing a Flight Plan The Active Flight Plan may be edited graphically on the Map page. See Section 9.3.3 for details. 4.5 Import Flight Plans with Connext When the GTN is interfaced with a compatible Flight Stream device, ight plans can be wirelessly imported into the GTN from supported Apps (i.e. Garmin Pilot). The imported ight plans can then be activated or stored to the ight plan catalog once they are previewed by the pilot. NOTE: Flight plans over 99 waypoints long are truncated at 99 waypoints and the last waypoint in the imported/uploaded ight plan may not be the destination airport. NOTE: Flight plan information and user waypoints included as part of a ight plan will not necessarily retain their names when the ight plan is transferred from the portable device to the GTN via a Flight Stream device. Whenever a User Waypoint is imported, it is compared to the existing User Waypoint catalog. If it matches locations with an existing User Waypoint, the waypoint will utilize the name saved in the GTN for that waypoint. If there is not a location match, the waypoint is imported but without the name label that the import software may have used. Therefore all new User Waypoints will come in as USR### where the number is the lowest open User Waypoint slot in the catalog. Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-39 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 39 7/9/2015 2:07:11 PM NOTE: This feature is available in software version 5.10 and later. 4.5.1 Operation On the portable device, select the option to send a ight plan to the GTN. The GTN MSG key will appear and begin to ash. 1. Pressing the MSG key will open the message page with a message showing how many ight plans are ready to preview. Touch To Preview Flight Plan Figure 4-57 Flight Plan Import Message 2. Touch the New FPL key to open the ight plan preview page when only one ight plan is imported, or the ight plan catalog when more than one ight plan is imported. Figure 4-58 Preview for Single Flight Plan Import Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-40 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 40 7/9/2015 2:07:11 PM Touch To Select The Desired Catalog Figure 4-59 Catalog for Multiple Flight Plan Import 3. Selecting a ight plan in the catalog that is "Pending Preview"
will slide out a menu to preview or delete the ight plan. Once the ight plan has been previewed and then stored or activated, the other Route Options in the menu will be available. Figure 4-60 Route Options by Selecting Flight Plan with Pending Review 4.5.2 Potential Errors If the GTN is unable to import a ight plan due to errors in the ight plan or a full catalog, the pilot will be alerted with a system message. Figure 4-61 Flight Plan Import Error Messages Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-41 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 41 7/9/2015 2:07:11 PM If an imported ight plan contains any errors, pop-up messages will be displayed alerting the pilot of the issues and the resulting changes to the ight plan. When the imported ight plan is too long, the GTN will truncate the ight plan to the correct length. The pilot should be aware that waypoints are missing from the end of the ight plan, including the destination waypoint. Figure 4-62 Pop-Up Message Reporting Flight Plan Errors When the imported ight plan contains waypoints (non-user waypoints), procedures, or airways that are not found in navigation database, the GTN will replace those waypoints with locked (lockd) waypoints. These locked waypoints must be resolved prior to activating the ight plan to provide navigation along the ight plan. When more than one error occurs during the ight plan import, the pilot will need to cycle through the errors by touching the Next key on the pop-up. Figure 4-63 Pop-Up Message Reporting Unknown Waypoints Figure 4-64 Pop-Up Message Reporting Unknown Procedure Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-42 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 42 7/9/2015 2:07:11 PM Figure 4-65 Pop-Up Message Reporting Unknown Airway Import Flight Plans with an SD Card 4.6 Flight plans can be created on a computer using compatible ight planning software and saved to the SD card to be imported into the GTN. The imported ight plans can then be activated or stored to the ight plan catalog once they are previewed by the pilot. NOTE: Flight plans over 99 waypoints long are truncated at 99 waypoints and the last waypoint in the imported/uploaded ight plan may not be the destination airport. NOTE: This feature is available in software version 5.10 and later. NOTE: The ight plan le format used by the GTN is different than the le format used by the GNS 400W/500W Series navigators. 1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key and then the Catalog key to display the Flight Plan Catalog. Flight Plan On SD Card Touch To Import Flight Plan Figure 4-66 Catalog for SD Card Flight Plan Import Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-43 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 43 7/9/2015 2:07:12 PM 2. An Import key will be present in the menu bar when ight plans are present on the SD card. Touch the Import key to open a pop-up with a list of the le names of the ight plans on the SD card. Touch To Import Flight Plan From SD Card Figure 4-67 Flight Plan To Import From SD Card 3. After selecting the desired ight plan to import, the GTN will attempt to import the ight plan and open the Route Options slide out menu. The imported ight plan must be previewed before being activated. Touch Preview to view the ight plan. Touch To Preview Flight Plan From SD Card Figure 4-68 Route Options For SD Card Flight Plan Import Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-44 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 44 7/9/2015 2:07:12 PM 4. Press Store to save the ight plan to the catalog. Press Activate to make the imported ight plan the active route. Touch To Store To Save Flight Plan To The Catalog Figure 4-69 Route Options For SD Card Flight Plan Import Potential Errors 4.6.1 Touch To Make The Imported Flight Plan The Active Route Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts If the GTN is unable to import a ight plan due to errors in the ight plan or Wpt Info a full catalog, the pilot will immediately be alerted with a pop-up. 1. Touch OK at the prompt to continue. Figure 4-70 Flight Plan Import Fault Figure 4-71 Flight Plan Import Fault - Catalog Full Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-45 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 45 7/9/2015 2:07:12 PM 2. If an imported flight plan contains any errors, pop-up messages will be displayed alerting the pilot of the issues and the resulting changes to the ight plan. These pop-ups are presented the rst time that the ight plan is viewed on the Flight Plan Preview page. When the imported ight plan is too long, the GTN will truncate the ight plan to the correct length. The pilot should be aware that waypoints are missing from the end of the ight plan. Figure 4-72 Flight Plan Import Issue - Flight Plan Too Long 3. When the imported ight plan contains waypoints (non-user waypoints), procedures, or airways that are not found in navigation database, the GTN will replace those waypoints with locked waypoints. These locked waypoints must be resolved prior to activating the ight plan. When more than one error occurs during the ight plan import, the pilot will need to cycle through the errors by touching the Next key on the pop-up. Figure 4-73 Flight Plan Import Issue - Flight Plan Contains Unknown Waypoints Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 4-46 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 46 7/9/2015 2:07:12 PM Figure 4-74 Flight Plan Import Issue - Unknown Procedure Removed From Flight Plan Figure 4-75 Flight Plan Import Issue - Unknown Airway Removed From Flight Plan Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 4-47 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 47 7/9/2015 2:07:12 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index 4-48 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 48 7/9/2015 2:07:12 PM 5 DIRECT-TO The GTN 7XX Direct-To function can quickly set a course to any waypoint. If the pilot selects Direct-To to a waypoint that is in the ight plan, waypoint sequencing in the ight plan will resume upon reaching that waypoint. If the pilot selects Direct-To for a waypoint that is not in the ight plan, the ight plan will no longer be active but remains available. There are some xes within procedures for which if a Direct-To is selected then the approach will not be active. For example, if you activate a Direct-To course to a waypoint between the FAF and the MAP and go Direct-To to that waypoint then approach guidance will not become active. 5.1 Direct-To Navigation 1. Press the Direct-To key on the right side of the unit. Figure 5-1 Direct-To Wpt Page 2. Select Waypoint, FPL, or NRST APT from the Direct-To window by touching the desired tab. 3. If a specic course is desired, touch the Course To key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 5-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:07:13 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System 4. Use the numeric keypad to select the course and then touch the Enter key. Selected Course Backspace Key Numeric Keypad Figure 5-2 Direct-To Course Selection 5. Touch the desired waypoint and touch the Activate key or press the small right knob. Waypoint Tab Waypoint Detail Touch To Select A Specic Course Touch To Activate Direct-To This Waypoint Messages Symbols Appendix Index 5-2 Figure 5-3 Direct-To Selection 6. The Map page will now be displayed with the new Direct-To course. Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:07:13 PM 5.2 Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint 1. Press the Direct-To key on the right side of the unit. 2. Touch the FPL tab at the top of the Direct-To window. Flight Plan Tab Flight Plan Waypoint List Touch Waypoint Key To Select Figure 5-4 Direct-To Flight Plan Leg Selection 3. Touch the ight plan waypoint you want to navigate directly to. The Direct-To Waypoint page will display information about the selected ight plan waypoint. Waypoint Tab Waypoint Detail Touch To Select A Specic Course Touch To Activate Direct-To This Waypoint Figure 5-5 Selected Direct-To Flight Plan Leg Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 5-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:07:13 PM 4. Touch the Activate key or press the small right knob to activate the selection. 5. The Map page will now be displayed with the new Direct-To course. Direct-To a Nearest Airport 1. Press the Direct-To key on the lower right side of the unit. 2. Touch the NRST APT tab at the top of the Direct-To window. The nearest 25 airports within 200 NM will be listed. The airport at the top of the list is the nearest airport. To review the other nearest airports, touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list. Nearest Tab Touch List And Drag Finger To Scroll List Nearest Airport List Figure 5-6 Direct-To Nearest Airport Selection Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl 5.3 Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 5-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:07:13 PM 3. Touch the desired airport to select it. The selected airport will be displayed in the Waypoint page. Direct-To Waypoint Activate Direct-To Course Figure 5-7 Selected Direct-To Nearest Airport 4. Touch the Activate key or press the small right knob to activate the selection. 5. The Map page will now be displayed with the new Direct-To course. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 5-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:07:14 PM 5.4 Removing a Direct-To Course When a Direct-To course is cancelled, the previously active ight plan will be reactivated and the nearest leg to the aircraft position will become the active leg. If there was no active ight plan, after cancelling the Direct-To course the aircraft will continue with the current heading. 1. Press the Direct-To key to display the Direct-To page. Waypoint Tab Direct-To Waypoint Touch To Remove
(Cancel) The Direct-To Course Figure 5-8 Cancel the Direct-To Course 2. Touch the Remove key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music 3. Navigation will now return to the active ight plan. Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 5-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:07:14 PM 5.5 Direct-To Map Waypoint A Direct-To course may be set to any waypoint selected on the Map page. The waypoint is selected by touching an item such as an airport, VOR, or NDB or any other location. Touching the map page at any place not having an existing location name will create a waypoint with the name MAPWPT. Touching the Direct-To key will automatically insert the selected waypoint as the Direct-To waypoint. The MAPWPT will be saved as a User Waypoint. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 1. On the Map page, touch the map at the location intended to FPL be the Direct-To waypoint. 2. Press the Direct-To key on the right side of the unit. Waypoint Tab Direct-To Waypoint Name Direct-To Waypoint Map Symbol Touch To Remove The Direct-To Course Touch To Activate The Direct-To Course Figure 5-9 Touch the Map to Create a MAPWPT as the Direct-To Course Destination Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music 3. Touch the Activate key or press the small right knob to Utilities activate the selection. System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 5-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:07:14 PM 5.6 Off-Route Direct-To Course An off-route Direct-To course may be selected by using the Waypoint tab, Nrst Apt tab, or selecting a waypoint on the map. When an off-route Direct-
To course is activated, the existing active ight plan will be deactivated. The original active ight plan and waypoint sequencing is reactivated when the Direct-To course is removed. Direct-To Waypoint Flight Plan Waypoint List Flight Plan Data Is Cleared Figure 5-10 Active Flight Data is Removed When a Direct-To Course is Activated 5.7 Graphically Editing a Direct-To Route Direct-To routes may be edited graphically on the Map page the same as a regular ight plan. See Section 9.3.3 for details. 5.8 Direct-To a User-Dened Hold NOTE: This feature is available in software version 6.00 and later. NOTE: Any time a user hold is changed with the Direct-To key, upon pressing the "Activate the Direct-To Hold" key, navigation guidance will be given back to the holding x and the new hold re-initiated. A user-dened hold can be created as part of a Direct-To to any waypoint. Automatic waypoint sequencing will be suspended during the hold. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 5-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:07:14 PM 1. Press the Direct-To key to display the Direct-To page. Waypoint Tab Direct-To Waypoint Name Touch To Select A Specic Course Touch To Create A Hold At Direct-To Wpt Figure 5-11 Create Hold at Direct-To Waypoint 2. Touch the Hold key. The Direct-To Hold page is displayed. Touch To Select A Specic Course Touch To Select Course Direction Touch To Select Turn Direction Touch To Select Leg Length Type Touch To Select Leg Length Time Touch To Select EFC Time Touch To Accept Hold Parameters Figure 5-12 Entering Direct-To Hold Parameters 3. Touch the Course key to open the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the inbound or outbound course. 4. Touch the Course Direction key to select between Inbound or Outbound for the course direction. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages 5. Touch the Turn key to select between Left or Right for the turn Symbols direction. 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 Appendix 5-9 Index 7/9/2015 2:07:14 PM 6. Touch the Leg Type key to select between Time or Distance for the leg type. 7. Touch the Leg Time or Leg Distance key to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the length of the leg. 8. Touch the Expect Further Clearance key to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the time for a reminder. 9. Touch the Load Hold key to accept the hold parameters and return to the Direct-To page. Specied Course To Direct-To Wpt Hold Pattern Course Touch To Activate The Direct-To Course And Hold Figure 5-13 Direct-To Page with Hold Selected 10. Touch the Hold Activate key or press the small right knob to activate the selection. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 5-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:07:15 PM 5.9 Direct-To a Search and Rescue Pattern NOTE: This feature is available in software version 6.00 and later. A search and rescue pattern can be created as part of a Direct-To for a ight plan, off-route, or map waypoint. Creating a SAR pattern as part of an an off-
route Direct-To will insert the SAR pattern waypoints at the end of the En Route portion of the active ight plan. 1. Press the Direct-To key to display the Direct-To page. Direct-To Wpt Touch To Select A Specic Course Touch To Create SAR Pattern At Direct-To Wpt Figure 5-14 Create SAR Pattern at Direct-To Waypoint 2. Touch the SAR key. The Direct-To Search and Rescue Patterns page is displayed. Selected Initial Wpt Touch To Select Desired SAR Pattern Touch To Select Initial Track Touch To Select Initial Turn Direction Touch To Select Leg Length Touch To Select Track Spacing Distance Touch To Select Number Of Legs Touch To Load Selected SAR Pattern to Direct-To Figure 5-15 Direct-To Search and Rescue Pattern Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 5-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:07:15 PM 3. Touch the SAR Pattern key to select between Parallel Track, Sector Search, Expanding Square, or Orbit for the SAR pattern type. The available patterns can be congured by the installer and all of the listed pattern types may not be available. See the Section 4.2.4 Load Search and Rescue Pattern for more details on conguring each pattern type. 4. Conrm the SAR pattern information and then touch the Load Pattern key to accept the SAR parameters and return to the Direct-To page. Direct-To Wpt Specied Course To Direct-To Wpt Selected SAR Pattern Type Touch To Activate Direct-To Course And SAR Pattern Figure 5-16 Direct-To Page with SAR Pattern Selected 5. Touch the SAR Activate key or press the small right knob to activate the selection. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 5-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:07:15 PM 6 PROCEDURES The GTN 7XX allows you to y non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures. All available approaches are stored on your Jeppesen NavData card, and are automatically updated when the cards les have been updated. Approach procedures are not the same as the approach plates available in ChartView, which is a separate database. Subscription information for NavData cards is included in your GTN 7XX package. The Procedures Page is displayed by touching the PROC key on the Home page. The Procedures Page provides access to approaches, departures and arrivals. Selections are also shown to: Activate Approach, Vectors to Final, and Activate Missed Approach. NOTE: The Chart feature provides a digital representation of a paper chart and provides no vertical or lateral course guidance. Flight Plan and Procedures are separate from Charts, and do provide vertical and lateral course guidance for the loaded route or procedure shown on the Flight Plan page. The term Chart Unavailable means that the chart cannot be viewed on the Charts due to either a chart not being published, or an error in the Chart database, but does not preclude its availability or inclusion of the procedure in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The absence of a chart for a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach does not preclude its availability or inclusion in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The absence of a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach under the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system does not preclude the ability to view the Chart for that procedure under the Chart feature. NOTE: Baro-corrected altitude is not required by the GTN unit to meet the requirements of TSO-C146c; however, to take full advantage of the GTN unit's capabilities, an optional baro-corrected altitude source is recommended for automatic sequencing of altitude leg types. If no baro-
corrected altitude data is provided to the GTN unit, altitude leg types must be manually sequenced. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:07:15 PM 6.1 Basic Approach Operations The GTN 7XX provides precision vertical guidance as well as lateral and advi-
sory vertical guidance using its built in GPS receiver for GPS or RNAV approaches. The moving map pages can also be used as an aid to situational awareness for ILS, VOR, and NDB approaches (and non-precision localizer-based approaches), but the appropriate radio navigational aid MUST be used for primary approach course guidance for non-GPS approaches. Approaches designed specically for GPS are often very simple and dont require overying a VOR or NDB. Currently, many non-precision approaches have GPS overlays to let you y an existing procedure (VOR, VOR/DME, NDB, etc.) more accurately using GPS. Many overlay approaches are more complex (in comparison to GPS-only approaches). The GTN 7XX displays and guides you through each leg of the approach automatically sequencing through each of these legs, up to the missed approach point (MAP). Approaches may be own as published with the full transition using any published feeder route or initial approach x (IAF) or may be own with a vectors-to-nal transition. Phase of ight annunciations are provided on the bottom of the display indi-
cating the current mode of ight. Procedures are arranged around the existing ight plan in the following order:
Departure, En Route, Arrival, and Approach. For example, Departure waypoints are inserted before the En Route waypoints in the ight plan and Arrival waypoints are inserted between the En Route waypoints and the approach waypoints. Always verify that the transition waypoints between each phase are correct. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 6-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:07:15 PM Departure Arrival Approach Airport Departure Runway Transition Preview Load Departure Airport Arrival Transition Runway Preview Load Arrival Airport Approach Transition Channel/ID Preview Load Approach Activate Approach Figure 6-1 Procedures Functional Diagram Annunciation Description LPV LP +V LP L/VNAV LNAV+V LNAV MAPR ENR TERM DPRT OCN LOW ALT
(lower window) Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance (LPV) approach. Fly to LPV minimums. Localizer Performance using published LP minima. Advisory vertical guidance is provided. Fly to LP minimums. Localizer Performance with no vertical guidance. Fly to LP minimums. Lateral Navigation and Vertical Navigation (LNAV/VNAV) approach. Fly to LNAV/VNAV minimums. GPS approach using published LNAV minima. Advisory vertical guidance is provided. Fly to LNAV minimums. Lateral Navigation approach. Fly to LNAV minimums. Missed Approach indicates the system is providing missed approach integrity and CDI full-scale deection 0.3 NM. En route, CDI full-scale deection is 2.0 NM or current CDI scale selection, whichever is smaller. Terminal, CDI full-scale deection is 1.0 NM or current CDI scale selection, whichever is smaller. Departure, indicates the system is using non-precision approach integrity. CDI full-scale deection is 0.3 NM. Oceanic, CDI full-scale deection is 2.0 NM. For LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, or LPV approaches, the LOW ALT annunciation indicates the aircrafts estimated height is lower than the Final Approach Waypoint height by approximately 50 meters. This annunciation will not be active when TAWS is operational. Table 6-1 Phase of Flight Annunciations Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:07:16 PM 6.2 Selecting a Departure A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the ight plan. Only one departure can be loaded at a time in a ight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active ight plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is dened by selection of a departure, the transition waypoint, and a runway. NOTE: Vector-only departures are not available in the Procedures database as the GTN 7XX cannot provide navigational guidance on vectored legs. 1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page and then touch the Departure key to display the Departure list. 2. If necessary, touch the Airport key and enter the departure airport. Touch the key for the desired Departure. Touch To Select Desired Departure Figure 6-2 List for Selecting a Departure Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 6-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:07:16 PM 3. Touch the key for the desired Transition. Touch To Select Desired Departure Transition Figure 6-3 Selecting a Transition for a Departure 4. Touch the key for the desired Runway, if necessary. The Departure page with preview will be displayed. Sequence List For The Selected Departure Touch To Select Departure Touch To Select Airport Touch To Select Transition Departure Diagram Touch To Select Runway Touch To Load Departure Touch To View Charts Figure 6-4 Departure Selected NOTE: If the selected runway is depicted as RW10B, for instance, this means both runways 10L and 10R. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:07:16 PM 5. Touch the Load Departure key. The Active Flight Plan page will be displayed. Touch To Change Or Remove Departure Touch To Edit Waypoint Scroll To View Flight Plan With Departure Waypoints Figure 6-5 Flight Plan After Loading a Departure 6. Remove a departure or select a new one by touching the Departure key and selecting the desired choice. Touch To Change A Departure Touch To Remove Departure Figure 6-6 Editing a Departure Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 6-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:07:16 PM 6.3 Selecting an Arrival A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport with a published arrival procedure. Only one arrival can be loaded at a time in a ight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active ight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is dened by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoint, and a runway. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl 1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page and then touch the Com/Nav Arrival key. Touch To Select Airport Touch To Show Arrival List Figure 6-7 Arrival Page 2. Conrm that the intended airport is shown or touch the Airport key and select the desired airport. Touch the key for the desired Arrival. Touch To Select Arrival Figure 6-8 Arrival List FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:07:16 PM 3. Touch the Transition key and then touch the key for the desired transition. Touch To Select Desired Arrival Transition Figure 6-9 Select Transition 4. Touch the key for the desired Runway, if necessary. NOTE: If the selected runway is depicted as RW10B, for instance, this means both runways 10L and 10R. 5. After selecting the runway, the Arrival page with map preview will be displayed. Sequence List For The Selected Arrival Touch To Select Arrival Touch To Select Airport Touch To Select Runway Arrival Diagram Touch To Select Transition Touch To Load Arrival Touch To View Charts Figure 6-10 Previewing an Arrival Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 6-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:07:17 PM 6. Touch the Load Arrival key. The Active Flight Plan page will be displayed. Touch To Select Or Remove Arrival Touch To Edit Waypoint Figure 6-11 Flight Plan With Arrival Loaded Scroll To View Flight Plan With Departure Waypoints Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:07:17 PM 6.4 Selecting an Approach Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a ight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach is already in the active ight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is dened by selection of an approach, the transition waypoint, and a runway. 1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page. The Approach, Arrival, and Departure elds will be dashed until a selection is made. Touch To View Available Departures Touch To View Available Arrivals Touch To View Available Approaches Figure 6-12 Procedures Selection Window 2. Touch the Approach key on the Procedures page to select an approach for the destination airport. Conrm that the intended airport is shown or touch the Airport key and select the desired airport. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 6-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:07:17 PM 3. Touch the Approach key on the Procedures-Approach page and then touch the key for the desired approach. Figure 6-13 Selecting an Approach 4. After selecting the approach for the destination airport, the approach options will be displayed. Sequence List For The Selected Transition Final Approach Fix Missed Approach Point Missed Approach Hold Point Current Dest Waypoint. Touch To Select Airport. Touch To Select Channel/ID Unselected Transition Selected Transition Approach Diagram Touch To Select Transition Touch To Activate Approach Touch To Select Approach Touch To Load Approach Figure 6-14 Selected Approach Options Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:07:17 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 5. Touch the Transition key and then touch the key for the desired transition. The selected Transition will be shown in white on the Procedure page Approach diagram. Unselected Transitions will be shown in grey. Touch To Select Transition Figure 6-15 Select Approach Transition 6. If desired, touch the Channel/ID key, then use the numeric keypad to select the channel number, and then touch the Enter key. The Channel and ID are typically loaded automatically if they are present. NOTE: As an alternate means of loading an approach, the Channel ID key allows you to select the channel ID for a SBAS approach for the current destination. The channel ID for the SBAS approach is available from an approved approach chart. If duplicate numbers are available for a channel, a list will be available where you may select the desired approach. 7. Touch the Load Approach key. The Active Flight Plan page will be displayed. The approach waypoints are placed at the end of the ight plan and the unit will automatically sequence to them after the en route waypoints. Approach Waypoints Figure 6-16 After Loading an Approach Index 6-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:07:18 PM NOTE: In software version 6.00 and later, if you build your ight plan with the destination airport at the end and then load an approach procedure, the destination airport will be removed from the end of the ight plan. If the leg to the destination airport is the active leg when loading an approach procedure, you will navigate all the way to the destination airport before joining the procedure. Be sure when LOADING and not ACTIVATING an approach procedure that the route to be own is correct. NOTE: In software version 5.13 and earlier, if you build your ight plan with the destination airport at the end and then load an approach procedure, you will navigate all the way to the destination airport before joining the procedure. Be sure when LOADING and not ACTIVATING an approach procedure that the route to be own is correct. 8. Touch the Load Approach & Activate key, which makes the active leg Direct-To the selected transition waypoint, or for Vector approaches to activate a leg that is an extended nal approach course. You can also activate the selected procedure on the Procedures page, if the approach is not activated on this page. Approach Waypoints Direct-To Waypoint Figure 6-17 After Activating the Approach NOTE: When re-activating an approach, the decision as to whether a hold is inserted at the IAF or not is assumed to be the same as the rst time the approach was activated, regardless of current aircraft position. If the pilot wishes to have the hold inserted or removed from the procedure, the procedure must be re-loaded or activated from the PROC-Approach page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:07:18 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 6.5 Approaches with Procedure Turns The procedure turn portion of an approach is stored as one of the legs of the approach. For this reason, the GTN 7XX unit requires no special operations from the pilot other than ying the procedure turn itself beyond what is required for any other type of approach. Roll steering is provided to aircraft with compatible autopilots. NOTE: The steering provided for the procedure turn does not guarantee that the aircraft will stay within charted procedure turn boundaries. As such the crew will need to ensure that the approach is own within the connes of the charted procedure. 6.6 Flying the Missed Approach Upon reaching the Missed Approach Point, the GTN 7XX unit continues to give guidance along an extension of the nal course segment (FAF to MAP) until you manually initiate the missed approach procedure (as mentioned previously in reference to the SUSP advisory). NOTE: If the unit is not congured for a CDI key, then the activate GPS missed approach will only resume automatic waypoint sequencing. The user must switch to GPS navigation, if desired, by using their external source selection method (this is typical an EFIS system). 1. When the MAP is reached, a pop-up will appear. Figure 6-18 Pop-Up Upon Reaching the MAP 2. Touch the Remain Suspended key to continue with sequencing suspended or touch Activate GPS Missed Approach for guidance to the Missed Approach Hold Point. The Activate GPS Missed Approach function is the same for the on screen controls or a remote switch. Activating the missed approach prior to the MAP can be accomplished on either the Flight Plan or Procedures pages. If using the Flight Plan page, the approach banner must be touched to display the Approach Options where Activate Missed Approach can be selected. Index 6-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:07:18 PM Touch the Approach Banner to Display the Approach Options Touch the Desired Option Figure 6-19 Approach Option Selection on the Flight Plan Page Touch the Approach Banner to Display the Approach Options Touch the Desired Option Figure 6-20 Approach Option Selection on the Procedures Page Once an option is selected, the GTN will continue to provide guidance along the nal approach course. Upon reaching the MAP, the unit will automatically sequence to the rst leg of the missed approach. This is used when a pilot needs to execute the missed approach prior to reaching the MAP. Flying an Approach with a Hold 6.7 Upon activating an RNAV GPS approach, you are given the option to skip any non-required holding patterns during the initial transitions of the approach. The Flight Plan Page displays a timer or distance, as appropriate, during the holding pattern. Use this timer or distance to y the outbound portion of the holding pattern. (The holding pattern is displayed on the Map Page and indicated as the active leg on the Active Flight Plan pages.) NOTE: If you need to lose extra altitude or speed by going around the holding pattern again, touch SUSP to manually suspend waypoint sequencing BEFORE crossing the holding waypoint the second time. If youve already passed this waypoint, re-activate the holding pattern. As you cross the MAP, a SUSP annunciation will appear, indicating that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP. A from indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV Page, but course guidance along the nal approach course continues. 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-15 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:07:18 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 6.8 Flying a DME Arc Approach Approaches that contain DME arcs are supported by the GTN. The GTN will provide guidance (left / right) relative to the arc. If you wish to activate the DME arc leg manually, the aircraft must be near the arc, as shown in the shaded area below. Figure 6-21 DME Arc Example 6.9 Radial-to-Fix (RF) Approaches RF legs associated with RNAV RNP 1.0 non-AR (Approval Required) approaches are supported by the GTN in version 6.00, or later, when approved by the installation. AC 90-101A denes RF leg as "a constant radius circular path, around a dened turn center, that starts and terminates at a x. An RF leg may be published as part of a procedure."
Flying the RF leg of an approach is similar to ying a DME arc approach. All GTN annunciations and indications are identical whether ying DME arcs or RF legs with the GTN. RF legs may have a larger or smaller radius than DME arcs. Unlike DME arcs, RF legs are not based on a VOR. Refer to the aircraft AFMS for specic details regarding RF legs for a specic aircraft. Index 6-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:07:19 PM 6.10 Vectors to Final With Vectors-To-Final (VTF) selected, the CDI needle remains off center until youre established on the nal approach course. With the approach activated, the Map Page displays an extension of the nal approach course in magenta (remember, magenta is used to depict the active leg of the ight plan) and vtf appears as part of the active leg on the Map page (as a reminder that the approach was activated with vectors-to-nal). Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav NOTE: In software version 5.13 and earlier, once VTF is activated all waypoints FPL in the approach prior to the FAF are removed. NOTE: In software version 6.00 and later, all waypoints along the nal approach course, including waypoints before the FAF, are included in the ight plan and the nal approach course to the FAF is activated. Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:07:19 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 6.11 ILS Approaches (GTN 750 Only) Precision ILS approaches can be performed with the built-in VLOC (VOR/
localizer/glideslope) receivers. The GPS receiver can be used for guidance prior to reaching the nal approach x, but once there, the proper frequency must be selected on the VLOC window (right side of screen) and the CDI output set to VLOC. 1.2NM 1.2NM 15NM GPS VLOC Auto S witch to VLO C within this area VLOC GPS 2NM MANUAL FAF The GTN 7XX can be set to automatically switch the external CDI output from GPS to VLOC as you intercept the nal approach course (if used with a KAP140/KFC225 autopilot, you will need to manually enable outputs. See instructions in the Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the King KAP140/
KFC225 section). When the ILS approach is activated and the correct ILS frequency is active in the VLOC window, the GTN 7XX automatically switches to VLOC within 1.2 NM left or right of the nal approach course. This switch can take place anywhere from 2.0 to 15.0 NM from the FAF. The illustration shows multiple locations along the approach path and the CDI selection that you can expect: GPS or VLOC. Within the area of the shaded box, the automatic switch from GPS to VLOC should occur. NOTE: If you attempt to intercept the approach course at a distance less than 2.0 NM from the FAF, the GTN 7XX does not automatically switch the CDI to VLOC. In this case, touch the CDI key to manually switch from GPS to VLOC. Index 6-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:07:19 PM The automatic switch from GPS to VLOC is not immediate, but instead occurs gradually to prevent abrupt CDI changes when coupled to an autopilot. The CDI selection can also be changed manually by touching the CDI key. 6.12 RNAV Approach Procedures The GTN 7XX allows for ying LNAV/VNAV, LNAV, LNAV +V, LPV, LP, and LP +V approaches according to the published chart. Phase of ight Annunciation L/VNAV LNAV LNAV + V LPV LP LP +V Description Minimums Lateral Navigation/Vertical Navigation. RNAV non-
precision approach with vertical guidance. Lateral Navigation. RNAV non-precision approach. Lateral Navigation with Advisory Vertical Guidance. RNAV non-precision LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance. The glidepath is typically denoted by a light dashed line on the vertical prole (Jeppeson only) with an associated glidepath angle (usually in the 3.00 degree range) and is provided to assist the pilot in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath, similar to an ILS glideslope. Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance
(LPV) approach. RNAV precision approach. LP indicates Localizer Performance with no vertical guidance. LP +V indicates Localizer Performance with advisory vertical guidance. This annunciation is available in software version 6.00 and later. This advisory guidance follows the same nature as set by the LNAV +V as shown above. Table 6-2 RNAV Approach Annunciations Published LNAV/
VNAV minimums. Published LNAV minimums. Published LNAV minimums. Published LPV minimums. Published LP minimums. Published LP minimums. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:07:19 PM 6.12.1 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 6-20 Flying the LPV Approach 1. Within 31 NM of the destination, the GTN switches from en route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 2.0 to 1.0 NM, full scale deection. 2. As you approach the IAF, a waypoint message appears on the bottom of the screen. 3. As the distance (DIST) to the IAF approaches zero, the message is replaced by a turn advisory that counts down 10 seconds prior to the turn. 4. As you approach the FAF, the GTN will begin to automatically rescale in an angular fashion. This will allow the LPV approach to be own in an identical fashion to a standard ILS. At 2.0 NM from the FAF, CDI scaling is tightened from 1.0 NM to the angular full scale deection (typically the angular full-scale deection is 2.0, but will be as dened for the approach). 5. Sixty seconds prior to reaching the FAF, the unit will check the required Horizontal Alarm Limit (HAL) and Vertical Alarm Limit
(VAL) to ensure the GPS position integrity is within limits to complete the LPV precision approach. In the event the HAL or VAL limits are exceeded, the approach will be downgraded to a non-precision approach indicated by LNAV on the moving map, a message that the approach is downgraded
(APPROACH DOWNGRADE - GPS approach downgraded. Use LNAV minima.), and the glideslope indicator will be agged. You may continue the approach using LNAV non-precision minimums if there are LNAV minimums for this approach. In the rare event the GPS integrity cannot meet the non-precision HAL limits, the unit will send a message to the pilot to abort the approach (ABORT APPROACH - GPS approach no longer available.). The unit will revert to terminal limits to support navigation to the missed approach when the message is acknowledged. After the aircraft has passed the FAF, a loss of WAAS integrity will cause the approach to abort instead of downgrade. 6. Capture the glideslope as you would an ILS glideslope. Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:07:19 PM 7. As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences to the MAP
(e.g. RW31, the runway threshold). With the needle on the external CDI (or HSI) centered, y toward the MAP, observing the altitude minimums published on the approach plate. 8. When viewing the Map Page, youll note that the nal course segment is displayed in magenta (the active leg of the ight plan always appears in magenta). 9. As you approach the MAP, a waypoint message appears on the bottom of the screen. 10. Once the unit crosses the MAP (dened as the runway end waypoint), sequencing will be suspended. Prepare the aircraft for missed approach operation. Touch the Unsuspend key to sequence to the Missed Approach procedure. 6.12.2 11. Fly the guidance provided by the unit to the MAHP and hold. Flying the LP Approach An LP approach is own similarly to an LNAV approach, except the precision is greater as it utilizes the SBAS accuracy. It has similar lateral accuracy as an LPV approach. Angular scaling is similar to a localizer approach. Most LP approaches have step down altitudes associated with them. The approach still results in an MDA and missed approach point. If the approach is indicated as LP +V, advisory vertical guidance will be provided. This does not change how the approach should be own, and the pilot is still responsible for descending to the correct altitude at each step down. The approach still results in an MDA and missed approach point. 1. Within 30 NM of the destination, the GTN switches from en route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions from 2.0 to 1.0 NM, full scale deection. 2. As you approach the IAF, a turn direction message appears on the bottom of the screen. 3. As the distance (DIST) to the IAF approaches zero, the message is replaced by a time to turn advisory that counts down 10 seconds prior to the turn. 4. As you approach the FAF, the GTN will begin to automatically rescale in an angular fashion. This will allow the LP approach to be own in the same fashion as a standard localizer approach. At 2.0 NM from the FAF, CDI scaling is tightened from up to either 2 or 0.3 NM, full scale deection, whichever is smaller. 6-21 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:07:19 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 5. Sixty seconds prior to reaching the FAF, the GTN will check the required Horizontal Alarm Limit (HAL) to ensure the GPS position integrity is within limits to complete the LP non-
precision approach. In the event the HAL limits are exceeded, the approach will be downgraded, when available, indicated by LNAV on the moving map, otherwise the approach will be aborted. A message will note that the approach is downgraded and the NAV indicator will be agged until the message is viewed. You may continue the approach using LNAV non-precision minimums if there are LNAV minimums for this approach. In the rare event the GPS HAL limits cannot meet non-precision limits, the GTN will notify the pilot with a message to abort the approach. The GTN will revert to terminal limits of 1.0 NM to support navigation to the missed approach. If the approach is indicating an LP +V, it is possible that the advisory vertical guidance could be removed without annunciation due to the vertical guidance not being within tolerances. This does not constitute a downgrade, and the approach can still be own to LP minimums. 6. As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences to the MAP. With the needle on the external CDI (or HSI) centered, y toward the MAP, observing the altitude minimums published on the approach plate. 7. When viewing the Map Page, youll note that the nal course segment is displayed in magenta (the active leg of the ight plan always appears in magenta). 8. As you approach the MAP, a waypoint message (Arriving at Waypoint) appears on the bottom of the screen. 9. At the MAP initiate the missed approach, if necessary. Once the GTN crosses the MAP, sequencing will be suspended. Prepare the aircraft for missed approach operation. Touch the Unsuspend key to sequence to the Missed Approach procedure. NOTE: For missed approaches with heading legs, y manually until the rst active course leg is reached. 10. Fly the guidance provided by the GTN to the MAHP and hold. Index 6-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:07:19 PM Points to Remember for All Procedures 6.13 The GTN 7XX Map page is designed to complement your approach plates and vastly improve situational awareness throughout the approach. However, you must always y an approach as it appears on the approach plate. The active leg (or the portion of the approach currently in use) is depicted in magenta on the Map Page. As you y the approach, the GTN 7XX automatically sequences through each leg of the approach unless SUSP appears at the annunciation bar at the bottom of the display. SUSP indicates that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended on the current leg and normally appears at holding patterns, upon crossing the missed approach point (MAP), for Climb to Altitude legs, and for Hold to Altitude legs. For roll steering autopilots: roll steering is terminated when approach mode is selected on the autopilot and is available once the missed approach is initiated. If Vectors-to-Final is activated while on the FROM side of the FAF, automatic waypoint sequencing is suspended and the SUSP annunciation will appear. Automatic waypoint sequencing will resume once the aircraft is on the TO side of the FAF and within full-scale deection. For all procedures, make sure to check the runway, transition, and all waypoints. CAUTION: Not all autopilots will follow guidance when on a heading leg using NAV, GPSS, or APR mode on the autopilot. Heading legs for procedures can be identied by HDG XXX in white on the Flight Plan page, as well as the procedure chart indicating that the aircraft must y a particular heading. Certain autopilots will revert to a Roll Only or Wings Level mode on these leg types and the pilot must engage the heading (HDG) mode of the autopilot and set the heading bug appropriately in order to use the autopilot on these legs. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:07:19 PM 6.14 Points to Remember for Localizer or VOR-based Approaches The default factory setting allows the CDI output to automatically switch from the GPS receiver to the LOC receiver. This may be changed to manual in some installations. If the ILS CDI Selection setting is changed to Manual, you must determine when to select GPS or VLOC guidance during the approach. Remember, VLOC is required for the nal course segment from the Final Approach Fix (FAF) to the MAP. NOTE: Installations with certain autopilots, such as the KAP 140 and KFC225, do not allow automatic ILS CDI switching. NOTE: GPS phase of ight annunciations (LPV, ENR, etc.) are not applicable to the external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active. If the CDI output has not automatically switched from GPS to ILS upon reaching the FAF, you must manually switch to the VLOC receiver by touching the CDI key. Verify that VLOC is displayed. Automatic switching of CDI output is available for ILS, localizer, SDF and LDA approaches. Automatic CDI switching is not available for backcourse approaches or VOR approaches. When ying an approach with the autopilot-coupled, you must monitor system functions at all times and verify that the autopilot and external CDI
(or HSI) switch to the VLOC receiver with sufcient time to capture and track the approach course. Switching to VLOC late in the approach may not provide the autopilot enough time to respond and intercept the approach course prior to the FAF (depending upon the performance characteristics of your autopilot and aircraft). When an ILS or VOR approach is rst selected or executed, the frequency is automatically checked. If the frequency is incorrect, you will receive a message and you must place the correct ILS or VLOC frequency in the active frequency eld. When ying a localizer-based approach (other than backcourse) with automatic CDI switching enabled:
Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 6-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:07:20 PM 1. GPS guidance may be used while ying outbound and on the initial portion of the procedure turn. 2. VLOC guidance is used on the remainder of the approach from the time you turn inbound on the procedure turn. 3. The localizer frequency must be active to use VLOC guidance at the MAP. When ying a localizer-based approach with automatic CDI switching disabled. 1. You may select VLOC guidance at any point on the approach prior to reaching the FAF. 2. The localizer frequency must be active to use VLOC guidance. 6.15 Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the King KAP140/KFC225 Autopilot outputs for the King KAP140/KFC225 autopilots are activated manually by the pilot after being prompted during the approach procedure. After enabling outputs, the GTN 7XX will provide guidance information consistent with what the autopilot expects (i.e., angular CDI scaling and glideslope capture for an LPV or other vertically guided GPS approach). Prompt To Activate Autopilot Outputs Touch To Activate Autopilot Outputs Figure 6-22 Prompt To Activate Autopilot Outputs Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 6-25 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:07:20 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index 6-26 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:07:20 PM 7 CHARTS NOTE: The availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic form may not preclude the requirement to carry paper charts aboard the aircraft. See the AFMS for more information. NOTE: The Chart feature provides a digital representation of a paper chart and provides no vertical or lateral course guidance. Flight Plan and Procedures are separate from Charts, and do provide vertical and lateral course guidance for the loaded route or procedure shown on the Flight Plan page. The term Chart Unavailable means that the chart cannot be viewed on the Charts due to either a chart not being published, or an error in the Chart database, but does not preclude its availability or inclusion of the procedure in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The absence of a chart for a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach does not preclude its availability or inclusion in the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system. The absence of a particular Departure, Arrival, or Approach under the Flight Plan or Procedures portion of the system does not preclude the ability to view the Chart for that procedure under the Chart feature. NOTE: Features that are selectable on the main map page, such as obstacles, airports, airspace, and other waypoint types that are not visible beneath the overlaid chart, remain selectable even when an approach chart is overlaid on the main map. NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the requirements of AC 20-159 and are not qualied to be used as an airport moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by the ight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations. The chart page will default to the nearest airport if no ight plan or destination airport is present. While you are on the ground, the displayed charts will default to the current airport location regardless of ight plan. The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be congured in the system, but not both. ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full color with high-resolution. The Map depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view of Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 7-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:07:20 PM approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
Arrivals (STAR) Departure Procedures (DP) An enablement card that is purchased from Garmin is separate from the Airport Diagrams NOTAMs Approaches Jeppesen database and is required to enable ChartView. NOTE: The chart for the destination airport or loaded approach will automatically be selected. NOTE: If two GTN 7XX units are crosslled, then the same type (ChartView or FlightCharts) and version (cycle number and effective dates) for the chart database must be installed on both units in order for the correct chart to be overlaid on the main map page. Airport Info Chart Detail Airport Info Menu Select Airport View Select Detailed Info Info APR DP Arrival View Airport Wpt Info Full Screen Invert Colors All Header Plan Prole Mins Figure 7-1 Charts Functional Diagram The following list describes the order in priority in which charts are auto-loaded in the system when the Chart page is displayed:
1. The most-recently selected chart during the current power cycle, if valid*, 2. The airport surface chart for the nearest airport, if on ground and nearest airport is found, 3. The approach chart for the approach in the active ight plan, if approach exists in the ight plan, 4. The airport surface chart for the last airport in the ight plan, if one exists, Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 7-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:07:20 PM 5. The airport surface chart for the nearest airport, if nearest airport is found
(same as #2 but aircraft could be in-air), 6. The airport surface chart for the rst airport in the database, if found, 7. No chart.
* Selected does not include charts that were auto-selected. A selection must be made while on the charts page. The following actions will invalidate #1:
Changing the approach in the active ight plan Changing the on-ground status while not viewing the Charts page 7.1 Chart Page 1. From the Home page, touch the Charts key. Touch to Select Airport Touch to Select Airport Info Chart Touch to View The Airport Information Chart Touch to View Airport Approach, Departure,
& Arrival Charts Touch to View Airport Wpt Info Touch To Change Chart Scale Touch For Full Display View Of Chart 2. Various controls allow viewing of more available detail. Figure 7-2 Charts Function Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 7-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:07:20 PM 7.1.1 Airport Selection 1. Touch the Airport selection key to select another airport. 2. Select the desired airport identier with the keypad and touch Enter. Selected Airport Touch to Select Airport Figure 7-3 Airport Identier Selection Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 7-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:07:21 PM 7.1.2 Info 1. Touch the Info key to select the specic information chart. Touch To View Selected Airport Info 2. Touch an item from the list to view the chart. Figure 7-4 Airport Info Selection Selected Airport Touch To View Selected Airport Info List Detailed View Of Selected Airport Info Figure 7-5 Airport Info Selection Detail 7.1.3 Information 1. Touch the Information key. 2. View the available airport information charts. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 7-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:07:21 PM 7.1.4 Approaches 1. Touch the Approaches key to view available approaches. Selected Airport Touch To View Approach List Touch To View Approach Charts Detailed View Of Selected Approach Figure 7-6 Approach Detail 2. Touch the Approach key to select an approach chart. Touch To View Approach Chart 3. Touch the desired approach to view detailed information. Figure 7-7 Approach List Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 7-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:07:21 PM 7.1.5 Departures 1. Touch the Departures key to view available departures. Selected Airport Touch To View Departure List Detailed View Of Selected Departure Figure 7-8 Departure Detail 2. Touch the Departure key to change the selected Departure chart. Touch To View The Departure Chart 3. Touch the desired departure to view detailed information. Figure 7-9 Departure List Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 7-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:07:21 PM 7.1.6 Arrivals 1. Touch the Arrivals key to view available arrivals. Selected Airport Detailed View Of Selected Arrival Touch To View Arrival Chart List Touch To View Arrival Charts Figure 7-10 Arrival Detail 2. Touch the Arrival key to change the selected Arrival chart. Touch To View Selected Arrival Info Figure 7-11 Arrival List 3. Touch the desired arrival to view detailed information. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 7-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:07:22 PM 7.1.7 Airport Info 1. Touch the Airport Info key to view the Waypoint Info for the selected airport. Selected Airport Info Touch Tabs To View More Details Touch To Return To Charts Page Figure 7-12 Selected Airport Detail 2. Touch the Back key to return to the Charts page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 7-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:07:22 PM 7.1.8 Full/Split Screen 1. Touch the Full key to display a full screen view of the current chart page. Full Chart Page View Touch To Return To Split Chart Page View Figure 7-13 Full View of Chart Page 2. Touch the Split key to display a view of the current chart page split between the chart detail and chart page controls. Split Chart Page View Touch To Display Full Chart Page View Figure 7-14 Split View of Chart Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 7-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:07:22 PM 7.2 Chart Menu Options 1. From the Charts page, touch the Menu key. Touch To Select Chart Layer Touch To Display Normal Or Inverted Chart Colors Figure 7-15 Chart Options 2. Touch the Chart Information key to select a Chart Layer. Chart Layers are only available with ChartView. Current Selected Chart Layer Touch To Select Chart Layer Figure 7-16 Select From Chart Layer List 3. Touch the desired selection to display the selected Chart Layer. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 7-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:07:22 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 7.2.1 7.2.2 Chart Layers - All Touch the All key to view the composite of layers available for the selected chart. Chart Layers - Header Touch the Header selection from the Chart Layer list to view the header information for the selected approach chart. Selected Airport Detailed View Of Selected Header Selected Approach Touch Menu To Select Layers 7.2.3 Figure 7-17 Header View of Chart for the Selected Approach Chart Layers - Plan Touch the Plan selection from the Chart Layer list to view the Plan View for the selected approach chart. Selected Airport Detailed Plan View Of Selected Approach Selected Approach Figure 7-18 Plan View of Chart for the Selected Approach Index 7-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:07:22 PM 7.2.4 Chart Layers - Prole Touch the Prole selection from the Chart Layer list to view the vertical prole of the selected approach. Selected Airport Detailed View Of Selected Prole Selected Approach Touch To Display Chart Info Options 7.2.5 Figure 7-19 Prole View of Chart for the Selected Approach Chart Layers - Minimums Touch the Minimums selection from the Chart Layer list to view the minimums for the selected approach. Selected Airport Detailed View Of Selected Minimums Selected Approach Touch To Display Minimums Figure 7-20 Minimums View of Chart for the Selected Approach Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 7-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:07:23 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 7.2.6 Invert Colors While viewing the Charts Menu, touch the Invert Colors key to show an inverted color view of the display that enhances low light viewing. Inverted Color Chart Page View Touch For Inverted Color Chart Page View Figure 7-21 Inverted Chart Colors View 7.2.7 Geo-Referenced Aircraft Position The geo-referenced aircraft position is placed on the chart when a position is established. On the Map page, the chart and geo-referenced position are shown when the aircraft is in the air (such as, speed is greater than 30 knots). When a chart is viewed on the Map page, areas of the chart that do not support geo-
referencing, such as expanded details and text blocks, are removed. Typically, SIDs and STARs are not geo-referenced and thus will not typically display the ownship symbol on those charts. Geo-Referenced Aircraft Position Figure 7-22 Areas of Chart Info Removed For Map Overlay and Geo-Reference Index 7-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:07:23 PM NOTE: The entire ownship symbol must be able to t within the displayed chart area before it will be drawn. 7.3 ChartView Cycle Number and Revision The ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no longer available for viewing upon reaching the disable date. When turning on the GTN unit, the Power-up Page indicates the criteria for ChartView availability. An enablement card that is purchased from Garmin is separate from the Jeppesen database and is required to enable ChartView. Jeppeson does not provide the Effective date. ChartView Cycle ChartView Expiration Date Info Not Provided ChartView Will Be Disabled On This Date Figure 7-23 System Status Database Information for ChartView The database CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView database appear in either white or yellow text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing. The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Jeppesen Databases in Appendix A for instructions on revising the ChartView database. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 7-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:07:23 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts 7.4 FliteCharts FliteCharts resemble the paper version of National Aeronautical Charting Ofce
(NACO) terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. Garmin FliteCharts is an electronic version of the National Aeronautical Navigation Services Charts (AeroNav Services), which was formerly NACO. FliteCharts lets pilots quickly nd and view all AeroNav Services Departure Procedures (DP), Standard Terminal Arrival Routes (STARs), approach charts, and airport diagrams. If the current approach is known, the GTN 7XX automatically selects the correct chart based on the ight plan. Pilots will have access to all approach plates currently published by AeroNav, which encompasses over 15,000 charts and over 2,900 airports in the U.S. FliteCharts updates are available from Garmin every 28 days, and the new geo-referenced capability will be included with the regular updates. FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data Wpt Info includes:
Arrivals (STAR) Departure Procedures (DP) Approaches Airport Diagrams Map Trafc Terrain 7.4.1 FliteCharts Cycle Number and Revision FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the GTN 7XX, the Power-up page indicates the criteria for chart availability. These indications are whether the databases are not congured, not available, current, out of date, or disabled. FliteCharts Cycle FliteCharts Expiration Date Date FliteCharts Is Effective FliteCharts Will Be Disabled On This Date Figure 7-24 System Status Database Information for FliteCharts Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 7-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:07:23 PM 7.5 SafeTaxi SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when zooming in on airports. The airport display on the map reveals runways with numbers, taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges (zooming in). When the aircraft location is within the screen boundary, including within SafeTaxi ranges, an airplane symbol is shown on any of the navigation map views for enhanced position awareness. NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the requirements of AC 20-159 and are not qualied to be used as an airport moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by the ight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations. Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are dened with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion. Taxiway Detail Taxiway Identication Aircraft Position Figure 7-25 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 7-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:07:23 PM 7.5.1 Using SafeTaxi Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum congured range. Charts and SafeTaxi are mutually exclusive. So, to view SafeTaxi and Hot Spots, the Charts feature must be turned off. Charts are displayed when the aircraft is in the air, but when on the ground, charts are removed and SafeTaxi will be shown automatically. During ground operations the aircrafts position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport features. The nose of the ownship symbol, not the center, depicts the current location of the aircraft. 7.5.2 Hot Spot Information Hot Spot locations are identied by a magenta circle or outline. Hot Spot Location Aircraft Location Hot Spot Location Figure 7-26 SafeTaxi Hot Spot Depiction Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 7-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:07:24 PM 7.5.3 SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision The SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date. When turning on the GTN 7XX, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available. The Power-up Page shows the SafeTaxi database is current when the SafeTaxi Expires date is shown in white. When the SafeTaxi cycle has expired, the SafeTaxi Expires date appears in yellow. The message unknown appears in white if no SafeTaxi data is available on the database card. The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found on the System - System Status page. SafeTaxi information appears in white and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in white when data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in white when data is current and in yellow when expired. SafeTaxi REGION NOT AVAILABLE appears in white if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 7-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:07:24 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index 7-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:07:24 PM 8 WAYPOINT INFO The Waypoint Info function allows you to view information about the selected waypoint. The Waypoint Info page can be reached from the Home page, selected from a ight plan, or selected from the Nearest page. Touch Key to Display Waypoint Type Figure 8-1 Waypoint Info Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:07:24 PM d a R
-
t p W f e R t s i D i
/
l a d a R l i a d a R
/
l a d a R i s i D
-
d a R
-
t p W f e R
?
y r a r o p m e T e t a e r C t r o p m I t p W r e s U n o L
/
t a L t n e m m o C w e i v e r P e m a N n o L
/
t a L e p y T n o i t i s o P l l e m a N A w e V i e t e e D l t i d E B D N t c e e S l w e i v e r P R O V t c e e S l y c n e u q e r F w e i v e r P T N I t c e e S l w e i v e r P s e r u d e c o r P s y a w n u R w e i v e r P o f n I y a w n u R L C P s e i c n e u q e r F a t a D x W t s a c e r o F s r a t e M F A T s M A T O N Figure 8-2 Waypoint Info Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 8-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:07:24 PM 8.1 Waypoint Selection 1. Touch the Waypoint Info key and then touch the desired waypoint type (Airport, INT, VOR, etc). 2. Touch the waypoint identier. 3. The waypoint identier selection page will be shown and the waypoint identier eld will be active for selection. Touch the required keys on the alphanumeric keypad to select the desired waypoint identier and then touch the Enter key. Airport Identier Find Key Displays Waypoint Search Touch To Cancel Selection And Return To Previous Page Backspace Key Clears Wpt Ident Cursor Movement Keys Alphanumeric Keypad Touch Enter After Selecting Ident Figure 8-3 Waypoint Ident Selection 4. The information page for the selected waypoint will be displayed. Figure 8-4 Waypoint Ident Selection Result Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:07:25 PM 8.2 Airport The Airport page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety of detailed information about the airport. 8.2.1 Info The upper part of the page shows the airport identier and type, name, city and region, the lat/lon coordinates of the airport, and the bearing (and direction arrow) and distance to the airport from your present position. The center area shows the airport elevation, fuel availability, and time zone. 1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the Airport key. Distance & Bearing To Airport From Current Position Airport Identier, City,
& Type Airport Lat/Lon Waypoint Info Page Tab Airport Information Touch To View Airport Charts Figure 8-5 Waypoint Info Airport Page 2. Touch the View Charts key to display available charts for the airport. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 8-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:07:25 PM 8.2.2 Preview The Waypoint Info Airport Preview page provides detailed information about the selected airport. 1. Touch the Preview tab to view a map of the airport and surrounding area. 2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the Preview map. Distance & Bearing To Airport From Current Position Airport Identier, City,
& Airport Type Airport Area Map Waypoint Preview Page Tab Touch & Move Finger While Pressing To Pan Map Airport Lat/Lon Touch To Zoom Figure 8-6 Waypoint Info Airport Map Page 3. You may touch the map window and while pressing the display drag your nger to move the map view. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:07:25 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 8.2.3 Procedures 1. Touch the Procedures page tab to view details about procedures for the selected airport. Distance & Bearing To Airport From Current Position Airport Identier, City,
& Airport Type Procedures Page Tab Airport Lat/Lon Approach Name & Type Touch To Scroll Figure 8-7 Waypoint Info Airport Procedures Page 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional procedures, as needed. 3. Touch one of the procedure keys to select it for the Procedures function. Distance & Bearing To Airport From Current Position Airport Identier, City,
& Airport Type Procedures Page Tab Airport Lat/Lon Arrival Name Touch To Scroll Figure 8-8 Waypoint Info Airport Arrival Information Index 8-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:07:25 PM 8.2.4 Runways Airport Identier, City,
& Airport Type Distance & Bearing To Airport From Current Position Runway Number. Touch For Detail Airport Runways Page Tab Runway Dimensions Surface Type Pilot-
Controlled Lighting Freq. Touch To Place In Standby. Airport Lat/Lon Runway Detail Trafc Pattern Info Figure 8-9 Waypoint Info Airport Runway Information Page 1. Touch the Runways tab to view information about the available runways for the selected airport. The runway identiers, surface type, lighting with Pilot Controlled Lighting
(PCL) frequency, runway size, and Trafc Pattern direction are shown. 2. Touch the PCL key to load the PCL frequency into the Com Standby location. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:07:25 PM 8.2.5 Frequencies 1. Touch the Frequencies tab to view details about available frequencies for the selected airport. 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional frequencies, as needed. A "c" symbol in a white circle will appear next to frequencies that also function as the Common Trafc Advisory Frequency (CTAF). Distance & Bearing To Airport From Current Position Airport Identier, City,
& Airport Type Frequency Name Airport Lat/Lon Airport Frequencies Page Tab
"c" Indicates CTAF Touch Frequency Key To Load Into Com Standby Touch To Scroll Figure 8-10 Waypoint Info Airport Frequency List Page 3. Touch the Frequency key next to the frequency name to load it as the Com or Nav standby frequency, depending on frequency type. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 8-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:07:26 PM 8.2.6 Weather (WX) Data 1. Touch the WX Data tab next to the center window to view textual METARs, City Forecast, and TAF weather information available for the selected airport. Distance & Bearing To Airport From Current Position Airport Identier, City,
& Airport Type Airport Lat/Lon Airport Weather Page Tab Weather Information Figure 8-11 Waypoint Info Airport Weather Page 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the Weather page information. Distance & Bearing To Airport From Current Position Airport Identier, City,
& Airport Type Airport Lat/Lon Airport Weather Page Tab Weather Forecast Information Touch To Change Pages Figure 8-12 Waypoint Info Airport Weather Forecast Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:07:26 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 8.2.7 NOTAM Pages 1. Touch the NOTAMs tab next to the center window to view any NOTAMs available for the selected airport. This feature is supported with ChartView and FIS-B through the GDL 88. Figure 8-13 Waypoint Info Airport NOTAMs Page 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional information, as needed. 8.2.8 Helipads 1. Touch the Helipad tab next to the center window to view any information available for the selected helipad. Helipad information may not be complete or consistent due to the data available from the 3rd party sources. Distance & Bearing To Helipad From Current Position Helipad Identier, City,
& Type Helipad Info Page Tab Figure 8-14 Helipad Waypoint Info Helipad Lat/Lon Helipad Information Index 8-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:07:26 PM 8.3 Intersection (INT) The Intersection page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety of detailed information about the intersection. The top left area of the page displays the Intersection identier and region. The top center area shows the lat/lon coordinates of the Intersection and the bearing (with direction arrow) and distance to the Intersection from your present position. Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identier key, entering the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad, and then touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by touching the Find key and then choosing from the existing list of waypoints by touching the desired waypoint from the list. The center area of the page shows a map with the Intersection in the center. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc 1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the Intersection Charts key. Distance & Bearing To Intersection From Current Position Intersection Identier Intersection Area Map Touch & Move Finger While Pressing To Pan Map Intersection Lat/Lon Nearest VOR Information Intersection Symbol &
Identier Touch To Zoom Figure 8-15 Waypoint Info - Intersections 2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the map. You may touch the map window and while lightly pressing the display, drag your nger to move the map view. Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:07:26 PM
1 2 | Users Manual 2 | Users Manual | 4.52 MiB | / January 01 2016 |
8.4 VOR The VOR page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety of detailed information about the VOR. The top left area of the page displays the VOR identier, name, city and state, and region. The top center area shows the lat/lon coordinates of the VOR and the bearing (with direction arrow) and distance to the VOR from your present position. The top right area shows the frequency in a key. Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identier key, entering the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad, and then touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by touching the Find key and then choosing from the existing list of waypoints by touching the desired waypoint from the list. The center area of the page shows a map with the VOR in the center. 1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the VOR key. Distance & Bearing To VOR From Current Position VOR Frequency - Touch To Insert Into Nav Standby VOR Identier, Symbol, & Name VOR Location
& Region VOR Class VOR Area Map Touch & Move Finger While Pressing To Pan Map VOR Lat/Lon Nearest Airport Information Magnetic Variation VOR Symbol
& Identier Map Scale Touch To Zoom Figure 8-16 Waypoint Info - VORs 2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the map. You may touch the map window and while lightly pressing the display, drag your nger to move the map view. 3. Touch the Frequency key next to load it as the Nav standby frequency. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 8-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:07:27 PM 8.5 NDB The NDB page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety of detailed information about the NDB. The top left area of the page displays the NDB identier, name, city and state, and region. The top center area shows the lat/lon coordinates of the NDB and the bearing (with direction arrow) and distance to the NDB from your present position. The top right area shows the frequency in a key. Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identier key, entering the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad, and then touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by touching the Find key and then choosing from the existing list of waypoints by touching the desired waypoint from the list. The center area of the page shows a map with the NDB in the center. 1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the NDB key. Distance & Bearing To NDB From Current Position NDB Frequency NDB Identier, Symbol, & Name NDB Location
& Region Marker Description NDB Area Map Touch & Move Finger While Pressing To Pan Map NDB Lat/Lon Nearest Airport Information NDB Symbol
& Identier Map Scale Touch To Zoom Figure 8-17 Waypoint Info for NDBs 2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the map. You may touch the map window and while lightly pressing the display, drag your nger to move the map view. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:07:27 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts 8.6 User Waypoints (User) In addition to the airport, VOR, NDB and intersection information contained in your Jeppesen NavData card, the GTN 7XX allows you to store up to 1,000 user-dened waypoints. The User Waypoint Page displays the waypoint name
(up to six characters long), identier and radial from two reference waypoints, distance from one reference waypoint, along with the user waypoints lat/lon position. The following descriptions and abbreviations appear on the User Waypoint Page:
Ref Wpt Reference waypoint identier (name) Radial Radial from reference waypoint, in degrees magnetic or degrees true (depending upon unit conguration) Distance Distance from reference waypoint, in nautical miles/statute miles/kilometers (depending upon unit conguration) Wpt Info Lat/Lon Latitude/Longitude (degrees/minutes) Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Distance & Bearing To Wpt From Current Position Identier, Symbol,
& References Wpts Used View All Wpts Edit Wpt Area Map Touch & Move Finger While Pressing To Pan Map Reference Wpt Delete Wpt Wpt Symbol
& Identier Map Scale Touch To Zoom Figure 8-18 Waypoint Info for a User Waypoint Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identier key, entering the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad, and then touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by touching the View All key and then choosing from the existing list of User waypoints by touching the desired waypoint from the list. Index 8-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:07:27 PM 8.6.1 Select User Waypoint By Name 1. While viewing the User Waypoint page, touch the User Waypoint Name. 2. Use the keypad to select the characters for the name and then touch Enter. 8.6.2 Select User Waypoint From A List 1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the User Waypoint key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL 2. Touch the View All key and then use the Up and Down keys Direct-To to view the waypoints on the list. User Waypoint List Name User Waypoint Type User Waypoint List 8.6.3 8.6.4 Figure 8-19 Waypoint Info User Waypoint List Edit User Waypoint 1. Select the desired User Waypoint and touch the Edit key. 2. Touch the key for the desired information and make changes as needed. Delete User Waypoint 1. Select the desired User Waypoint and touch the Delete key. 2. Touch the OK key to conrm deleting the selected waypoint. Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:07:27 PM Map Area Around Waypoint Temporary Waypoint Touch to Finalize Waypoint Creation Touch To Zoom 8.7 Create Waypoint User waypoints are created from the Create User Waypoint page. To create a new user waypoint, simply enter its name (identier) and position, or reference another waypoint by radial and distance. Direct-To Waypoint Type Waypoint Name Waypoint Comment Touch To Setup Ref Wpt 1 Touch To Setup Ref Wpt 2 Touch to Cancel Waypoint Creation Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Figure 8-20 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint 1. From the Waypoint Info page, touch the Create Waypoint key. 2. Touch the User Identier key. 3. Use the alphanumeric keypad to make the waypoint name (up to six characters) and then touch the Enter key. User Waypoint Name Alphanumeric Keypad Touch To Cancel Creating Name Backspace Key Clears Wpt Name Cursor Movement Keys Touch Enter After Creating Name Figure 8-21 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Name Index 8-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:07:27 PM 4. Touch the Comment key to add a short comment for the new waypoint. 5. Touch the Position Type key and then Lat/Lon, Radial/Radial, or Radial/Distance to assign the type. See the following instructions for more detail. Touch to Select the Desired Waypoint Position Type Figure 8-22 Waypoint Info - Create User Position Type 6. If desired, touch the Temporary? key to create the waypoint for only temporary use. Temporary waypoints will be removed when the power is cycled. 7. When nished with all selections, touch the Create key to create the new waypoint. 8.7.1 Mark On Target If an external Mark On Target (MOT) switch is installed, pressing that switch will result in the creation of a User waypoint called MOTxxx at the point in space where the MOT switch was pushed. The waypoints are created in increasing numeric order up to number 999, at which point they will start replacing existing waypoints at the beginning of the list. When a Mark on Target waypoint is created, it may not be immediately visible on the moving map page because the ownship icon will be directly on top of the waypoint. Creation of the waypoint can be veried by changing zoom scales on the map or viewing the User Waypoints page. NOTE: This feature is available in software version 4.00 and later. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:07:28 PM 8.7.2 Waypoint Location Based on Lat/Lon Coordinates 1. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Position Type key and then the Lat/Lon key. Then, touch the Latitude/
Longitude value key. Touch to Select Lat/Lon Waypoint Reference Type Figure 8-23 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Type - Lat/Lon 2. The Lat/Lon coordinate values will be highlighted. Touch the Lat or Lon key to toggle selection of the hemisphere values and highlight the selected value. When The Lat Key Is Touched, The Latitude Hemisphere Value Is Active For Selection Touch to Select Hemisphere Value Touch To Toggle Lat/Lon Touch to Select Numeric Values Figure 8-24 Lat/Lon Coordinate Selection 3. Touch the desired hemisphere keys to select the desired values. After selecting the hemisphere value, the cursor will advance to the rst character of the adjacent numeric value for selection. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 8-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:07:28 PM Even when the hemisphere values are highlighted, touching the numeric keys will always place the cursor at the rst numeric value. The Large knob may also be used for cursor movement and characters are selected with the Small knob. NOTE: When editing values, turn the Large knob counter-clockwise to backspace or move the cursor to the left. 8.7.3 4. As each value is selected, the cursor will advance to the next character. Touch the necessary key for the desired values. 5. When nished with the Lat/Lon selections, touch the Enter key. 6. When nished with all selections, touch the Create key to create the new waypoint. Waypoint Location Based on Two Radials 1. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Position Type key and then the Radial/Radial key. Touch to Select Radial/Radial Waypoint Reference Type Figure 8-25 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Type - Radial/Radial 2. Touch the Ref Wpt key and use the alphanumeric keypad to select the desired identier. 3. Touch the upper Radial key and use the alphanumeric keypad to select the desired value. 4. Touch the Enter key. 5. When nished with all selections, touch the Create key to create the new waypoint. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:07:28 PM 8.7.4 Waypoint Location Based on Radial and Distance 1. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Position Type key and then the Radial/Distance key. Touch to Select Radial/Distance Waypoint Reference Type Figure 8-26 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Type - Radial/Distance 2. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Ref Wpt key and use the alphanumeric keypad to select the desired identier. 3. Touch the upper Radial key and use the alphanumeric keypad to select the desired value. 4. Touch the upper Distance key and use the alphanumeric keypad to select the desired value. 5. Touch the Enter key. 6. Touch the Create key to save the new waypoint. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 8-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:07:29 PM 8.8 Import User Waypoints (SD Card) The GTN can import user generated waypoints from a le on the SD card. The created waypoints will be at the latitude and longitude specied in the le with the specied name and comment. NOTE: This feature is available in software version 5.10 and later. When a user waypoint le is on the SD card, a key will be available on the Waypoint Info page for importing user waypoints. 1. Insert an SD card with the User waypoints into the the GTN. 2. From the Waypoint Info page, touch the Import Waypoints Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To key. 3. Touch OK to acknowledge the pop-up to import all of the user Proc waypoints in the le. Figure 8-27 Start User Waypoint Import Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 8-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:07:29 PM 4. The pilot is informed of the status of the user waypoint import via one of the following system messages. Message Description USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User waypoints were imported successfully. USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User waypoint import failed. USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User waypoint import failed. User waypoint database is full. USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User waypoints imported successfully -
existing waypoints reused. All user waypoints were imported successfully. User waypoint import failed due to improper le format. User waypoint catalog is full and the requested user waypoints could not be imported. User waypoints imported and existing waypoints are used instead of creating duplicate waypoints. This occurs when a waypoint to be imported is within 0.001 latitude and longitude of an existing user waypoint (roughly a few hundred feet, depending on latitude). Table 8-1 User Waypoint Import Messages Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 8-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:07:29 PM 9 MAP The Map page is used to provide situational awareness in ight. The Map page can display the following information:
Airports, NAVAIDs, airspace, airways, land data (highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with names Wind direction and speed Icons for enabled map features Aircraft
(with icon the nose representing present position) Nav range ring Flight plan legs North Indicator Map Orientation Nav Range Ring From - To - Next Waypoints Touch To Edit FPL Back to Previous Page Touch to View Messages Map Menu Options CDI - Select Nav Source OBS - Select Manual or Auto Sequencing Topography scale Topography data NEXRAD (or Precip) Weather (Opt.) ChartView or FliteChart Overlay Terrain Overlay Trafc Overlay Radar Overlay Fuel Range Ring (SW V 6.00 or later) Active Flight Plan Leg Aircraft Symbol
(Present Position) CDI Range Keys Touch to Zoom In and Out Figure 9-1 Map Page Description The following information describes the ownship symbol behavior in a helicopter that does not have a source of magnetic heading information connected to the GTN. When greater than 15 knots groundspeed the map is oriented either north up with ownship oriented to its current track or track up. When less than Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:07:29 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 15 kts groundspeed, the directional ownship icon is replaced with a non-directional icon because it can't be determined if the rotorcraft is going sideways or backwards. The map will continue to orient to the current track if the map is selected for Track Up. If the map is oriented to track up, then below 5 kts groundspeed the map orientation will "latch" to the last valid track prior to the groudspeed going below 5 kts. The map will reorient when the groundspeed again exceeds 5 kts. The position of the ownship icon over the map is always the current GPS position of the aircraft. NOTE: The electronic map is an aid to navigation and is designed to facilitate the use of authorized government charts, not replace them. Land and water data is provided only as a general reference. The accuracy of the land and water data is not suitable for use as a primary source of navigation and should only be used to supplement ofcial government charts and notices. Map Overlays Map Setup Map Detail Map User Fields Graphically Edit FPL Map Pointer - Create Wpt Topo Airways Terrain NEXRAD (or PRECIP)*
Charts*
StormScope*
Trafc*
Radar*
Map Aviation Land Airspace Trafc*
Weather*
Change User Fields Restore Defaults
* Optional Figure 9-2 Map Page Functional Diagram Index 9-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:07:29 PM NOTE: NEXRAD (or PRECIP) and Radar may not be shown at the same time. 9.1 Map Menu The Map Menu provides the ability to modify and control the information displayed on the Map page. Map Overlays are selected to overlay various types of information over the base map. Map Setup modies the display of other map features. Map User Fields determines whether or not the elds in the corners of the Map page are displayed and the data shown in each corner. Map Detail lets you control the amount of information displayed at different map ranges. Restore Defaults lets you start all over again with the default values for the settings for the Map User Fields. NOTE: Changes made in the Map Menu take effect immediately on the map display. 1. From the Home page, touch Map to reach the Map page, or press and hold the HOME key to go to the Map page from any function. On the Map page, touch the Menu key. Map Overlay Selections Touch To Edit Map Setup Touch and Slide Finger To Adjust Map Detail Level Touch To Edit Map User Fields (Corners) Return Map User Fields To Default Values 2. Touch the key for the desired option to access its settings. Figure 9-3 Map Menu Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:07:29 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 3. Touch the Back key to return to the Map page. Any changes made will be retained until changed. 9.1.1 Map Overlays Map Overlays are layers of information that are referenced to geographic location and are overlayed on the base map. A green bar will appear below the Map Overlay key text when the overlay is selected, except for Airways and NEXRAD. NOTE: Data linked weather (SiriusXM / FIS-B / Connext) is displayed below the chart overlay, Active onboard RADAR overlay is displayed above the chart overlay. NOTE: Map overlay keys do not turn on or activate equipment necessary for the overlay to function. Map overlay keys may remain available even if the information necessary for the overlay is not available. For example:
the Radar overlay key is available even if the radar is turned off. NOTE: Map overlays for StormScope, Trafc, or Radar are prevented from being overlaid on the main map without a heading source or while User Navigation Angles are selected. 9.1.1.1 Overlay Priority The data overlayed on the map is displayed according the following priorities
(from highest to lowest):
1 - Trafc 2 - Ownship 3 - Flight Plan 4 - TAWS Alerts 5 - Weather Radar 6 - Charts 7 - Stormscope 8 - Obstacles 9 - Fuel Range Ring 10 - TFRs 19 - County Warning 11 - Freezing Levels 20 - PIREPs 12 - Cell Movement 21 - AIREPS 13 - Lightning 14 - METARs 22 - City Forecast 23 - Surface Analysis 24 - Airspace 25 - Waypoints 26 - Airways 27 - Turbulence 15 - Winds Aloft 16 - SIGMETs 17 - AIRMETs 18 - Cyclone Warning Table 9-2 Data Overlay Priority 28 - Icing Potential 29- Echo Tops 30 - NEXRAD 31 - Cloud Tops 32 - IR Satellite 33 - SafeTaxi 34 - Terrain 35 - Base Map 36 - Topo Index 9-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:07:30 PM 9.1.1.2 Topo The Topo Data option selects whether the colored topographical features are displayed. Trafc, Land Data, Terrain, and Obstacles will still be displayed even with Topo Data turned off. 1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the TOPO Map Overlay key to toggle the Topo setting. Topo Map Overlay Off Topo Map Overlay On Figure 9-4 Topo Map Overlay Selections 2. When the Topo Map Overlay is toggled off, all topographic color features are removed. 9.1.1.3 Airways The Airways option allows you to select the airways that are shown on the Map page. All, Low only, and High only Airways may be selected. When Off is selected, airways will not be shown. 1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Airways Map Overlay key to select the Airways viewed. Selections are: Off, Low, High, and All. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:07:30 PM Low Airway (Grey) High Airway (Green) Active Flight Plan Leg Figure 9-5 Map Menu Airways Map Overlay Selection 2. Low Airways are shown as grey lines. High Airways are shown as green lines. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:07:30 PM 9.1.1.4 Terrain The Terrain Data option selects whether Terrain Data is shown on the Map page. Terrain and NEXRAD weather may not be displayed at the same time. Selecting one will disable the other. A Terrain icon will indicate that the Terrain overlay has been selected. Terrain overlay colors may or may not be shown depending on the altitude of the aircraft. 1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Terrain Map Overlay key to toggle the view of Terrain data. Red Terrain - At or Within 100 ft below Aircraft Altitude Yellow Terrain - Between 100 ft and 1000 ft below current aircraft altitude Current Position Icon Shows Terrain Overlay Is Active Touch to Zoom Map Range Figure 9-6 Map Menu Terrain Map Overlay "On" Selection Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain 2. The colors of the terrain are referenced to your aircraft altitude. Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:07:30 PM 9.1.1.5 NEXRAD (Optional) The NEXRAD menu option allows the display of NEXRAD Precip weather information overlayed on the Map page. Terrain and NEXRAD Precip weather may not be displayed at the same time. Selecting one will disable the other. NEXRAD Precip weather is an optional feature that requires the installation of a GDL 69/69A, GDL 88, or GSR 56 and an appropriate Weather subscription. Only one weather source can be displayed at a time (i.e. FIS-B and XM cannot be displayed on the map simultaneously. See the Weather section for more detail. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the NEXRAD Map Overlay key to toggle the view of NEXRAD weather data. NEXRAD Product Age NEXRAD Weather NEXRAD Weather Figure 9-7 Map Menu NEXRAD Map Overlay "On" Selection Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:07:30 PM 9.1.1.6 Charts (Optional) The Charts menu option allows the display of Charts overlayed on the Map page. The Charts Map Overlay option selects whether Chart data is shown on the Map page. Charts may or may not be shown depending on the other aircraft's location. The ownship icon will be shown over an available chart. See the Charts section for more detail. A chart will be displayed on the map if all of the following are true:
A charts database is a valid database. The system date is prior to the disable date of the charts database. The Charts Overlay Setting is active. The aircraft is In Air. The chart displayed on the map will be chosen based on:
The approach chart for the approach in the active ight plan, if an approach exists in the active ight plan. The airport surface chart for the nearest airport, if no approach exists in the active ight plan and an airport exists within 200NM of the aircraft's current position. NOTE: Features that are selectable on the main map page, such as obstacles, airports, airspace, and other waypoint types that are not visible beneath the overlaid chart, remain selectable even when an approach chart is overlaid on the main map. NOTE: If the chart for the loaded approach procedure is not overlaid on the map page with the Chart Overlay active, ensure the correct chart is selected on the dedicated Charts page. NOTE: If two GTN 7XX units are crosslled, then the same type (ChartView or FlightCharts) and version (cycle number and effective dates) for the chart database must be installed on both units in order for the correct chart to be overlaid on the main map page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:07:31 PM While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Charts Map Overlay key to toggle the view of the Charts overlay. Chart Overlay Selected In The Map Menu Ownship Located on Chart Overlay Figure 9-8 Map Menu Charts Map Overlay "On" Selection Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:07:31 PM 9.1.1.7 StormScope (Optional) The WX-500 StormScope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft. The StormScope measures relative bearing and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports the information to the display. Stormscope and XM Lightning are mutually exclusive. NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 Pilots Guide for a detailed description of the WX-500 StormScope. 1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the StormScope Map Overlay key to show the menu for selecting the StormScope radar weather data display mode (Cell, Strike, Off, or Clear Strikes). Select StormScope Data Display Figure 9-9 Map Menu StormScope Map Overlay Selection 2. StormScope data will be overlayed on the Map page when Cell or Strike is selected. See the Weather section for more details. Icon Shows StormScope Overlay Is Active Figure 9-10 Map Menu StormScope Map Overlay On Selection Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:07:31 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL 9.1.1.8 Radar (Optional) The Radar setting set on the Weather Radar page, such as Tilt, Range, etc., will be used for the radar overlay on the Map page. NEXRAD/PRECIP and the Radar overlay may not be shown at the same time. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Radar Map Overlay key to toggle the view of airborne Radar data. Precipitation Returns Direct-To Scan Line Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Figure 9-11 Map Menu Radar Map Overlay On Selection 9.1.1.9 Trafc (Optional) The Trafc Map Overlay option selects whether Trafc data is shown on the Map page. A Trafc icon will indicate that the Trafc overlay has been selected. Trafc may or may not be shown depending on the other aircraft's location and equipment. See the Trafc section for more detail. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Trafc Map Overlay key to toggle the view of Trafc data. Icon Shows Trafc Overlay Is Active Non-Threat Trafc Indication. Currently 1200 Ft Above And Rising Icon Shows Aircraft Is Receiving TIS Trafc From Ground Stations When A GDL 88 Is Connected
(GTN software version 5.11 or earlier) Figure 9-12 Map Menu Trafc Map Overlay On Selection Index 9-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:07:31 PM 9.1.2 Map Setup e c r u o S r e h t a e W t n e m e v o M l l e C s p o T d u o C l s p o T o h c E i g n n t h g i L R A T E M s t l u a f e D e r o t s e R s t l u a f e D e r o t s e R e g n a R e p y T e g n a R A M T
/
B s s a C l e c a p s r i A t r a m S s e c a p s r i A w o h S e g n a R A C T
/
C s s a C l e g n a R d e t c i r t s e R e g n a R D s s a C l s e m a N e c n i v o r P
/
e t a t S l i a t e D e k a L
/
r e v i R s t l u a f e D e r o t s e R l i a t e D d a o R l i a t e D y t i C s m a r g a D i i x a T e f a S s n o i s n e t x E y a w n u R e g n a R n o i t c e s r e t n I e g n a R t r o p r i A e g n a R B D N e g n a R R O V e g n a R
) y r a t i l i M
(
A O M e g n a R t n o p y a W i r e s U e g n a R Z D A I
/
r e h t O s t l u a f e D e r o t s e R s t l u a f e D e r o t s e R e g n a R y a w r i A s R F T e v o b A p U h t r o N n o i t a t n e i r O m o o Z o t u A i n M m o o Z o t u A x a M m o o Z o t u A i g n R e g n a R v a N i g n R e g n a R l e u F i e m T e v r e s e R l e u F l e a c S o p o T g n R e l c a t s b O t n o P i g n R e l c a t s b O e r i W s t l u a f e D e r o t s e R l r o o C t r a h C Figure 9-13 Map Setup Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:07:32 PM The Map page is customized by selecting groups from the Map Menu. The Map Menu groups include choices for Map, Aviation, Land, Airspace, Trafc, and Weather groups depending on the installed equipment of a given aircraft. Each group has a list of options that vary with the group. 1. While viewing the Map page, touch the Menu key. Then, touch the Map Setup key. The Map Setup page will be displayed. Map Setup Group Group Options Group Option Details Figure 9-14 Map Setup Page 2. Touch the desired Map Setup Group tab (Map, Aviation, Airspace, Land, Trafc, or Weather) to display the set of group options. 3. Touch the desired group key. A list of options for the selected group will be shown. (i.e. Map - Orientation, North Up Above, Auto Zoom, etc.) Touch the Up or Down keys as needed to scroll through the list. 4. Touch the key for the selected option. 5. Touch the Restore Defaults key to return to the original default values for the selected option. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:07:32 PM 9.1.2.1 Map The Map option denes the behavior and display of information on the Map page such as: Orientation, North Up Above, Auto Zoom, Nav Range Ring, Topo Scale, Obstacle Range, and Restore Defaults. The default values are shown in bold type. Feature Orientation North Up Above Auto Zoom Auto Zoom Min Auto Zoom Max Nav Range Ring Fuel Range Ring Fuel Reserve Time Topo Scale Point Obstacle Range Wire Obstacle Range Chart Color Scheme Restore Defaults Selection North Up, Track Up, Heading Up Off, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM, 250 NM Off, On 250 ft, 400 ft, 500 ft, 750 ft, 1000 ft, 1500 ft, 2500 ft, 0.5 NM, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM, 250 NM, 400 NM 250 ft, 400 ft, 500 ft, 750 ft, 1000 ft, 1500 ft, 2500 ft, 0.5 NM, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM, 250 NM, 400 NM Off, On, Enhanced Off, On 30 Min, 45 Min, 60 Min, 90 Min Off, On Off, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM Off, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM Day, Night Returns values to original factory settings Table 9-1 Map Setup Map Options Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:07:32 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Map Orientation The Map Orientation selection sets the orientation of the Map page. Selections are North Up, Track Up, and Heading Up. A Map Orientation label is shown below the North indicator (reference to True North) in the top left corner of the Map page. Map Orientation Figure 9-15 Map Orientation Label North Up Above The North Up Above option allows you to select the map range where at and above the selected value the Map Orientation will automatically change to North Up as a default. When the map range is 500 NM or more, the map orientation will automatically become North Up. Auto Zoom With a valid ight plan, the Auto Zoom feature will automatically change the Map page range depending on the distance to the next waypoint in the ight plan. If enabled, it will also automatically zoom to the SafeTaxi zoom range when the aircraft is on the ground. Auto Zoom can be overridden at any time by manually zooming with the In and Out keys. The Auto Zoom Min selection sets the minimum range that the display will Zoom in. The Auto Zoom Max value sets the maximum range the display will Zoom out. Auto Zoom Active Indication Figure 9-16 Auto Zoom Active Indication Auto Zoom is re-enabled once one of the following conditions is met:
A waypoint is sequenced The aircraft transitions from on ground to in air A point is reached where the Auto Zoom range matches the manual override range (known as auto-sync) and will be noted as Auto above the map range value on the map page Auto Zoom is toggled off and back on in the Map Setup page Index 9-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:07:32 PM NOTE: Rotorcraft use a Local Auto Zoom function where Auto Zoom will remain at the 1500 ft zoom scale until the rotorcraft is above 400 ft GSL or 40 kts. Auto Zoom Min Set the limit that the display will zoom in automatically. Selected Minimum Auto Zoom Range Figure 9-17 Map Setup Minimum Auto Zoom Range Auto Zoom Max Set the limit that the display will zoom out automatically. Selected Maximum Auto Zoom Range Figure 9-18 Map Setup Maximum Auto Zoom Range Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:07:32 PM Nav Range Ring When turned on, the Nav Range Ring option will show a ring with a compass rose oriented to magnetic north around your present position on the Map page. When selected ON, the Enhanced Range Ring function provides a second ring at 1/2 the distance of the primary ring to allow the pilot to acccurately judge distance to objects depicted on the map. Nav Range Ring Current Position Nav Range Ring Range Active Obstacle Overlay Types *
Fuel Range Ring Figure 9-19 Nav Range Ring NOTE: This feature is available in software version 6.00 and later. When interfaced with a fuel computer, the GTN can display a Fuel Range Ring which shows an estimate of the remaining ight distance at the current fuel consumption rate and groundspeed. If either fuel quantity or fuel ow sensor data is not received, the GTN will use the Fuel on Board or Fuel Flow values on the Utilities Fuel Planning page. If both fuel quantity and fuel ow are not received by the GTN, the Fuel Range Ring will be removed. A dashed green circle indicates the selected Range to Reserve Fuel. A solid yellow circle indicates the Total Endurance Range. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:07:32 PM Total Endurance Range Range To Reserve Fuel Total Endurance Time Time To Reserve Fuel Figure 9-20 Fuel Range Ring TOPO Scale The Topo Scale option selects whether the elevation scale for topographical features on the Map page is displayed. The scale will be located on the left side of the display. Figure 9-21 Map Page Topo Scale Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:07:32 PM Point Obstacle Range The Point Obstacle Range option selects whether the Point Obstacle Data is shown on the Map page at and below the selected Point Obstacle range. Map ranges above this value will not show the Point Obstacle Data. An obstacle with an asterisk indicates a group of the same obstacle type. Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than 1000 ft AGL) Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less than 1000 ft AGL) Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than 1000 ft AGL) Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than 1000 ft AGL) Table 9-2 Navigation Map Point Obstacle Icons by Elevation Tower Windmill Windmill in Group Power Line Color None White Amber Red Color None White Amber Red Table 9-3 Obstacle Icon Types Description Lines are removed when they are more than 2000 ft below the aircraft. Lines are white when they are within 2000 ft below the aircraft. Lines are amber when they are within 1000 ft below the aircraft. Lines are red when they are within 100 ft below or above the altitude of the airplane. Table 9-4 Fixed Wing Color Scheme for Obstacles and Wires Description Lines are removed when they are more than 500 ft below the rotorcraft. Lines are white when they are within 500 ft below the rotorcraft. Lines are amber when they are within 250 ft below the rotorcraft. Lines are red when they are at or above the altitude of the rotorcraft. Table 9-5 Rotorcraft Color Scheme for Obstacles and Wires Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:07:33 PM Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk. The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group. Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap. 1. While viewing the Map function, touch the Menu key. 2. Touch the Map Setup key. 3. Under the Map tab touch the Point Obstacle Range key and select the maximum range where obstacles will be displayed. Lighted Obstacle Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Grouped Obstacles Wpt Info Current Position Unlighted Obstacle Active Obstacle Overlay Types *
*
Figure 9-22 Navigation Map Point Obstacles The icon on the left shows that the point obstacle overlay is active. The icon on the right shows that the wire obstacle overlay is active. These icons are available in software version 5.12 or later. 4. Touch an obstacle on the map and the elevation will be shown. If there are nearby or overlayed objects (obstacle, airspace, airport, etc), touch the Next key to step through the nearby objects. Touch the Back key to return to the normal map view. Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:07:33 PM Selected Obstacle Selected Obstacle Info and Type Touch to Step to the Next Nearby Obstacle Obstacle Location Detail Figure 9-23 Point Obstacle Detail Wire Obstacle Range The Wire Obstacle Range option selects whether the power lines are shown on the Map page at and below the selected Wire Obstacle range. Map ranges above this value will not show the Wire Obstacle Data. NOTE: This feature is available in software version 5.10 and later and requires the use of obstacle databases that contain wire obstacle data. HTAWS Alert Detail at Cursor Point Figure 9-24 Wire Obstacles Selected Obstacle Grouped Obstacles Wire Obstacle Detail About the Selected Obstacle Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:07:33 PM Chart Color Scheme The Chart Color Scheme setting changes the day and night view of the Chart Overlay colors on the Map page. Figure 9-25 Chart Color Scheme Settings Restore Defaults Returns values to the original factory settings. 9.1.2.2 Aviation The Aviation group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to customize the display of Active Flight Plan, Active Flight Plan Waypoints, Airport size range, SafeTaxi information, Runway Extensions, Intersection/NDB locations, VOR locations, Airspace Detail, and TFR icons on the Map page. The feature will be shown at map ranges of the selected value and lower. The options for each feature are shown in the following table. The default values are shown in bold type. Feature Airport Range Selection Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM Heliports (Optional) Off, On SafeTaxi Diagrams Off, 1000 ft, 1500 ft, 2500 ft, 0.5 NM, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM Runway Extensions Off, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM Intersection Range NDB Range Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:07:34 PM Feature VOR Range User Wpt Range Airway Range TFR Restore Defaults Selection Off, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM, 100 NM Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM, 100 NM 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM Off, On Returns values to original factory settings Table 9-6 Map Setup Aviation Options NOTE: The term intersection range means any GPS waypoint included in the navigation database, and includes waypoints that may not be intersections of two VOR radials. Airport Size Size Criteria Display Criteria Longest runway length is less than 5000 feet, unless it has a tower frequency, in which case it is a Medium Airport. Longest runway length is less than 8100 feet but greater than or equal to 5000 feet or less than 8100 feet and has a tower frequency. Longest runway length is greater than or equal Small Medium Large Small airports and heliports are displayed on the map when the Map Range is less than or equal to 1/4 times the Airport Range Setting. Medium airports are displayed on the map when the Map Range is less than or equal to 1/2 times the Airport Range Setting. Large airports are displayed on the map when the Map Range is less than or equal to the Airport Range Setting. to 8100 feet. Table 9-7 Airport Display Range Setting NOTE: The Airport Range Setting of "Off" means airports are never displayed. Heliports are displayed on the map page if the Heliport Display Setting is
"On" and the Map Range is less than or equal to 1/4 times the Airport Range Setting. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:07:34 PM 9.1.2.3 Land The Land Data option selects whether detailed land features, such as Freeways, National Highways, Local Roads, Cities, States/Provinces, and Rivers/Lakes are displayed. Topo features, trafc, terrain, and obstacles will still be displayed, even with Land Data turned off. The options for each feature are shown in the following table. The default values are shown in bold type. Feature Selection Road Detail City Detail State/Province Names Off, On River/Lake Detail Restore Defaults None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most Returns values to original factory settings Table 9-8 Map Setup Land Options 9.1.2.4 Airspace The Airspace viewing range options select whether the Airspaces are shown on the Map and at and below the selected map ranges. The Smart Airspaces selection lters airspaces to show the ones appropriate for your altitude. Feature Selection Airspace Label Range Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM Smart Airspace Off, On Show Airspaces Class B/TMA Range Class C/TCA Range Class D Range Restricted Range MOA (Military) Range Other/ADIZ Range Restore Defaults All, Below 18000 ft, Below 15000 ft, Below 12000 ft, Below 9000 ft, Below 6000 ft, Below 3000 ft Off, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM Off, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM, 100 NM Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM, 100 NM None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most Returns values to original factory settings Table 9-9 Map Setup Airspace Options Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-25 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:07:34 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Airspace Labels NOTE: This feature is available in software version 5.10 and later when congured by the installer. The Airspace Label feature shows the airspace altitude limits within the selected range. Airspace Labels - On Figure 9-26 Display of Airspace Labels Smart Airspaces:
Garmins Smart Airspace feature aids visual clarity on-screen by de-
emphasizing airspace thats well above or below the aircrafts current altitude. The vertical separation is 1,000 feet at sea level and the vertical separation will gradually increase to 2,000 feet until the aircraft reaches 10,000 feet. Anything above 10,000 feet keeps the 2,000 feet vertical separation. NOTE: Smart Airspace only changes the depiction of the airspace on the moving map display. It does not alter the Airspace Alerts that can be set on the System-Alerts portion of the system. Smart Airspaces - Off Smart Airspaces - On Figure 9-27 Display of Smart Airspaces (Airspace Borders Grayed) Index 9-26 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:07:34 PM To control the display of European airway airspaces:
1. While viewing the Map Setup Airspaces option, touch the Other/ADIZ Range key and select a value. 2. Select Off for the Other/ADIZ Range to turn off the display of airway airspaces. Airway Airspaces - On Airway Airspaces - Off Figure 9-28 Selecting the Display of European Airway Airspaces Airway Airspaces - On 9.1.2.5 Trafc (Optional) The Trafc group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to customize the display of trafc on the Map page. The Trafc function requires the installation of the appropriate trafc device. Only one trafc source can be congured for the GTN and this trafc source will be overlaid on the main map. Coverage follows the airplane. In the Navigation Map page setup you can select the maximum range at which trafc symbols are shown. Once outside of the selected range, trafc will be decluttered. The default values are shown in bold type. Trafc Selection Display Result Range Trafc Restore Defaults 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM All Trafc, Alerts & Advisories, Alerts Only Returns values to original factory settings Table 9-10 Map Page Trafc Display Options Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-27 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 27 7/9/2015 2:07:35 PM 9.1.2.6 Weather (Optional) The Weather group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to customize the overlay of the available weather information on the Map page. Weather is an optional feature that requires an external weather source, which must be selected to allow the overlay. Feature Weather Source Cell Movement METAR Cloud Tops Echo Tops Lightning Restore Defaults Selection SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Off, On Returns values to original factory settings Table 9-11 Map Setup SiriusXM Weather Options NOTE: Map overlay keys may remain available even if the information necessary for the overlay is not available. For example: the Radar overlay key is available even if the radar is turned off. Feature Weather Source METAR IR Satellite Lightning Restore Defaults Connext Settings Selection SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B Off, On Off, On Off, On Returns values to original factory settings Selectable Connext Settings Table 9-12 Map Setup Connext Weather Options Feature Weather Source METAR Restore Defaults Selection SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B Off, On Returns values to original factory settings Table 9-13 Map Setup FIS-B Weather Options Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-28 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 28 7/9/2015 2:07:35 PM 9.1.3 Change User Fields The Change User Fields selection allows you to congure the Data, Function, and Page eld type shown in each of the four corners of the Map page. The information shown in each eld may be selected from a list after Change User Fields is selected. 1. While viewing the Map page, touch the Menu key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 2. From the Map Menu screen, touch the Change User Fields FPL key. Touch To Select Data Field
(TRK Currently Shown) Touch To Select Data Field
(DIS Currently Shown) Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Touch To Cancel Any Changes Terrain Figure 9-29 Map Data Fields Selection NOTE: Map Data Field Types that use the term "Destination" refer to the missed approach point (if an approach is loaded) or the nal airport in the ight plan. NOTE: In software version 5.13 and earlier, ETE to Destination is not available when a procedure is loaded and there are waypoints in the Enroute section of the ightplan. Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-29 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 29 7/9/2015 2:07:35 PM 3. Touch the corner data eld key you want to select. Touch the Data, Function, or Page keys to select the User Field type. A list of information types will be displayed. Touch To Select Data, Function, or Page Field Type List. Touch To Select Data Field Slider Indicates More Selections Available. Press Finger and Slide To View More Selections. Selected Field Type Figure 9-30 Map Data Field Type Selections 4. Touch the Up or Down keys or touch the display and drag your nger to scroll through the list. Touch the desired item to select it or touch the Back key to cancel selection. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-30 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 30 7/9/2015 2:07:35 PM Map Data Field Type ACTV WPT - Active Waypoint B/D APT - BRG/DIS from Dest APT 1 BRG - Bearing to Current Waypoint DIS - Distance to Current Waypoint DIS to Dest - Distance to Destination 2 MSA - Minimum Safe Altitude OAT (static) - Static Air Temperature OAT (total) - Total Air Temperature RAD ALT - Radar Altimeter Time - Current Time DTK - Desired Track Time to TOD - Time to Top of Descent ESA - Enroute Safe Altitude ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival ETA at Dest - ETA at Destination ETE - Estimated Time Enroute ETE to Dest - ETE to Destination Fuel Flow - Total Fuel Flow GS - GPS Ground Speed GSL - GPS Altitude Generic Timer - Timer Display TKE - Track Angle Error TRK - Track Trip Timer - Timer Display VOR/LOC - Tuned VOR/LOC Info VSR - Vertical Speed Required Wind - Wind Speed and Direction XTK - Cross Track Error OFF - Do Not Display Data Field Table 9-14 Map Data Field Types of Information Note 1:
Note 2:
B/D APT is the straight line distance. Dist to DEST is the distance along the ight plan. Function Field Type CDI - Course Deviation Indicator Flap Override - Flap Override 1 GPWS Inhibit - GPWS Inhibit 1 G/S Inhibit - G/S Inhibit 1 HTAWS RP Mode - HTAWS RP Mode 2 Passenger Address - PA Toggle Playback - Play Last Recording TAWS Inhibit - TAWS Inhibit Gen Timer - Generic Timer Control WX RDR Controls - Weather Radar Controls OBS/Suspend/Unsuspend Button OFF - Do Not Display Data Field On Scene - "On Scene" Mode Toggle Table 9-15 Map Function Field Types of Information Note 1:
Note 2:
With TAWS-A enabled With HTAWS enabled Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-31 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 31 7/9/2015 2:07:35 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Map Page Field Type Charts - Charts Page Fuel PLAN - Fuel Planning Page Flight Plan - Flight Plan Page SCHED MSG - Scheduled Messages Map - Map Page Nearest - Nearest Page Trip PLAN - Trip Planning Page VCALC - VCALC Page NEAR APT - Nearest Airport Page User FREQ - User Frequencies PROC - Procedures Page Approach - Approach Page Arrival - Arrival Page Departure - Departure Page Services - Services Page Trafc - Trafc Page Terrain - Terrain Page Utilities - Utilities Page Checklist - Checklist Page WPT INFO - Waypoint Information Weather - Weather Page CNXT WX - Connext WX Page FIS-B WX - FIS-B Weather Page Stormscope - Stormscope Page WX Radar - Weather Radar Page SiriusXM WX - Sirius XM WX Page OFF - Do Not Display Page Field Table 9-16 Map Page Field Types of Information 9.1.4 Map Detail The Map Detail feature allows four levels of decluttering to remove map information. The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR key. There are four levels of decluttering. Level 0 shows the most detail and level 3 shows the least detail. 0 1 2 3 Figure 9-31 Map Detail Levels Index 9-32 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 32 7/9/2015 2:07:35 PM 1. While viewing the Map page, touch the Menu key. 2. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Map Detail scale and slide your nger to adjust the level. Features marked with a are shown at the indicated Map Detail Level. Feature River/Lake Names Land/Country Text Large City Medium City Small City Small Town Freeways Highways Roads Railroads Political Boundaries User Waypoints VORs NDBs Intersections Class B Airspace Class C Airspace Class D Airspace Tower 0 1 2 3 Feature TRSA ADIZ Alert Areas Caution Areas Danger Areas Warning Areas Large Airports Medium Airports Restricted Areas Prohibited Areas MOAs Runway Labels Lightning Strike Data NEXRAD Data Trafc Symbols Trafc Labels Water Detail Active FPL Legs Airways 0 1 2 3 Table 9-17 Features Shown at Each Map Detail Level Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-33 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 33 7/9/2015 2:07:35 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 9.2 Map Panning In the Map Page function, panning allows you to move the map beyond its current limits without adjusting the map scale. The panning function is selected by simply touching the Map display. The In and Out keys at the lower right corner of the page control the map range. Touching the display momentarily switches the display to Map Pan Mode. While in Map Pan Mode, touch the display gently and drag your nger to pan around the map. FPL 1. Touch the Map page display. Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Selected Item Touch To Edit FPL On The Display Pan Mode Annunciation and Bearing and Distance To The Map Pointer From Present Position Map Pointer Location Aircraft Present Position Touch To Step To Items Near The Map Pointer Info On Selected Item Figure 9-32 Map Panning With Airspace Highlighted NOTE: It is possible that multiple airspaces can be stacked vertically and be difcult to visually identify them. Touching the Next key will step through the airpaces. 2. If you touch an item on the display (waypoint, airspace, obstacle) there may be other items very close that are difcult to see at a given zoom level. Touch the Next key to annunciate and highlight the next item. Each touch of the Next key steps to another item near the Map Pointer. Index 9-34 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 34 7/9/2015 2:07:36 PM Next Nearest Item Highlighted Touch To Edit FPL On The Display Pan Mode Annunciation and Bearing and Distance To The Cursor From Present Position And Elevation At The Cursor Cursor Location Aircraft Present Position Touch To Step To Items Near The Cursor Info On Selected Item Figure 9-33 Map Panning With Next Airspace Shown 3. Touch the Airspace Info (Item) key for more information about the selected item. Touch the Back key to return to the Map Panning display. Figure 9-34 Map Panning Selected Item Information Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-35 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 35 7/9/2015 2:07:36 PM 4. While pressing your nger gently against the display, drag your nger across the display to scroll the display in the direction of your nger movement. The Map Pointer cross hair location is based on where your nger touches the display, but after dragging your nger the Map Pointer will be centered on the map when your nger is lifted from the display. Map Pointer Pan Mode Annunciation Coordinates Of Map Pointer Figure 9-35 Map Panning With Map Pointer NOTE: Pressing the Direct-To key will use the Map Pointer location as the destination. 5. Touch the Back key to return to the normal map display. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-36 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 36 7/9/2015 2:07:36 PM 9.3 Map Controls While in the Map page function, several controls are available to manage the view and display of information. The In and Out keys at the lower right corner of the page control the map range. Touching the display momentarily switches the display to Map Pan Mode. While in any of the Map function pages, touching the display starts Pan Mode. Options are available to Create a waypoint at the Map Pointer position and to Graphically Edit Flight Plan. 9.3.1 Pan Map Mode Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL The Pan Map mode allows you to move the map display to view the Direct-To surrounding area. 1. Touch the Map page display. 2. See the description in the Map Panning section for details of using this feature. Touch the Back key to return to the normal Map display. 9.3.2 Create Waypoint The Create Waypoint function will create a User Waypoint at the Map Pointer location when that location is not an already named object, such as an airport or airspace. 1. In Pan Mode, touch the Create Waypoint key. 2. Follow the directions in the Waypoint Info section for Creating User Waypoints. Figure 9-36 Create User Waypoint While Map Panning Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-37 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 37 7/9/2015 2:07:36 PM 9.3.3 Graphically Edit Flight Plan Mode The Edit Flight Plan Mode allows making quick changes to the active ight plan directly on the display. The process is simply touching the display to start Map Pan Mode, touching the Graphically Edit FPL key, dragging the desired leg to a new waypoint or airway, and touching the Done key. At any point, a step may be removed by touching the Undo key or the whole process ended by touching the Cancel key. The Undo key will remove up to nine steps. Adding a Waypoint Within an Existing Flight Plan 9.3.3.1 1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key. Active Flight Plan Map Pointer Where Display Was Touched Touch Edit Flight Plan Key To Change FPL Touch To Return To The Map Display Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather 2. Touch and hold the desired leg of the ight plan. Figure 9-37 Edit Flight Plan Mode Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Current Active FPL Waypoints Active Flight Plan Leg Intended New Waypoint Touch To Cancel Changes And Return To Map Display Figure 9-38 Select Leg of Flight Plan to Change Index 9-38 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 38 7/9/2015 2:07:36 PM 3. Drag the ight plan leg to a new waypoint, or airway, to add a waypoint, or airway, to the active ight plan. The ight plan leg being edited will turn cyan. New FPL Waypoint Active Flight Plan Leg Touch To Cancel Changes And Return To Map Display Figure 9-39 Drag Selected Leg of Flight Plan to New Waypoint 4. Touch the Done key. The aircraft will now navigate according to the new ight plan. New Active FPL Active Flight Plan Leg Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain New FPL Waypoint Weather Touch To Undo Last Step Touch To Accept Changes To FPL Touch To Cancel Editing Figure 9-40 Completed Flight Plan with New Waypoint NOTE: Parallel track will be cancelled when graphically editing a ight plan. NOTE: It is not possible to graphically add an intermediate waypoint between the current position and a direct-to waypoint unless that waypoint is in the ight plan. Garmin recommends deleting any ight plan prior to graphically editing a direct to waypoint. Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-39 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 39 7/9/2015 2:07:37 PM 9.3.3.2 9.3.3.3 9.3.3.4 Adding a Waypoint to the End of an Existing Flight Plan 1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key. 2. Touch a waypoint that you want to add to the end of the ight plan. 3. Touch the Done key to accept the changes and return to the Map page. Removing a Waypoint from an Existing Flight Plan 1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key. 2. Touch a waypoint, or airway, on the ight plan that you want to remove. 3. Drag the ight plan line away from the waypoint, or airway, and release the line. The waypoint, or airway, will be removed from the ight plan. 4. Touch the Done key to accept the changes and return to the Map page. Creating a Flight Plan Without an Existing Flight Plan 1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key. 2. Touch a waypoint on the map to set the rst waypoint in the ight plan. If there are several nearby waypoints, touch the desired waypoint to select it. Touch Desired Waypoint Cluster Of Nearby Multiple Waypoints Figure 9-41 Select the Desired Waypoint From Multiple Waypoints Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-40 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 40 7/9/2015 2:07:37 PM New FPL Waypoint Touch To Undo Last Step Figure 9-42 Start New Flight Plan with Origin Waypoint 3. Touch a waypoint, or airway, on the map for the next waypoint, or airway, in the ight plan. Continue adding waypoints, or airways, as needed. New Active FPL New FPL Waypoint Active Flight Plan Leg Touch To Accept Changes To FPL Touch To Undo Last Step Touch To Cancel Editing Figure 9-43 Add New Waypoint to Flight Plan 4. Touch the Done key to accept the changes and return to the Map page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-41 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 41 7/9/2015 2:07:37 PM 9.4 CDI (GTN 750 only) The GTN 750's CDI key is used to select data that is sent from the GPS or VLOC receiver to the external CDI (or HSI). When the external CDI (or HSI) is connected to the GPS receiver, GPS appears below the CDI key in the annunciation bar. When the external CDI (or HSI) is being driven by the VLOC receiver, VLOC appears instead. NOTE: The VLOC receiver must be selected for display on the external CDI/
HSI for approaches which are not approved for GPS. See the ILS example in the Procedures section for more information. NOTE: GPS phase of ight annunciations (LPV, ENR, etc.) are not applicable to the external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active. NOTE: The internal on-screen CDI information is based on GPS data and cannot be used for primary navigation. NOTE: If the unit is not congured for a CDI key, then the activate GPS missed approach will only resume automatic waypoint sequencing. The user must switch to GPS navigation, if desired, by using their external source selection method (this is typical an EFIS system). 1. The navigation source is annunciated under the CDI key. Touch CDI Key To Toggle Navigation Source Navigation Source Annunciation Figure 9-44 Navigation Source Selection 2. Touch the CDI key to toggle between sources. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-42 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 42 7/9/2015 2:07:37 PM 9.5 OBS The OBS key is used to select manual or automatic sequencing of waypoints. Touching this key selects OBS mode, which retains the current active to waypoint as your navigation reference even after passing the waypoint (i.e., prevents sequencing to the next waypoint). Touching the OBS key again returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints. Whenever OBS mode is selected, you may set the desired course To/From a waypoint using the pop-up window on the GTN 7XX or with the external OBS selector on your HSI or CDI. For leg types that do not support OBS, this key will be shown as a SUSP key. This key will then also function as an Unsuspend key for legs that auto-suspend, such as holds, missed approaches, etc. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To NOTE: In dual GTN installations with crossll on, the OBS course will only be updated real time on the GTN that is receiving the new OBS course. The course will be transferred to the other GTN when OBS is exited. Proc Charts 1. Touch the OBS key to enable the OBS function. 2. Enter the desired OBS heading using the keypad and touch Enter. 3. The OBS heading will be shown in the ight plan annunciation above the CDI in the lower portion of the display. The OBS function annunciation will show. Next FPL Leg Runway Extension Destination Wpt Ownship Position Active FPL Leg OBS Heading Touch the OBS Key To Enable OBS Function OBS Function Annunciation Figure 9-45 OBS Course Selection Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 9-43 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 43 7/9/2015 2:07:37 PM 9.6 Map Symbols Various symbols are used to distinguish between waypoint types. The identiers for any on-screen waypoints can also be displayed. Special-use and controlled airspace boundaries appear on the map, showing the individual sectors in the case of Class B, Class C, or Class D airspace. The following symbols are used to depict the various airports and navaids on the Map Page:
Symbol Airport with hard surface runway(s); Serviced, Primary runway shown Description Airport with hard surface runway(s); Non-Serviced, Primary runway shown Airport with soft surface runway(s) only, Serviced Airport with soft surface runway(s) only, Non-Serviced Unknown Airport Restricted (Private) Aireld Intersection VOR VORTAC VOR/DME TACAN DME NDB Locator Outer Marker Heliport Table 9-18 Map Symbols Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 9-44 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 44 7/9/2015 2:07:38 PM 10 TRAFFIC The Trafc function displays available trafc information depending on your installed equipment to assist in situational awareness. The features and operation depend on the capabilities and options of each type of trafc system. NOTE: The reference point for the ownship is the nose of the ownship aircraft symbol (either miniature aircraft or triangle). The reference point for all trafc icons is the center of the depicted trafc. 1. From the Home page, touch the Trafc key. 2. Use the active areas on the display and the Menu options to set up the Trafc display. 10.1 Trafc Pop-Up When the GTN 7XX is displaying any page (other than the Trafc page) and a trafc alert becomes active, the Trafc Warning pop-up will be displayed. NOTE: The trafc pop-up will not appear when your aircraft is on the ground. 1. The trafc pop-up will appear on pages other than the Trafc page when a trafc alert occurs. Trafc Location Ownship Position Touch To Close Pop-Up Trafc Alert Annunciation Touch To Go To Trafc Page Trafc Alert Annunciation Figure 10-1 Trafc Pop-Up On the Map Page 2. Touch the Go to Trafc key to view the Trafc page. OR 3. Touch the Close key to close the pop-up. The pop-up will return if the trafc alert persists. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:07:38 PM 10.2 Trafc Test The Trafc Test function is only available on some trafc systems. The aircraft must be on the ground and Trafc Status must be in Standby. 1. Touch the Test key to activate the test function in the Trafc equipment. Test Trafc Status Touch For Trafc Test While In Standby Trafc Status Figure 10-2 Trafc Test Mode 2. The unit will return to normal operation mode after the test process is successfully completed. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:07:38 PM 10.3 Trafc Information Service (TIS) (Optional) WARNING: The Trafc Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help the pilot locate trafc visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid trafc. NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Trafc Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb/descent indication. NOTE: TIS and Trafc Advisory System (TAS) may not both be congured at the same time. NOTE: GDL 88 equipped aircraft only: When the radio tower symbol is crossed out, the aircraft is not a participant in the TIS-B system i. e. not visible to other TIS-B clients. The GDL 88 will, however, continue to receive available TIS-B and FIS-B ground station up-links and continue to display TIS-B and FIS-B data along with available ADS-B and ADS-R data. NOTE: Except for GDL 88 equipped aircraft, TIS, and Trafc Advisory System
(TAS) may not both be displayed at the same time. NOTE: More information is available about the GDL 88 in the "Garmin GDL 88 ADS-B Transceiver Pilots Guide."
Trafc Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the trafc data link. TIS receives trafc information from ground stations, and is updated every ve seconds. The GTN 7XX displays up to eight trafc targets within a 7.5 NM radius, from 3000 feet below to 3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. 7.0 NM 3,500 ft 3,000 ft Figure 10-3 TIS Coverage Volume (not to scale) Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:07:39 PM 10.3.1 TIS Symbology Trafc is displayed according to TCAS symbology using three different symbols. TIS Symbol Description Non-Threat Trafc Trafc Advisory (TA) Trafc Advisory Off Scale Table 10-1 TIS Trafc Symbols Trafc Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When trafc meets the advisory criteria for the TA, a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. A Non-
threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than 1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond ve NM. A Trafc Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder. TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the trafc is moving, to the nearest 45. Trafc information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing trafc) is displayed in the center of the Trafc Page or in a banner on maps other than the Trafc Map Page on which trafc can be displayed. The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the trafc symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation appears above the trafc symbol with a "+" sign; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Trafc symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent information. Always remember that TIS cannot alert you to the presence of aircraft that are not equipped with transponders, nor can it alert you to aircraft that may be nearby, but obscured from the ground surveillance radar by interfering terrain. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:07:39 PM 10.3.2 Trafc Page The Trafc Map Page is congured to show surrounding TIS trafc data in relation to the aircrafts current position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. The trafc mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Trafc Map Page. When the aircraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to Operating Mode and the GTN 7XX begins to display trafc information. Altitude Filter Normal Above Below Unrestricted TRF Status Operate Standby Figure 10-4 Trafc Page Functional Diagram Non-Threat Trafc Ownship Position Trafc Direction Of Travel Range Ring Radius Trafc Status Key
(Operate/Standby) Figure 10-5 Trafc Page Heading Annunciation Proximity Advisory, 1200 ft Above and Climbing Range Rings Altitude Filter Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:07:39 PM 10.3.3 Displaying Trafc on the Trafc Page 1. From the Home page, touch the Trafc key. 2. Conrm TIS is in Operating Mode. 3. Touch the Trafc Status key to toggle between Operate and Standby mode. 10.3.4 Altitude Display 1. While viewing the Trafc page, touch the Operate key to begin displaying trafc. Operate is displayed in the Trafc Status eld. 2. The Altitude Filter limits the trafc displayed to the Below, Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the Displayed Trafc Range table. The lter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change the altitude lter value. Select the desired altitude lter by touching the BELOW, NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED keys. The selection is displayed in the Altitude mode eld. Selected Altitude Filter Figure 10-6 Trafc Altitude Filter Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:07:39 PM Altitude Mode Displayed Trafc Range Below Normal Above Unrestricted
-9900 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 9900 ft All Trafc Shown Table 10-2 Displayed Trafc Range 10.3.5 TIS Limitations NOTE: This section on TIS Limitations is not comprehensive. Garmin recommends the user review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual, Section 1-3-5. TIS is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft. TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft. TIS is intended only to assist in visual acquisition of other aircraft in VMC. No recommended avoidance maneuvers are provided for, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory. While TIS is a useful aid to visual trafc avoidance, it has some system limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use. Many of these limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. In other words, the information provided by TIS will be no better than that provided to ATC. TIS will only display aircraft with operating transponders installed. TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar, which is a secondary surveillance radar similar to the Air Trafc Control Radar Beacon System
(ATCRBS). TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering. TIS is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communication between the aircraft and the Mode S radar. Whenever the structure of the client aircraft comes between the transponder antenna (usually located on the underside of the aircraft) and the ground-based radar antenna, the signal may be temporarily interrupted. Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described in the AIM, Section 4-5-6. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:07:39 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground stations is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the Aeronautical Information Manual for a Terminal Mode S Radar Site Map covering the U.S. NOTE: TIS will be unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U.S., particularly in mountainous regions. Also, when ying near the oor of radar coverage in a particular area, intruders below the client aircraft may not be detected by TIS. TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which the uplink occurs. Therefore, the surveillance information is approximately ve seconds old. In order to present the intruders in a real time position, the TIS ground station uses a predictive algorithm in its tracking software. This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their expected positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit. Occasionally, aircraft maneuvering will cause this algorithm to induce errors in the display. These errors primarily affect relative bearing information and trafc target track vector
(it will lag); intruder distance and altitude will remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in see and avoid. Some of the more common examples of these errors follow:
When client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes. When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client aircraft course at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head on) and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0.25 NM, TIS may display the intruder on the opposite side of the client than it actually is. These are relatively rare occurrences and will be corrected in a few radar scans once the course has stabilized. Index 10-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:07:39 PM 10.3.6 TIS Alerts When the number of Trafc Advisories (TAs) on the Trafc Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
A single Trafc voice alert is generated. A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the bottom of the display, ashing for 5 seconds and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area. To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the Trafc voice alert is generated only when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the rst TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another voice alert is generated. A Trafc Not Available (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of range. Trafc may not be displayed in the radar coverage area due to the following:
Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service. Trafc or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-
capable Mode S radar site. Trafc or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site. Trafc or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In at terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000 feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all directions. Trafc does not have an operating transponder. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:07:39 PM 10.3.7 TIS System Status The GTN 7XX performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby Mode on the ground or Operating Mode in the air. If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown in the center of the Trafc Map Page. Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action for a failure message. Trafc Page Annunciation No Data Description Data is not being received from the transponder Failed The transponder has failed Unavailable TIS is unavailable or out of range Table 10-3 TIS Failure Annunciations The Trafc mode is annunciated in the bottom left corner of the Trafc Page. When the aircraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and trafc information is displayed. The mode can be changed manually using the Trafc Status key. Trafc Status Trafc Mode Annunciation
(Trafc On Map Page) Trafc Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps) TIS Operating TIS Standby TIS Failed*
Operate Standby TIS Fail
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action Table 10-4 TIS Modes Shown on the Map Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:07:39 PM The annunciations that indicate the status of trafc information appear in a banner at the bottom center of maps on which trafc can be displayed. Trafc Status Banner Annunciation Description Trafc Coast 9 SEC Trafc Removed The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message). The quality of displayed trafc information is reduced when this message is displayed. Trafc is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message). Trafc may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed. Table 10-5 TIS Trafc Status Annunciations Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:07:39 PM 10.4 TAS Trafc (Optional) NOTE: TIS and Trafc Advisory System (TAS) may not both be congured at the same time. TAS data comes from a TAS unit such as a Garmin GTS 800 or 820, Skywatch 497, KTA 810, or other unit. Refer to the appropriate Trafc Advisory Systems Pilots Guides for a detailed discussion of the respective trafc advisory system. The type of trafc systems that is installed is described by the Trafc Page keys. If a Trafc Advisory System (TAS) is congured, a Trafc Mode and Altitude Filter key will be displayed. NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, trafc may be displayed intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for trafc at all times. WARNING: The Trafc Advisory System (TAS) is intended for advisory use only to aid the pilot in visually acquiring trafc. No avoidance maneuvers should be based solely upon TAS trafc information. It is the responsibility of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid trafc. A Trafc Advisory System (TAS) enhances ight crew situational awareness by displaying trafc information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The TAS also provides visual and aural trafc alerts including voice announcements to assist in visually acquiring trafc. When the TAS is in Operating Mode, the unit interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft while monitoring transponder replies. The TAS uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The TAS then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Trafc Advisory
(TA), visual and aural alerting is provided. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:07:39 PM 10.4.1 TAS Symbology Trafc Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS uses an on-board interrogator-processor to detect trafc. Only aircraft with operating transponders will be detected. Trafc is displayed according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols. TAS Symbol Description Non-Threat Trafc
(intruder is beyond 5 NM and greater than 1200 ft vertical separation) Proximity Advisory (PA)
(intruder is within 5 NM and less than 1200 ft vertical separation) Trafc Advisory (TA)
(closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria) Trafc Advisory Off Scale Table 10-6 TAS Intruder Symbol Description Non-Threat Trafc Relative Altitude (1200 ft Above) Vertical Trend Arrow (Climbing) Figure 10-7 Intruder Type, Altitude, and Vertical Trend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:07:40 PM Heading Annunciation Trafc Proximity Advisory Range Rings Altitude Filter 10.4.2 Displaying and Operating Trafc (TAS Systems) The unit must be in Operating mode for trafc to be displayed. The ability to switch from Standby to Operating mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff. Non-Threat Trafc Ownship Position Range Ring Distance Trafc Status Key
(Operate/Standby) Map 10.4.2.1 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Figure 10-8 Trafc Page Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Mode 1. From the Home page, touch the Trafc key. 2. Conrm TAS is in Operating Mode. 3. Touch the Trafc Status key to toggle between Operate and Standby mode. 4. The Altitude Filter limits the trafc displayed to the Below, Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the Displayed Trafc Range table. The lter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change the altitude lter value. NOTE: Not all TAS systems can be set to Standby mode while in the air. The Trafc Page shows surrounding TAS trafc data in relation to the aircrafts current position and altitude without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless no valid heading is received. The Trafc Status is annunciated in the lower left corner and the Altitude Filter is annunciated in the lower right corner. Index 10-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:07:40 PM 10.4.2.2 Range Ring Touching the In and Out keys will zoom in and out in preset steps depending on the installed equipment as shown in the following table. Trafc Device Garmin GTS 800, Skywatch (SKY497/
SKY889) Garmin GTS 820 and 850, Honeywell KTA 810 TAS, KTA 910 TAS, KMH 820 IHAS, KMH 920 IHAS, and Avidyne TAS 620 (Ryan 9900BX) Map Ranges 2 NM, 6 NM, 12 NM 2 NM, 6 NM, 12 NM, 24 NM, 40 NM Table 10-7 Available Trafc Range Ring Steps 10.4.3 Altitude Display 1. While viewing the Trafc page, touch the Trafc Status key to begin displaying trafc. TAS OPERATING is displayed in the Trafc mode eld. 2. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change the altitude lter value. The lter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. Select the desired altitude lter by touching the BELOW, NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED keys. The selection is displayed in the Altitude mode eld. Selected Altitude Filter Figure 10-9 Trafc Altitude Filter Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:07:40 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Altitude Mode Displayed Trafc Range Below Normal Above Unrestricted
-9900 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 9900 ft All Trafc Shown Table 10-8 Displayed Trafc Range 10.4.4 Trafc System Status NOTE: Refer to the equipment documentation for information on the self-test and operating modes. The Trafc Status is indicated in the lower left corner of the Trafc Page. Mode Trafc Mode Annunciation
(Trafc Page) Trafc Display Enabled Icon
(Other Maps) TAS Self-test Initiated TAS Operating TAS Standby TAS Failed Test Operate Standby TAS Fail If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the Table 10-9 TAS Modes center of the Trafc Page. Trafc Page Annunciation No Data Data Failed Failed Description Data is not being received from the TAS unit Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit Table 10-10 TAS Failure Annunciations Index 10-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:07:40 PM The annunciations to indicate the status of trafc information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of maps on which trafc can be displayed. Trafc Status Banner Annunciation Description TA 6.0 + 03 Failed Data Fail No Data System cannot determine bearing of Trafc Advisory. Annunciation indicates distance in NM, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending). Trafc data has failed. Data is being received from the transponder, but a failure is detected in the data stream. Trafc has not been detected. Table 10-11 TAS Trafc Status Annunciations Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:07:40 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 10.5 ADS-B Trafc ADS-B technology is an important part of the FAAs Next Generation Air Transportation System (NextGen), allowing for enhanced safety, efciency, and the ability of the system to handle greater numbers of aircraft. ADS-B In allows a properly-equipped aircraft to access FAA broadcast services such as TIS-B and FIS-B. With ADS-B Out, the avionics transmit an aircrafts precise location, as well as specic information about that aircraft, to ground stations and other aircraft. If more than one target is occupying the same area of the screen, the GTN will combine the two trafc targets into one trafc group. The group symbol maintains the iconology of the highest priority trafc target in the group and indicates a grouped symbol by the presence of an asterisk to the left of the grouped trafc target. Trafc targets displayed on the dedicated trafc page may be selected in order to obtain additional information about a trafc target or to view all targets in a grouped target. When a grouped target is selected, the Next key on the dedicated trafc page will cycle through all targets located in close proximity to where the screen has been touched. Touch Icon For Info Map Orientation Selected Trafc Info Touch For Next Target Range Rings Ownship Icon ADS-B and TCAS Status and Altitude Filter Trafc Motion Vector Alerted Target, 1200 ft Above and Climbing Range Ring Radius Selected Vector Motion and Duration Touch To View Trafc Menu Figure 10-10 ADS-B Trafc Page NOTE: The Next key on the dedicated trafc page will cycle through all targets located in close proximity to where the pilot has touched the screen. Index 10-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:07:40 PM Symbol Description Basic Non-Directional Trafc Basic Directional Trafc Basic Off-scale Selected Trafc Proximate Non-Directional Trafc Proximate Directional Trafc Proximate Off-scale Selected Trafc Non-Directional Alerted Trafc Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Trafc Directional Alerted Trafc Off-Scale Directional Alerted Trafc Non-Directional Surface Vehicle Directional Surface Vehicle Table 10-12 ADS-B Trafc Symbols NOTE: Color of basic and proximate trafc is dependent on conguration
(cyan or white) and airborne/on-ground status of target (target is brown when on the ground, see the surface vehicles). Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:07:41 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System 10.5.1 Trafc Applications - SURF, AIRB, etc. The GTN ADS-B trafc display is capable of running in two modes:
Airborne Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situation Awareness (SURF). AIRB is in operation in the en route environment, outside of ve NM from and 1,500 feet above the nearest airport. SURF is in operation within the terminal environment (within ve NM and less than 1,500 feet above eld elevation). When SURF is running, and the zoom scale on the trafc display is less than two NM, the airport environment
(including taxiways and runways) is displayed in addition to trafc. This is to aid in situational awareness of runway occupancy/availability, etc. Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and TIS-B, all trafc targets may not be depicted on the trafc display. Because higher data precision is required for display in the SURF environment, some targets eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is active. Individual eligibility for AIRB and SURF is depicted in the selected trafc data on the trafc page. 10.5.2 ADS-B Trafc Menu The Trafc Menu allows control of the trafc information display. Select TCAS Status:
Operate and Standby Select ADS-B Status:
Off, Surface, or Airborne Select Motion Vector:
Absolute, Relative, Off Touch To Perform Trafc Test Select Altitude Filter:
Normal, Above, Below, Unrestricted Select Vector Duration:
30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min Figure 10-11 ADS-B Trafc Menu 10.5.2.1 ADS-B Status ADS-B Status displays the current status of trafc application: Off, Surface, Messages or Airborne. Touch the ADS-B Status key to toggle the ADS-B Status. Symbols Appendix Index 10-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:07:41 PM 10.5.2.2 TCAS Status This shows the current status of the TCAS system. The modes reported by the trafc device are "Operate" while in the air and "Standby" while on the ground. This control allows the pilot to manually select the TCAS Status. Touch the TCAS Status key to toggle the TCAS Status. 10.5.2.3 Test The Trafc Test function is only available on some TAS trafc systems. The aircraft must be on the ground and Trafc Status must be in Standby. 1. Touch the Test key to activate the test function in the Trafc equipment. 2. The unit will return to normal operation mode after the test process is successfully completed. 10.5.2.4 Motion Vector When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the trafc targets depict the target reported track and speed over the ground. When Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the trafc targets display how the trafc target is moving relative to your aircraft. These vectors are calculated using the trafc targets track and ground speed and your aircrafts track and ground speed. These two values are combined to depict where the trafc target is moving purely with respect to your aircraft and give a forecast of where the trafc target will be, relative to your aircraft, in the near future. Selected Vector Type Figure 10-12 Trafc Motion Vector Type Selection NOTE: Absolute motion vectors are colored either white or cyan. Relative motion vectors are always green. The annunciation on the bottom of the dedicated trafc page indicates which vector type is selected and their length. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:07:41 PM
* Indicates Multiple Targets. Touch NEXT To View Each Target. Trafc Motion Vector (White) ADS-B and TCAS Status and Altitude Filter 3000 ft Below and Descending Range Ring Radius Selected Vector Motion and Duration Touch To View Trafc Menu Figure 10-13 Absolute Motion (White Vectors)
* Indicates Multiple Targets. Touch NEXT To View Each Target. ADS-B and TCAS Status and Altitude Filter Trafc Motion Vector (Green) Ownship Icon Range Ring Radius Selected Vector Motion and Duration Touch To View Trafc Menu Figure 10-14 Relative Motion (Green Vectors) Map Orientation Selected Trafc Info Touch For Next Target Proximate Non-Directional Trafc Ownship Icon Map Orientation Selected Trafc Info Touch For Next Target Proximate Non-Directional Trafc Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:07:42 PM Target Motion Vector Motion Vector Target Ownship Icon Ownship Icon Figure 10-15 Comparison of Absolute and Relative Motion Vectors With a Single Target Target Motion Vector Motion Vector Target Target Motion Vector Ownship Icon Target Motion Vector Ownship Icon Figure 10-16 Comparison of Absolute and Relative Motion Vectors With a Two Targets Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:07:42 PM 10.5.2.5 Vector Duration The Vector Duration selection sets the time that the vector will show the calculated distance and direction of the trafc target. A longer duration will result in a longer vector. Selected Vector Duration Figure 10-17 Trafc Motion Vector Duration Selection 10.5.2.6 Altitude Filter 1. The Altitude Filter limits the trafc displayed to the Below, Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the Displayed Trafc Range table. The lter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change the altitude lter value. 2. Select the desired altitude lter by touching the BELOW, NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED keys. The selection is displayed in the Altitude mode eld. Selected Altitude Filter Figure 10-18 Trafc Altitude Filter Selection Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:07:42 PM Altitude Mode Displayed Trafc Range Below Normal Above Unrestricted
-9900 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 9900 ft All Trafc Shown Table 10-13 Displayed Trafc Range 10.5.2.7 On Scene Mode When a GDL 88 (with software version 3.00, or later) is installed with a GTN in a helicopter, the GTN provides controls for enabling/disabling "On Scene"
mode in the GDL 88. "On Scene" mode decreases trafc alerts when operating near other helicopters (e.g., news reporting). 1. While viewing the Trafc page, touch the Menu key. 2. Touch the On Scene key to enable/disable On Scene mode. 10.5.3 Rotorcraft Trafc Page Orientation NOTE: Rotorcraft Trafc Page Orientation functionality is available in software version 5.12 or later. When ying at low speeds in a helicopter, heading may not always be closely aligned with track (it could easily be up to 180 degrees different). If the GTN is interfaced with a heading source, the ADS-B trafc page will remain xed with the ownship heading pointed up. However, if heading is not being received by the GTN, the display of ADS-B trafc will be unavailable. When one of the following conditions is true, the ADS-B trafc page will be unavailable:
Ownship directionality is invalid (no valid heading or track) GPS ground speed is less than 15 knots and ownship heading is not available While the trafc display is unavailable due to these conditions, trafc alerts will be provided in a non-bearing textual form at the top of the trafc page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-25 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:07:43 PM 10.6 RYAN TCAD 9900BX with the GDL 88 Ryan TCAD is a system that provides audio and visual alerts for trafc near your aircraft. The information from this system can be interfaced through the GTN series. Operating instructions and details on the modes of operation are described in the Ryan TCAD operators handbooks. TCAS-like symbols are used in the 9900BX. Altitude modes are available (normal, look up, look down, unrestricted). Ranges are manually controlled for the current shield. Trafc display range selections:
-
Ryan 9900BX 1 NM, 1 and 2 NM, 2 and 6 NM, 6 and 12 NM, and 12 and 24 NM. 10.6.1 Ryan TCAD Description NOTE: Refer to the Ryan TCAD Pilots Guide for a detailed description of the Ryan TCAD System. The Ryan TCAD (Trafc and Collision Alert Device) is an on-board air traf-
c display used to identify potential collision threats. TCAD computes rela-
tive altitude and range of threats from nearby Mode C and Mode S-equipped aircraft. TCAD will not detect aircraft without operating transponders or those that are beyond radar coverage. TCAD, within dened limits, creates a shield of airspace around the aircraft that detected trafc cannot penetrate without triggering an alert. TA: Trafc Advisory. This is trafc with 500 feet, or less, of altitude separation that is converging or maintaining altitude separation. PA: Proximity Advisory. This is trafc with 500 feet of altitude separation that is not a TA. TRFC: Other trafc. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-26 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:07:43 PM ADS-B and TCAD Status and Altitude Filter Alerted Target, 1200 ft Above and Climbing Range Ring Radius Selected Vector Motion and Duration Trafc Annunciation Touch Icon For Info Map Orientation Selected Trafc Info Touch For Next Target Trafc Motion Vector Ownship Icon Touch To View Trafc Menu Figure 10-19 Trafc Page for Ryan TCAD with GDL 88 10.6.2 Altitude Mode The GDL 88 has four altitude display modes: Normal (2,700 feet, Above
(-2,700 feet to +9,000 feet), Below (-9,000 feet to +2,700 feet), and Unrestricted
(9,900 feet). The GDL 88 continues to track up to 30 intruder aircraft within its maximum surveillance range, regardless of the altitude display mode selected. The selected altitude display mode is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the Trafc page. The Altitude Filter limits the trafc displayed to the Below, Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the Displayed Trafc Range table. The lter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. While viewing the Trafc page, touch the Altitude Filter key to change the altitude lter value. Select the desired altitude lter by touching the BELOW, NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED keys. The selection is displayed in the Altitude mode eld. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-27 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 27 7/9/2015 2:07:43 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Selected Altitude Filter Figure 10-20 Trafc Altitude Filter Selection Altitude Mode Displayed Trafc Range Below Normal Above Unrestricted
-9900 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 9900 ft All Trafc Shown Table 10-14 Displayed Trafc Range 10.6.3 TCAD Control Menu The TCAD Control Menu allows control over the settings for the TCAD Trafc display. Select TCAD Control Menu Figure 10-21 TCAD Trafc Menu 1. While viewing the Trafc menu, touch the TCAD Control key. Select Field Elevation Set Trafc Audio Volume Activate Operation Select Ground Mode Figure 10-22 TCAD Control Menu Select Local Baro Select Approach Mode: Set, Armed, or Active Appendix 2. Touch the desired key from the menu to make any settings. Index 10-28 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 28 7/9/2015 2:07:43 PM 10.6.3.1 Trafc Audio 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Trafc Audio key. Touch To Lower The Volume Touch To Raise The Volume Bar Graph Showing Volume Level Figure 10-23 TCAD Trafc 2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the TCAD Trafc Audio level. The selected volume will be shown as a percentage value and graphically with a bar graph. 3. Touch the Back key to return to the TCAD Control menu. 10.6.3.2 Field Elevation 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Field Elevation key. Touch To Manually Set Field Elevation Touch To Automatically Select The Destination Airport Field Elevation Figure 10-24 TCAD Trafc Field Elevation Selection 2. With the Use DEST APT key deactivated (no green bar), touch the Field Elevation key to manually select the Field Elevation for trafc reporting. Use the keypad to select the elevation value. 3. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected value will be shown in the Field Elevation key. 4. Touch the Use DEST APT key to automatically use the eld elevation of the destination airport of the active ight plan for trafc reporting. NOTE: Activating the Use DEST APT feature automatically uses the elevation for the current destination airport for the TCAD. If no destination airport is present in the GTN system, the TCAD will not receive a eld elevation and therefore not automatically enter approach mode. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-29 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 29 7/9/2015 2:07:43 PM 10.6.3.3 Baro 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the BARO key to manually select the barometric pressure. 2. Use the keypad to select the barometric pressure value. 3. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected value will be shown in the BARO key. 10.6.3.4 Operate 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Operate key to activate TCAD trafc. 2. Touching the Operate key toggles TCAD trafc operation on Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To and off. 10.6.3.5 Ground Mode 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Ground key to activate Ground Mode TCAD trafc. 2. Touching the Ground key toggles Ground Mode on and off. 10.6.3.6 Approach Mode 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Approach key to activate Approach Mode TCAD trafc. 2. Touching the Approach key toggles Approach Mode on and off. Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-30 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 30 7/9/2015 2:07:43 PM 10.7 TCAD 9900B Operation The TCAD 9900B provides a passive system that uses transponder replies from other aircraft to acquire trafc information. Altitude Separation 900 Feet, Closing Trafc Advisory Altitude Separation 0 Feet, Steady Altitude Separation Range Ring Radius Touch To Select Barometric Pressure Map Orientation Trafc Advisory Separation
00 Feet, Opening Ownship Icon Touch To Select Active Shield Touch To View Trafc Menu Figure 10-25 Trafc Page for Ryan TCAD 9900B Symbol Description Imminent Trafc Non-Imminent
(Trafc within 500 feet AND 1.0 NM; OR no altitude AND within 1.0 NM) Trafc Trafc Closing Vertically Trafc Diverging Vertically Trafc not Closing or Diverging Vertically Table 10-15 9900B TCAD Symbols 10.7.1 Select Local Barometric Pressure 1. While viewing the TCAD display, touch the Baro key to select the local barometric pressure. 2. Use the keypad to select the values and touch Enter to save the values. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-31 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 31 7/9/2015 2:07:44 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL 10.7.2 Select Active Shield 1. While viewing the TCAD display, touch the Active Shield key to select the Active Shield values (Departure, Enroute, or Ground). 2. Touch the desired setting to save the values. 10.7.3 TCAD 9900B Trafc Menu The TCAD 9900B Menu allows control over the settings for the TCAD Trafc Direct-To display. 1. While viewing the Trafc page, touch the Menu key. Set Trafc Audio Volume Proc Charts Wpt Info Select Shield Setup Figure 10-26 TCAD 9900B Trafc Menu Select Approach Mode: Set, Armed, or Active Map 2. Touch the desired key from the menu to make any settings. 10.7.3.1 Trafc Audio 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Trafc Audio key. Touch To Lower The Volume Touch To Raise The Volume Bar Graph Showing Volume Level Figure 10-27 TCAD Trafc Audio 2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the TCAD Trafc Audio level. The selected volume will be shown as a percentage value and graphically with a bar graph. 3. Touch the Back key to return to the TCAD Control menu. Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-32 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 32 7/9/2015 2:07:44 PM 10.7.3.2 Shield Setup The Shield Setup function allows you to select the Shield Type (mode of operation) and the size of the shield volume that will provide alerts when entered by aircraft. Approach Shield Type 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type key and touch the Approach Shield Type. Touch To Select Shield Type:
Approach or Standard Touch To Manually Set Field Elevation Touch To Automatically Select The Destination Airport Field Elevation Figure 10-28 TCAD 9900B Shield Setup for Approach 2. Touch the Field Elevation key. 3. With the Use DEST APT key deactivated (no green bar), touch the Field Elevation key to manually select the Field Elevation for trafc reporting. Use the keypad to select the elevation value. 4. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected Terrain value will be shown in the Field Elevation key. 5. Touch the Use DEST APT key to automatically use the eld elevation of the destination airport of the active ight plan for trafc reporting. NOTE: Activating the Use DEST APT feature automatically uses the elevation for the current destination airport for the TCAD. If no destination airport is present in the GTN system, the TCAD will not receive a eld elevation and therefore not automatically enter approach mode. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-33 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 33 7/9/2015 2:07:44 PM En Route, Standard, or Terminal Shield Type 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type key and touch the desired Shield Type: Enroute, Standard, or Terminal. Touch To Select Shield Type:
Approach or Standard Touch To Manually Set Shield Height Touch To Shield Range Figure 10-29 TCAD 9900B Shield Setup for En Route, Standard, and Terminal 2. Touch the Shield Height key and use the keypad to select the Shield Height value. The selected value will be shown in the Shield Range key. 3. Touch the Shield Range key and use the keypad to select the Shield Range value. The selected value will be shown in the Shield Range key. 10.7.3.3 Approach Mode 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Approach key to activate Approach Mode TCAD trafc. 2. Touching the Approach key toggles Approach Mode between Set, Armed, or Active. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-34 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 34 7/9/2015 2:07:44 PM 10.8 TCAD 9900BX Operation The TCAD 9900BX provides an active system that interrogates other aircraft to acquire trafc information. Altitude Separation 1600 Feet, Ascending Ownship Icon Range Ring Radius Touch To Select Barometric Pressure Trafc Annunciation Map Orientation Other Trafc, Separation 1300 Feet Above Trafc Advisory Altitude Separation 200 Feet, Descending Touch To Select Altitude Filter Touch To View Trafc Menu Figure 10-30 Trafc Page for Ryan TCAD 9900BX Symbol Description Trafc Advisory Proximity Advisory
(color may be congured as cyan) Other Trafc
(color may be congured as cyan) Out-of-Range Trafc Advisory Table 10-16 9900BX (TCAS) Symbols 10.8.1 Select Local Barometric Pressure Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System 1. While viewing the TCAD display, touch the Baro key to select the local barometric pressure. 2. Use the keypad to select the values and touch Enter to save Messages the values. Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-35 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 35 7/9/2015 2:07:45 PM 10.8.2 Select Altitude Filter The Altitude Filter limits the trafc displayed to the Below, Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the Displayed Trafc Range table. The lter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. While viewing the Trafc page, touch the Altitude Filter key to change the altitude lter value. Select the desired altitude lter by touching the Normal, Above, Below, or Unrestricted keys. The selection is displayed in the Altitude Filter eld. Selected Altitude Filter Figure 10-31 Trafc Altitude Filter Selection Altitude Mode Displayed Trafc Range Below Normal Above Unrestricted
-9900 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 2700 ft
-2700 ft to 9900 ft All Trafc Shown Table 10-17 Displayed Trafc Range 10.8.3 TCAD 9900BX Trafc Menu The TCAD 9900BX Menu allows control over the settings for the TCAD Trafc display. 1. While viewing the Trafc page, touch the Menu key. Select Shield Setup Set Trafc Audio Volume Select Approach Mode: Set, Armed, or Active Toggle Ground Mode On or Off Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 10-36 Figure 10-32 TCAD 9900BX Trafc Menu 2. Touch the desired key from the menu to make any settings. Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 36 7/9/2015 2:07:45 PM 10.8.3.1 Trafc Audio 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Trafc Audio key. Touch To Lower The Volume Touch To Raise The Volume Bar Graph Showing Volume Level Figure 10-33 TCAD Trafc Audio 2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the TCAD Trafc Audio level. The selected volume will be shown as a percentage value and graphically with a bar graph. 3. Touch the Back key to return to the TCAD Control menu. 10.8.3.2 Shield Setup The Shield Setup function allows you to select the Shield Type (mode of operation) and the size of the shield volume that will provide alerts when entered by aircraft. Approach Shield Type 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type key and touch the Approach Shield Type. Touch To Select Shield Type:
Approach or Standard Touch To Manually Set Field Elevation Touch To Automatically Select The Destination Airport Field Elevation Figure 10-34 TCAD 9900BX Shield Setup for Approach 2. Touch the Field Elevation key. 3. With the Use DEST APT key deactivated (no green bar), touch the Field Elevation key to manually select the Field Elevation for trafc reporting. Use the keypad to select the elevation value. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 10-37 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 37 7/9/2015 2:07:45 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System 4. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected value will be shown in the Field Elevation key. 5. Touch the Use DEST APT key to automatically use the eld elevation of the destination airport of the active ight plan for trafc reporting. NOTE: Activating the Use DEST APT feature automatically uses the elevation for the current destination airport for the TCAD. If no destination airport is present in the GTN system, the TCAD will not receive a eld elevation and therefore not automatically enter approach mode. En Route, Standard, or Terminal Shield Type 1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type key and touch the desired Shield Type: Enroute, Standard, or Terminal. Touch To Select Shield Type:
Approach or Standard Touch To Manually Set Shield Height Touch To Shield Range Figure 10-35 TCAD 9900BX Shield Setup for En Route, Standard, and Terminal 2. Touch the Shield Height key and use the keypad to select the Shield Height value. The selected value will be shown in the Shield Range key. 3. Touch the Shield Range key and use the keypad to select the Shield Range value. The selected value will be shown in the Shield Range key. 10.8.3.3 Approach Mode 1. While viewing the Trafc menu, touch the Approach key to activate Approach Mode TCAD trafc. 2. Touching the Approach key toggles Approach Mode between Set, Armed, or Active. Messages 10.8.3.4 Ground Mode Symbols Appendix 1. While viewing the Trafc menu, touch the Ground key to activate Ground Mode TCAD trafc. 2. Touching the Ground key toggles Ground Mode between On and Off. Index 10-38 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 38 7/9/2015 2:07:45 PM 11 TERRAIN 11.1 Terrain Congurations During power-up of the GTN 7XX, the terrain/obstacle database versions are displayed along with a disclaimer. At the same time, the Terrain system self-test begins. A failure message is issued if the terrain test fails. Garmin provides the following terrain awareness solutions within the GTN 7XX environment:
Terrain Proximity - This is the standard Terrain function and refers to the display of the relative terrain elevations on the moving map. No aural alerts of any type are provided by a Terrain Proximity conguration. TAWS-B (Optional) - A system developed to meet the terrain alerting and ground proximity requirements for Class B TAWS systems as dened in TSO-C151c. Garmins GTN 7XX Terrain Awareness and Warning System
(TAWS-B) is an optional feature and is intended to provide the ight crew with both aural and visual alerts to aid in preventing inadvertent Controlled Flight Into Terrain (CFIT). HTerrain Proximity - This is the standard Terrain function and refers to the display of the relative terrain elevations on the moving map. No aural alerts of any type are provided by a Terrain Proximity conguration. HTAWS - (HTAWS) is an optional feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled ight into terrain. Garmin TAWS satises TSO-C194 requirements for certication. TAWS-A (Optional) - A system to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled ight into terrain (CFIT) as dened in TSO-C151c. TAWS-A provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. NOTE: Obstacles are removed from the Terrain and TAWS pages at ranges greater than 10 NM. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:07:45 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc 11.2 General Database Information Garmin TAWS and HTAWS use terrain and obstacle information supplied by government and private sources. The data undergoes verication by Garmin to conrm accuracy of the content. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive. Pilots must familiarize themselves with the appropriate charts for safe ight. NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government and private agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data. The terrain database is contained on the datacard. 11.2.1 Database Versions The version and area of coverage of each terrain/obstacle database is shown on the System-System Status page. Databases are checked for integrity at power-
up. If a database is found to be missing and/or decient, the TAWS/HTAWS system fails the self-test and displays the TAWS/HTAWS system failure message. 11.2.2 HTAWS Database Requirements To function properly, HTAWS requires the use of databases specic to Terrain helicopters and HTAWS. The databases required are:
Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 2.5 arc-second Terrain Database Helicopter Obstacle Database Helicopter Navigation Database 11.2.3 Database Updates Terrain and obstacle databases are updated periodically with the latest terrain and obstacle data. Visit the Garmin website to check for newer versions of terrain/obstacle databases. Compare database cycle numbers to determine if a newer version is available. includes either The database update process reprogramming or replacing the database card and inserting the updated card in the card slot on the unit front panel. The terrain/obstacle database may be downloaded via the internet and the card reprogrammed using a USB programmer available from Garmin. Contact Garmin at 866-739-5687 or at www.garmin.com or http://y.garmin.com for more information. Index 11-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:07:46 PM To update your terrain/obstacle databases:
1. Prepare the card with new terrain data. 2. Turn off the power to the unit. 3. Remove the old terrain data card and insert the new card into the unit. 4. Turn on the unit and verify that the Terrain Database verication is succesful. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 5. Verify that TAWS/HTAWS passes the self-test (if congured for FPL TAWS or HTAWS). 11.2.4 Terrain Database Areas of Coverage Direct-To The xed-wing terrain database provides worldwide coverage. The following describes the area of coverage available in each helicopter terrain database. Regional denitions may change without notice. Proc Charts Database Americas - North Americas - South Atlantic - North Atlantic - South Pacic - North Pacic - South Coverage Area Latitudes: 0 to N90 Longitudes: W180 to W30 Latitudes: N30 to S90 Longitudes: W180 to W30 Latitudes: 0 to N90 Longitudes: W30 to E90 Latitudes: N30 to S90 Longitudes: W30 to E90 Latitudes: 0 to N90 Longitudes: E60 to E180 Latitudes: N30 to S90 Longitudes: E60 to E180 Table 11-1 Terrain Database Coverage NOTE: Because of higher resolution helicopter terrain data, the world-wide data won't t on the terrain database card. Therefore, data is regionalized. If you have the wrong region database for your present position, then you get the message that terrain is unavailable for the current location and a crosshatched pattern on the terrain display. Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:07:46 PM 11.2.5 Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage The following describes the area of coverage available in each database. Regional denitions may change without notice. Database United States (US) US/Europe Coverage Area Limited to the United States plus some areas of Canada, Mexico, Caribbean, and the Pacic. Alaska, Austria, Belgium, Canada*, Caribbean*, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hawaii, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Mexico*, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, United Kingdom, United States
* Indicates partial coverage Table 11-2 Obstacle Database Coverage NOTE: It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the Obstacle Database. Obstacle databases created for GTN software version 5.10 or later include all power lines or only HOT lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed. Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) Lines are those power lines that are co-located with other FAA-identied obstacles. The installed obstacle database type can be veried on the System Status page. Power line data is available for the contiguous United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:07:46 PM 11.3 Terrain Proximity Garmin Terrain Proximity is a non-TSO-C151c-certied terrain awareness system provided as a standard feature of GTN 7XX to increase situational awareness and help reduce controlled ight into terrain (CFIT). Terrain may be displayed on the Map and Terrain pages. Terrain Proximity uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level (MSL)-based altitude (GSL altitude) and is used to determine Terrain alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts. Terrain utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GSL altitude, Terrain displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft. In this manner, Terrain Proximity can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions. Terrain requires the following to operate properly:
The system must have a valid 3-D GPS position solution. The system must have a valid terrain/obstacle database. View Layers 360 Arc Flight Plan Legend Figure 11-1 Terrain Proximity Page Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:07:46 PM 11.3.1 Displaying Terrain Proximity The Terrain page is in the Terrain function. 1. Touch the Terrain key on the Home page. Terrain Page Title Heading Annunciation Active Flight Plan Leg Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived) Red Terrain Is Above Or Within 100 ft Below The Aircraft Altitude Ownship Position Range Rings Yellow Terrain Is Between 100 ft and 1000 ft Below The Aircraft Altitude Icon shows point obstacle overlay is active
(software version 5.12, or later) Terrain Menu Key Terrain Type Icon shows wire obstacle overlay is active (software version 5.12, or later) Figure 11-2 Terrain Page 2. Touch the Menu key for options. Selected View Flight Plan Selected To Show Terrain and Obstacle Legend Selected To Show Figure 11-3 Terrain Menu Options Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:07:46 PM 11.3.1.1 Terrain Page 120 Arc or 360 Rings Select the 120 Arc or 360 rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the 360 or Arc keys from the Menu. 1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key. 2. Touch the 360 or Arc key. Outer Arc Range Heading Annunciation Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived) 120 Arc Outline Red Terrain Is Above Or Within 100 ft Below The Aircraft Altitude Yellow Terrain Is Between 100 ft and 1000 ft Below The Aircraft Altitude Terrain Scale Obstacle Scale (software version 6.00, or later) Terrain Type Figure 11-4 Terrain 120 Arc View 11.3.1.2 Display Flight Plan on Terrain Page Select the display of the active ight plan on the Terrain page. Touch the Flight Plan key to toggle the display of active ight plan on or off. 11.3.1.3 Display Terrain and Obstacle Legend Select the display of the Terrain Legend on the Terrain page. Touch the Legend key to toggle the display of the Terrain Legend on or off. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:07:46 PM 11.3.2 Terrain Limitations Terrain Proximity displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft. The displayed alerts are advisory in nature only. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database. However, all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be inaccurate. Terrain information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. Never use this information for navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles. Terrain Proximity uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. The displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive. NOTE: The data contained in the Terrain databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data. NOTE: TERRAIN, TAWS-A, TAWS-B, HTAWS, or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY functionality will be available via the Terrain page, depending on the installed hardware and conguration. HTAWS or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY are available in software version 4.00, or later. TAWS-A is available in software version 5.00, or later. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:07:46 PM 11.4 Terrain Awareness and Warning System
(TAWS-B) Optional TAWS (Terrain Awareness and Warning System) is an optional feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled ight into terrain
(CFIT). TAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. TAWS satises TSO-C151c Class B requirements for certication. Class B TAWS is required for all Part 91 turbine aircraft operations with six or more passenger seats and for Part 135 turbine aircraft operations with six to nine passenger seats (FAR Parts 91.223, 135.154). 11.4.1 TAWS-B Requirements TAWS requires the following to operate properly:
A valid terrain/obstacle database A valid 3-D GPS position solution 11.4.2 TAWS-B Limitations NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data. TAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft. Compliance with TAWS B alerts and warnings is MANDATORY. When a TAWS B pull up annunciation is issued, the pilot is required to pull up. TAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verication by Garmin to conrm accuracy of the content, per TSO-C151c. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:07:46 PM 11.4.3 Computing GPS Altitude for TAWS TAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level (MSL)-based altitude (GSL altitude) and is used to determine TAWS alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts. The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS are referenced to Mean Sea Level. Using the GPS position and GSL altitude, TAWS displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircrafts ight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions. 11.4.4 Baro-Corrected Altitude Versus GSL Altitude Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions. The most accurate baro-
corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the ight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions seldom match the standard conditions dened by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have xed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude
(as read from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircrafts true altitude differing from the baro-corrected altitude. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:07:46 PM 11.4.5 Using TAWS-B During unit power-up, the terrain/obstacle database versions are displayed. At the same time, TAWS self-test begins. One of the following aural messages is generated:
TAWS System Test OK TAWS System Failure TAWS information can be displayed on the Map page. Terrain and obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet Above Ground Level (AGL) are displayed in yellow and red. The GTN 7XX adjusts colors automatically as the aircraft altitude changes. View Layers TAWS 360 Arc Flight Plan Legend TAWS Inhibit Test TAWS Figure 11-5 TAWS-B Page Functional Diagram 11.4.6 Displaying TAWS-B Data TAWS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols shown below are used to represent terrain, obstacles, and threat locations. Obstacles are removed when more than 2000 ft below the aircraft. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:07:47 PM Projected Flight Path Threat Location 100 ft Threshold Unlighted Obstacle Terrain above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude (Red) 1000 ft Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow) Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black) Figure 11-6 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle
< 1000 ft
> 1000 ft
< 1000 ft
> 1000 ft AGL AGL AGL AGL Threat Location Indicator Terrain Color Terrain/
Obstacle Location Alert Level WARNING
(Red) CAUTION
(Yellow) Red Yellow White Terrain/
Obstacle at or within 100 ft below current aircraft altitude Terrain/
Obstacle between 100 ft and 1000 ft below current aircraft altitude Terrain/
Obstacle between 1000 ft and 2000 ft below current aircraft altitude Table 11-3 TAWS-B Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix l o b m y S e l c a t s b O Index 11-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:07:47 PM Tower Windmill Windmill in Group Power Line Table 11-4 Obstacle Icon Types Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group. Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap. 11.4.7 TAWS-B Page TAWS information is displayed on the Map and Terrain pages. The TAWS Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and threat location data in relation to the aircrafts current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Flight plan information (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) included in the ight plan are displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected ight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest threat location on the TAWS Page. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. If orientation is not heading up, it will be track up. Two views are available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360 default display and the radar-like ARC (120) display. Map range is adjustable with the In and Out keys from 1 to 200 NM, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs). 11.4.7.1 Terrain Page Layers 1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key. Select Terrain View Select Displayed Layer Select TAWS Function Figure 11-7 Terrain Page TAWS-B Menu Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:07:47 PM 2. Touch the Flight Plan key to toggle the display of the active ight plan. Flight Plan Terrain Overlay TAWS-B Annunciation Icon shows wire obstacle overlay is active (software version 5.12, or later) Terrain Legend Obstacle Legend
(software version 6.00, or later) Icon shows point obstacle overlay is active (software version 5.12, or later) Figure 11-8 Flight Plan and Legend Shown On TAWS-B Terrain Page 3. Touch the Legend key to toggle the display of the Terrain and Obstacle legend. Terrain Page View 11.4.7.2 Select the 120 Arc or 360 rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the 360 or Arc keys from the Menu. 1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key. 2. Touch the 360 or Arc key. 11.4.7.3 Terrain Page TAWS-B Selections The TAWS selections allow you to inhibit aural TAWS alerts and to send a request to the TAWS equipment to run its internal tests. After cycling power, TAWS will no longer be inhibited. 1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:07:47 PM 2. Touch the TAWS Inhibit key to toggle the inhibiting of TAWS alerts. TAWS Alerts Inhibited TAWS Inhibited Annunciation Test TAWS - Only Available on Ground Figure 11-9 TAWS-B Alerts Inhibited Selected 3. Touch the Test TAWS key to test the TAWS system. This function is not available when the aircraft is in the air. TAWS Test Display TAWS Test Annunciation Figure 11-10 TAWS-B Test Selected 11.4.8 TAWS-B Alerts Alerts are issued when ight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS software algorithms. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. TAWS alert types are shown in the TAWS Alerts Summary with corresponding annunciations and aural messages. When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the TAWS page. If the TAWS page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the page being viewed. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:07:48 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Obstacle Group Blinking Message Touch To Display Terrain Page Touch To Remove Pop-Up And Remain On Current Page TAWS Annunciation Figure 11-11 Terrain Alert Pop-Up To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Wpt Info Touch the Go to Terrain key (accesses the TAWS Page) OR Touch the Close key to remove the pop-up alert If the pilot takes no action, the pop-up will be removed when the alert is no longer active. 11.4.8.1 TAWS-B Alerting Colors and Symbology Color and symbols are also associated with TAWS alerts. The alert annunciations show in the bottom left corner of the display. The three TAWS alert levels and their associated text coloring as well as any associated symbology are shown in the following table. Alert Level Annunciator Text Threat Location Example Visual Annunciation Indicator Warning White text on red background Caution Black text on yellow background Informational Black text on white Not Applicable background Table 11-5 TAWS-B Alert Colors and Symbology Index 11-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:07:48 PM Alert Type Alert Annunciation Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR-W) FLTA Terrain Warning
(RTC-W, ITI-W) FLTA Obstacle Warning
(ROC-W, IOI-W) FLTA Wire Warning
(ILI-W, RLC-W) FLTA Terrain Caution
(RTC-C, ITI-C) FLTA Obstacle Caution
(ROC-C, IOI-C) FLTA Wire Caution
(ILI-C, RLC-C) Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA) Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR-C) Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR-C) Voice Call Out
(VCO-500) None Aural Message Pull Up Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up*
or Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up*
or Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up
"Wire Ahead Pull Up, Wire Ahead Pull Up"
Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead*
or Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead*
or Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle
"Wire Ahead"
Too Low, Terrain Sink Rate Dont Sink*
or Too Low, Terrain Five-Hundred
* Alerts with multiple messages are congurable at installation and are installation-
dependent. Alerts for the default conguration are indicated with asterisks. Table 11-6 TAWS-B Alerts Summary Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:07:48 PM 11.4.8.2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notication when the aircraft is determined to be descending upon terrain at an excessive rate. The parameters for the alert as dened by TSO-C151c are shown below. i
) t e e F
(
n a r r e T e v o b A t h g e H i
"SIN K R A TE"
"PULL UP"
"PULL UP"
Figure 11-12 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria 11.4.8.3 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC), Reduced Required Line Clearance (RLC), and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) alerts are issued when the aircraft ight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum clearance values in the FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values table. When an RTC, RLC, and/or a ROC alert is issued, a threat location indicator is displayed on the TAWS Page. Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI), Imminent Line Impact (ILI), and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircrafts projected path. ITI, ILI, and IOI alerts are accompanied by a threat location indicator displayed on the TAWS Page. The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical ight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in the following table. 11-18 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:07:48 PM Flight Phase En Route Terminal Approach Departure Minimum Clearance Altitude (feet) Level Flight Descending 700 350 150 100 500 300 100 100 Table 11-7 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values During nal approach, FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 NM of the approach runway or below 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the runway threshold. 11.4.8.4 Premature Descent Alerting A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is signicantly below the normal approach path to a runway. PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 NM of the destination airport and ends when the aircraft is either 0.5 NM from the runway threshold or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the threshold. During the nal descent, algorithms set a threshold for alerting based on speed, distance, and other parameters.
Figure 11-13 PDA Alerting Threshold PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when inhibiting TAWS and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS is inhibited, the alert annunciation TER INHB is shown. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:07:48 PM 11.4.8.5 Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS-B PDA/FLTA Alerting TAWS also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the PDA/FLTA aural and visual alerts. Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS and always remember to enable the system when appropriate. Only the PDA and FLTA alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode. After cycling power, TAWS will no longer be inhibited. Terrain (TAWS) Inhibited Annunciation Touch To Toggle TAWS Inhibit. TAWS Inhibited shown. Figure 11-14 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled (TAWS Inhibited) Annunciation 1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key. 2. Touch the TAWS Inhibit key to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice dependent on current state). A green bar in the key indicates the TAWS is inhibited. 11.4.8.6 Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert (NCR) The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Take-Off alert (also referred to as Altitude Loss After Take-Off) provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff. The aural message Dont Sink is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet Distance from the departure airport is 2 NM or less Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 The NCR alerting parameters as dened by TSO-C151c are shown below. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:07:48 PM i
) t e e F
(
n a r r e T e v o b A t h g e H i DONT SINK or TOO LOW, TERRAIN Altitude Loss (Feet) Figure 11-15 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss DONT SINK or TOO LOW, TERRAIN Sink Rate (FPM) Figure 11-16 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix i
) t e e F
(
n a r r e T e v o b A t h g e H i 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:07:49 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 11.4.8.7 Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) TAWS-B provides aural advisory alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at 500 feet above the terrain, as determined by the radar altimeter (if greater than 5 NM from the nearest airport) or 500 feet above the nearest runway threshold elevation (if less than 5 NM from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this altitude, TAWS-B issues the aural alert message Five-hundred. 11.4.8.8 TAWS-B Not Available Alert TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS position solution along with specic vertical accuracy minimums. Should the position solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation TAWS N/A is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B page. The aural message TAWS Not Available is generated. When the GPS signal is re-
established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural message TAWS Available is generated (when the aircraft is airborne). 11.4.8.9 TAWS-B Failure Alert TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message TAWS System Failure is generated along with a TAWS FAIL annunciation. 11.4.9 TAWS-B System Status During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations. The system test can also be manually initiated. An aural alert is issued at test completion. TAWS System Testing is disabled when ground speed exceeds 30 knots. Alert Type Alert Annunciation Aural Message TAWS Available None TAWS Available TAWS System Test in Progress TAWS System Test Pass TAWS N/A TAWS Alerting is Disabled TAWS System Test Fail None None TAWS System Test OK TAWS Not Available None TAWS System Failure Table 11-8 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations Index 11-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:07:49 PM 11.5 11.5.1 HTAWS (Optional) Introduction NOTE: TERRAIN, TAWS, HTAWS, or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY functionality will be available via the Terrain page, depending on the installed hardware and conguration. HTAWS or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY are available in software version 4.00, or later. 11.5.1.1 Overview Garmins Helicopter Terrain Awareness Warning System (HTAWS) is an optional feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled ight into terrain. Garmin HTAWS is TSO-C194 authorized. Units installed in helicopters that do not have HTAWS installed will display HTerrain Proximity. This is noted by the ve color terrain scale which is appropriate to the low altitude operating environment for helicopters. HTAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles are a hazard to the aircraft. HTAWS Relative Terrain Depiction Rotorcraft Ownship Figure 11-17 Map Page with Terrain NOTE: HTAWS-enabled units can be identied by going to the Terrain page and checking the lower right-corner for HTAWS. 11.5.1.2 Operating Criteria Garmin HTAWS requires the following to operate properly:
The system must have a valid 3D GPS position solution The system must have a valid terrain/obstacle database. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:07:49 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 11.5.1.3 Limitations NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-
validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data. HTAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the ight path of the aircraft. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database. However, all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be inaccurate. Never use this information for navigation. NOTE: Terrain databases do not consistently represent foliage. Some trees may extend above HTAWS protection limits in some operating modes. Terrain information is based on terrain elevation data contained in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid terrain. HTAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. The data undergoes verication by Garmin to conrm accuracy of the content. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive. 11.5.2 HTAWS Operation 11.5.2.1 HTAWS Alerting HTAWS uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GSL altitude) and is used to determine HTAWS alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts. HTAWS utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GSL altitude, HTAWS displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and Index 11-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:07:49 PM altitude of the aircraft. The GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircrafts ight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, HTAWS can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions. Detailed alert modes are described later in this section. 11.5.2.2 Power Up During power-up of the unit, the terrain/obstacle database versions are displayed along with a disclaimer to the pilot. At the same time, HTAWS self-
test begins. HTAWS gives the following aural messages upon test completion:
HTAWS System Test, OK, if the system passes the test HTAWS System Failure, if the system fails the test A test failure is also annunciated visually for HTAWS, as shown in the HTAWS Alert Summary table. 11.5.3 HTAWS Page HTAWS is shown on the Terrain page when HTAWS is available. 120 Arc View Rotorcraft Ownship Icon shows point obstacle overlay is active (software version 5.12, or later) Icon shows wire obstacle overlay is active (software version 5.12, or later) Figure 11-18 Terrain/HTAWS Page Relative Terrain Elevation depiction HTAWS Annunciation Terrain information, aircraft ground track, and GPS-derived MSL altitude are displayed on the page. The GSL above altitude display in the top right corner of the display reminds the pilot that altitude is GPS-derived. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-25 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:07:49 PM The HTAWS page menu provides options to acknowledge caution alerts, reduce protection, or inhibit alerting. Figure 11-19 HTAWS Terrain Menu 11.5.3.1 View Selection The HTAWS Page has two selectable view settings:
HTAWS Terrain Colorization Overlay Rotorcraft Ownship 360 View Terrain Legend Obstacle Legend
(software version 6.00, or later) Figure 11-20 Terrain Page with HTAWS - 360 View 360 ViewView from above aircraft depicting surrounding terrain on all sides. Arc (120) ViewView of terrain ahead of and 60 to either side of the aircraft ight path. NOTE: If a heading source is available the HTAWS page will be oriented heading up. If no heading source is available the HTAWS page will be oriented track up. 1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS Page, touch MENU. Touch Arc or 360. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-26 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:07:50 PM 2. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. The HTAWS Page displays the selected view. Repeat step 1 to select the alternate view, and touch Back. 11.5.3.2 HTAWS Inhibit HTAWS provides an inhibit mode. This mode deactivates aural and visual alerts when they are deemed unnecessary by the aircrew. Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting the HTAWS system and always remember to enable the system when appropriate. VCOs are not inhibited in Inhibit Mode. See section 3 for more information on HTAWS alerts. When alerting is inhibited, all FLTA aural and visual alerting is suppressed. HTAWS should only be inhibited when in visual contact with terrain and when the pilot can be assured of maintaining clearance from terrain and obstacles. When conducting en route operations and operations from published airports and heliports, HTAWS should be operated in Normal mode. HTAWS congured units will always start up with HTAWS alerts uninhibited. To inhibit HTAWS alerts:
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU. 2. Touch HTAWS Inhibit. The green bar will show when HTAWS Inhibit is active. 3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. The HTAWS annunciation is displayed alerts are inhibited. The in the terrain annunciator eld whenever HTAWS is inhibited. NOTE: When the ground speed is less than 30 knots HTAWS will automatically display the HTAWS INHB annunciation. This indicates that HTAWS is no longer providing protection. This automatic TAWS INHB cannot be removed by menu option selection. Menu selections for INHIBIT HTAWS and RP Mode remain available when HTAWS is automatically inhibited due to groundspeed. If the pilot selects a mode on the menu while HTAWS is auto inhibited because it is less than 30 knots then the unit will enter that mode once ground speed exceeds 30 knots. Hence, the presence of these selections on the Menu. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-27 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 27 7/9/2015 2:07:50 PM 11.5.3.3 External HTAWS Inhibit Control An optional installation is allowed for providing an external HTAWS Inhibit switch. Touching the external HTAWS Inhibit switch toggles the HTAWS inhibit on and off in the same manner as using the Terrain Menu selection. 11.5.3.4 Reduced Protection Mode The Reduce Protection (RP) functionality allows operating with a reduction in the alerting thresholds, and suppresses visual and aural annunciation of caution alerts. Reduced protection allows low level operations and landings off airport with a minimum number of alerts while continuing to provide protection from terrain and obstacles. Reduced Protection should only be selected when operating in visual contact with the terrain as alerting times are signicantly less than in normal mode. There is support for an external RP Mode switch and an external Alert Acknowledge switch. To toggle protection:
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS Page, touch MENU. 2. Touch the RP Mode key to toggle the RP mode on and off. The green bar will show when RP mode is active. 3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. The RP Mode annunciation is displayed in the terrain annunciator eld and in the lower right corner of the terrain page whenever protection is reduced. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-28 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 28 7/9/2015 2:07:50 PM 11.5.3.5 HTAWS Manual Test Garmin HTAWS provides a manual test capability which veries the proper operation of the aural and visual annunciations of the system prior to a ight. To manually test the HTAWS system:
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS Page, touch MENU. 2. Touch the Test HTAWS key. 3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. An aural message is played giving the test results:
HTAWS System Test, OK if the system passes the test HTAWS System Failure if the system fails the test NOTE: HTAWS System Testing is disabled when in the air so as not to impede HTAWS alerting. 11.5.3.6 HTAWS Legend 1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU. 2. Touch the Legend key to toggle the legend on or off. The green bar will show when the Legend is active. 3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. Figure 11-21 HTAWS Terrain and Obstacle Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-29 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 29 7/9/2015 2:07:50 PM Color Red Orange Yellow Green Black Description Terrain is more than 250 ft above the aircraft. Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft above the aircraft. Terrain is between 250 ft and 0 ft below the aircraft. Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft below the aircraft. Terrain is more than 500 ft below the aircraft. Table 11-9 HTAWS Terrain Altitude Color Description Aircraft Altitude +250 ft Aircraft Altitude Aircraft Altitude -250 ft Aircraft Altitude -500 ft Red Terrain is more than 250 ft above the aircraft altitude Orange Terrain is between 250 ft and 0 ft above the aircraft altitude Yellow Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft below the aircraft altitude Green Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft below the aircraft altitude Black Terrain more than 500 ft below the aircraft altitude Figure 11-22 HTAWS Terrain Altitude Colors Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-30 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 30 7/9/2015 2:07:50 PM 11.5.3.7 Flight Plan Overlay 1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU. 2. Touch the Flight Plan key to toggle the overlay of the active ight plan on or off. The green bar will show when the Flight Plan overlay is shown. 3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. 11.5.4 HTAWS Symbols The symbols and colors in the following gures and table are used to represent obstacles and the location of terrain threats on the HTAWS Page. Each color is associated with a height above terrain. Obstacles are ALWAYS shown on the TAWS page at 10 NM and below. NOTE: If an obstacle or terrain cell and the projected ight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest threat location on the HTAWS Page. Tower Windmill Windmill in Group Power Line Table 11-10 Obstacle Icon Types Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group. Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-31 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 31 7/9/2015 2:07:50 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle
< 1000 ft
> 1000 ft
< 1000 ft
> 1000 ft AGL AGL AGL AGL Obstacle Color Obstacle Location Red Yellow White Obstacle is at or above current aircraft altitude Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft below current aircraft altitude Obstacle is 250 ft, or more, below current aircraft altitude. Obstacles are removed when more than 500 ft below the helicopter. l o b m y S e l c a t s b O Table 11-11 HTAWS Obstacle Colors and Symbology Obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude (Red) 250 ft Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow) Obstacle is 250 ft, or more, below the aircraft altitude (White) Figure 11-23 HTAWS Obstacle Altitude Colors and Symbology Threat Location Indicator Alert Level WARNING (Red) CAUTION (Yellow) Table 11-12 HTAWS Alert Coloring and Symbology Index 11-32 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 32 7/9/2015 2:07:51 PM 11.5.5 HTAWS Alerts Alerts are issued when ight conditions meet parameters that are set within HTAWS software algorithms. HTAWS alerts employ either a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed. Aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Annunciations appear in a dedicated eld in the lower left corner of the display. Annunciations are color-coded according to the HTAWS Alert Summary table. Pop-up terrain alerts will occur if an HTAWS alert is activated while not on the HTAWS page. There are two options when an alert is displayed:
To acknowledge the pop-up alert and return to the currently viewed page:
Touch the Close key. To acknowledge the pop-up alert and quickly access the HTAWS Page:
Touch the ENT key. NOTE: To further capture the attention of the pilot, HTAWS issues aural
(voice) messages that accompany visual annunciations and pop-up alerts. For a summary of aural messages, see the HTAWS Alert Summary table. NOTE: HTAWS Caution Alerts are displayed as constant black text on a yellow background; HTAWS Warning Alerts are displayed as constant white text on a red background. 11.5.5.1 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance The unit will issue terrain alerts not only when the aircraft altitude is below the terrain elevation but also when the aircraft is projected to come within minimum clearance values of the terrain. This alerting, called Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA), is also provided for obstacles. The FLTA functionality looks ahead of the aircraft using GPS position information and the terrain and obstacle databases to provide alerts when the predicted ight path does not clear the terrain or obstacle by the required clearance. The amount of clearance required varies depending on position relative to airports and heliports, in order to reduce the occurrence of nuisance alerting. Any threat locations are depicted on the display. There are 2 levels of severity for FLTA alerts. They are cautionary (amber) and warning (red) in nature and are described in further detail below. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-33 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 33 7/9/2015 2:07:51 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc FLTA CAUTIONEstimated potential impact in approximately 30 seconds after a caution pop-up alert and annunciation. FLTA caution alerts are accompanied by the aural message Caution Terrain; Caution Terrain. Similarly, a Caution Obstacle; Caution Obstacle alert is also provided. The time to an alert can vary with conditions, therefore there is no guarantee of a 30 second caution alert being issued. FLTA WARNING Warning pop-up alerts are issued 15 seconds prior to an estimated potential impact in normal mode and approximately 10 seconds in RP Mode. FLTA warning alerts are accompanied by the aural message Warning - Terrain, Terrain . Similarly, a Warning -
Obstacle, Obstacle alert is also provided. The time to an alert can vary with conditions, therefore there is no guarantee of a 15/10 second warning alert being issued. The alerts are annunciated visually through the annunciator status bar, a pop-up alert box, and the red and yellow areas on the HTAWS page. The alerts are annunciated aurally through a voice message indicating the potential threat, such as Caution - Terrain, Terrain or Warning - Obstacle, Obstacle. Charts 11.5.5.2 HTAWS Voice Call Out Aural Alert The purpose of the Voice Call Out (VCO) aural alert messages are to provide an advisory alert to the pilot that the aircraft is between 500 feet and 100 feet above terrain in 100 foot increments. When the aircraft descends within the selected distance from the terrain, the aural message for the selected height above terrain is generated. There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the aural message. HTAWS allows an additional 50 foot VCO alert with radar altimeter input. Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-34 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 34 7/9/2015 2:07:51 PM 11.5.5.3 HTAWS Voice Call Out Selection The Voice Call Out (VCO) selection is available when HTAWS is installed. The VCO functionality provides a voice annunciation of the aircrafts height above terrain or the nearest airport, heliport, runway, or helipad when that threshold is rst crossed. The available call outs include Five Hundred through One Hundred in one hundred foot intervals. The voice call outs can be enabled and disabled through the Voice Call Outs Selection option on the System - Audio page. NOTE: VCOs are available down to 100 feet above terrain when HTAWS is installed and use GSL above terrain to generate call outs (no radar altimeter required). If a radar altimeter is interfaced to the GTN, alerts are available down to 50 feet and the height above terrain when the radar altimeter is used to generate the callouts. To select the Voice Call Out choices in the System - Audio page, select the Voice Call Out Selection item and then select the desired value. 1. From the Main page, touch System and then Audio. Audio Volume Numeric Value Touch To Select Alert Voice 2. Touch the Voice Callouts key to view the Voice Call Outs Terrain page. Audio Volume Bar Graph Touch To Adjust Audio Volume Touch To View Maximum Voice Call Outs Figure 11-24 Select Voice Call Outs from the System Audio Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-35 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 35 7/9/2015 2:07:52 PM 3. Touch the MAX Voice Callout key to select the Voice Call Outs. Touch To Set Maximum Voice Call Out Range Maximum Voice Call Out Range -
None Selected Figure 11-25 View the Maximum Voice Call Out Range (None Selected) 4. The values above the selected value will be disabled (Off). Touch To Set Maximum Voice Call Out Range -
200 ft Selected Maximum Voice Call Out Range - 200 feet Selected Figure 11-26 View the Maximum Voice Call Out Range (200 ft Selected) Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-36 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 36 7/9/2015 2:07:52 PM 11.5.5.4 HTAWS Not Available Alert Garmin HTAWS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specic vertical accuracy minimums. Should the navigation solution become degraded, or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation HTAWS N/A is shown in the annunciation window. When the GPS signal is re-
established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the HTAWS N/A annunciation is removed. 11.5.5.5 HTAWS Failure Alert HTAWS continually monitors several system-critical items, such as database validity, hardware status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message HTAWS System Failure is issued along with the HTAWS FAIL annunciation. 11.5.5.6 HTAWS Alert Summary Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts The aural alert voice gender is congurable to be either male or female. See Wpt Info your Garmin installer for further information on conguring the alert system. HTAWS Annunciation Pop-Up Alert Aural Message Description None None HTAWS System Failure None None HTAWS Not Available Caution - Terrain, Terrain Warning - Terrain, Terrain HTAWS has failed HTAWS has been inhibited by the crew, or the aircraft ground-
speed is below 30 knots (automatic inhibiting). HTAWS not available. Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance Caution for Terrain Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance Warning for Terrain Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-37 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 37 7/9/2015 2:07:52 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix HTAWS Annunciation Pop-Up Alert Aural Message Description Caution - Obstacle, Obstacle Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance Caution for Obstacle Warning - Obstacle, Obstacle Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance None None None None Wire Ahead
"Wire Ahead Pull Up, Wire Ahead Pull Up"
Five Hundred Four Hundred Three Hundred Two Hundred One Hundred
"Fifty"
Warning for Obstacle Alerting thresholds are reduced. Visual and aural annunciation of caution alerts are suppressed. Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance Caution for Wire. Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance Warning for Power Lines HTAWS provides optional 500 ft through 100 ft (in 100 ft increments) altitude call out alerts. An additional value of 50 ft is available if a radar altimeter is installed. Table 11-13 HTAWS Alert Summary NOTE: HTAWS Caution Alerts are displayed as constant black text on a yellow background; HTAWS Warning Alerts are displayed as constant white text on a red background. Index 11-38 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 38 7/9/2015 2:07:53 PM 11.5.6 Pilot Actions If an HTAWS warning and associated aural are received, the pilot should immediately maneuver the rotorcraft in response to the alert unless the terrain or obstacle is clearly identied visually and determined by the pilot not to be a factor to the safety of the operation. A HTAWS caution alert indicates terrain or obstacle nearby. If possible visually locate the terrain or obstacle for avoidance. A HTAWS warning alert may follow a HTAWS caution unless the aircrafts path towards the terrain or obstacle is changed. NOTE: Display of terrain and obstacles on the display is supplemental data only. Maneuvering solely by reference to the terrain and obstacle data is not recommended or authorized. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-39 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 39 7/9/2015 2:07:53 PM 11.6 11.6.1 TAWS-A (Optional) Introduction NOTE: TERRAIN, TAWS-A, TAWS-B, HTAWS, or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY functionality will be available via the Terrain page, depending on the installed hardware and conguration. HTAWS or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY are available in software version 4.00, or later. TAWS-A is available in software version 5.00, or later. NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data. TAWS-A (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class A) is an optional feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled ight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-A provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. TAWS-A satises TSO-C151c Class A and TSO-92c requirements for certication. Class A TAWS requires the following components and will not work properly without them:
A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database A valid 3-D GPS position solution Valid ap and landing gear status inputs A valid radar altimeter TAWS-A uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verication by Garmin to conrm accuracy of the content, per TSO-C151c. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may be inaccurate. TAWS-A uses information from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude, along with additional altitude input from the radar altimeter. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to a height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude accuracy is 11-40 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 40 7/9/2015 2:07:53 PM affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts. The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-A are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GSL altitude, TAWS-A displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircrafts ight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-A can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions. Class A TAWS incorporates radar altimeter input with the GSL altitude to provide a more accurate position reference when at lower altitudes for certain alert types, and to retain a level of ground proximity warning capability in the unlikely event of an airport, terrain or obstacle database failure. Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric conditions. The most accurate baro-
corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting to the nearest reporting station along the ight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions seldom match the standard conditions dened by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have xed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude
(as read from the altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL altitude. This variation results in the aircrafts true altitude differing from the baro-corrected altitude. TAWS-A provides the following alert types:
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Alerting, which consists of:
- Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) / Required Line Clearance (RLC) /
Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) Alerting
- Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) / Imminent Line Impact (ILI) /
Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) Alerting Premature Descent Alerting (PDA) Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) Alerting, which consists of:
- Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) Alerting Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-41 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 41 7/9/2015 2:07:53 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix
- Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) to Terrain Alerting
- Flight Into Terrain (FIT) Alerting
- Negative Climb Rate (NCR) after takeoff Alerting
- Excessive below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation (GSD) Alerting
- Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) Alerting 11.6.1.1 Displaying TAWS-A Data TAWS-A uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacle (with a height greater than 200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Depictions of obstacles more than 200 feet below the aircraft are removed. Colors are adjusted automatically as the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 11-28 and Tables 11-11 and 11-12 are used to represent terrain, obstacles, and threat locations. Projected Flight Path Threat Location 100 ft Threshold Unlighted Obstacle Terrain above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude (Red) 1000 ft Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow) Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black) Figure 11-27 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-A Alert Level Annunciator Text Threat Location Example Visual Annunciation Indicator Warning White text on red background Caution Black text on yellow background Informational Black text on white Not Applicable background Table 11-14 TAWS-A Alert Colors and Symbology Tower Windmill Windmill in Group Power Line Table 11-15 Obstacle Icon Types Index 11-42 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 42 7/9/2015 2:07:53 PM Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group. Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap. Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle
< 1000 ft
> 1000 ft
< 1000 ft
> 1000 ft AGL AGL AGL AGL Threat Location Indicator Terrain Color Terrain/
Obstacle Location Alert Level l o b m y S e l c a t s b O Red Yellow Terrain/
Obstacle above or within 100 ft below current aircraft altitude Terrain/
Obstacle between 100 ft and 1000 ft below current aircraft altitude WARNING
(Red) CAUTION
(Yellow) Table 11-16 TAWS-A Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology TAWS-A Display 11.6.2 The TAWS-A Page shows terrain, obstacle, and threat location data in relation to the aircrafts current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected ight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-A Page. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360 default display and the radar-like ARC (120) display. Map range is adjustable with the In and Out keys from 1 to 200 NM, as indicated by the map range rings
(or arcs). Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-43 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 43 7/9/2015 2:07:53 PM Terrain Page Title Track Annunciation Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived) Red Terrain Is Above Or Within 100 ft Below The Aircraft Altitude Range Arc Yellow Terrain Is Between 100 ft and 1000 ft Below The Aircraft Altitude Ownship Position Terrain Legend Ostacle Legend (software version 6.00, or later) Terrain Type Figure 11-28 TAWS-A Page with Arc View Terrain Page Title Heading Annunciation Lighted Tower Obstacle An Asterisk Indicates Grouped Obstacles Lighted Windmill Obstacle Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived) Red Terrain Is Above Or Within 100 ft Below The Aircraft Altitude Ownship Position Yellow Terrain Is Between 100 ft and 1000 ft Below The Aircraft Altitude TAWS Annunciations
(all annunciations shown on Terrain page) Terrain Type TAWS Annunciations
(shown on all displays)
(+ indicates there are more annunciations and will show each one for ve seconds) Range Arcs Figure 11-29 TAWS-A Page with 360 View Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-44 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 44 7/9/2015 2:07:53 PM 1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key. 2. Selections are grouped by function: View, Layers, and TAWS. Selected View Flight Plan Selected To Show Terrain and Obstacle Legend Selected To Show Test TAWS - Only Available on Ground Flap Override Selection Glideslope Alert Inhibit Ground Proximity Warning System Inhibit TAWS Alerts Inhibit Figure 11-30 TAWS-A Menu View Layers TAWS 360 Arc Flight Plan Legend Flap Override G/S Inhibit GPWS Inhibit TAWS Inhibit Test TAWS Figure 11-31 TAWS-A Page Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-45 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 45 7/9/2015 2:07:54 PM 11.6.3 TAWS-A Alerts Alerts are issued when ight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-A software algorithms. TAWS-A alerts employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. TAWS-A alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages are shown in Table 11-13. When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the display. The TAWS-A Alert Annunciation is shown on the lower left part of the display. If the TAWS-A Page is not already displayed, a pop-up alert appears while an alert is active. Terrain Warning Blinking Alert Touch To Display Terrain Page Touch To Remove Pop-Up And Remain On Current Page TAWS Annunciation Figure 11-32 Terrain Alert Pop-Up To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Touch the Close key (returns to the currently viewed page), or Touch the Go to Terrain key (accesses the TAWS-A Page) Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-46 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 46 7/9/2015 2:07:54 PM 11.6.3.1 TAWS-A Alerts Summary Alert Annunciation Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
*
*
*
*
or or or or Alert Type Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Warning (RTC) Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI) Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Warning (ROC) Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI) Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR) Excessive Closure Rate Warning (ECR) Imminent Line Impact Warning
(ILI) Aural Message Terrain, Terrain;
Pull Up, Pull Up *
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up Terrain, Terrain;
Pull Up, Pull Up*
or or
"Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up Obstacle, Ob-
stacle; Pull Up, Pull Up*
or Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up Obstacle, Ob-
stacle; Pull Up, Pull Up*
or Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up
<whoop>
<whoop> Pull Up
<whoop>
<whoop> Pull Up
"Wire Ahead, Pull Up; Wire Ahead, Pull Up"
or
"Wire, Wire; Pull Up, Pull Up"
Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-47 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 47 7/9/2015 2:07:54 PM Alert Type Alert Annunciation Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page) Aural Message Reduced Line Clearance Warning
(RLC)
"Wire Ahead, Pull Up; Wire Ahead, Pull Up"
or
"Wire, Wire; Pull Up, Pull Up"
*
*
*
*
or or or or Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Caution (RTC) Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI) Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Caution (ROC) Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI) Imminent Line Impact Caution (ILI) Reduced Line Clearance Caution
(RLC) Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA) Caution, Terrain;
Caution, Terrain*
Terrain Ahead;
Terrain Ahead Caution, Terrain;
Caution, Terrain Terrain Ahead;
Terrain Ahead Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle*
Obstacle Ahead;
Obstacle Ahead Obstacle Ahead;
Obstacle Ahead*
or or or or Caution, Obstacle;
Caution, Obstacle
"Wire Ahead; Wire Ahead"*
or
"Caution, Wire;
Caution, Wire"
"Wire Ahead; Wire Ahead"*
or
"Caution, Wire;
Caution, Wire"
Too Low, Terrain Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-48 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 48 7/9/2015 2:07:54 PM Alert Type Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR) Excessive Closure Rate Caution (ECR) Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR) Flight Into Terrain High Speed Caution
(FIT) Flight Into Terrain Gear Caution (FIT) Flight Into Terrain Flaps Caution (FIT) Flight Into Terrain Takeoff Caution (FIT) Glide Slope Devia-
tion Caution (GSD) Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) TAWS Available TAWS System Test in Progress TAWS System Test Pass TAWS N/A TAWS Alerting is Disabled TAWS System Test Fail Alert Annunciation Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page) Aural Message Sink Rate Terrain, Terrain
*
or Dont Sink*
or Too Low, Terrain Too Low, Terrain Too Low, Gear Too Low, Flaps Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Too Low, Terrain Wpt Info Glideslope Five-Hundred, Four-Hundred*, Three-Hundred*, Two-Hundred*, One-Hundred*
TAWS Available None TAWS System Test OK TAWS Not Available None TAWS System Failure Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix None None None None N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-49 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 49 7/9/2015 2:07:55 PM Alert Type Alert Annunciation Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page) Aural Message TAWS System Failure TAWS Not Available TAWS Not Available TAWS Available
(aural message only in ight) GPWS System Failure GPWS System Failure
**
*
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A None Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Incorrect TAWS conguration, invalid/missing terrain, airport, or obstacle database, or TAWS audio fault. No GPS position GPS position unavailable/
degraded, outside of terrain database coverage Sufcient GPS signal reception restored None Incorrect TAWS conguration, radar altimeter unavailable, GPS position unavailable/
degraded, TAWS audio fault GPWS Inhibit GPWS Not Available. Incorrect TAWS conguration, radar altimeter unavailable, GPS position unavailable/
degraded, TAWS audio fault. Index 11-50 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 50 7/9/2015 2:07:55 PM Alert Type Glideslope Inhibit FLAP Override Alert Annunciation Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page) Aural Message N/A N/A None None
* Alerts with multiple messages are congurable. Alerts for the default conguration are indicated with asterisks.
** VCO alerts are not issued if both TAWS and GPWS systems have failed or are not available GSD alert will be available if a valid ILS is being used for navigation, even in no valid GPS signal is being received. Table 11-17 TAWS-A Alerts Summary 11.6.3.2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notication when the aircraft is determined to be descending upon terrain at an excessive rate. The parameters for the alert as dened by TSO-C151c are shown below. i
) t e e F
(
n a r r e T e v o b A t h g e H i
"SIN K R A TE"
"PULL UP"
"PULL UP"
Figure 11-33 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-51 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 51 7/9/2015 2:07:55 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music 11.6.3.3 Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC), Reduced Required Line Clearance (RLC), and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) alerts are issued when the aircraft ight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum clearance values in the FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values table. When an RTC, RLC, and/or a ROC alert is issued, a threat location indicator is displayed on the TAWS Page. Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI), Imminent Line Impact (ILI), and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircrafts projected path. ITI, ILI, and IOI alerts are accompanied by a threat location indicator displayed on the TAWS Page. The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical ight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in the following table. Flight Phase En Route Terminal Approach Departure Minimum Clearance Altitude (feet) Level Flight Descending 700 350 150 100 500 300 100 100 Table 11-18 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values During nal approach, FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 NM of the approach runway or below 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the runway threshold. 11.6.3.4 Premature Descent Alerting A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the Utilities aircraft is signicantly below the normal approach path to a runway. PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 NM of the destination airport and ends when the aircraft is either 0.5 NM from the runway threshold or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the threshold. During the nal descent, algorithms set a threshold for alerting based on speed, distance, and other parameters. System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-52 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 52 7/9/2015 2:07:55 PM
Figure 11-34 PDA Alerting Threshold PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when inhibiting TAWS and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS is inhibited, the alert annunciation TER INHB is shown. 11.6.3.5 Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS-A PDA/FLTA Alerting TAWS-A also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the PDA/FLTA aural and visual alerts. Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS-A and always remember to enable the system when appropriate. Only the PDA and FLTA alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode. After cycling power, TAWS-A will no longer be inhibited. Touch To Toggle TAWS Inhibit. TAWS Inhibited shown. Terrain (TAWS) Inhibited Annunciation Figure 11-35 TAWS-A Alerting Disabled (TAWS Inhibited) Annunciation 1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key. 2. Touch the TAWS Inhibit key to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice is dependent on current state). A green bar in the key indicates the TAWS is inhibited. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-53 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 53 7/9/2015 2:07:55 PM 11.6.3.6 Excessive Closure Rate Alert The Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) alert provides suitable notication when the aircraft is determined to be closing upon terrain at an excessive speed for a given aircraft gear and ap conguration. The following gures show the ECR alerting criteria for aps in the landing conguration and for all other ight phases respectively. ECR alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is 5 NM from the nearest airport, except when FLTA is not available (causing the TAWS N/A or TAWS FAIL annunciation to be displayed), in which case ECR alerting will remain active until landing. i
) t e e F
(
n a r r e T e v o b A t h g e H i Figure 11-36 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps Up or Takeoff Conguration) Closure Rate (FPM) Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-54 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 54 7/9/2015 2:07:56 PM i
) t e e F
(
n a r r e T e v o b A t h g e H i Figure 11-37 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps in Landing Conguration) Closure Rate (FPM) Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-55 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 55 7/9/2015 2:07:57 PM 11.6.3.7 Flight Into Terrain Alert Flight Into Terrain (FIT) alerts occur when the aircraft is too low with respect to terrain based on landing gear status, ap position, and groundspeed. FIT caution alerts are issued when ight conditions meet the criteria shown below. i
) t e e F
(
n a r r e T e v o b A t h g e H i Altitude Change Rate (FPM)
* Flap position will not trigger alert if Flap Override option is enabled; see discussion below. Figure 11-38 Flight Into Terrain Caution Alert Criteria To reduce nuisance FIT alerts on approaches where ap extension is not desired (or is intentionally delayed), the pilot may override FIT alerting based on the ap position, while all other FIT alerting remains in effect. Flap Override Selection Flap Override Annunciation Figure 11-39 TAWS-A Page Menu and FIT Flap Override Annunciation Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-56 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 56 7/9/2015 2:07:58 PM 11.6.3.7.1 Overriding Flaps-based FIT alerting 1. While viewing the TAWS-A Page, touch the MENU key. 2. Touch the Flap Override key to toggle the override state. When the Flaps Override option is enabled, the annunciation FLAP O/R is annunciated on the TAWS-A Page. If GPWS alerts are also inhibited (which include FIT), the FLAP O/R annunciation is not shown. NOTE: The FLAP O/R (Flap Override) should be activated when an approach without aps is going to be performed. FIT alerts also occur during takeoff or go-around if the aircrafts height above ground level (as determined by the radar altimeter) is too close to rising terrain. TAWS-A will issue the aural message Too Low - Terrain and visual annunciations when conditions enter the caution alert area. i
) t e e F
(
n a r r e T e v o b A t h g e H i TOO LOW, TERRAIN Radio Altitude Loss (Feet) Figure 11-40 FIT Alerting After Takeoff Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-57 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 57 7/9/2015 2:07:59 PM 11.6.3.8 Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert (NCR) The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Take-Off alert (also referred to as Altitude Loss After Take-Off) provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff. The aural message Dont Sink is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet Distance from the departure airport is 2 NM or less Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 The NCR alerting parameters as dened by TSO-C151c are shown below. i
) t e e F
(
n a r r e T e v o b A t h g e H i DONT SINK or TOO LOW, TERRAIN Altitude Loss (Feet) Figure 11-41 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-58 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 58 7/9/2015 2:07:59 PM i
) t e e F
(
n a r r e T e v o b A t h g e H i DONT SINK or TOO LOW, TERRAIN Sink Rate (FPM) Figure 11-42 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate 11.6.3.9 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert A Glideslope Deviation or Glidepath Deviation (GSD) caution alert is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is signicantly below the glidepath for the selected approach.
) t e e F
(
e d u t i t l i A o d a R GLIDESLOPE Number of Dots Below Glideslope/Glidepath (4 Dot CDI Example) Figure 11-43 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert Criteria Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-59 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 59 7/9/2015 2:08:00 PM GSD alerting is only active after departure and the following conditions are met:
An ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach is active and vertical navigation indications are being displayed. Aircraft is below 1000 feet AGL. Gear is congured for landing. When a GSD caution alert occurs, the aural and visual annunciation GLIDESLOPE is issued. If a GSD caution alert occurs on an LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach, the aural and visual annunciation GLIDESLOPE is issued. 11.6.3.9.1 Inhibiting Glideslope Deviation (GSD) Alerts NOTE: The Glideslope (G/S) Inhibit function should be activated when ying a localizer backcourse approach to prevents nuisance GSD alerts. GSD alerts are inhibited independent from all other FLTA, PDA, and GPWS alerts. 1. While viewing the TAWS-A Page, touch the MENU key. 2. Touch the G/S Inhibit key to inhibit or enable glideslope or glidepath alerts (choice dependent on current state). NOTE: The G/S Inhibit function will only be active for a single approach and the inhibit function will not remain active for subsequent approaches. When G/S alerts are inhibited, they are only inhibited for a single approach. To inhibit G/S alerts on the next approach, the G/S Inhibit function must be activated again between the rst and second approaches. NOTE: Glideslope Deviation alerts will not be available if the G/S INHB function is activated. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-60 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 60 7/9/2015 2:08:00 PM 11.6.3.10 Inhibiting GPWS Alerts (EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR) NOTE: The "Inhibit GPWS" function only affects GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR, NCR, and FIT). Alerting for FLTA, PDA, and GSD is controlled independently from the GPWS alerts listed below. EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited as a group. Discretion should be used when inhibiting alerts and the GPWS system should be enabled when appropriate. When these alerts are inhibited, the alert annunciation GPWS INH is shown on the TAWS-A Page annunciation window. 1. While viewing the TAWS-A Page, touch the MENU key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To 2. Touch the GPWS Inhibit key to inhibit or enable GPWS alerts Proc
(choice dependent on current state). GPWS Inhibit Selection GPWS Inhibit Annunciation Figure 11-44 GPWS Inhibit Annunciation 11.6.4 Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) TAWS-A provides aural advisory alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at 500 feet above the terrain, as determined by the radar altimeter (if greater than 5 NM from the nearest airport) or 500 feet above the nearest runway threshold elevation (if less than 5 NM from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this altitude, TAWS-A issues the aural alert message Five-hundred. Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 11-61 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 61 7/9/2015 2:08:01 PM 11.6.5 TAWS-A System Status During power-up, TAWS-A conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations. The system test can also be manually initiated. An aural alert is issued at test completion. TAWS-A System Testing is disabled when ground speed exceeds 30 knots. 11.6.6 TAWS-A Abnormal Operations Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav TAWS-A continually monitors several system-critical items such as database FPL validity, ap and landing gear position, radar altimeter input, and GPS status. If the GTN does not contain Terrain, Airport Terrain, and Obstacle databases
(or the databases are invalid), the aural message TAWS System Failure is generated along with the TAWS FAIL alert annunciation. TAWS-A requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specic vertical accuracy minimums. Should the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation TAWS N/A is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-A page, the aural message TAWS Not Available is generated if airborne, some TAWS-A terrain alerts will not be issued, and GPWS alerting (which are not dependent on GPS position) will continue to operate. When the GPS signal is re-established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural message TAWS Available is generated. TAWS-A also requires radar altimeter input. Should the radar altimeter input fail or become degraded, the annunciation GPWS FAIL is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-A Page. The aural message GPWS System Failure is also generated. The GPWS FAIL annunciation will also occur if both GPS altitude and barometric altitude are unavailable. If only the GPWS system has failed, GPWS-based alerts will not be available, while other TAWS-A alerting remains unaffected. Multiple TAWS or GPWS annunciations cannot be displayed at the same time. When multiple annunciations exist, an asterisk will be present next to the annunciation. The display of each annunciation will alternate with each being displayed for approximately ve seconds. Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 11-62 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 62 7/9/2015 2:08:01 PM 12 WEATHER Weather data are displayed by the Weather function when an optional weather source is installed. The Wx Weather pages may be oriented to Track Up, Heading Up, or North Up. When more weather products are installed, a key for each product will be shown. Touch the key for the desired weather product. When a single weather product is installed, touching the Weather key will go directly to the Weather page. Touch To Use SiriusXM Weather Touch To Use Stormscope Weather Touch To Use FIS-B Weather Touch To Use Connext Weather Touch To Use Weather Radar Figure 12-1 Weather Product Selection Figure 12-2 Weather Page Functional Diagram NOTE: In data link weather, Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) and Notices to Airmen (NOTAMs) that do not have geographical locations cannot be viewed on the GTN. NOTE: Stormscope and XM Lightning are mutually exclusive. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:08:01 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather conditions. NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information. Always conrm TFR information through ofcial sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Trafc Control. 12.1 FPL SiriusXM Weather Products (Optional) Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix NEXRAD Off US Canada WX Forecast Current 12 Hour 24 Hour 36 Hour 48 Hour Lightning Echo Tops Cloud Tops METAR Cell Movement AIREP/PIREP County Warnings Winds Aloft Surface 3000 ft ... 45,000 ft SIGMET/AIRMET Freezing Level Icing Turbulence Cyclone Orientation Track Up Heading Up North Up Legend Figure 12-3 SiriusXM Weather Functional Diagram Index 12-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:08:01 PM 12.1.1 Displaying SiriusXM Weather To display SiriusXM Weather touch the Weather key on the Home page. 1. Touch the Weather key on the Home page and then touch the SiriusXM key. Weather Product Legends NEXRAD Weather Age Of Selected Weather Products Out Of Coverage Area Selected Altitude Touch + or - To Select Altitude Figure 12-4 SiriusXM Weather Page 2. While viewing the Data Link weather page, touch the Menu key to congure the Data Link Weather page. Touch NEXRAD Key To Select Off, US, or Canada NEXRAD Touch Keys To Select Weather Product. Green Bar Indicates Selected Product. Touch Legend Key To Display Legend Weather Overlay Map Orientation Figure 12-5 SiriusXM Weather Menu 3. Once you selected what items you want to display, touch BACK to return to the Data Link Weather page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:08:02 PM 12.1.2 Weather Legend The Legend key displays a pop-up legend of the currently displayed weather products. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Legend key. Legend Of Selected Weather Products Touch Legend And Slide Finger Up And Down To Scroll Legend Figure 12-6 Weather Legend Display 2. Touch the Legend area of the display and while maintaining light pressure against the display, drag your nger up or down to scroll through the legend display for the selected weather products, or use the Up/Down keys. 3. Touch the Legend key again to remove the Legend. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:08:02 PM Cloud Tops Surface-Fronts Freezing Levels METAR City Forecast SIGMET/AIRMET NEXRAD Echo Tops Icing Potential Winds Aloft County Warnings Turbulence Cell Movement AIREPS PIREPS Lightning Cyclone TFR Figure 12-7 Available Weather Legends 12.1.3 Weather Map Orientation 1. While viewing the Weather Data Link function, touch the Menu key. 2. Touch the Orientation key to toggle the map view orientation choices of North Up, Track Up, and Heading Up. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:08:03 PM 12.1.4 SiriusXM Weather Symbols and Product Age When a weather product is active on the Map function or the Weather Data Link function is selected, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age of the data may not indicate the time between the current GPS time and the time when the data is assembled, but rather a general indication of the time elapsed from when the data is received by the GTN. Updated weather data may or may not contain new weather data. Weather data is refreshed at intervals that are dened and controlled by SiriusXM Satellite Radio and its data vendors. If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the designated intervals, the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services. If more than half of the designated time has elapsed from the time the data is received, the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow. WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product may be signicantly older than the indicated weather product age. The following table contains the expiration time and XM broadcast interval. The expiration time is an elapsed time after which the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received, the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow. The SiriusXM Weather broadcast interval is the time interval when SiriusXM Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new weather data. Weather data is broadcast at intervals that are dened and controlled by SiriusXM Satellite Radio. NOTE: SiriusXM Weather does not provide a timestamp for AIRMETs, SIGMETs, City Forecasts, County Warnings, Cell Movement and TFR products. Therefore, the unit does not display a product age indication for these products. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:08:03 PM NOTE: The unit displays valid times on the weather map in lieu of product age indications for SiriusXM Weather Icing Potential, Winds Aloft, and Turbulence weather products. NOTE: The unit displays product age for SiriusXM Weather Freezing Level and Canada Winds Aloft weather products. The product age indication represents the number of minutes that have elapsed since the weather product was created by SiriusXM Weather. The unit does not display the valid times assigned to the information within these products. Weather Product Expiration Time
(Minutes) Broadcast Rate
(Minutes) NEXRAD (NEXRAD and Echo Top are Mutually Exclusive) Echo Top (Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive) (NEXRAD and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive) Cloud Top (Cloud Top and Echo Top Mutually Exclusive) SiriusXM Lightning Cell Movement SIGMETs / AIRMETs METARs WX Forecast Freezing Levels Winds Aloft City Forecast County Warnings Cyclone Warnings Icing Potential (Icing)
(SLD) Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
(Blue - Regular, Yellow - Urgent) 30 30 60 30 30 60 90 60 120 90 90 60 60 90 90 5 (U.S.) 10 (Canada) 7.5 15 5 1.25 12 12 12 12 12 12 5 12 22 12 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:08:03 PM Weather Product Air Report (AIREP) Turbulence Radar Coverage Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) Terminal Aerodrome Forecast (TAF) Expiration Time
(Minutes) Broadcast Rate
(Minutes) 90 180 30 60 60 12 12 5 12 12 Table 12-1 SiriusXM Weather Products and Data Timing Symbol Description Flood Severe Thunderstorm Tornado Sunny Part Sun Cloudy Rainy T-Storm Snow Windy Foggy Haze High/Low Temp Table 12-2 Weather Symbols Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:08:03 PM 12.1.5 NEXRAD WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of 158 high-
resolution Doppler radar systems that are operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 NM. The NEXRAD network provides important information about severe weather for air trafc safety. NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and dissemination of NEXRAD images can be signicant and may not reect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays and the relative age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use NEXRAD data for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Instead, use it in an early-warning capacity of pre-departure and en route evaluation. Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of the maximum reectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Echo Tops cannot Trafc be shown with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD. 1. While viewing the SiriusXM Weather menu, touch the NEXRAD key to display the NEXRAD selections. Figure 12-8 SiriusXM NEXRAD Weather Selection Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:08:03 PM 2. Touch the desired NEXRAD source selection and then the Back key to view the weather information. NEXRAD Source Age Of Selected Weather Products NEXRAD Weather Present Position Figure 12-9 SiriusXM NEXRAD Weather Figure 12-10 NEXRAD Weather Legend 12.1.5.1 Reectivity Reectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD display directly correlate to the level of detected reectivity. Reectivity as it relates to hazardous weather can be very complex. The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather reect radar better than others. The intensity of a Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:08:04 PM radar reection is not necessarily an indication of the weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reection, while dry hail does not. Both wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous. The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reectivity (Z). NEXRAD measures the radar reectivity ratio, or the energy reected back to the radar receiver (designated by the letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases. 12.1.5.2 NEXRAD Limitations NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
NEXRAD base reectivity does not provide sufcient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics. For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain. NEXRAD base reectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over the site. In the Cell Movement function, Base height is actually the height of maximum radar reection and that the Base and Top heights are based on radar height and not MSL or AGL. Each square block on the display represents an area of four square kilometers (2.15 NM). The intensity level reected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data sampled within the area. Block Area Is 4 km2
(2.15 NM2) Block Area Is 4 km2
(2.15 NM2) Figure 12-11 NEXRAD Data Blocks Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:08:04 PM The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
Ground clutter Strobes and spurious radar data Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun) Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans NEXRAD Limitations (Canada) Radar coverage extends to 55N. Any precipitation displayed between 52N and 55N is displayed as mixed because it is unknown. Precipitation Above 52N Out Of Coverage Area Figure 12-12 NEXRAD Data - Canada 12.1.5.3 Animating NEXRAD NOTE: Animated NEXRAD functionality is available in software version 6.00 and later. When US or Canada NEXRAD is enabled for display and more than two NEXRAD images have been received by the GTN, the NEXRAD display can be animated on the SiriusXM Weather page. As new NEXRAD images are received, the GTN will automatically store them for future animation. The GTN can animate up to six NEXRAD images from oldest to newest, showing each for one second and the newest for two seconds. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:08:04 PM Touch To Start NEXRAD Animation Product Age Figure 12-13 Start NEXRAD Animation 1. While viewing the SiriusXM Weather page with NEXRAD enabled for display, touch the NXRD key to start the NEXRAD animation. NOTE: Weather Forecast, Cloud Tops, and Cell Movement will automatically be turned off while NEXRAD is animating. 2. Touch the NXRD key to stop the NEXRAD animation. The animation will also stop when leaving the page or turning off NEXRAD on the SiriusXM weather page. Touch To Stop NEXRAD Animation Figure 12-14 Start NEXRAD Animation Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:08:04 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 12.1.6 Echo Tops Echo Tops data shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. This information is determined from NEXRAD data. NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Echo Tops cannot be shown with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Echo Tops key. Product Age Present Position Echo Tops Figure 12-15 Echo Tops 2. Touch the Echo Tops key again to turn it off. Figure 12-16 Echo Tops Legend Index 12-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:08:04 PM 12.1.7 Cloud Tops NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, it is not possible to display Echo Tops and Cloud Tops at the same time. Cloud tops data depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Cloud Tops key. Product Age Cloud Tops Present Position Figure 12-17 Cloud Tops 2. Touch the Cloud Tops key again to turn it off. Figure 12-18 Cloud Tops Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:08:05 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 12.1.8 Cell Movement Cell Movement data shows the location and movement of storm cells as identied by a ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with short, orange arrows. NOTE: In the Cell Movement function, Base height is actually the height of maximum radar reection and that the Base and Top heights are based on radar height and not MSL or AGL. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Cell Movement key. Product Age Cell Movement
(Position And Direction Of Movement) Present Position Figure 12-19 Cell Movement 2. Touch a Cell Movement icon to view cell details. Top Height Reported as Maximum Altitude of Reected Precip. Base Height Reported as Altitude of Maximum Reectivity Cell Speed and Direction Figure 12-20 Cell Movement Detail 3. In the Menu, Touch the Cell Movement key again to turn it off. Figure 12-21 Cell Movement Legend Index 12-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:08:05 PM 12.1.9 SIGMETs and AIRMETs SIGMETs (SIGnicant METerological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen's METerological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather considered of importance to aircraft. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the SIGMET/AIRMET key. IFR Line SIGMET Line Turbulence Line Present Position Figure 12-22 SIGMETs and AIRMETs 2. Touch the SIGMET/AIRMET key again to turn it off. Figure 12-23 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:08:05 PM 12.1.10 County Warnings County Warnings data provides specic public awareness and protection weather warnings from the National Weather Service. This can include information on res, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms, ood conditions, and other natural disasters. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the County Warnings key. Touch the County Warnings symbol for detailed information. County Warning Detail County Warning Symbol
- Touch To Display Detail Figure 12-24 County Warnings Data 2. Touch the County Warnings key again to turn it off. Figure 12-25 County Warnings Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:08:05 PM 12.1.11 Freezing Level Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the Freezing Level is found. When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears on the next update. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Freezing Level key. Product Age Freezing Level Line Freezing Level Line Present Position Figure 12-26 Freezing Level 2. Touch the Freezing Level key again to turn it off. Figure 12-27 Freezing Level Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:08:06 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 12.1.12 METARs METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations. METARs are updated hourly and are considered current. METARs typically contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown as colored ags at airports that provide them. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the METAR key. Touch an airport symbol for more METAR detail. Product Age METAR Detail METAR Flags Touch Airport For METAR Detail 2. Touch the METAR key in the Menu again to turn it off. Figure 12-28 METARs METAR Symbol Description VFR (ceiling greater than 3000 ft. AGL and visibility greater than ve miles) Marginal VFR (ceiling 10003000 ft. AGL and/or visibility three to ve miles) IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1000 ft. AGL and/or visibility one mile to less than three miles) Low IFR (ceiling below 500 ft. AGL or visibility less than one mile) Unknown Table 12-3 METAR Symbols Index 12-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:08:06 PM 12.1.13 Cyclone The current location of the cyclone is shown along with its projected path with the date and time. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Cyclone key. Projected Path With Date And Time Current Position Of Cyclone Figure 12-29 Cyclone 2. Touch the Cyclone key again to turn it off. Figure 12-30 Cyclone Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:08:06 PM 12.1.14 Lightning Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A yellow cross icon represents a strike that has occurred within a 2 kilometer (approx. 1 NM) region. The exact location of the lightning is not displayed. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Lightning key. Product Age Lightning Strikes Present Position Figure 12-31 Lightning 2. Touch the Lightning key again to turn it off. Figure 12-32 Lightning Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:08:07 PM 12.1.15 Weather Forecast The Weather Forecast data provides Surface Analysis and City Forecast information for current and forecast weather conditions. The Surface Analysis forecast shows frontal lines indicating weather fronts and the direction they are moving. High and Low pressure centers are noted with a large H or L. A Cold Front is a front where cold air replaces warm air. A blue line with blue triangles will point in the direction of cold air ow. A Warm Front is where warm air replaces cold air. A red line with red half moons will point in the direction of the warm air ow. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the WX Forecast key. Touch a Wx Forecast symbol for more detail. Wx Forecast Symbol Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wx Forecast Detail Wpt Info Weather Front Surface Analysis 2. Touch the desired time increment for the forecast period. Figure 12-33 Surface Figure 12-34 Select Surface Forecast Time Period Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:08:07 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info City Forecast Fronts Figure 12-35 Surface Legends Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:08:07 PM 12.1.16 Winds Aloft Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from the surface up to 45,000 feet. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Winds Aloft key. Wind Symbols Selected Wind Altitude Touch To Select Wind Altitude Figure 12-36 Winds Aloft 2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT or + keys to increase or decrease the reporting altitude of the winds aloft in 3,000 foot increments. The selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude keys. 3. Touch the Winds Aloft key again to turn it off. Figure 12-37 Winds Aloft Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-25 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:08:07 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 12.1.17 Icing The Icing product shows a graphic view of the current icing environment in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specic to aircraft type). The Icing product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the analysis. Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large, super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted as black and red blocks over the Icing colors. Icing and SLD data are shown between 1,000 feet and 30,000 feet in 3,000 foot increments. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Icing key. SLD Threat Icing Potential Shading Present Position Selected Icing Altitude Touch To Select Icing Altitude Figure 12-38 Icing and SLD 2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT or + keys to increase or decrease the reporting altitude of icing in 3,000 foot increments. The selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude keys. 3. Touch the Icing key again to turn it off. Figure 12-39 Icing Legend Index 12-26 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:08:07 PM 12.1.18 Turbulence Turbulence data identies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classied as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs. 1. While viewing the Weather Data Link menu, touch the Turbulence key. Turbulence Shading Selected Turbulence Altitude Figure 12-40 Turbulence 2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT or + keys to increase or decrease the reporting altitude for turbulence in 3,000 foot increments. The selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude keys. 3. Touch the Turbulence key again to turn it off. Figure 12-41 Turbulence Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-27 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 27 7/9/2015 2:08:08 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 12.1.19 AIREP/PIREP Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a particular route of ight. When signicant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Trafc Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low in-
ight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA). 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the AIREP/
PREP key. AIREP Symbol
(Green). Touch For Details. Urgent PIREP Symbol (Yellow). Touch For Details. Routine PIREP Symbol (Blue). Touch For Details. Figure 12-42 Weather Display With AIREP/PIREP Information Active 2. Touch a weather information symbol to view details for that item. AIREP Details Touch An AIREP/PIREP Symbol For Detail Figure 12-43 AIREP/PIREP Information Detail Index 12-28 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 28 7/9/2015 2:08:08 PM 3. Touch the Back key to remove the detailed information. 4. Touch the AIREP/PREP key again to turn it off. 12.2 StormScope Weather 12.2.1 StormScope (Optional) NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 Pilots Guide for a detailed description of the WX-500 StormScope. The WX-500 StormScope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft. The StormScope measures relative bearing and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports the information to the display. Interfaces are currently only available for the WX-
500 StormScope System. For lightning display interpretation, study the examples in the WX-500 Pilot's Guide that are designed to help you relate the cell or strike patterns shown on the display to the size and location of thunderstorms that may be near your aircraft. Symbol Time Since Strike (Seconds) 6 60 120 180 Table 12-4 Stormscope Symbols 1. From the Home page, touch the Weather key (and then the StormScope key if present) to reach the StormScope function. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-29 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 29 7/9/2015 2:08:08 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Orientation Annunciation. HDG N/A - Heading Is Not Available. Range Ring Lightning Strikes Lightning Display Mode
(Cell or Strike) Lightning Strike Rate Touch To Clear Lightning Strikes Figure 12-44 StormScope Display (360 Display View Shown) 2. Touch the Menu key to setup the StormScope display. Arc View Selected Lightning Display Mode
- Strike Selected Figure 12-45 StormScope Menu 3. Touch the 360 or Arc to select the display view. View Mode 360 Arc Cell Strike Figure 12-46 StormScope Functional Diagram Index 12-30 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 30 7/9/2015 2:08:08 PM 12.2.2 Clearing the StormScope Page Routinely clearing the StormScope Page of all discharge points is a good way to determine if a storm is building or dissipating. In a building storm discharge points reappear faster and in larger numbers. In a dissipating storm discharge points appear slower and in smaller numbers. 1. While viewing the Weather StormScope page, touch the Clear Strikes key to clear lightning strikes. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 2. Lightning strikes will be cleared from the display and the Rate FPL value will be reset. NOTE: When Heading is not available (N/A), the pilot must clear the strikes after each turn. 12.2.3 Changing the StormScope Display View The Lightning Page displays either a 360 or a 120 viewing angle. 1. While viewing the Weather StormScope page, touch MENU. 2. Touch the 360 or Arc to select the display view. Figure 12-47 StormScope 360 and Arc Display Views 12.2.4 Changing the Storm Data Display Range Storm data can be displayed on the Map page 2000 NM zoom scale, but the data only goes out as far as the StormScope can report (200 NM). The Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-31 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 31 7/9/2015 2:08:09 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL 500 NM zoom scale will display all lightning data. Scales greater than 500 NM do not display any additional StormScope data. While viewing the StormScope page touch the In and Out keys to display a larger or smaller area. NOTE: Cell mode uses a clustering program to identify clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Cell mode is most useful during periods of heavy storm activity. Displaying cell data during these periods frees the user from sifting through a screen full of discharge points and helps to better determine where the storm cells are located. Direct-To 12.2.5 Displaying StormScope Data on the Map Page The Map Page displays cell or strike information using yellow lightning strike symbology overlaid on a moving map. This added capability improves situational awareness, which in turn makes it much easier for the pilot to relate storm activity to airports, NAVAIDs, obstacles and other ground references. 1. On the Home page, touch the Map key. 2. Touch the Menu key. 3. Touch the StormScope key to enable StormScope lightning display on the Map page. Repeated touches toggle between Off, Cell, and Strike. NOTE: The selected lightning display type, cell or strike, will be shown the same on both the StormScope and the Map pages. NOTE: StormScope data is displayed on the Map Page only if aircraft heading is available. NOTE: The GTN will display StormScope data with or without a heading source. If no heading source is available, the display will indicate this by placing HDG N/A in the upper right portion of the display. If no heading is available, the pilot must clear the strikes after each heading change. Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-32 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 32 7/9/2015 2:08:09 PM 12.3 Weather Radar The GTN 7XX can display weather radar from a Garmin GWX system or from selected 3rd party radars. Only one weather radar system may be interfaced to the system. For detailed information on the operation of 3rd party radars, refer to their specic documentation. 12.3.1 Garmin GWX Radar Description The Garmin GWX 68 and GWX 70 Airborne Color Weather Radars combine excellent range and adjustable scanning proles with a high-denition target display. To focus radar scanning on specic areas, Sector Scanning offers pilot-
adjustable horizontal scan angles of 20, 40, 60, or 90 (up to 120 with the GWX 70). A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients, and cell buildup activity at various altitudes. See the documentation of each radar for specic features. 12.3.1.1 Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting and Ranging. Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting a microwave pulse beam that, upon encountering a target, is then reected back to the radar receiver as a return echo. The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with the most intense energy in the center of the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and receiving. The returned signal is then processed and displayed on the GTN 7XX. Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 micro-seconds for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out and back for each nautical mile of target range. It takes 123.6 micro-seconds for a transmitted pulse to make the round trip if a target is 10 NM away. The GWX weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather, not for penetrating severe weather. The decision to y into an area of radar targets depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft capabilities and pilot experience. Pulse type weather radar detects only precipitation, not clouds or turbulence. The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns, but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to y between them. Only Doppler radar can detect turbulence. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-33 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 33 7/9/2015 2:08:09 PM Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It also has the ability to detect and provide distance to objects on the ground, such as, cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans. 12.3.1.2 Antenna Beam Illumination It is important to understand the concept of the antenna beam illumination. The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The farther the beam travels, the wider it gets. The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam. Figure 12-48 Radar Beam from 12 inch Antenna The vertical dimensions of the radar beam are shown in the gure above and the same holds true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam will be as wide as it is tall. Note that it is possible not to see areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the antenna tilt set to zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 NM. The curvature of the earth can also be a factor, especially at range settings of 150 NM or more.
Figure 12-49 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-34 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 34 7/9/2015 2:08:10 PM 12.3.1.3 Radar Signal Attenuation The phenomena of weather attenuation needs to be kept in mind whenever operating the weather radar. When the radar signal is transmitted, it is progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening, or attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation. Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the amount of radar energy at a distance from the antenna is inversely proportional to the square of the distance. The reected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that lls the radar beam will be one fourth the energy reected from an equivalent target 20 miles away. This would appear to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer. Internal circuitry within the GWX system compensates for much of this distance attenuation. Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation. It is also more intense. As the radar signal passes through moisture, a portion of the radar energy is reected back to the antenna. However, much of the energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the signal may not reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an attenuated signal and area of no precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar will display a radar shadow. This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the heavy rain may extend much further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the rst, preventing it from being displayed on the radar. Never y into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the heavy precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy cell. The WATCH feature of the GWX Weather Radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas. Areas in question will appear as shadowed or gray area on the radar display. Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also help detect radar shadows. Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the radome. Even the smallest amount of wear and tear, pitting, and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefciency. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-35 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 35 7/9/2015 2:08:10 PM 12.3.2 Radar Signal Reectivity 12.3.2.1 Precipitation Precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as earth or solid structures, will be detected by the weather radar. The weather radar will not detect clouds, thunderstorms or turbulence directly. It detects precipitation associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar signal reectors are raindrops, wet snow or wet hail. The larger the raindrop the better it reects. The size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reectivity. Because large drops in a small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong return. Ice, dry snow, and dry hail have low reective levels and often will not be displayed by the radar. A cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog or drizzle, will not reect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return. Figure 12-50 Precipitation Type and Reectivity Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-36 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 36 7/9/2015 2:08:10 PM 12.3.2.2 Ground Returns The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reective properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so shorelines, rivers, lakes, and cities are well dened. Increasing gain too much causes the display to ll in between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks. Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and structures provide good returns, small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches, and shorter ranges are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reective regular lines and edges of the city become more dened. Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reectors, and normally do not provide good returns. The energy is reected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They can appear as dark areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reector and will provide stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves. Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block the areas behind. However, over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be reected back and forth in the mountain passes or off canyon walls using up all or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from this area causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists. 12.3.2.3 Angle of Incidence The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence. Incident angle (A) is illustrated below. This directly affects the detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity of the displayed target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and lower display intensity due to minimized reection of the radar energy. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-37 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 37 7/9/2015 2:08:10 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Figure 12-51 Angle of Incidence A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display will show a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is reected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain. 12.3.3 Operating Distance The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near an operating airborne weather radar. The minimum safe distance is based upon the FCCs exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for general population/uncontrolled environments which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory Circular 20-68B for more information on safe distance determination. 12.3.3.1 Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL) (GWX 68) The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW/cm2, is the semicircular area of at least 11 feet from the 12 inch antenna as indicated in the illustration below. All personnel must remain outside of this zone. With a scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is signicantly reduced. 12.3.3.2 Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL)
(Other Radars) See the appropriate documentation for MPEL. Index 12-38 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 38 7/9/2015 2:08:11 PM MPEL Boundary 11 for 12 antenna Figure 12-52 MPEL Boundary 12.3.4 Basic Antenna Tilt Setup The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations. It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that will work in all situations, but this method does provide good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the antenna tilted so that the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground. The following discussion explains one way of achieving this. With the aircraft ying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals the aircrafts current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the tilt so the front edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 NM. Note this antenna tilt angle setting. Now, raise the antenna tilt 6 above this setting. The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4 from parallel with the ground. Practical Application Using the Basic Tilt Setup At this point, when ying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL, any displayed target return should scrutinized. If the displayed target advances on the screen to 5 NM of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2,000 feet or less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna tilt 4 can help separate ground returns from weather returns in relatively at terrain. This will place the bottom of the radar beam level with the ground. Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-39 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 39 7/9/2015 2:08:11 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets to 30 NM or closer. This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot y over it safely. If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, set the displayed range to 60 NM. Closely monitor anything that enters the display. Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground returns can be monitored for possible threats. The relationship between antenna tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals 100 feet of altitude for every one nautical mile. Change in Antenna Tilt
+4
+3
+2
+1 0
-1
-2
-3
-4 10 nm 4000 3000 2000 1000 0 1000 2000 3000 4000
) t e e f
(
m a e B r a d a R f o e g n a h C l a c i t r e V Figure 12-53 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground, a target return at 10 NM is approximately 4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 NM, 8,000 feet; at 50 NM, 20,000 feet. In other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being displayed at 10 NM would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000 feet. If that ground target return moves to 5 NM, maximum distance below the aircraft will be 2,000 feet. This setup will provide a good starting point for practical use of the GWX radar. There are many other factors to consider in order to become procient at using weather radar in all situations. 12.3.5 Weather Mapping and Interpretation 12.3.5.1 Weather display Interpretation When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the colors denote approximate rainfall intensity and rates as shown in the table below. Index 12-40 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 40 7/9/2015 2:08:11 PM GWX 68 Radars GWX 70 Radars Weather Mode Color Approximate Intensity Approximate Rainfall Rate
(in/hr) Approximate Intensity 3rd Party Radars Radar Return Level (see radar docu-
mentation for details) BLACK GREEN YELLOW RED MAGENTA
< 23 dBZ 23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ 33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ 41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ 50 dBZ and greater
< .01
.01 - 0.1 0.1 - 0.5 0.5 - 2
> 2
< 23 dBZ 23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ 33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
> 41 dBZ Turbulence Detection Table 12-5 Precipitation Intensity Levels 0 1 2 3 4 12.3.5.2 Thunderstorms Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud. The more severe the drafts, the greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations can be made from what is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin. In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating large amounts of precipitation), the turbulence is considered severe. Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands or short distances suggest irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence. Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence, as well as heavy precipitation. Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity. Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line), individual cells may be in different stages of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense targets may contain developing clouds not having enough moisture to produce a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts. Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence. Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as hooks, ngers, or scalloped edges. These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should be treated as highly dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they were red or magenta areas. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-41 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 41 7/9/2015 2:08:11 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Squall Line Steep Gradient Hook or Finger Scalloped Edge Figure 12-54 Cell Irregularities Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a short time. When displaying shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out. That can help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather. Figure 12-55 The Blind Alley Overhead View In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed areas behind targets. Figure 12-56 The Blind Alley Vertical Scan Index 12-42 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 42 7/9/2015 2:08:12 PM 12.3.5.3 Tornadoes There is no conclusive radar target return characteristics which will identify a tornado, however, tornadoes may be present if the following characteristics are observed:
A narrow, nger-like portion, as shown on the previous page, extends and, in a short time, curls into a hook and closes on itself. A hook which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6, especially if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in the southern hemisphere) of a major thunderstorm. V- shaped notches. Doughnut shapes. These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, nor are tornado returns limited to these characteristics. Conrmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a normal thunderstorm display. 12.3.5.4 Hail Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore, the higher the top of a thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains hail. Vertically scanning the target return can give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by radar. It is not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual top does not indicate the top of the hazardous area. Hail can fall below the minimum reectivity threshold for radar detection. It can have a lm of water on its surface, making its reective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this lm of water, and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large amounts of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards or less) and make poor radar targets. In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry (no liquid coating), target returns are less intense. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados. U-shaped cloud edges 3 to 7 miles across can also indicate hail. These target returns appear quite suddenly along any edge of the cell outline. They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant monitoring essential. Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-43 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 43 7/9/2015 2:08:12 PM 12.4 GWX Radar Operation in Weather Mode WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When transmitting while the aircraft is on the ground, no personnel or objects should be within 11 feet of the antenna. CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It is always a good idea to put the radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly. When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically switches to Standby mode on landing. Tilt Show Bearing Bearing Turbulence Detection (GWX 70) GCS (GWX 70) ACT (GWX 70) Watch Shading Weather Alert Stabilize Mode Scan Off Standby Weather Ground Test Horizontal Vertical Sector Scan 20 40 60 90 (GWX 70) Full Gain Figure 12-57 Weather Radar Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-44 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 44 7/9/2015 2:08:12 PM 12.4.1 Viewing Weather on the Weather Radar Page 1. From the Home page, touch the Weather key on the Home page and then touch the Radar key (if necessary). Bearing Line Scan Line Precipitation Scale Tilt Adjustment Operating Mode Antenna Stabilization Orientation Range Scale Bearing Line Display Bearing Line Adjustment Gain Calibration Setting Scan Direction Sector Scan Selection Figure 12-58 Weather Radar Page (Horizontal Scan) 2. Touch the MODE key and then touch the function desired. 3. The color-coded precipitation scale is shown on the left side of the display. A table describing the precipitation intensity levels is in section 12.3.5.1. Precipitation Color Values GWX 68 GWX 70 Figure 12-59 Weather Radar Precipitation Scale 4. Touch the IN and OUT keys to select the desired range. Touch the desired keys to set any required values as described below. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-45 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 45 7/9/2015 2:08:12 PM 12.4.2 Conguring Weather Radar Page To congure the WX Radar page, the Radar Mode must be in Ground, Weather, or Test mode. When one of these modes is selected, a warm-up period is initiated (countdown is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the selected mode will be available. 1. While on the ground, touch MODE. 2. In the Weather Radar Mode window, touch STANDBY. Touch the Desired Mode Figure 12-60 Weather Radar Mode Selection 3. Touch MODE and select Weather, Ground, or Test. A caution window is displayed. Figure 12-61 Caution for Radar Activation Conrmation 4. Touch OK to acknowledge the selected mode will be activated. If Weather or Ground is selected, a warm-up period is initiated
(countdown is displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar begins transmitting. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-46 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 46 7/9/2015 2:08:13 PM 12.4.3 Vertically Scanning a Storm Cell When vertically scanning with stabilization ON, the actual physical area that the radar is sweeping may not match the vertical scan display. This occurs whenever the aircraft pitch is not at 0 degrees. To compensate for this, the vertical display will erase the portion of the vertical display that is no longer being scanned. It will appear that the vertical sweep wraps around when reaching the end of the GTN vertical display. The radar is simply erasing the portion of the vertical display that is not currently being scanned. NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant adjustment of the Bearing Line. Antenna Stabilization Scan Line Tilt Line Range Scale Gain Calibration Setting Precipitation Scale Tilt Adjustment Operating Mode Scan Direction Show Tilt Selection Figure 12-62 Weather Radar Page (Vertical Scan) Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-47 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 47 7/9/2015 2:08:13 PM 12.4.4 Adjusting the Antenna Tilt Angle In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam should be pointed at the wet part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just below the freezing level of the storm. The best way to nd this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan. 1. While viewing the WX Radar page touch the TILT key. An adjustment window will be displayed. Numeric Adjusted Tilt Angle Touch To Adjust Tilt Angle Figure 12-63 Adjusting Tilt 2. Touch the Up and Down Arrow keys to adjust the Tilt. The range is DN 15 to UP 15. 3. Touch Back to save the values and return to the Radar display. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-48 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 48 7/9/2015 2:08:13 PM 12.4.5 Adjusting the Bearing Line 1. Touch the SHOW BRG key. This displays the Bearing Line in Horizontal Scanning mode. 2. To adjust the Bearing Line, touch the BEARING key. An adjustment window will be displayed. Touch To Adjust Bearing Numeric Adjusted Bearing Value And Direction Figure 12-64 Bearing Line Adjustment 3. Touch the Gain Adjustment arrow keys to change the gain. 4. Touch Back to save the values and return to the Radar display. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-49 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 49 7/9/2015 2:08:13 PM 12.4.6 Adjusting Gain Gain is used to adjust the sensitivity of the radar receiver. It can be used to adjust the characteristics of the returns from the surface. WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode will cause precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color not representative of the true intensity. Remember to return the gain setting to : Calibrated for viewing the actual intensity of precipitation. 1. While viewing the WX Radar page touch the GAIN key. The Gain Adjustment Bar will be displayed. Numeric Adjusted Gain Value Relative Adjusted Gain Value Touch to Return to Calibrated Gain Touch To Adjust Gain Figure 12-65 Gain Adjustment 2. Touch the Gain Adjustment arrow keys to change the gain. 3. Touch Back to save the values and return to the Radar display. Restore Calibrated Gain 1. While viewing the WX Radar page touch GAIN to display the Gain adjustment window. 2. Touch the SET TO CALIBRATED key. This will restore the calibrated gain. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-50 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 50 7/9/2015 2:08:13 PM 12.4.7 Sector Scan Adjusting the Sector Scan reduces the scan angle from Full in increments of 20, 40, and 60 in horizontal or vertical scanning. 1. While viewing the WX Radar page, touch Sector Scan to display the Sector Scan Mode window. Touch the Desired Sector Size GWX 68 GWX 70 Figure 12-66 Sector Scan Mode 2. Touch the desired mode. After selection, you are returned to the Weather Radar Menu screen. 3. Touch Back again to return to the Weather Radar screen. Selected Sector Scan Range Scan Line Sector Scan Selection Key Figure 12-67 Selected Sector Scan Range Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-51 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 51 7/9/2015 2:08:14 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain 12.4.8 Weather Radar Menu Touch Menu to view the Weather Radar Menu. Touch To Enable Ground Clutter Suppression Touch To Enable Turbulence Detection Touch To Enable Altitude Compensated Tilt GWX 70 Touch To Enable WATCH Shading Touch To Enable Weather Alerts Touch To Enable Antenna Stabilization GWX 68 Figure 12-68 Weather Radar Menu Selections NOTE: Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) and Turbulence Detection is only supported for 12 or larger RADAR antennas. Turbulence Detection is only supported out to a range of 40 NM and is disabled at display ranges greater than 160 NM. Weather 12.4.8.1 Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH) While in horizontal scan mode, this feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible inaccuracies in displayed intensity due to weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known as attenuation. The radar energy weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation, and distance. Issues with the radome will also attenuate the radar energy. All these factors have an effect on the return intensity. The more energy that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy of the displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions with this information in mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the extent of attenuation in a shaded area. 1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch WATCH Shading to toggle WATCH Shading. Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-52 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 52 7/9/2015 2:08:14 PM 2. To deactivate Watch Mode, repeat sequence. Watch Shaded Area Figure 12-69 Horizontal Scan with WATCH 12.4.8.2 Weather Alert The Weather Alert feature may be used to indicate the presence of heavy precipitation beyond the currently displayed range and 80 to 320 NM from the aircrafts present position. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns. If a Weather Alert is detected within 10 of the aircraft heading, a message will be displayed in the Messages page. Touch the MSG key to view messages. Weather Alerts Figure 12-70 Weather Alert Display If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a weather alert can be generated by ground returns. To avoid this issue, set the display range to less than 80 NM in the terminal area. Weather alerts can also be deactivated in the terminal area. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-53 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 53 7/9/2015 2:08:14 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols 1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch Weather Alert to toggle Weather Alerts. 2. To deactivate Weather Alerts, repeat sequence. 12.4.8.3 Antenna Stabilization 1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch Stabilize to toggle Antenna Stabilization. 2. To deactivate Antenna Stabilization, repeat sequence. The current stabilization condition is shown in the top right of the weather radar display. 12.4.8.4 Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT) - GWX 70 only Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT) automatically adjusts the tilt to compensate for altitude changes as you climb or descend. 1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch ACT to toggle ACT. 12.4.8.5 2. To deactivate ACT, repeat sequence. Turbulence Detection - GWX 70 only Turbulence Detection activates a feature that detects and displays severe turbulence. Turbulence Detection is inactive at ranges greater that 160 NM. If Turbulence Detection is enabled and available, Turbulence Detection will be reported as Inactive in any of the following conditions:
Scan orientation is not Horizontal Scan range is greater than 160 NM Radar mode is not Weather 1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch Turbulence Detection to toggle Turbulence Detection. 2. To deactivate Turbulence Detection, repeat sequence. 12.4.8.6 Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) - GWX 70 only Ground Clutter Suppression reduces the amount of returns as a result of highly reective objects on the ground, such as buildings or cities, while maintaining the intensity and size of weather returns. 1. While viewing the Weather Radar Menu, touch GCS to toggle Ground Clutter Suppression. Appendix 2. To deactivate Ground Clutter Suppression, repeat sequence. Index 12-54 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 54 7/9/2015 2:08:14 PM 12.5 Connext Weather Connext Weather is an optional feature available with the Iridium satellite system that is interfaced through the optional Garmin GSR 56. Connext Weather may be viewed in the Weather and Map functions. The Weather pages may be oriented to either Track Up, Heading, or North Up. Both Connext and XM Weather may be installed and selected individually. Connext Weather coverage is available throughout most of Europe, Canada and the U.S. Additional radar coverage areas are being added continuously. PRECIP Lightning IR Satellite METAR PIREP Winds Aloft Surface 3000 ft ... 45,000 ft SIGMET/AIRMET Connext Settings Coverage Region Present Position Destination Flight Plan Distance Waypoint Waypoint Ident Data Request Request Data Auto Request Cov Diameter Datalink Status Orientation Legend Figure 12-71 Connext Weather Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-55 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 55 7/9/2015 2:08:14 PM More detail on Connext weather products and coverage can be found at:
http://y.garmin.com/y-garmin/gfds-weather/
NOTE: A system can be congured for multiple weather products, but only one may be selected for viewing in the Weather or map pages at a given time. 1. While viewing the Connext Weather page, press the MENU key to display the Connext Weather Menu. Figure 12-72 Select Connext Weather 2. Touch the desired key to access the settings. The settings will affect the display on both the Weather and Map pages. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-56 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 56 7/9/2015 2:08:15 PM 12.5.1 Using Connext Satellite Weather Products When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the Navigation Map Page, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age of the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at selectable intervals. Weather products expire at intervals based on each product. When the data expires, it is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by Connext Satellite Radio services. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received, the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow. 12.5.2 Connext Weather Menu The Connext Weather page is customized by selecting options from the Connext Weather and the Connext Settings Menus. The Connext Weather Menu options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying selected weather products. The Connext Settings Menu makes settings for the Coverage Region and Data Request frequency. 1. While viewing the Connext Weather page, touch the MENU key to display the Connext Weather Menu. Touch the desired keys to toggle the weather product. Figure 12-73 Connext Weather Menu 2. Touch the Connext Settings key to make detailed settings for the Connext Weather display. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-57 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 57 7/9/2015 2:08:15 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To 12.5.3 Connext Settings Coverage Region Settings Figure 12-74 Connext Settings Menu Proc 12.5.3.1 Connext Data Request Touch To Manually Request Data Auto Request Setting Time To Next Data Request Datalink Status It is necessary to request the downloading of weather products. Requests can be sent manually or set to automatically update at a selected rate. The Connext weather data may be updated at any time regardless of the automatic update timing by selecting a Manual Request. When multiple requests are made, some products are merged with the old data (SIGMETs/AIRMETs, TAFs, TFRs, and METARs), but the old data of other products is discarded. 1. While viewing the Connext Settings Menu, touch the Request Data key to manually request data. 2. Touch the Auto Request key to set the Auto Request Period. Touch To Select Request Period Figure 12-75 Select Auto Request Period Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-58 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 58 7/9/2015 2:08:15 PM 3. Touch the Cancel Request key to cancel a request in progress. Touch To Cancel Request Touch To Select Request Period Time Remaining Until Next Request Figure 12-76 Cancelling A Request 12.5.3.2 Connext Data Request Coverage Region Present Position Data Request Touch the Present Position key to request that weather information will be shown around your present position. Destination Connext Data Request Touch the Destination key to request that weather information will be shown around the destination waypoint in the ight plan. Flight Plan Data Request Touch the Flight Plan key to request that weather information will be shown around the active ight plan. Flight Plan Distance Data Request Touch the Distance key to request that weather information will be shown for the selected distance along the active ight plan. Waypoint Connext Data Request 1. Touch the Waypoint key to request that weather information will be shown around the selected waypoint. 2. Select the waypoint and then press ENT. Diameter/Route Width Connext Data Request After selecting a coverage option in the previous section, select the desired Diameter and then press ENT. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-59 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 59 7/9/2015 2:08:15 PM 12.5.3.3 Connext Weather Map Orientation 1. While viewing the Connext Weather Menu, touch the Orientation key. 2. Touch the orientation choices of North Up, Track Up, and Heading Up and to accept the displayed value and return to the Connext Weather Menu. Touch To Select Map Orientation Figure 12-77 Connext Weather Map Orientation Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-60 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 60 7/9/2015 2:08:16 PM 12.5.4 Register With Connext It is necessary to register the GTN with Connext to utilize the weather products. 1. Call Garmin Customer Service to create a Connext account. Provide the GTN System ID and airframe info (model, tail number, etc). 2. Customer Service will issue an access code to enter on the Connext Registration page. 3. While viewing Connext Settings Menu, touch the Datalink Status key. Current Registration Info Phone and Datalink Status Iridium Signal Level Touch To Register Figure 12-78 GSR 56 Status 4. Touch the Connext Registration key to display the Connext Registration display. Touch To Enter Access Code Current Registration Info Touch To Register Figure 12-79 Connext Registration Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-61 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 61 7/9/2015 2:08:16 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl 5. Touch the Access Code key to enter the appropriate code and then touch the Enter key. 6. Touch the Register key to complete the process. The GTN will contact the Connext servers using the GSR 56 transceiver. If the access code and system ID are correct, it will download and display the airframe info. Com/Nav Deactivate Unit Registration With Connext FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Registration of the GTN unit with Connext can be deactivated so that the unit can no longer make requests to Connext. This does not cancel the subscription. 1. While viewing the Connext Registration display, touch the Access Code eld and enter an invalid access code to deactivate the Connext registration. 2. Any weather requests will now fail and the system will no longer be linked to the Connext account. Wpt Info 12.5.5 Connext Weather Product Age The weather product expiration time and the refresh rate are shown in the following table. The refresh rate represents the interval at which Connext Satellites broadcast new signals that may or may not contain new weather data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by the Data Link Receiver. Weather data is refreshed at intervals that are dened and controlled by Connext and its data vendors. Weather Product Expiration Time
(Minutes) PRECIP Lightning IR Satellite SIGMETs / AIRMETs METARs Winds Aloft Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
(Blue - Regular, Yellow - Urgent) Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) 60 Table 12-6 Connext Weather Products and Aging Times 30 30 60 60 90 90 90 Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-62 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 62 7/9/2015 2:08:16 PM WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product may be signicantly older than the indicated weather product age. 12.5.6 TFRs Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local FPL short term restrictions. Figure 12-80 Connext TFR Legend 1. Touch a TFR symbol on the Weather page to view details. TFR Detail Touch TFR Symbol To View Details Figure 12-81 Connext TFR Detail 2. Touch the Back key to return to the Weather display. Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-63 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 63 7/9/2015 2:08:16 PM 12.5.7 Precipitation (PRECIP) Data Graphical data is overlaid on the map indicating the rainfall detected by ground based radar for a specic area. The colors indicating increasing levels of rainfall progresses from light green for light rainfall to red for heavy rainfall. Review the Limitations section in the front of this guide for the limitations that apply to the Connext data. Rainfall data is color coded as follows:
Figure 12-82 Connext PRECIP Weather Map Display and Legend The "No Coverage" color indicates that no data is available for that area, and rainfall in that area is unknown. When weather data is received, the airborne system will display that data for 20 minutes. If no new data has been received for a given area, the rainfall will be removed after 20 minutes and the area will revert back to the "No Coverage"
color. The Connext Weather Function is based on a ground-to-air data link and requires that the appropriate ground systems are broadcasting weather data and the aircraft is within reception range of the Ground Broadcast Transceiver (GBT). 12.5.7.1 Animating Precipitation Data NOTE: Animated Precipitation functionality is available in software version 6.00 and later. When Precipitation Data is enabled for display and more than two Precipitation images have been received by the GTN, the Precipitation display can be animated on the Connext Weather page. As new Precipitation images are Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-64 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 64 7/9/2015 2:08:16 PM
1 2 | Users Manual 3 | Users Manual | 3.91 MiB | / January 01 2016 |
12.5.7 Precipitation (PRECIP) Data Graphical data is overlaid on the map indicating the rainfall detected by ground based radar for a specic area. The colors indicating increasing levels of rainfall progresses from light green for light rainfall to red for heavy rainfall. Review the Limitations section in the front of this guide for the limitations that apply to the Connext data. Rainfall data is color coded as follows:
Figure 12-82 Connext PRECIP Weather Map Display and Legend The "No Coverage" color indicates that no data is available for that area, and rainfall in that area is unknown. When weather data is received, the airborne system will display that data for 20 minutes. If no new data has been received for a given area, the rainfall will be removed after 20 minutes and the area will revert back to the "No Coverage"
color. The Connext Weather Function is based on a ground-to-air data link and requires that the appropriate ground systems are broadcasting weather data and the aircraft is within reception range of the Ground Broadcast Transceiver (GBT). 12.5.7.1 Animating Precipitation Data NOTE: Animated Precipitation functionality is available in software version 6.00 and later. When Precipitation Data is enabled for display and more than two Precipitation images have been received by the GTN, the Precipitation display can be animated on the Connext Weather page. As new Precipitation images are Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-64 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 64 7/9/2015 2:08:16 PM received, the GTN will automatically store them for future animation. The GTN can animate up to six Precipitation images from oldest to newest, showing each for one second and the newest for two seconds. 1. While viewing the Connext Weather page with Precipitation enabled for display, press the Play PRCP key to start the Precipitation animation. 2. Touch the Stop PRCP key to stop the Precipitation animation. The animation will also stop when leaving the page or turning off Precipitation on the Connext weather page. 12.5.8 Lightning Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two kilometer
(1.08 NM) region. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed. Only cloud to ground strikes are reported in the US and extreme southern Canada (cloud to cloud strikes are not reported). Lightning Legend Lightning Symbol Figure 12-83 Connext Data Link Lightning and Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-65 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 65 7/9/2015 2:08:17 PM 12.5.9 Infrared Satellite Data Infrared Satellite data is available over North America and Europe and depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery. Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes. Information is updated every half hour. IR Satellite Legend IR Satellite Product Age IR Satellite Coverage Figure 12-84 Connext Infrared Satellite Data Map Display and Legend 12.5.10 METARs NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals
(hPa), except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury
(in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius. NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation database service area. METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations. METARs are generally updated hourly, but some site are more frequent. Special updates are done as conditions warrant. METARs typically contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown as colored ags at airports that provide them. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-66 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 66 7/9/2015 2:08:17 PM METAR Symbol Description VFR (ceiling greater than 3000 ft. AGL and visibility greater than ve miles) Marginal VFR (ceiling 10003000 ft. AGL and/or visibility three to ve miles) IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1000 ft. AGL and/or visibility one mile to less than three miles) Low IFR (ceiling below 500 ft. AGL or visibility less than one mile) Unknown Table 12-7 METAR Symbols Metar Legend Product Age METAR Detail Selected METAR (VFR) Figure 12-85 Connext Weather - Graphic METARs and Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-67 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 67 7/9/2015 2:08:17 PM 12.5.11 PIREPs Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for a particular route of ight. When signicant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Trafc Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low in-
ight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA). PIREP Legend Product Age PIREP Detail Selected PIREP Figure 12-86 Connext Weather - PIREPs Figure 12-87 Connext Weather - PIREPs Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-68 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 68 7/9/2015 2:08:17 PM 12.5.12 Winds Aloft Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3000 foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL. Pressing the WX Aloft ALT + or soft keys steps down or up in 3,000 foot increments. Winds Aloft Legend Product Age Winds Aloft Symbol Winds Aloft Altitude Selection Figure 12-88 Connext Weather - Winds Aloft Figure 12-89 Connext Weather - Winds Aloft Legend Winds Aloft Altitude The Winds Aloft Altitude option allows you to select the altitude for the Winds Aloft weather product. Altitude can be selected in 3,000 foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL. Pressing the WX Aloft ALT + or soft keys steps down or up in 3,000 foot increments. In the gure shown above, 6,000 feet is selected and Winds Aloft data is shown for winds reported at an altitude of 6,000 feet. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-69 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 69 7/9/2015 2:08:17 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 12.5.13 SIGMETs and AIRMETs SIGMETs (SIGnicant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmens METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a signicant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position. SIGMET/AIRMET Legend Product Age SIGMET Line Selected SIGMET Line Figure 12-90 Connext Weather Page - AIRMETs/SIGMETs When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous weather. SIGMETs are directed to all aircraft. AIRMETs are intended for light aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust, and volcanic ash as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is selected in the Connext Settings Menu. Figure 12-91 Connext Weather - AIRMETs/SIGMETs Detail and Legend When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
Icing Turbulence IFR conditions Mountain obscuration Surface winds Index 12-70 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 70 7/9/2015 2:08:18 PM 12.6 FIS-B Weather The Flight Information Services (FIS-B) function is capable of displaying text and graphic weather information with GDL 88 installations. No subscription for FIS-B services is required with the GDL 88. The FIS-B Function is a graphic weather display capable of displaying graphical weather information on UAT equipped installations. Graphical data is overlaid on the map indicating the rainfall detected by ground based radar for a specic area. Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities
(reectivity) measured in dBZ (decibels of Z). Reectivity (designated by the letter Z) is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. The dBZ values increase as returned signal strength increases. Precipitation intensity is displayed using colors corresponding to the dBZ values. Review the Limitations section in the front of this guide for the limitations that apply to the FIS-B data. An example of how rainfall data is color coded follows:
Figure 12-92 FIS-B Weather Precipitation Legend A cyan checkerboard pattern indicates that no data is available for that area, and rainfall in that area is unknown. The FIS-B Function is based on a ground-to-air data link and requires that the appropriate ground systems are broadcasting weather data and the aircraft is within reception range of the Ground Broadcast Transceiver (GBT). Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-71 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 71 7/9/2015 2:08:18 PM NEXRAD Off CONUS Regional Combined METAR PIREP Wind/Temp Aloft 1,000 ft ... 45,000 ft SIGMET/AIRMET Orientation Track Up Heading Up North Up Legend Figure 12-93 FIS-B Weather Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-72 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 72 7/9/2015 2:08:18 PM Expiration Time
(Minutes) Transmission Interval
(Minutes) Update Interval (Minutes) Weather Product CONUS NEXRAD Regional NEXRAD AIRMETs SIGMETs METARs 60 30 60 60 90 Winds and Temperatures Aloft 90 or at the end of the valid period Pilot Weather Report (PIREP)
(Blue - Regular, Yellow - Urgent) TAFs TFRs NOTAMs 90 60 60 60 15 2.5 5 5 5 10 10 10 10 10 15 5 As Available
(Typically 20 minutes) As Available
(Typically 20 minutes), then at 15 minute intervals for 1 hour 1 minute (where available), As Available otherwise
(Typically d 20 minutes) 12 hours As available
|(Typically 20 minutes) 8 hours 20 As available
(Typically 20 minutes) Table 12-8 FIS-B Weather Products and Aging WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product may be signicantly older than the indicated weather product age. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-73 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 73 7/9/2015 2:08:18 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 12.6.1 FIS-B Operation Weather data reception time is shown in the upper right corner of the screen. An indicated time shows if the aircraft is currently within reception coverage of a ground station with weather broadcast capabilities. The ground system determines the weather coverage area and extent of data that is transmitted by each ground station. The GDL 88 can display weather from multiple ground stations. 1. From the Home page, touch the Weather key on the Home page and then touch the FIS-B Weather key (if necessary). Weather Product Legends NEXRAD Selection Age Of Selected Weather Products Touch + or - To Select Map Range Figure 12-94 FIS-B Weather Page (NEXRAD Key Shown) 2. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, touch the Menu key to congure the Data Link Weather page. Touch NEXRAD Key To Select Off, CONUS, Regional, or Combined NEXRAD NOTAM On/Off Display Key Touch Keys To Select Weather Product. Green Bar Indicates Selected Product. Touch Legend Key To Display Legend Weather Overlay Map Orientation Figure 12-95 FIS-B Weather Data Link Menu 3. Once you selected what items you want to display, touch BACK to return to the FIS-B Weather page. Index 12-74 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 74 7/9/2015 2:08:18 PM 12.6.2 FIS-B NEXRAD WSR-88D weather surveillance radar or NEXRAD (NEXt generation RADar) is a Doppler radar system that has greatly improved the detection of meteorological events such as thunderstorms, tornadoes, and hurricanes. An extensive network of NEXRAD stations provides almost complete radar coverage of the continental United States, Alaska, and Hawaii. The unobstructed range of each NEXRAD is 124 nautical miles. 12.6.2.1 NEXRAD Abnormalities There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images. Some, but not all, causes of abnormal displayed information include:
Ground Clutter Strobes and spurious radar data Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly at the sun Military aircraft deploy metallic dust which can cause alterations in radar scans Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows Scheduled maintenance may put a radar off-line 12.6.2.2 NEXRAD Limitations Certain limitations exist regarding the NEXRAD radar displays. Some, but not all, are listed for the users awareness:
The Regional NEXRAD pixels are 1.5 minutes (1.5 nautical miles
= 2.78 km) wide by 1 minute (1 nautical miles = 1.852 km) tall. The CONUS NEXRAD pixels are 7.5 minutes (7.5 nautical miles = 13.89 km) wide by 5 minutes (5 nautical miles = 9.26 km) wide. Above 60 degrees of latitude the Regional NEXRAD "pixels" are 3 minutes/nautical miles. CONUS NEXRAD is not available above 60 degrees of latitude. The intensity level reected by the pixel will be the highest level sampled within the area covered by each pixel. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-75 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 75 7/9/2015 2:08:18 PM 12.6.2.3 NEXRAD Intensity Colors are used to identify the different NEXRAD echo intensities (reectivity) measured in dBZ (decibels of Z). Reectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Reectivity (designated by the letter Z) covers a wide range of signals (from very weak to very strong). So, a more convenient number for calculations and comparison, a decibel (or logarithmic) scale (dBZ), is used. The dBZ values increase as the strength of the signal returned to the radar increases. 12.6.2.4 NEXRAD When enabled, NEXRAD weather information is shown. Composite data from all of the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of the maximum reectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather level severity. Refer to the legend for a description of the color code. The NEXRAD option has selections of Regional, CONUS, or Combined NEXRAD. CONUS NEXRAD includes a composite of available NEXRAD radar imagery across the 48 states. Regional NEXRAD is a composite of available NEXRAD radar imagery in a local area, showing a more detailed image than CONUS NEXRAD. FIS-B weather data reception requires line-of-site communication between the receiver and the ADS-B ground station. Incomplete Regional and/or CONUS NEXRAD imagery displayed on the MAP and FIS-B Weather Pages of the affected products is an indicator of poor FIS-B reception. Affected Areas Any area in the continental United States (CONUS) or Alaska where the distance from ADS-B ground stations, or the combined effect of distance and low altitude, is sufciently great may cause poor reception. A good source of information for ground station coverage can be found at:
http://www.faa.gov/nextgen/ashmap/
Reception will improve in some affected areas as the FAA completes the NextGen ADS-B ground station infrastructure. However, due to line-of-sight broadcast characteristics, operators with properly installed and functioning equipment may still receive incomplete FIS-B data when signal reception is limited by the distance from ground stations combined with a low altitude. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-76 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 76 7/9/2015 2:08:18 PM The example below displays an area where FIS-B data is degraded due to poor reception:
Figure 12-96 Example of Areas Where FIS-B Reception Is Unavailable Continental US NEXRAD (CONUS) The Display CONUS NEXRAD selection shows NEXRAD radar information for the entire continental United States. CONUS NEXRAD data is updated every 15 minutes. Out Of CONUS NEXRAD Coverage CONUS NEXRAD Coverage Shown CONUS Selected On NEXRAD Key Figure 12-97 Weather Page With CONUS Displayed Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-77 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 77 7/9/2015 2:08:19 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Regional NEXRAD The Regional NEXRAD selection shows regional NEXRAD radar information within 500 NM of the aircraft location. Out Of Regional NEXRAD Coverage Regional NEXRAD Coverage Shown Within Regional NEXRAD Area But Coverage Not Available Regional Selected On NEXRAD Key Figure 12-98 Weather Page With Regional NEXRAD Displayed Map Combined NEXRAD Regional NEXRAD data and CONUS NEXRAD data are shown together. The two types of NEXRAD are separated by a white stippled border. This boundary is updated whenever new Regional or CONUS NEXRAD data is received. The radius of the boundary is xed at 150 NM. Out Of Regional NEXRAD Coverage Regional NEXRAD Boundary Shown NEXRAD Weather Shown NEXRAD Weather Shown CONUS & Regional Selected On NEXRAD Key Figure 12-99 Weather Page With Combined NEXRAD Displayed Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-78 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 78 7/9/2015 2:08:19 PM Selecting NEXRAD in the FIS-B Weather Menu 1. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, touch the Menu key to select the NEXRAD choice. 2. Touch the NEXRAD key to select Off, Regional, CONUS, or Combined NEXRAD. Touch the Desired NEXRAD Source Figure 12-100 NEXRAD Source Selection 3. Touch the Back key to return to the FIS-B Weather Menu. Animating NEXRAD FIS-B NOTE: Animated NEXRAD functionality is available in software version 6.00 and later. When Regional or CONUS NEXRAD is enabled for display and more than two NEXRAD images have been received by the GTN, the NEXRAD display can be animated on the FIS-B Weather page. As new NEXRAD images are received, the GTN will automatically store them for future animation. The GTN can animate up to six NEXRAD images from oldest to newest, showing each for one second and the newest for two seconds. NOTE: CONUS/Regional Combined NEXRAD cannot be animated. CONUS and Regional NEXRAD can only be animated when displayed individually. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-79 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 79 7/9/2015 2:08:19 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather page with NEXRAD enabled for display, press the Play NXRD key to start the NEXRAD animation. 2. Touch the Stop NXRD key to stop the NEXRAD animation. The animation will also stop when leaving the page or turning off NEXRAD on the FIS-B weather page. 12.6.3 FIS-B TFRs FPL Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local short term restrictions. The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes. Figure 12-101 FIS-B TFR Legend 1. Touch a TFR symbol on the Weather page to view details. TFR Detail Touch TFR Symbol To View Details Touch TFR Symbol To View Details Figure 12-102 FIS-B TFR Detail 2. Touch the Back key to return to the Weather display. Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-80 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 80 7/9/2015 2:08:19 PM 12.6.4 FIS-B METARs When enabled, graphic METARs (METeorological Aviation Reports) are shown as colored ags at airports that provide METAR reports. Press the METARs key to enable or disable METARs. Refer to the Legend for a description of the color code. The update rate is every ve minutes. METAR Symbol Description VFR (ceiling greater than 3000 ft. AGL and visibility greater than ve miles) Marginal VFR (ceiling 10003000 ft. AGL and/or visibility three to ve miles) IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1000 ft. AGL and/or visibility one mile to less than three miles) Low IFR (ceiling below 500 ft. AGL or visibility less than one mile) Unknown Table 12-9 METAR Symbols 1. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, touch the Menu key to select the METAR choice. Touch an airport symbol for more METAR detail. Product Age METAR Detail METAR Flags Touch Airport For METAR Detail 2. Touch the METAR key to toggle METARS on or off. Figure 12-103 METARS 3. Touch the Back key to return to the FIS-B Weather page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-81 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 81 7/9/2015 2:08:20 PM 12.6.5 FIS-B PIREPs Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information. When signicant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Trafc Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low in-ight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent
(UUA). The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes. 1. While viewing the FIS-B weather page, touch the Menu key to select the PIREP choice. 2. Touch the PIREP key to toggle PIREPs on or off. Urgent PIREP Symbol (Yellow). Touch For Details. Routine PIREP Symbol (Blue). Touch For Details. Figure 12-104 Weather Display With PIREP Information Active Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-82 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 82 7/9/2015 2:08:20 PM 3. Touch a weather information symbol to view details for that item. PIREP Details Selected PIREP For Detail Figure 12-105 PIREP Information Detail Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts 4. Touch the Back key to remove the detailed information. Wpt Info 5. Touch the PIREP key again to turn it off. Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-83 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 83 7/9/2015 2:08:20 PM 12.6.6 FIS-B Winds and Temperatures Aloft Winds and Temperatures Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed, direction, and Temperature at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in increments from the 1,000 feet up to 53,000 feet. The update rate is every 12 hours. 1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Wind/
Temp Aloft key. Wind Symbols Selected Wind Altitude Touch To Select Wind Altitude Figure 12-106 Winds Aloft 2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT or + keys to increase or decrease the reporting altitude of the winds aloft in increments. The selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude keys. 3. Touch the Wind/Temp Aloft key again to turn it off. Figure 12-107 FIS-B Winds Aloft Legend Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-84 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 84 7/9/2015 2:08:20 PM 12.6.7 FIS-B SIGMETs and AIRMETs SIGMETs (SIGnicant METerological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmens METerological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather considered of importance to aircraft. The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes. Figure 12-108 FIS-B SIGMET/AIRMET Legend 1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather menu, touch the SIGMET/
AIRMET key. Surface Winds Present Position IFR Line Turbulence Line Mountain Obscured Figure 12-109 FIS-B SIGMETs and AIRMETs Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 12-85 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 85 7/9/2015 2:08:20 PM 2. Touch a SIGMET/AIRMET line to view details. Touch the Back key to return to the Weather display. Figure 12-110 SIGMET and AIRMET Details 3. Touch the SIGMET/AIRMET key again to turn it off. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 12-86 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 86 7/9/2015 2:08:21 PM 13 NEAREST The Nearest function provides detailed information for the 25 nearest airports, VORs, NDBs, Intersections and User waypoints within 200 NM of your current position. In addition, the Nearest pages include the ve nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) and center (ARTCC/FIR) points of communication and alert you to any Special Use (SUA) or Controlled Airspace you may be in or near. Function Title Nearest Waypoint Types Figure 13-1 Nearest Page List List List Wpt Info Wpt Info Wpt Info Freq List List List Wpt Info Wpt Info Airspace Info List List List Frequency Frequency Wpt Info Frequency Figure 13-2 Nearest Page Functional Map Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 13-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:08:21 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain 13.1 Select a Nearest Page The available waypoint types are shown on the Nearest page. Touch the key to display the nearest 25 waypoint types (FSS and ARTCC will display up to ve items). Not all 25 nearest waypoints can be displayed on the corresponding Nearest page at one time. The Nearest page displays detailed information for ve nearest items. 1. On the Home page, touch the Nearest key. 2. Touch the desired waypoint type (Airport, VOR, etc.) and then touch the Up and Down keys on the lower right of the display to navigate through the list of available items. You can also touch an item on the list and drag your nger to scroll the list. 3. Touch the highlighted item to view more detailed information. 4. To navigate Direct-To the waypoint you're viewing, press the Direct-To key. The waypoint will be loaded into the Waypoint window of the Direct-To function. 5. Touch the Activate key to navigate directly to that waypoint. Weather 13.2 Nearest Airport The Nearest Airport Page displays the identier, symbol, bearing and distance, and the length of the longest runway for the 25 nearest airports (within 200 NM of your present position). The Nearest Airport Page can be congured to exclude shorter runways or undesirable runway surface types, so that the corresponding airports do not appear on the list. You may wish to use this feature to exclude seaplane bases, heliports, or runway lengths which would be difcult or impossible to land upon. See System - Setup - Nearest Airport Criteria for information about conguring the Nearest Airport display criteria. Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 13-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:08:21 PM 1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the Airport key. A list of the nearest 25 airports within 200 NM will be listed. Airport Identier Scroll Bar Indicate More Items On The List Airport Information Figure 13-3 Nearest Airport 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list. 3. Touch the Airport Identier key to show the Waypoint Info page for the selected airport. Distance & Bearing Information Referenced To Current Position Airport Information Page Touch To View Charts When Available Figure 13-4 Nearest Airport Waypoint Info Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages 4. Touch one of the tabs (Map, Procedures, Runways, etc.) on the sides of the display for more information about the selected airport. Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 13-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:08:22 PM 13.3 Nearest Intersection (INT) The Nearest Intersection Page displays the identier, symbol, bearing and distance to the 25 nearest intersections (within 200 NM of your present position). 1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the INT key. A list of the nearest 25 Intersections within 200 NM will be listed. Intersection Identier Slider Indicates More Items On The List Intersection Information Arrow Indicates More Items On The List Figure 13-5 Nearest Intersection List 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list. Slider Indicates More Items On The List Arrows Indicate More Items On The List Figure 13-6 Scrolling Down the Nearest Intersection List Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 13-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:08:22 PM 3. Touch the Intersection Identier key to show the Waypoint Info page for the selected Intersection. Distance & Bearing Information Referenced To Current Position Intersection Map Detail Map Range Keys Figure 13-7 Nearest Intersection Waypoint Detail Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 13-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:08:22 PM 13.4 Nearest VOR The Nearest VOR Page displays the identier, symbol, bearing and distance to the 25 nearest VORs (within 200 NM of your present position). For each VOR listed, the Nearest VOR Page also indicates the frequency and may be used to quickly tune the Nav radio to the nearby VOR (GTN 750 only). Touch the VOR Frequency key to place the frequency in the standby eld of the Nav window. Touch the Nav Active window to ip/op the Nav frequencies. 1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the VOR key. A list of the nearest 25 VORs within 200 NM will be listed. Nearest VOR Identier Bearing from Current Position to VOR Nearest VOR Frequency Distance from Current Position to VOR Arrows Indicate More Items On The List Figure 13-8 Nearest VOR List and Information 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 13-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:08:22 PM 3. Touch the VOR Identier key to show the Waypoint Info page for the selected VOR. VOR Information Referenced To Current Position Additional VOR Information VOR Map Detail VOR Location Figure 13-9 Nearest VOR Waypoint Information 4. Touch the Frequency key on this page or from the Nearest VOR List page to place the selected frequency into the Nav Standby window. Touch to Flip/Flop VOR Frequency Inserted Into Standby Window. VOR Frequency Figure 13-10 Nearest VOR Frequency Entry Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 13-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:08:23 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 13.5 Nearest NDB The Nearest NDB Page displays the identier, symbol, bearing, distance and frequency to the 25 nearest NDBs (within 200 NM of your present position). 1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the NDB key. A list of the nearest 25 NDBs within 200 NM will be listed. NDB Identier Scroll Bar Indicates More Items On The List. Touch And Drag Finger To Scroll. NDB Information Arrows Indicate More Items On The List Figure 13-11 Nearest NDB 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list. 3. Touch the NDB Identier key to show the Waypoint Info page for the selected NDB. Distance and Bearing Referenced To Current Position NDB Map Detail Map Range Keys Figure 13-12 Nearest NDB Waypoint Information Index 13-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:08:23 PM 13.6 Nearest User Waypoint The Nearest User Waypoint Page displays the name, bearing and distance to the 25 nearest user waypoints (within 200 NM of your present position). 1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the User Waypoint key. A list of the nearest 25 User waypoints within 200 NM will be listed. Figure 13-13 Nearest User Waypoint 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list. 3. Touch the User Identier key to show the Waypoint Info page for the selected User waypoint. User Wpt Distance &
Bearing Referenced To Current Position User Wpt Map Detail Map Range Keys Figure 13-14 Nearest User Waypoint Information Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 13-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:08:23 PM 13.7 Nearest Airspace The Nearest Airspace Page, alerts you to as many as 25 controlled or special use airspaces near or in your ight path. Alerts are provided according to the following conditions:
If your projected course will take you inside an airspace within the next ten minutes, the alert message AIRSPACE ALERT - Airspace entry in less than 10 minutes appears. The Nearest Airspace Page shows the airspace as Airspace Ahead. If you are within two nautical miles of an airspace and your current course will take you inside, the message AIRSPACE ALERT - Within 2nm of airspace appears. The Nearest Airspace Page shows the air-
space as Airspace Within 2 NM. If you are within two nautical miles of an airspace and your current course will take you inside in less than 10 minutes, the message AIR-
SPACE ALERT - Airspace within 2nm and entry in less than 10 minutes appears. The Nearest Airspace Page shows the airspace as Ahead <
2 NM. If you have entered an airspace, the message AIRSPACE ALERT -
Inside Airspace appears. The Nearest Airspace Page shows Inside of airspace. Note that the airspace alerts are based on three-dimensional data (latitude, longitude and altitude) to avoid nuisance alerts. The alert boundaries for controlled airspace are also sectorized to provide complete information on any nearby airspace. Once one of the described conditions exists, the message annunciator ashes, alerting you of an airspace message (if airspace alert messages are enabled). See System-Alerts to set the Arrival Alert Proximity, Airspace Type, and Altitude Buffer values. NOTE: The Airspace Alert setting does not alter the depiction of airspace, or change the Smart Airspace setting for the main map page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 13-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:08:23 PM Airspace Boundary Runway Extension Airspace Sector Name Selected Airspace Sector Map Pointer Current Position Active Flight Plan Leg Map Pointer Location Information Figure 13-15 Airspace Sectors 1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the Airspace key. A list of the nearest 25 Airspaces within 200 NM along the aircraft ight path will be listed, depending on the airspace types and values set by the user. Airspace Name Airspace Information Figure 13-16 Nearest Airspace List 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list. 3. Touch the Airspace Identier key to show the Waypoint Info page for the selected Airspace. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 13-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:08:24 PM Touch To View Airspace Frequency List Airspace Name Airspace Contact Name Proximity To Airspace Airspace Altitude Figure 13-17 Nearest Airspace Waypoint Information Once you have been provided an airspace alert message, detailed information concerning the specic airspace is provided on the Nearest Airspace Page. The Nearest Airspace Page displays the airspace name, status (AIRSPACE ALERT -
inside Airspace, AIRSPACE ALERT - Airspace entry in less than 10 minutes, etc.), and a time to entry (if applicable). By selecting any airspace name listed on the Nearest Airspace Page, additional details are provided including controlling agency, communication frequencies and oor/ceiling limits. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 13-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:08:24 PM 13.8 Nearest ARTCC The Nearest ARTCC page displays the facility name, bearing to, distance, and frequency to the ve nearest Air Route Trafc Control Center (ARTCC) points of communication (within 200 NM of your present position). For each ARTCC listed, the Nearest ARTCC page also indicates the frequency(s) and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver to the centers frequency. Touch the ARTCC Frequency key to place the frequency in the standby eld of the COM window. Touch the COM Active window to ip/op the Com frequencies (GTN 750 only). 1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the ARTCC key. A list of the nearest ve ARTCCs within 200 NM will be listed. ARTCC Name and Information ARTCC Frequency Key With Multiple Frequencies Available ARTCC Frequency Key Figure 13-18 Nearest ARTCC 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list as needed. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 13-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:08:24 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 3. The Frequency category will show "Multiple" keys if multiple frequencies are available. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to display the frequencies. Selected ARTCC Frequency Key ARTCC Multiple Frequency Key ARTCC Multiple Frequency List Figure 13-19 Nearest ARTCC Multiple Frequency List 4. Touch the key for the desired frequency to place the selected frequency into the Com Standby window. Touch To Flip/Flop Active And Standby Frequencies Selected ARTCC Frequency Inserted Into Standby Window Selected ARTCC Multiple Frequency List Key Figure 13-20 Selected ARTCC Frequency From List Index 13-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:08:24 PM 13.9 Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) The Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) Page displays the facility name, bearing to, distance, and frequency to the ve nearest FSS points of communication
(within 200 NM of your present position). For each FSS listed, the Nearest FSS Page also indicates the frequency(s) and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver to the FSSs frequency. Touch the FSS Frequency key to place the frequency in the standby eld of the COM window. Touch the COM Active window to ip/op the Com frequencies
(GTN 750 only). Receive-only frequencies are noted with a white "RX."
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the FSS key. A list of the nearest ve FSSs within 200 NM will be listed. FSS Name and Information FSS Frequency Key With Multiple Frequencies Available FSS Frequency Key Figure 13-21 Nearest FSS 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list, if necessary. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 13-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:08:24 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 3. The Frequency key will show "Multiple FREQ" if multiple frequencies are available. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to display the frequencies. Slider Indicates More Frequencies. Touch And Drag Finger To View More. FSS Multiple Frequency List Touch The Up And Down Keys To View More Frequencies Figure 13-22 Nearest FSS Multiple Frequency List 4. Touch the key for the desired frequency to place the selected frequency into the Com Standby window. Selected FSS Frequency Inserted Into Standby Window FSS Multiple Frequency Key Figure 13-23 Selected FSS Frequency From List Index 13-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:08:25 PM 13.10 Nearest Weather Frequency (WX Freq) The Nearest WX FREQ function displays facility name, bearing to, distance, and frequency for the nearest 25 Automatic Terminal Information Service
(ATIS), Automated Service Observing System (ASOS), and Automated Weather Observing Station (AWOS) weather reporting stations within 200 NM. 1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the WX FREQ key. A list of the nearest 25 Weather stations within 200 NM will be listed. Reporting Weather Waypoint Information Reporting Weather Waypoint Identier AWOS Frequency ATIS Frequency ASOS Frequency Arrows Indicate More Items On The List Figure 13-24 Nearest Weather Station Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain 2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list, as Weather needed. 3. Touch the key for the desired frequency to place the selected frequency into the Com Standby window. Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 13-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:08:25 PM Selected Weather Frequency Inserted Into Standby Window Selected Weather Frequency Key Figure 13-25 Nearest Weather Station Selected Frequency 4. Touch the Weather Station Identier key to show the Waypoint Info page for the selected Weather station. Dis & Brg Information Referenced To Current Position Weather Tab Selected Wpt Identier, Type, and Name Information Wpt Detail Figure 13-26 Nearest Weather Station Waypoint Information Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 13-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:08:25 PM 14 SERVICES/MUSIC The Services function is available when certain optional features are installed and enabled. The key will be labeled as Music when only the Music feature is enabled. Music is provided through SiriusXM Satellite Radio. The GSR 56 is an Iridium satellite transceiver that supports voice telephone calls, aircraft position reporting, and world wide weather products. While viewing the Home page, touch the Services key to view the Services page. Touch To Use Phone Services Touch To Setup Position Reporting Touch To Use Text Messaging Touch To Access SiriusXM Music Touch To Access Your Contact List Figure 14-1 Services Page g g Inbox Drafts Outbox Status Phone Number Call/End Call Volume Suppression Off On On During APR/MAPR/
TERM Add Status Automatic Reporting Time Period Volume Name Phone Number Email Address Save Contact Existing Contact Call Message Edit Delete Figure 14-2 Services Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 14-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:08:26 PM 14.1 Music NOTE: Refer to the Weather Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products. The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for the pilots and passengers enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is not available on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specic service packages, visit http://www.garmin.com/xm/. Audio entertainment is available through the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A. The GTN unit serves as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A. When enabled, the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in the Music function. The information on the SiriusXM Satellite Radio display is composed of four areas: the Active Channel, Available Channels, Category of the highlighted channel, and the Volume setting. The Active Channel window shows the Channel Name and Number, Artist, Song Title, and Category. Channel Prev/Next Channel Select with keypad Browse Volume Presets Status Channel Category Up/Down Mute XM 1 XM 2 XM 3 GDL 69A Status Figure 14-3 Music Functional Diagram Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 14-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:08:26 PM 14.2 Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite Radio to activate the entertainment subscription. The SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions are included with the GDL 69A (also available at www.garmin. com, P/N 190-00355-04). It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A. Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming. These IDs are located:
On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver On the Music Menu Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located. NOTE: Refer to the GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04) for further information. 1. Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio through the e-mail address listed on their web site (www.xmradio.com) or by the customer service phone number listed on the web site (1-800-985-
9200). 2. Follow the instructions provided. If SiriusXM weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are cleared on the XM Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 14-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:08:26 PM 14.3 Music Operation The GTN 7XX provides control for enjoying SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment in the aircraft. The Music function allows selecting music categories and specic channels, as well as saving category and channel selections as presets for quick recall. The music volume level may also be managed. Current Category Signal Level Current Channel. Touch to Select a Channel. Current Channel Touch Step To Previous Or Next Channel Current Preset Bank. Touch To Step Through Preset Banks. Touch To Select Category Current Volume. Touch to Change Volume. Touch To Select Preset GDL Data Link Status Figure 14-4 Main Music Display NOTE: The Music Conguration function can be set so that when there is radio reception or intercom conversation, the music level is dropped to a low, or background level. When the radio or intercom trafc ceases, the level gradually returns to normal. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 14-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:08:26 PM 14.3.1 Browsing Channels and Categories The Category window displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of channels, such as Jazz, Rock, or News, can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other contents. 1. While viewing the Music page, touch the Browse key and then touch the desired channel to select it. Current Channel Touch to Change Categories Active Channel Figure 14-5 Music Channels 2. Touch the Category key to activate Category selection and then touch the desired Category to select it. Selected Category Current Category Categories. Touch to Select 3. The current category will be shown at the top of the display. Figure 14-6 Music Categories Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 14-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:08:26 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 14.3.2 Selecting an SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel by Number Channels may be selected directly in the selected category using the numeric keypad. 1. While viewing the main Music page, touch the Channel key. The Channel Number selection page will appear. Touch Channel Key Figure 14-7 Selecting Music Channels 2. Use the numeric keys to enter the number for the desired channel and then touch the Enter key. Channel Number Window Touch to Clear Channel Number Window Numeric Keypad for in Channel Number Selection Touch to Select Channel Shown in Channel Number Window Figure 14-8 Selecting Music Channels with the Numeric Keypad Index 14-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:08:27 PM 14.3.3 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Volume The Volume control allows you to set the audio volume level, as well as mute the audio. 1. While viewing the Music page, touch the Volume key. Bar Graph Showing Volume Level Touch To Lower The Volume Touch To Raise The Volume Touch To Toggle Mute Figure 14-9 Music Volume Control 2. Touch the Up or Down Volume keys to adjust the radio volume. 3. Touch MUTE to toggle muting of the radio volume. 4. Touch MUTE again or the Volume key to unmute the radio volume. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 14-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:08:27 PM 14.3.4 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel Presets The Music Menu allows you to store the Active Channel into a selected preset position for easy later recall. A delay of several seconds can occur when setting or recalling a preset. Selected Preset Channel Touch To Recall Selected Preset Touch To Select Bank of Presets (XM 1, XM 2, or XM 3) Figure 14-10 Music Presets 14.3.4.1 Saving a Preset 1. While viewing the desired channel, select the preset bank for saving the preset (XM 1, XM 2, or XM 3) by touching the Presets key until the desire bank is shown. 2. Touch the desired Preset key and hold it for three seconds. 14.3.4.2 Recalling a Preset 1. Touch the Presets key to select the preset bank (XM 1, XM 2, or XM 3). 2. Touch the desired Preset key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 14-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:08:27 PM 14.3.5 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to nd the possible cause of a failure. Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to SiriusXM Satellite Radio Ensure the SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription has been activated Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver For troubleshooting purposes, check the Menu on the Music Page or the GDL 69 Box on the System - External LRUs Page for Data Link Receiver
(GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. It may take several minutes for all subscribed data to become available after power-up. Text Color White Grey Green Description Subscribed Not Subscribed Available Table 14-1 Product Status 1. Touch the Status key on the Music page to display the GDL 69/69A Status. Data Radio ID &
Signal Level Subscription Level Audio Radio ID
& Signal Level GDL 69A SW Version and Serial Number Weather Product List Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Figure 14-11 GDL 69 Status Page 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 Weather Product Legend Messages Music Menu Symbols Appendix 14-9 Index 7/9/2015 2:08:27 PM 2. The GDL status information is provided on this page. 3. Touch the Menu key to display the GDL Status Menu. Figure 14-12 GDL Status Menu 4. Touch the Lock Activation key if this is for the initial subscription or a change in the subscription. Touch the OK key to continue the operation. Figure 14-13 Lock Activation Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 14-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:08:28 PM 14.4 Iridium Phone Operation (Optional) Optional satellite telephone operation is available through the Iridium satellite system that is interfaced through the Garmin GSR 56. Phone Status Touch To Start Phone Call Touch To Adjust Phone Volume Touch To Select Phone Number To Call Touch To End Phone Call Touch To Select Suppression Option Figure 14-14 Services Phone Page 14.4.1 Status The Status section shows the Call Time, Phone Status, and Call Suppression selected. The Call Time value shows the length of the call time for the current call using the Iridium phone. Phone Status shows the current operating status of the Iridium phone. Status Idle Initializing Connected Connecting Call Description The Iridium phone is not using the GSR 56 for communicating at this time. The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing. The GSR 56 is connected to the called number. The GSR 56 is in the process of connecting to the called number. Changing Volume The volume level on the GSR 56 is changing. Busy Dialing Incoming Call Hanging Up Unavailable The phone is in use by another service and the call may not be made. The GSR 56 is dialing the called number. A call is being made to the GSR 56. The GSR 56 is disconnecting from the current call. The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the Iridium phone system. Table 14-2 Iridium Phone Status Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 14-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:08:28 PM 14.4.2 Making a Phone Call 1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, touch Phone, select a phone number, or select one from Contacts. Entered Phone Number Touch To Delete Previous Character Touch To Move Cursor Touch To Select Number From Existing Contacts Touch To Select Phone Number Figure 14-15 Making a Phone Call 2. Touch Enter to accept the selected number. 3. Touch the Call key. Phone Status Touch To Start Phone Call Touch To Adjust Phone Volume Touch To Select Phone Number To Call Touch To End Phone Call Touch To Select Suppression Option Figure 14-16 Phone Call In Progress Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 14-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:08:28 PM 4. To make a direct call with a keypad, touch the Touchtone Entry key. Figure 14-17 Touchtone Entry Pad 5. After completing the call, touch the End Call key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 14-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:08:28 PM 14.4.3 Answering a Phone Call An incoming phone call will generate a pop-up announcing the call. When a call is accepted, the pop-up will show that the call is connected and the cumulative call time will be shown. 1. When an incoming call is available, touch the Enter key or the ANSWER key to answer the call. Or, press the Ignore key to not answer the call and hang up. Touch To Answer Phone Call Touch To Ignore Phone Call Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Figure 14-18 Incoming Call Pop-Up 2. After a called is accepted and connected, the connection time will be shown on the pop-up. Touch the ATT soft key to attenuate the call volume; touching it again will return to normal volume. Touch the HANG UP soft key to end the call. Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 14-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:08:28 PM 14.4.4 Suppress Visuals Call Suppression controls calling when use of the Iridium phone system is allowed. NOTE: The Suppress Visuals setting only affects the visual indication of an incoming call/text. It does not inhibit the phone ringer or incoming SMS chime. Garmin recommends that you inhibit the audio from the GSR 56 unless a phone call is active. Status Off On On During APR/
MAPR/TERM Description Call Suppression is turned off. Calls may be transmitted and received through the Iridium phone. Call Suppression is turned on. The incoming call pop-up will not be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page. Outgoing calls are not affected. Call Suppression is turned on during Approach, Missed Approach, and Terminal operations. The incoming call pop-up will not be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page. Outgoing calls are not affected. Table 14-3 Call Suppression 1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, touch the Suppression key. 2. Touch the desired Call Suppression type. Touch To Select The Desired Suppression Figure 14-19 Select Call/SMS Suppression 3. Or, press Back to return to the Phone page without making a selection. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 14-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:08:29 PM 14.4.5 Phone Volume Use the Phone Volume controls to adjust the loudness of the phone calls you hear. Volume controls will only be available when the Idle, Connected, or Changing Volume states are displayed. Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Soft Keys 1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, touch the VOL keys to adjust the phone volume. Touch To Reduce Volume Touch To Increase Volume Phone Volume Level Bar Graph Figure 14-20 Select Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment 2. The phone volume level is shown as a bar graph. 14.4.6 SMS Text Operation Send and receive text messages through the GSR 56 phone connection. 1. While viewing the Services page, touch the SMS Text key. Touch To Compose New Message Touch To Received Messages Touch To View Draft Messages Touch To View Sent Messages Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Touch To Return To Previous Page Touch To View SMS Text Menu Symbols Appendix Figure 14-21 SMS Text Page 2. Select Compose, Inbox, Drafts, or Outbox. Index 14-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:08:29 PM 14.4.6.1 SMS Text Messaging Menu The SMS Text Messaging Menu allows you to sort, mark, or delete messages and select call suppression. Figure 14-22 SMS Text Messaging Menu 1. Touch the Time key to sort messages by Time or the Address key to sort by Address. 2. Touch the Suppression key and then touch the call suppression choice. The current choice will be shown on the Suppression key. 3. While viewing the Inbox, Drafts, or Outbox, touch the Mark All As Read to tag the messages as having been read. 4. Touch the Delete All Messages to delete the messages in the viewed category. 14.4.6.2 Composing a SMS Text Message 1. While viewing the SMS Text page, touch the Compose key. Touch To Select Recipient Touch To Compose New Message Touch To Send Message Figure 14-23 Compose a New SMS Text Message 2. Touch the To window to select the recipient. Select either a Phone Number or E-mail Address. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 14-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:08:29 PM Touch To Select Phone Number Touch To Select Email Address Figure 14-24 Select Destination for the SMS Text Message 3. Use either the keypad or select from the Contacts. 4. Touch the Message window to enter the text for the message. Use the keypad to create the message. 5. Touch Send to send the message. Touch Save to save the message as a draft. Touch Delete to delete this message. 14.4.6.3 A Failed SMS Text Message 1. While viewing the Services page, touch the SMS Text key and touch the Outbox tab. A failed message is noted with an x. Message With Failed Mark Outbox Group With Failed Notation Figure 14-25 SMS Text Message List Showing a Failed Message 2. Touch the failed message. Touch the Send Again key to resend the message. Touch the Delete key to delete the message. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 14-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:08:29 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Failed Message Message Body Touch To Delete Message Touch Resend Message Figure 14-26 Resend a Failed SMS Text Message 14.4.7 Position Reporting Position Reporting is a system which collects system variables and transmits them over the Iridium satellite at a given interval through the GSR 56. 1. While viewing the Services page, touch the Position Reports key. Report Status Touch To Enable Automatic Reporting Touch To Manually Send A Report Touch To Set Automatic Reporting Period Figure 14-27 Services Position Reporting 2. Touch the Automatic Reporting key to enable Automatic Reporting. 3. After Automatic Reporting is enabled, touch the Report Period key to set the Reporting Period. 4. Select the Report Period with the keypad and press Enter. Messages 5. When Automatic Reporting is disabled, touch the Send Report key to manually send a report. Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 14-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:08:30 PM 14.4.7.1 Status The Status window shows the time until the next data transmission and the status of the reporting system. NOTE: The GSR 56 does not report its serial number until 90 seconds after power up of the GTN. As a result, for that period, the product info for the GSR 56 will show Waiting. 14.4.7.2 Position Reporting Status The Time Until Transmit eld is a countdown timer that shows the time until the next data transmission. This eld is blank when the aircraft is on the ground. Position Reporting will be enabled when the aircraft is in the air. Status Idle Initializing Transferring Unavailable Description The reporting system is not using the GSR 56 for reporting at this time. The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing. A position report is currently being transmitted. The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the reporting system. Table 14-4 Position Reporting Status Countdown Time Until Transmit Reporting Status Number Of Reports In The Queue Figure 14-28 Position Reporting Status Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 14-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:08:30 PM 14.4.8 Contacts The Phone Book may hold up to 128 entries. A phone number may be entered and dialed without saving it to the Phone Book. Note that it is necessary to dial a 1, the area code, and then the number. 14.4.8.1 Creating a Contact Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl 1. While viewing the Services page, touch the Contacts key. Com/Nav Touch To Add Contact Existing Contacts Touch To Search Contact List Touch To Edit Contact Figure 14-29 Contact List 2. Touch the Add key to add a new contact. Touch To Add Contact Name Touch To Add Contact Phone Number Touch To Add Contact Email Address Touch To Save Contact Figure 14-30 Add a New Contact 3. Use the keypad to enter the information for each item and then touch the Save Contact key. FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 14-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:08:30 PM 14.4.8.2 Using a Contact 1. While viewing the Contacts page, touch an existing contact. Touch To Call The Contact Phone Number Touch To Edit The Contact Touch To Send A Message To The Contact Phone Number Touch To Delete The Contact Figure 14-31 Using the Contact List 2. Touch the desired function for the selected Contact. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 14-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:08:30 PM 15 UTILITIES The Utilities page provides a group of features that will support your ight planning to make them easier and more efcient. The Vertical Calculator
(VCALC) calculates the time to begin descent and vertical speed required to reach a desired altitude at the chosen location. The Flight Timers feature provides a number of timer types to assist in monitoring your time in ight. RAIM Prediction predicts if GPS coverage is available for your current location or at a specied waypoint at any time and date. RAIM performs checks to ensure that the GTN unit has adequate satellite geometry during your ight. The Trip Planning feature allows the pilot to view desired track (DTK), distance (DIS), estimated time en route (ETE), en route safe altitude (ESA) and estimated time of arrival (ETA) information for a direct-to, point-to-point between two specied waypoints or for any programmed ight plan. The Fuel Planning feature will display fuel conditions along the active direct-to or ight plan when equipped with fuel ow (FF) and/or fuel on board (FOB) sensors. The DALT/
TAS/Winds feature performs calculations about Altitude, Airspeed, and Winds. The Scheduled Messages function allows you to create scheduled messages by Message, Type, and setting a Timer. The Checklists function provides a built-in method of reviewing your aircraft checklist. The Clean Screen function will lock the touchscreen so the display can be cleaned without activating any functions. Figure 15-1 Utilities Home Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:08:30 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix l l A r a e C l s t s i l k c e h C t n e r r u C r a e C l t s i l k c e h C t s i l k c e h C p u o r G u n e M e g a s s e M e p y T r e m T i d e e p S d n u o r G O R A B S A C T A T K R T G D H i t n o P o t t n o P i i t n o P o t t n o P i S O P P. m o r F L P o F T l n a P t h g i l F l n a P t h g i l F S O P P. m o r F o T T L A d e t a c i d n I e d o M e d o M g e L d r a o B n o l e u F w o l F l e u F d e e p S d n u o r G L P F g e L i e m T t r a p e D e t a D t r a p e D d e e p S d n u o r G I M A R e t u p m o C e t a D l a v i r r A i e m T l a v i r r A s u t a t S M A R I i t n o p y a W n w o D p n U o i t c e r i D p o t S
/
t r a t S i r e m T t e s e R n O r e w o P r i A n I n O r e w o P r i A n I i e m T t e s e R i r e m T t e s e R i e m T e r u t r a p e D a i r e t i r C a i r e t i r C i r e m T p i r T t p W e v o b A L S M e p y T e d u t i t l A l e o r P S V t e s f f O r e t f A
/
e r o f e B i t n o p y a W t e g r a T s t l u a f e D e r o t s e R s e g a s s e M l y a p s i D i r e m T c i r e n e G e d u t i t l A t e g r a T Figure 15-2 Utilities Functional Diagram Index 15-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:08:31 PM 15.1 Vertical Calculator (VCALC) The Vertical Calculator (VCALC) function allows you to create a three-
dimensional prole which guides you from your present position and altitude to a nal (target) altitude at a specied location. This is helpful when youd like to descend to a certain altitude near an airport. Once the prole is dened, message alerts and additional data can be congured on the Map Page to keep you informed of your progress. Cruise Altitude Target Altitude Target Waypoint Target Offset (Before) Figure 15-3 VCALC Target VCALC is inhibited in the following conditions:
Groundspeed is less than 35 knots No active ight plan or direct-to destination SUSP mode Vectors-to-Final mode VLOC mode After the FAF on an approach WARNING: Do not use VCALC messages as the only means of either avoiding terrain/obstacles or following ATC guidance. VCALC provides advisory information only and must be used in concert with all other available navigation data sources. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:08:31 PM Target Altitude Altitude Type MSL Above Wpt VS Prole Target Offset Before/After Target Waypoint Figure 15-4 VCALC Page Functional Diagram 1. From the Utilities page, touch VCALC. Before/After Target Desired Target Altitude Desired Distance From Target Offset VCALC Status Message Restore Factory Defaults Altitude Type Desired Vertical Speed Target Waypoint Vertical Speed Required For Target ALT At Offset Display Status Messages Figure 15-5 VCALC Page 2. Select the VCALC items as necessary to set up parameters for the next waypoint. Touch the Back key when nished. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:08:31 PM 15.1.1 Target Altitude This sets the desired ending altitude for the VCALC setup. 1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Target ALT. Selected Altitude Backspace Key Numeric Keypad Figure 15-6 Select VCALC Target Altitude 2. Use the numeric keypad to select the desired Target Altitude and then touch the Enter key. 15.1.2 Altitude Type This value selects the altitude reference that will be used for VCALC calculations. 1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Altitude Type. 2. Touching the Altitude Type key will toggle between MSL and Above WPT. "Above WPT" is only available for waypoints that are airports. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:08:32 PM 15.1.3 Vertical Speed (VS) Prole This value sets the desired vertical speed. 1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch VS Prole. Selected Vertical Speed Backspace Key Numeric Keypad Figure 15-7 Select VCALC Vertical Speed 2. Use the numeric keypad to select the desired Vertical Speed and then touch the Enter key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:08:32 PM 15.1.4 Target Offset The Target Offset is a pilot-selected distance value that represents the geographical location where you wish to arrive at the target altitude. This distance is measured from the Target Waypoint and, in a separate data eld on the VCALC page, designated as either before or after the Target Waypoint. 1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch the Offset key. Selected Target Offset Backspace Key Numeric Keypad Figure 15-8 Select VCALC Target Offset 2. Use the numeric keypad to select the desired Target Offset and then touch the Enter key. 15.1.5 Before/After Target Waypoint This setting designates whether the offset distance denes a point before you reach the target reference waypoint or after you reach the waypoint. The After selection is not available for the last waypoint in a ight plan. 1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch the Before/After key. 2. Touching the Before/After key will toggle between Before and After the Target Waypoint. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:08:32 PM 15.1.6 Target Waypoint Select the waypoint in the ight plan that will be used for planning a descent. When using a ight plan, the target waypoint is a reference that can be specied from the waypoints contained in the ight plan. By default, the last waypoint in the ight plan is selected. 1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Target Waypoint. Figure 15-9 Select VCALC Target Waypoint List 2. A list of the remaining waypoints in the ight plan will be shown. Touch the desired waypoint to select it as the Target Waypoint. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:08:32 PM 15.1.7 Display VCALC Messages Selecting Display Messages will allow the display of messages about the VCALC function when they occur. With Display Messages not selected, VCALC messages will not be displayed. 1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Display Messages to toggle the display of VCALC messages in the Message function. VCALC Message Touch To Toggle Messages Figure 15-10 VCALC Approaching Target Altitude Message 2. Touch the MSG key to toggle the display of available messages. 15.1.8 Restore VCALC Defaults While viewing the VCALC page menu, touching the Restore Defaults key will reset all of the VCALC values back to their default values. The Target Waypoint will not be changed. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:08:32 PM 15.2 Flight Timers The Flight Timers function provides count up/down timers, plus automatic recording of departure time, and total trip time. Departure and total trip time recording can be congured to run either any time unit power is on, or only when your ground speed exceeds the in-air threshold set by the installer (for example, 30 knots). A exible Generic Timer is available for general timing needs. NOTE: When a count up timer is used, the preset value has no function. 1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the Flight Timers key. Start/Stop Generic Timer Reset or Preset Timer Selected Counter Direction Select Preset Time Reset Timer Select Criteria For Timer Start Elapsed Time Departure Time
(Local Time) Set Departure Time To Current Local Time Of Timer Start Figure 15-11 Utility Flight Timers Page 2. If the Generic Timer Direction counter is set to "Up," the Reset Timer key will be shown and when touched will return the timer to 00:00:00. If the Direction counter is set to "Down,"
the Preset Timer key will be shown and the key will return the timer to the Preset time value. 3. Touch each key as desired to set up timer operation. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:08:32 PM RAIM Prediction 15.3 RAIM Prediction predicts if GPS coverage is available for your current location or at a specied waypoint at any time and date. RAIM performs checks to ensure that the GTN unit has adequate satellite geometry during your ight. RAIM availability is near 100% in Oceanic, En Route and Terminal phases of ight. Because the FAAs TSO requirements for non-precision approaches specify signicantly better satellite coverage than other ight phases, RAIM may not be available when ying some approaches. The GTN unit automatically monitors RAIM during approach operations and warns you if RAIM is not available. In such cases, use a non-GPS based approach. RAIM prediction helps you plan for a pending ight to conrm GPS operation during an approach. RAIM prediction only predicts the availability of Fault Detection (FD) integrity in the absence of SBAS corrections. It cannot predict the availability of LPV or L/VNAV approaches. The FAA provides a NOTAM service for LPV approach availability. 1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the RAIM Prediction key. Touch To Select Destination Waypoint Touch To Select Local Arrival Time Touch To Select Local Arrival Date Figure 15-12 Utility RAIM Prediction Page 2. Touch the Waypoint key and select the waypoint for RAIM Prediction. 3. Touch the Arrival Date key and select the date of arrival at the selected waypoint. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:08:33 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages 4. Touch the Arrival Time key and select the local time of expected arrival at the selected waypoint. 5. When the Waypoint, Arrival Date, and Arrival Time values have been entered, touch the Compute RAIM key to determine if RAIM is available. Touch To Compute RAIM RAIM Prediction Result Figure 15-13 RAIM Prediction Completed 15.4 Trip Planning The GTN 7XX allows the pilot to view desired track (DTK), distance (DIS), estimated time en route (ETE), en route safe altitude (ESA) and estimated time of arrival (ETA) information for a direct-to, point-to-point between two specied waypoints or for any programmed ight plan. This item also displays the sunrise/sunset times for your destination waypoint (for the selected departure date). All times are based on the time set in System-Setup. For trip planning inputs: departure time and date are manually entered, while ground speed can be provided by sensor data, if selected. The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning inputs. In Flight Plan mode with a stored ight plan selected, and the entire ight plan (CUM) selected, the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected ight plan. Symbols In Flight Plan mode with a stored ight plan selected, and a specic leg selected, the waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg. Appendix Index 15-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:08:33 PM In Point-To-Point mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active ight plan, these default to the endpoints of the active leg). Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active ight plan has already been own. Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn and is the desired track between the selected waypoints. It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected. Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Estimated time en route (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less Direct-To than an hour, then it is shown as minutes:seconds. Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the destination.
- If in Point-To-Point mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
- If a ight plan other than the active ight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire ight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the ight plan was selected.
- If the active ight plan is selected the ETA reects the current position of the aircraft and the current leg being own. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to and including the selected leg. If the entire ight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the ight plan was selected. En Route safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT. Destination sunrise and sunset times - These times are shown as hours:minutes and are the local time at the destination. NOTE: The capability of using Sensor Data for the trip planning functions is available in SW Versions 2.00, 4.10, and later. Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:08:33 PM 15.4.1 Point-To-Point Mode The Trip Planning Point-to-Point mode shows trip calculations between two selected points: either two waypoints from the database or from your present position to a selected waypoint. 1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the Trip Planning key. 2. Touch the Mode key to toggle to Point-to-Point. 3. Touch the P.POS key to toggle between using your present position as the From waypoint when selected or a waypoint selected from the database when P.POS is deselected. If P.POS is selected, the Lat/Lon of the present position will be shown in the From position. Touch To Use Present Position As Departure Point Touch To Toggle Sensor Data Use Touch To Select Departure Time Touch To Select Departure Date Lat/Lon Of Present Position Touch To Select Arrival Waypoint Touch To Select P-to-P or Flight Plan Mode Trip Statistics Figure 15-14 Utility Trip Planning Page (Point-To-Point Mode) - Sensor Data Used 4. If P.POS is not selected for the From point, touch the From key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint from the database and touch Enter. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:08:33 PM Touch For Waypoint Search Selected From Waypoint Touch To Select From Waypoint Figure 15-15 Selecting a From Waypoint 5. Touch the To key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint from the database for the destination waypoint and touch Enter. 6. Touch the Depart Time key and then use the keypad to select the departure time (local time at From waypoint) and touch Enter. Selected Departure Time Touch To Select Departure Time Figure 15-16 Selecting Departure Time 7. Touch the Depart Date key and then the Departure Date page to select the departure year, month, and day and then touch Enter. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:08:33 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Touch To Select Departure Year Touch To Select Departure Month Touch To Select Departure Day Figure 15-17 Selecting Departure Date Index 15-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:08:34 PM 8. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter. Selected Ground Speed Touch To Select Ground Speed Figure 15-18 Selecting Expected Average Ground Speed Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts 9. After completing the Trip Planning selections, the trip statistics Wpt Info will be shown in the lower half of the display. Trip Statistics For Selected Route Figure 15-19 Utility Trip Planning Page With Computed Data (Point-To-Point Mode) Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:08:34 PM Use Sensor Data Selected Ground Speed Set By Sensor Data Trip Statistics For Selected Route Figure 15-20 Utility Trip Planning Page With Computed Data (Point-To-Point Mode) - Use Sensor Data Selected NOTE: When Local Time is selected in the Setup-Date/Time feature, Sunrise/
Sunset calculations in the Trip Planning feature are based on the From waypoint time zone. For instance, a ight plan originating in the Pacic time zone and ending in the Central time zone would show Sunset/Sunrise times at the destination in Pacic time. This potential offset does not occur when UTC time is used. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:08:34 PM 15.4.2 Flight Plan Mode The Trip Planning Flight Plan mode shows trip calculations between two legs of the ight plan or the cumulative ight plan. 1. Touch the Mode key to select Flight Plan mode, if required. Touch To Select Flight Plan Leg Touch To Select Flight Plan From Catalog Select To Toggle Sensor Data Use Touch To Select Departure Time Touch To Select Departure Date Touch To Select P-to-P or Flight Plan Mode Touch To Select Expected Average Ground Speed Trip Statistics Figure 15-21 Utility Trip Planning Page (Flight Plan Mode) 2. Touch the Flight Plan key to select the ight plan. Touch To Select Flight Plan (Active FPL Shown) Touch To Scroll List Figure 15-22 Select Flight Plan Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:08:34 PM 3. Touch the Leg key to select the flight plan leg. If the Cumulative selection is chosen, statistics will relate to the entire ight plan. Touch To Select Flight Plan Leg (Cumulative FPL Shown) Figure 15-23 Select Flight Plan Leg 4. Touch the Depart Time key and then use the keypad to select the departure time (local time at From waypoint) and touch Enter. 5. Touch the Depart Date key and then the Departure Date page to select the departure year, month, and day and then touch Enter. 6. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:08:35 PM 7. Statistics for the current ight plan leg are displayed in the lower half of the display. Touch To View Statistics For Previous FPL Leg Touch To View Statistics For Next FPL Leg Trip Statistics Figure 15-24 Utility Trip Planning Page Computed Data View (Flight Plan Mode) Use Sensor Data Selected Ground Speed Set By Sensor Data Trip Statistics For Selected Route Figure 15-25 Utility Trip Planning Page Computed Data View (Flight Plan Mode) -
Use Sensor Data Selected Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities 8. Touch the Next key to view statistics for the next leg in the System ight plan. Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:08:35 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music 15.5 Fuel Planning Fuel Planning This item displays fuel conditions along the active direct-to or ight plan. You may manually enter fuel ow, ground speed
(GS) and fuel on board gures for planning purposes. Fuel planning gures can be displayed not only for the currently active ight plan or direct-to, but also point-to-point between two specied waypoints and for any pro-
grammed ight plan. Fuel on board and fuel ow may be manually entered in the unit start-up sequence and used to recalculate fuel on board as it is consumed. When fuel ow or fuel on board is manually entered, the gures are retained the next time you view the page (with fuel on board continuously recalculated). NOTE: The capability of using Sensor Data for the trip planning functions is available in SW Versions 2.00, 4.10, and later. Use Sensor Data Selected Selected Distance Measured Fuel Required For the Flight Plan Range With Existing Fuel Flight Time Available With Remaining Fuel At Destination Flight Time Available With Existing Fuel Fuel Usage Rate Remaining Fuel At Destination Utilities Figure 15-26 Utility Fuel Planning Page (Flight Plan Mode) - Use Sensor Data Selected System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:08:35 PM 15.5.1 Point-To-Point Mode The Fuel Planning Point-to-Point mode shows fuel calculations between two selected points: either two waypoints from the database or from your present position to a selected waypoint. 1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the Fuel Planning key. 2. Touch the Mode key to toggle to Point-to-Point. 3. Touch the P.POS key to toggle between using your present position as the From waypoint when selected or a waypoint selected from the database when P.POS is deselected. If P.POS is selected, the Lat/Lon of the present position will be shown in the From position. Lat/Lon Of Present Position Touch To Select Arrival Waypoint Touch To Use Present Position As Departure Point Use Sensor Data Selected Touch To Select P-to-P or Flight Plan Mode Fuel Statistics Figure 15-27 Utility Trip Planning Page (Point-To-Point Mode) - Use Sensor Data Selected Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:08:35 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 4. If P.POS is not selected for the From point, touch the From key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint from the database and touch Enter. Touch For Waypoint Search Selected From Waypoint FPL Touch To Select From Waypoint Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Figure 15-28 Selecting the From Waypoint 5. Touch the To key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint from the database for the destination waypoint and touch Enter. 6. Touch the Fuel on Board key and then use the keypad to select the current amount of fuel on board and touch Enter. Selected Fuel On Board Value Touch To Select Fuel On Board Value Figure 15-29 Selecting Current Fuel On Board Index 15-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:08:35 PM 7. Touch the Fuel Flow key and then use the keypad to select the average fuel ow and touch Enter. Selected Fuel Flow Value Touch To Select Fuel Value Figure 15-30 Selecting Fuel Flow 8. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter. Selected Ground Speed Value Touch To Select Ground Speed Value Figure 15-31 Selecting Ground Speed Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-25 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:08:36 PM 15.5.2 Flight Plan Mode The Fuel Planning Flight Plan mode shows fuel calculations between two legs of the ight plan or the cumulative ight plan. 1. Touch the Mode key to select Flight Plan mode, if required. Touch To Select Flight Plan Leg Touch To Select Flight Plan From Catalog Use Sensor Data Selected Touch To Select Previous FPL Leg Touch To Select P-to-P or Flight Plan Mode Touch To Select Next FPL Leg Fuel Statistics Figure 15-32 Utility Fuel Planning Page (Flight Plan Mode) 2. Touch the Flight Plan key to select the ight plan. Touch To Select Flight Plan (Active FPL Shown) Touch To Scroll List Figure 15-33 Select Flight Plan Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-26 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:08:36 PM 3. Touch the Leg key to select the flight plan leg. If the Cumulative selection is chosen, statistics will relate to the entire ight plan. Touch To Select Flight Plan Leg (Cumulative FPL Shown) Figure 15-34 Select Flight Plan Leg 4. 5. If desired, touch the Fuel on Board key and then use the keypad to select the Fuel on Board value and touch Enter. If desired, touch the Fuel Flow key and then use the keypad to select the Fuel Flow value and touch Enter. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc 6. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select Terrain the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter. 7. Statistics for the current ight plan leg are displayed in the lower half of the display. The Cumulative ight plan is shown. 8. Touch the Previous and Next keys to view statistics for the previous and next legs in the ight plan. Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-27 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 27 7/9/2015 2:08:36 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 15.6 DALT/TAS/Winds Density Alt / TAS / Winds indicates the theoretical altitude at which your aircraft performs depending upon several variables, including indicated altitude (Indicated ALT), barometric pressure (BARO) and total air tempera-
ture (TAT; the temperature, including the heating effect of speed, read on a standard outside temperature gauge). This item computes true airspeed
(TAS) and density altitude, based upon the factors above. Also, this feature determines winds aloft the wind direction and speed and a head wind/tail wind component, based on true airspeed, aircraft heading (HDG) and ground speed. When a FADC provides pressure altitude and the Use Sensor Data option is selected, the Baro key will not be present in the edit mode and the Baro indication will not be shown in computed results. Touch To Select Baro Pressure Touch To Select Indicated Altitude Touch To Toggle Sensor Data Use TRK, HDG, &
GS Statistics Touch To Select Calibrated Air Speed Touch To Select Total Air Temp DALT, TAS, and Winds Statistics Figure 15-35 Utility DALT/TAS/Winds Page Using Indicated Altitude and Not Using Sensor Data Touch To Toggle Sensor Data Use TRK, HDG, &
GS Statistics DALT, TAS, and Winds Statistics Figure 15-36 Utility DALT/TAS/Winds Page Using Sensor Data and Pressure Altitude Index 15-28 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 28 7/9/2015 2:08:36 PM NOTE: The capability of using Sensor Data for the trip planning functions is available in SW Versions 2.00, 4.10, and later. Touch To Select Baro Pressure Touch To Select Indicated Altitude Touch To Toggle Sensor Data Use Touch To Select Track Value Touch To Select Heading Value Touch To Select Calibrated Air Speed Touch To Select Total Air Temp Touch To Select Ground Speed DALT, TAS, and Winds Statistics Figure 15-37 Utility DALT/TAS/Winds Page Using Manually Entered Data Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info 1. Touch the Indicated ALT key and then the keypad to select Map the Indicated Altitude and then touch Enter. Selected Indicated Altitude Value Touch To Select Indicated Altitude Value Figure 15-38 Select Indicated Altitude Value Touch To Clear Values Touch To Select Above Or Below Sea Level Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-29 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 29 7/9/2015 2:08:36 PM 2. Touch the BARO key and then the keypad to select the Barometric Pressure and then touch Enter. Touch To Clear Values Selected Barometric Pressure Value Touch To Select Barometric Pressure Value Touch To Cancel Selection Figure 15-39 Select Barometric Pressure Value 3. Touch the CAS key and then the keypad to select the Calibrated Air Speed and then touch Enter. Touch To Clear Values Selected Calculated Air Speed Value Touch To Select Calculated Air Speed Value Touch To Cancel Selection Figure 15-40 Select Calculated Air Speed Value Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-30 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 30 7/9/2015 2:08:37 PM 4. Touch the TAT key and then the keypad to select the Total Air Temperature and touch Enter. Selected Total Air Temperature Value Touch To Select Total Air Temperature Value Touch To Cancel Selection Touch To Clear Values Touch To Select Above Or Below 0 Degrees Figure 15-41 Select Total Air Temperature Value 5. Touch the TRK key and then the keypad to select the Track Angle and then touch Enter. Touch To Clear Values Selected Track Angle Value Touch To Select Track Angle Value Touch To Cancel Selection Figure 15-42 Select Track Angle Value Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-31 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 31 7/9/2015 2:08:37 PM 6. Touch the HDG key and then the keypad to select the Heading value and then touch Enter. Touch To Clear Values Selected Heading Value Touch To Select Heading Value Touch To Cancel Selection Figure 15-43 Select Heading Value 7. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select the average ground speed for the trip and then touch Enter. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-32 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 32 7/9/2015 2:08:37 PM 15.7 Clean Screen Mode The Clean Screen mode makes the touchscreen inactive so the display can be manually cleaned. The front bezel, keypad, and display can be cleaned with a microber cloth or with a soft cotton cloth dampened with clean water. DO NOT use any chemical cleaning agents. Care should be taken to avoid scratching the surface of the display. 1. While viewing the Utilities page group, touch the Clean Screen key to start Screen Cleaning Mode. Touch To Clean Screen Figure 15-44 Utilities Page 2. Touch the HOME key to exit Screen Cleaning Mode. Figure 15-45 Screen Cleaning Mode Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-33 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 33 7/9/2015 2:08:37 PM 15.8 Scheduled Messages The Scheduled Messages utility displays reminder messages (such as Change oil, Switch fuel tanks, Overhaul, etc.). One-time, periodic, and event-based messages are allowed. One-time messages appear once the timer expires and reappear each time the GTN-series unit is powered on, until the message is deleted. Periodic messages automatically reset to the original timer value, once the message is displayed. Event-based messages do not use a timer, but rather a specic date and time. NOTE: This feature is available in SW Versions 5.00, and later. 1. While viewing the Utilities page group, touch the Scheduled Messages key to start the Scheduled Messages function. Touch To Add A Scheduled Message Figure 15-46 Scheduled Messages Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-34 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 34 7/9/2015 2:08:37 PM 2. Touch the Message selection and enter the desired message to be displayed. Touch the Type selection to choose the message type. Touch the Timer selection to set the countdown time for the message to be displayed. Touch To Enter Message Text Touch To Select Message Type Touch To Enter Message Countdown Timer Figure 15-47 Create a Scheduled Message 2. After completing the selections, touch the Enter key. Figure 15-48 Sample Scheduled Message Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-35 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 35 7/9/2015 2:08:38 PM 15.9 Checklists The Checklists function provides a built-in method of reviewing your aircraft checklist. Checklists are created using the Garmin Checklist Editor software
(available online) and stored on the data card as chklist.ace. As each Checklist is completed, you can advance to the next one in order. In the Checklist Menu, you can access any Checklist, or group of Checklists, and clear the current or all Checklists. NOTE: This feature is available in SW Versions 5.10, and later. In software version 6.00 and later, the installer may congure the title of this feature to be Task Lists or Checklists. 15.9.1 Checklists Menu 1. While viewing the Utilities page group, touch the Checklists key to start the Checklists function. 2. Touch the Menu key to select an option from the Checklist Menu. Touch To Select A Checklist Group Touch To Select A Checklist Touch To Clear Current Checklist Figure 15-49 Utility Checklist Menu Touch To Clear All Checklists Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 15-36 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 36 7/9/2015 2:08:38 PM Touch To Select A Checklist Figure 15-50 Select a Checklist from the Checklist Menu 15.9.2 Viewing Checklists 1. While viewing the Utilities function, touch the Checklist key. Use the existing Checklists in the order provided or touch the Menu key to select another checklist. Completed Checklist Item Checklist Status Touch To Advance To Next Checklist Figure 15-51 Checklist Completion Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities 2. After completing the Checklist, touch Go to Next Checklist, System Menu, or Back to exit the Checklist function. NOTE: All checklists are cleared after a power cycle. Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 15-37 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 37 7/9/2015 2:08:38 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index 15-38 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 38 7/9/2015 2:08:38 PM 16 SYSTEM The System function allows you to change unit settings, customize operation to your preferences, and check on the operation of your unit. The System pages cover System Status, Database Info and transfer, GPS Status, External LRUs, Setup, Alerts, Units, Audio, Backlight control function, and Connext Setup. 1. From the Home page, touch the System key. Figure 16-1 System Home Page 2. Touch the desired key to reach that function. To return to the System page, touch the Back key. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:08:39 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Serial No. & Sys ID SW/HW Version Info Database Info SBAS WAAS CDI Date/Time Com/Nav Nearest Airport Crossll Arrival Destination Proximity Class B/TMA Class C/TCA Class D Restricted MOA (Military) Other Airspace Altitude Buffer User Fields *
Nav Angle Mag Var Temp Fuel Position Format Volume TAWS Alert Voice Manual Offset Connext Setup **
Voice Commands **
* - Available When Space Allows On Top Row
** - Optional Figure 16-2 System Function Summary Index 16-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:08:39 PM 16.1 System Status The System status page of the System function provides information about the GTN unit and the equipment attached to it. This information is useful if it is necessary to contact Customer Service. The System Status page shows the System ID and serial number for the GTN unit, hardware and software versions, as well as a list of the installed databases. Serial # & System ID Software Versions Database Info Current Standby Conicts Figure 16-3 System Status Functional Diagram Serial No. And System ID Internal SW Versions Current Database Information Database Not Active and On Standby Database Conicts Figure 16-4 System Function System Status Page Description Touch To Scroll List Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:08:39 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav 1. While viewing the System page, touch System Status. 2. Use the Up and Down arrow keys as needed to view the Database Information. 3. Touch the Back key to return to the System page. 16.1.1 Serial Number and System ID FPL The System Status section shows the unit Serial Number and the System ID. Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 16.1.2 Version Information The software versions of the GTN unit are displayed. This information is useful when contacting Customer Support. 16.1.3 Database Information The Database Information section lists the name of the database, its version, and expiration date for the currently used databases, and also contains the Database SYNC function. Standby databases are listed for databases not currently used, but available on the data card. Database conicts will be shown in the Conicts section. NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government and private agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-
validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data. The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
Terrain The terrain database contains terrain mapping data. It is updated periodically and has no expiration date. Approximately one minute is required to verify the rotorcraft terrain database on start up. Obstacles The obstacles database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft. Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. The rotorcraft database includes all reported obstacles regardless of height. It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is updated on a 56-
day cycle. Obstacles will still be shown after the database has expired. Index 16-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:08:39 PM Several obstacle database options are available. Obstacle databases created for GTN software version 5.10 or later include all power lines or only HOT lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed. Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) Lines are those power lines that are co-located with other FAA-identied obstacles. The installed obstacle database type can be veried on the System Status page. Power line data is available for the contiguous United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico. SafeTaxi The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways, ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle. SafeTaxi will still be shown after it has expired. FliteCharts The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a 28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts no longer functions. Basemap - The Basemap database contains land and water data, such as roads, boundaries, rivers, and lakes. Aviation The Navigation database is updated on a 28 day cycle. Navigation database updates are provided by Garmin and may be downloaded from the Garmin web site http://y.garmin.com or from Jeppesen at "http://www. jeppdirect.com/Garmin" onto a Garmin provided Supplemental Datacard. Contact Garmin at http://y.garmin.com for navigation database updates and update kits. Charts The optional ChartView database is updated on a 14 day cycle. The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Contact Jeppesen
(www.jeppesen.com) for ChartView subscription and update information. NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi or Chartview functions as the basis for ground maneuvering. SafeTaxi and Chartview functions do not comply with the requirements of AC 20-159 and are not qualied to be used as an airport moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi and Chartview are to be used by the ight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface to improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:08:39 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Airport surface diagrams Internal memory 56 days SafeTaxi Terrain Topographic map, Terrain/TAWS SD card As required y.garmin.com Systems using HTAWS Database Name Aviation Function Airport, NAVAID, Waypoint, and Airspace information Where Stored Internal memory Update Cycle 28 days Obstacle Obstacle information for map, and TAWS Internal memory 56 days Basemap Boundary and road information Internal Memory As required Provider Notes y.garmin.com Updates installed via SD card and copied into internal memory. For helicopter applications an Aviation database that includes additional heliports is available. y.garmin.com Updates installed via SD card and copied into internal memory require a 2.5 arc-
second database. y.garmin.com Updates installed via SD card and copied into internal memory. Databases that include HOT lines and power lines are available for use with GTN software version 5.10, or later. For helicopter applications, Obstacle databases that include additional low height obstacles and power lines are available. y.garmin.com Updates installed via SD card and copied into internal memory FliteCharts ChartView FAA-published terminal procedures Jeppesen terminal procedures SD card 28 days y.garmin.com Disables 180 days SD card 14 days Contact Jeppesen Table 16-1 Database List after expiration date. Optional feature that requires Garmin dealer enablement. Disables 70 days after expiration date. Index 16-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:08:40 PM 16.1.3.1 Database Info The Database Info page shows the Current databases, databases on Standby on the SD card for future use, and database conicts. Current databases show all databases that are currently being used. Standby databases are loaded onto the card, but are not being used. Database conicts are shown and can be resolved in the Conicts tab. 16.1.3.2 Database Sync Operation Database SYNC allows the GTN to synchronize databases from a single unit. The pilot only needs to update a single database card and the new databases are automatically SYNC'd through the units connected in the cockpit and congured for Database Syncing. Database SYNC is supported by these database types:
Navigation Obstacle SafeTaxi Airport Directory Chartview (when support is added by Jeppesen) FliteCharts Basemap When Database SYNC is enabled in the LRUs and a database card is inserted that is created for Database SYNC, the GTN will coordinate with the other LRUs in the cockpit to determine which unit has the newest databases. Once the determination has occurred, the connected LRUs will begin to transfer the databases. This process may take several minutes. The status of the database transfers to a unit can be viewed on the System Status page under the Standby tab. The GTN will display the source of the received databases (in this example:
Database SYNC - GTN #2). If a database transfer is pending, completed, or not authorized, the status will also be indicated. When the transfer is complete, if there are new and current databases to be used, and if the aircraft is stopped and has yet to takeoff, the pilot will be prompted with the option to restart the unit that has the new databases transferred to it. During the restart process, the unit will prompt you to update
(transfer from the card to the unit's memory) to the newer databases so they can be used. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:08:40 PM NOTE: This feature is available in SW Versions 5.10, and later. NOTE: When a database card is inserted into a GTN that does not support certain types of databases (charts in a GTN 6XX or an airport directory in any GTN), the GTN is still capable of SYNCing the database to other LRUs that do support that database. NOTE: Restarting the GTN must only be performed when the aircraft is on the ground as navigation and communication from the restarted unit will be lost for a period of time. 1. With the GTN turned off, insert the database card. 2. Turn the GTN on. The Database SYNC will occur automatically in the background. During the Database SYNC process, normal operation of the GTN is not affected. 3. On the System Status page, touch the Standby tab to view the transfer process. Figure 16-5 Database Transfer In Process Figure 16-6 Database Pending Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:08:40 PM Figure 16-7 Database Transfer Complete Figure 16-8 Database Transfer Not Authorized 4. Once all of the database transfers have completed, if the GTN determines that at least one of the newly transferred databases is effective and the aircraft is on the ground and stopped prior to a ight, a pop-up and conrmation will be presented to restart the GTN. No pop-up will appear if the aircraft is moving or has been in the air since the GTN was turned on. 5. Touch Yes to continue updating the database. Figure 16-9 System Restart - Step 1 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:08:40 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc 6. Touch OK to complete the restart process. Following the restart, the pilot will be prompted to update to the effective databases (just like when a new database card is inserted). Figure 16-10 System Restart - Step 2 WARNING: The unit will reset and all GPS navigation and moving map functions may be lost while the unit regains GPS position. Communication functions will be lost for a few seconds while the unit resets. Additionally, if the user selects to update databases at that point, the ability to interact with the GMA 35 audio panel, or change com frequencies will be lost until all databases are updated. 7. When the unit restarts, the pilot will be prompted to update the GTN to the newly transferred databases. Terrain 16.1.3.3 Database Sync Setup Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix When the GTN installer option is turned on to allow Database SYNC, the pilot controls are available to turn Database SYNC on or off (Database SYNC is turned on by default). To change the Database SYNC preference:
1. While viewing the System Status page, touch the Menu key and then touch the Database SYNC key to enable or disable the Database SYNC feature. Once the feature is enabled, Database SYNC will occur automatically when a card is inserted into the GTN. Figure 16-11 Database Sync from System Status Menu Index 16-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:08:40 PM 2. Touch OK at the prompt to conrm the enabling of Database SYNC. Figure 16-12 Prompt to Continue Database Transfer 16.1.3.4 Standby Databases The GTN supports a standby copy of each database, allowing the pilot to pre-
load the next cycle without losing the active cycle. The GTN will automatically treat any received database (via SD card or Database SYNC) as the standby database until it is activated by the pilot. The standby databases are listed on the System Status page. Figure 16-13 Database Standby Display The GTN will use Database SYNC in the background to SYNC the standby database with other LRUs in the cockpit. As a result, when the standby database becomes effective, the pilot will be prompted on all LRUs to update to the new database. If a the standby database is out of date or not yet effective, the pilot will not be prompted to update to that database until it becomes effective. This prevents the pilot from accidentally overwriting the effective, active database. If the pilot does actually want to overwrite the active database with a not yet effective or out of date database, they can do so by pressing and holding the small right knob while applying power to the GTN. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:08:40 PM 16.1.3.5 Resolving Database Conicts If the GTN determines that there are multiple LRUs with the newest cycle of a database, but they have different regions or types of that database (i.e.; Fixed-
wing vs. Rotorcraft navigation database, different regions of the navigation database, or different obstacle database types) then a database conict will occur. When a database conict occurs, that database will not be SYNC'd until the pilot resolves the conict. Initiate the resolve conicts function on the unit that has the databases to send to the other units. 1. Touch the Conicts tab, and then touch Resolve Conicts on the LRU with the desired databases. Figure 16-14 Database Conicts 2. Touch OK at the prompt to continue conict resolution. Figure 16-15 Conrm Conict Resolution Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:08:40 PM 3. Once touched, the desired database will be SYNC'd to the other LRUs and Initiated will be displayed on the Resolve Conicts eld. Figure 16-16 Database Conicts Resolved (Initiated) GPS Status 16.2 16.2.1 GPS Status Page The GPS Status Page provides a visual reference of GPS receiver functions, including current satellite coverage, GPS receiver status, position accuracy, and displays your present position (in latitude and longitude) and altitude. The GPS Status Page also displays the current UTC time at the top right of the page. The Satellite Status Page is helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite coverage or installation problems. You may wish to refer to this page occasionally to monitor GPS receiver performance and establish a normal pattern for system operation. Should problems occur at a later date, you may nd it helpful to have an established baseline from which to compare. 1. While viewing the System page, touch GPS Status. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:08:41 PM GPS Receiver Status Lat/Lon Position Sky View of satellite positions Vertical Figure of Merit Horizontal Figure of Merit Signal Strength Bars SBAS Selection Satellite acquired and used for position x Satellite acquired, used for position x, and has differential corrections Tracked Satellite, not used Current UTC Time GPS Altitude Ground Speed Phase of Flight Estimated Position Uncertainty Horizontal Dilution of Precision Satellite Numbers Acquiring Satellite, not ready for use Figure 16-17 GPS Status Page 2. If desired, touch the SBAS key to select an SBAS provider. The SBAS list is based on the Aviation database. 3. Touch the key for the desired SBAS provider. Figure 16-18 SBAS Provider List 4. Touch the Back key to return to the System Status page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:08:41 PM As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar appears for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite number (01-32, SBAS satellites will have higher numbers) underneath each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in the following stages:
Graph Symbol No signal strength bars Grey signal strength bars Yellow signal strength bars Cross-hatch cyan signal strength bars Solid cyan signal strength bars Solid green signal strength bars D Description The receiver is looking for the satellites indicated. The receiver has found the satellite(s) and is collecting data. The receiver has collected the necessary data but the satellite is not being used in the position solution as it has been excluded. The receiver has found the satellite(s) but it has been excluded by the FDE program as a faulty satellite. The receiver has collected the necessary data, but is not using the satellite in the position solution. The receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite is being used in the position solution. The D character inside the bars indicates differential corrections (e.g. WAAS) are being used for that satellite. Table 16-2 Signal Strength Bar Graph Description Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain The Time and other data may not be displayed until the unit has acquired Weather enough satellites for a x. The sky view display at the left of the page shows the satellites currently in view as well as their respective positions. The outer circle of the sky view represents the horizon (with north at the top of the circle); the inner circle represents 45 above the horizon and the center point shows the position directly overhead. Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected
(hollow signal strength bar) before the satellite may be used for navigation (solid signal strength bar). Once the GPS receiver has determined your position, the GTN unit indicates your position, altitude, track and ground speed. The GPS receiver status eld also displays the following messages under the appropriate conditions:
Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:08:41 PM GPS Signal Message Description Acquiring 3D Nav 3D Diff Nav LOI The GPS receiver is acquiring satellites for navigation. In this mode, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be in view. The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and computes altitude using satellite data. The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and differential corrections are being used. The LOI (Loss Of Integrity) annunciator (bottom left corner of the screen) indicates that satellite coverage is insufcient to pass built-in integrity monitoring tests. Table 16-3 GPS Signal Messages The GPS Status Page also indicates the accuracy of the position x, using Horizontal Figure of Merit (HFOM), Vertical Figure of Merit (VFOM), and Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU). HFOM and VFOM represent the 95%
condence levels in horizontal and vertical accuracy. The lowest numbers are the best accuracy and the highest numbers are worse. EPU is the horizontal position error estimated by the Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) algorithm, in feet or meters. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:08:41 PM NOTE: Operating outside of an SBAS service area with SBAS enabled may cause elevated EPU values to be displayed on the satellite status page. Regardless of the EPU value displayed, the LOI annunciation is the controlling indication for determining the integrity of the GPS navigation solution. NOTE: The FDE Prediction program is used to predict FDE availability. This program must be used prior to all oceanic or remote area ights for all operators using the GTN as a primary means of navigation under FAR parts 91, 121, 125, and 135. The FDE program is part of the GTN trainer, available for download from the GTN product information page on Garmins web site, www.garmin.com. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To If the GTN has not been operated for a period of six months or more, acquiring satellite data to establish almanac and satellite orbit information can take 5 to 10 minutes. Proc Charts The Time and other data may not be displayed until the unit has acquired enough satellites for a x. 16.2.2 Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS) SBAS is a system that supports wide area, or regional, augmentation through the use of additional satellite broadcast messages. WAAS, EGNOS, and MSAS are known SBAS providers. At the time of printing, SBAS providers support the following areas:
WAAS provides SBAS service for Alaska, Canada, the 48 contiguous states, and most of Central America. EGNOS provides SBAS service for most of Europe and parts of North Africa. MSAS provides SBAS service for Japan only. 1. While viewing the System page, touch GPS Status. 2. If desired, touch the SBAS key to select an SBAS provider. The SBAS list is based on the Aviation database. Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:08:41 PM 3. Touch the key for the desired SBAS provider. Figure 16-19 SBAS Selection Page 4. Touch the Back key to return to the System Status page. 16.2.3 Circle of Uncertainty The Circle of Uncertainty depicts an area where the ownship location is guaranteed to be when the aircraft location cannot be accurately determined. The area of the Circle of Uncertainty becomes larger as GPS horizontal accuracy degrades and smaller as it improves. The Circle of Uncertainty is shown only when the aircraft is on the ground. The Circle of Uncertainty area is transparent so that features within it may still be seen. Area Within The Circle Of Uncertainty Ownship Symbol Figure 16-20 Circle of Uncertainty Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:08:41 PM 16.3 External LRUs The External LRU page displays the external equipment connected to the GTN and their connection status. 1. While viewing the System page, touch the External LRUs key. LRU Available And Communicating Touch For More Information LRU Not Available Or Communicating Figure 16-21 External LRU Page 2. When more information is available about the listed units, touch the More Info key to view the information. 16.3.1 GDL 69 (and GDL 69A) Status The GDL 69 Status page displays the serial numbers for the Data Radio for the GDL 69/69A and the Audio Radio for the GDL 69A. Subscription status displays the level of service available for your particular subscription. The Weather Products section lists the products available for your particular subscription. 1. While viewing the External LRUs page, touch More Info for the GDL 69 LRU. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:08:41 PM Data Radio ID &
Signal Level Subscription Level Audio Radio ID
& Signal Level SW Version and Serial Number Weather Product List Weather Product Legend Touch To View GDL Status Menu Figure 16-22 GDL 69/69A Status Page 2. Touch the Menu key to display the GDL 69 Status Menu. Figure 16-23 GDL Status Menu 3. Touch the Lock Activation key if this is for the initial subscription or a change in the subscription. Touch the OK key to continue the operation. Figure 16-24 Lock Activation 4. Touch the Back key to return to the System page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:08:42 PM 16.3.2 GDL 88 Status The GDL 88 Status page displays information about the status of the GDL 88. Status On Available to Run Unavailable Fault Unavailable to Run Description Application is on/running. Required ownship input data is available and meets the performance criteria. Application is congured. Required input data is available and meets the performance criteria. This state represents that the ASA Application is manually or automatically selected off. Required Input data is not available due to a failure or the ASA Application process is failed. Required Input data is available but does not meet the performance criteria or is not available due to Non-
Computed Data (NCD) conditions. Table 16-4 Trafc Application Status Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info 1. While viewing the External LRUs page, touch More Info for Map the GDL 88 LRU. Internal or External GPS Source Time In Minutes From Last Ground Uplink FIS-B Weather Products GDL 88 SW Version and Serial Number Weather Product Legend Touch To Enable/Disable FIS-B Weather Trafc Status Figure 16-25 GDL 88 Status 2. Touch the Enabled key to toggle whether FIS-B Weather is enabled/disabled for use. Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:08:42 PM 16.3.3 GSR 56 Status The GSR 56 Status page displays information about the status of the GSR 56. 1. While viewing the External LRUs page, touch More Info for the GSR 56 LRU. Current Registration Info Phone and Datalink Status Iridium Signal Level Touch To Register Figure 16-26 GSR 56 Status 2. Touch the Connext Registration key to display the Connext Registration display. Touch To Enter Access Code Current Registration Info Touch To Register Figure 16-27 Connext Registration Page Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:08:42 PM 16.4 Setup System Setup allows setting the time convention, Com channel spacing, crosslling to a second GTN or GNS unit, and Nearest Airport search ltering. CDI CDI Scale ILS CDI Capture Date/Time Local Offset Time Format Nearest Airport Runway Surface Min Rwy Length Com/Nav Com Channel Spacing 25.0 kHz 8.33 kHz Reverse Frequency Lookup Crossll Figure 16-28 System Setup Functions Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:08:42 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts 1. While viewing the System page, touch the Setup key. Touch Key to Select CDI Scale Touch Key to Set ILS CDI Capture Touch Key to Set Time Offset Touch Key to Set Time Format Touch Key to Set Runway Surface Type Touch Key to Set Min Runway Length Touch Key to Set Com Channel spacing Touch Key to Activate Rev Freq Lookup Touch Key to Enable Crossll With Dual GTN Units Figure 16-29 System Setup Page 2. After making the desired selections, touch the Back key to return to the Setup page. Wpt Info 16.4.1 Date/Time The Date/Time setting provides selection of time format (local or UTC; 12-
or 24-hour). UTC (also called GMT or Zulu) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites signals and cannot be changed. Current Selected Date and Time Touch To Select Local Time Offset Touch To Select Time Format Figure 16-30 System Date and Time Setup 1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch Local Offset to set the time offset for local time. 2. Use the keypad to select the desired local offset and then touch Enter. 3. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Time Format key to select local 12 hour, local 24 hour, or UTC time. Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:08:43 PM Touch Key to Select Time Format Figure 16-31 Select System Time Format 4. Touch the key for the desired time format. 16.4.2 Com Channel Spacing Com transceiver channel spacing may be selected between 8.33 kHz and 25.0 kHz. While viewing the System Setup page, touch Channel Spacing to toggle between 8.33 kHz and 25.0 kHz channel spacing. 16.4.3 Reverse Frequency Look-Up The identier and frequency type will be shown for the selected Com and Nav frequencies for the nearest stations that are in the database when the unit is receiving a valid position input. Station Identiers with a + sign will have more stations associated with this frequency than just the type displayed. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc 1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Reverse Terrain Frequency Lookup key to toggle the function. Airport Identier and Type Shown For Freqs In Database. The + Sign Indicates More Stations Associated With This Frequency Identier and Type Shown For Freqs In Database Reverse Frequency Lookup Selected Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Figure 16-32 Reverse Frequency Lookup Selected 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-25 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:08:43 PM 16.4.4 Nearest Airport Criteria Nearest Airport Criteria denes the surface type and minimum runway length used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the Nearest Airport Page. A minimum runway length and/or surface type may be entered to prevent airports with small runways, or runways that do not have an appropriate surface, from being displayed. The default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and any for runway surface type. Touch To Select Runway Surface Type Touch To Select Minimum Runway Length Figure 16-33 Select Nearest Airport Criteria Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-26 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:08:43 PM 1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch Runway Surface to display the options. Touch the desired surface type. Touch to Select Any Runway Surface Touch to Select Hard Runway Surfaces Only Touch to Select Hard or Soft Runway Surfaces Touch to Select Water Surfaces Only Figure 16-34 Nearest Airport Runway Surface Type 2. Touch Minimum Runway Length to display the keypad for selecting the minimum runway length. Select the desired minimum runway length with the numeric keypad. A selection of "0" will allow any length. Touch Key to Delete Values Touch Keys to Set Values Figure 16-35 Nearest Airport Runway Length 3. After selecting the runway length, touch the Enter key to save the entered values or touch the Back key to return to the System Setup page without saving a value. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-27 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 27 7/9/2015 2:08:43 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 16.4.5 Crossll Dual units may be interfaced to crossll information between the two units. This option will not be available unless dual units are congured. When Crossll is turned on with one GTN, it is automatically turned on in the other GTN. Some items are always crosslled regardless of the crossll setting;
others are dependent on the crossll setting. The GTN can be can also be interfaced with the GNS 400W/500W units. The GTN can automatically send the Active Flight Plan and active Direct-To course to the GNS unit. The GTN User Waypoints can be manually sent to the GNS unit. The GNS unit can manually send its User Waypoints to the GTN unit. Waypoint names longer than six characters, or duplicates, sent from the GTN unit to the GNS unit will replace some characters with a "+" sign, while leaving signicant characters to aid in identication (such as, USR003 becomes US+003). NOTE: Upon crossll being activated, the GTNs may take up to 10 seconds to crossll the ight plans. The pilot must verify the ight plan in each unit prior to use. The GTN and GNS units must have databases with the same cycle. NOTE: When GPS navigation is lost in either unit, crosslling may not be available until GPS is restored in both units. Crosslling will resume once the ightplan is changed on one of the units or crossll is re-enabled. NOTE: If two GTN 7XX units are crosslled, then the same type (ChartView or FlightCharts) and version (cycle number and effective dates) for the chart database must be installed on both units in order for the correct chart to be overlaid on the main map page. 16.4.5.1 GTN-to-GTN Crosslling This data is always crosslled:
User waypoints Flight plan catalog Alerts (trafc pop-up acknowledgement, missed approach waypoint pop-
up acknowledgement, altitude leg pop-up acknowledgement) External sensors (transponder status and commands, synchro heading) System setup:
- User-dened NAV frequencies to store favorites
- Date/Time convention
- Nearest airport criteria
- Units (Nav angle, Distance/Speed, etc.) Index 16-28 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 28 7/9/2015 2:08:43 PM
- User-dened COM frequencies to store favorites
- CDI Scale setting
- ILS CDI Capture setting NOTE: There is an installer option to turn on a system message that will be provided anytime crossll is turned off to alert the pilot that ight plans are not being crosslled. This data is crosslled only if crossll is turned on by the pilot:
Active navigation (ight plan) 1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Crossll key to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Crossll. or 2. When Crossll is about to be enabled, you will be prompted to note that data will be overwritten in the other unit. Touch OK to enable Crossll or touch Cancel to return to the System Setup page without enabling Crossll. Touch OK to Enable Crossll With Dual Units Figure 16-36 Conrming Crossll Selection 16.4.5.2 GTN-GNS Crosslling GTN to GNS Active ight plans, active direct-to, User waypoints GNS to GTN User waypoints 1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the GNS Crossll Settings key to reach the GNS Crossll settings. Touch OK to Enable Auto Crossll With Dual Units Touch OK to Manually Transfer User Waypoints Figure 16-37 GTN-GNS Crossll Selection Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-29 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 29 7/9/2015 2:08:44 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix NOTE: When the active ight plan on the GTN contains legs or features that are not supported by the GNS, those legs will not be crosslled and will not be present in the active ight plan on the GNS. 2. Touch Auto GNS Crossll to enable Crossll and send the Active Flight Plans and the active Direct-To course to the GNS unit. 3. Touch the Transfer User Waypoints key to transfer the User Waypoints from the GTN unit to the connected GNS unit. Transfer Of User Waypoints In Progress 16.4.6 CDI Scale Selection Figure 16-38 GTN-GNS Crossll The CDI source and ILS CDI Capture type may be selected manually or automatically. The selected CDI Scale will be reected in the annunciation bar at the bottom of the display. CDI Scale Selection allows you to dene the scale for the course deviation indicator (both on the GTN unit's on-screen CDI and the external CDI). The scale values represent full scale deection for the CDI to either side. The default setting is Auto. At this setting, the CDI scale is set to 2.0 NM during the en route phase of ight. Within 31 NM (terminal area) of your destination airport, the CDI scale linearly ramps down to 1.0 NM over a distance of 1 NM. Likewise, when leaving your departure airport the CDI scale is set to 1.0 NM and gradually ramps up to 2 NM beyond 30 NM (from the departure airport). During GPS approach operations the CDI scale gradually transitions down to an angular CDI scale. At 2.0 NM before the nal approach x (FAF), CDI scaling is tightened from 1.0 NM to the angular full scale deection (typically the angular full-scale deection is 2.0, but will be as dened for the approach). If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 NM), the higher scale settings are not selected during ANY phase of ight. For example, if 1.0 NM is selected, the GTN unit uses this for en route and terminal phases and ramps down further during an approach. Note that the Horizontal Alarm (HAL) protection Index 16-30 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 30 7/9/2015 2:08:44 PM limits listed below follow the selected CDI scale, unless corresponding ight phases call for lower HAL. For example, if the 1.0 NM CDI setting is selected, full-scale deection during approach will still follow the approach CDI scale settings. CDI Scale Auto (oceanic) 2.0 NM or Auto (en route) 1.0 NM or Auto (terminal) 0.3 NM or Auto (approach) Horizontal Alarm Limit 2.0 NM 2.0 NM 1.0 NM 0.3 NM Table 16-5 CDI Scale and Horizontal Alarm Limits An auto ILS CDI selection allows the GTN unit to automatically switch the external CDI from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver, when intercepting the nal approach course. Or, select manual to manually switch the external CDI connection, as needed (using the CDI key). If the unit is installed with a KAP140/KFC225 autopilot, automatic switching will not take place. Touch To Select CDI Scale Touch To Select ILS CDI Capture Type Figure 16-39 CDI Selection 1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the CDI Scale key to allow automatic selection or to choose a CDI Scale manually. Touch To Select 1 NM CDI Scaling Touch To Select Automatic CDI Scaling Figure 16-40 CDI Scale Selection Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-31 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 31 7/9/2015 2:08:44 PM 2. Touch the ILS CDI Capture key to select automatic or manual. This feature enables the unit to automatically switch from GPS to VLOC on an ILS approach. See Procedures-ILS Approaches for more detail on ILS approaches. 16.5 Alerts Settings The Alerts Setup page controls two functions: Arrival Alerts and Airspace Alerts. Arrival Alerts, when active, will generate a message when the aircraft is within the selected proximity of the destination. Airspace Alerts generate a message and ltering of the Nearest Airspace list. The altitude component of Airspace Alerts are dependent on both aircraft and airspace altitude and the values set for the Altitude Buffer. Touch to Select Distance Values Arrival Selected Airspace Type (green bar) Airspace Altitude Buffer Figure 16-41 Alerts Setup Page 1. While viewing the System page, touch the Alerts key. 2. Touch the Arrival key to toggle activation. A green bar will appear when it is active. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-32 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 32 7/9/2015 2:08:44 PM 3. Touch the Proximity key to set the Proximity distance values. A numeric keypad will appear. Select the desired values and then touch Enter. Selected Proximity Value Touch To Cancel Figure 16-42 Airspace Alert Proximity Selection 4. Touch the Altitude Buffer key to set the buffer altitude value. A numeric keypad will appear. Select the desired value and then touch Enter. Selected Altitude Buffer Value Touch To Cancel Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities Figure 16-43 Airspace Alert Altitude Buffer Selection 5. Touch the Airspace type keys to toggle activation. A green bar System will appear when it is active. NOTE: The Airspace Alert setting does not alter the depiction of airspace, or change the Smart Airspace setting for the main map page. NOTE: Airspace alerts for Prohibited airspace cannot be disabled. Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-33 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 33 7/9/2015 2:08:44 PM 16.6 Units Settings The Units Setup page allows you to select the conventions for the various units that are displayed. Units Type Units Values Altitude/Vertical Speed Feet(FT/FPM), Meters (M/MPS) Distance/Speed Fuel Nav Angle Magnetic Variation Position Format Pressure Temperature Nautical Miles (NM/KT), Kilometers (KM/KPH), Statue Miles
(SM/MPH) Gallons (GAL), Imperial Gallons (IG), Kilograms (KG), Liters
(LT), or Pounds (LB) Magnetic (), True (T), User (u) Enter numeric value, E or W LAT/LON, MGRS, UTM Inches of Mercury (IN), Hectopascals (HPA), Millibars (MB) Celsius (C) or Fahrenheit (F) Table 16-6 System Units Setup 16.6.1 Setup Units Use these settings to set the units for values displayed in the unit operation. 1. While viewing the System page, touch the Units key. Touch Key to Set Units Figure 16-44 System Units Page 2. Touch the key for the desired units. A window with a list of unit values will appear. Touch the desired value on the list. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-34 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 34 7/9/2015 2:08:45 PM Figure 16-45 Setup Units Selection Windows 3. After making the desired selections, touch the Back key to return to the Setup page. 16.6.2 Setting a User-Congured (Manual) Nav Angle There are three variation (heading) options: Magnetic, True, and User. If Magnetic is selected, all track, course and heading information is corrected to the magnetic variation computed by the GPS receiver. The True setting references all information to true north. The User selection allows the pilot to enter values between 0 and 179 E or W. NOTE: When changing the Nav angle, the DTK on the Flight Plan page for an approach does not change until that approach is reloaded. 1. While viewing the System page, touch Units key. 2. Touch the Nav Angle key and then the User key. Touch to select User
(manual) mag var Figure 16-46 Nav Angle Selections Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-35 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 35 7/9/2015 2:08:45 PM 3. After User is selected, touch the Magnetic Variation key to set the value. Touch to set manual mag var Figure 16-47 Magnetic Variation is Available for Editing 4. Touch the keys on the numeric keypad to set the Magnetic Variation and then touch Enter. Current User Mag Var Value Touch Key to Toggle Hemisphere Touch Key to Delete Values Use the Numeric Keypad to Select User
(manual) Magnetic Variation Cancel Selection And Return To Previous Page Figure 16-48 Numeric Keypad for Setting Manual Magnetic Variation Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-36 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 36 7/9/2015 2:08:45 PM 5. The User Nav Angle value will be used for all angular values. Remember to change the value when traveling to an area requiring another value. Selected User (manual) Magnetic Variation Figure 16-49 User (Manual) Magnetic Variation Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-37 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 37 7/9/2015 2:08:45 PM 16.6.3 Position Format Selection There are three Position Formats available: Lat/Lon, the Military Grid Reference System (MGRS), and the Universal Transverse Mercator (UTM) grid system. The format selected will be shown in all locations where position information is shown. NOTE: The Position Format Selection function is available in SW Versions 4.10, and later. MGRS Position Format Figure 16-50 MGRS Position Format Shown On Waypoint Info Page 100 km Square Identier Grid Designator Easting Numeric Location Northing Numeric Location Figure 16-51 MGRS Position Format Detail Latitude Band Grid Zone Easting Value Northing Value Figure 16-52 UTM Position Format Detail Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-38 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 38 7/9/2015 2:08:45 PM 1. While viewing the System page, touch Units key. 2. Touch the Position Format key. Touch to select Position Format Figure 16-53 Position Format Selection 3. Touch the desired Position format. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-39 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 39 7/9/2015 2:08:45 PM 16.7 User Fields The User Fields selection allows you to congure the data eld type shown at the top of the display in the center elds when they are not occupied by controls for an audio panel or transponder. The data shown in each eld may be selected from a list after touching the desired eld. NOTE: Data Field Types that use the term "Destination" refer to the nal destination in the ight plan. NOTE: ETE to Destination is not available when a procedure is loaded and there are waypoints in the Enroute section of the ight plan. 1. While viewing the System page, touch the User Fields key, then touch an available eld in the top of the display. Terrain Page Assigned To Field Touch To Select Field Touch To Select Category
(Data, Function, or Page). Data selected in this case. List of Data Types Available Figure 16-54 User Fields Selection 2. Touch the Data, Function, or Page tab to display a list of available selections. A list of information types will be displayed. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-40 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 40 7/9/2015 2:08:46 PM 3. Touch the Up or Down keys or touch the display and drag your nger to scroll through the list. Touch the desired item to select it or touch the Back key to cancel selection. Field Type List. Touch To Select Data Field Slider Indicates More Selections Available. Press Finger and Slide To View More Selections. Selected Field Type Figure 16-55 Map Data Field Type Selections The options available are shown in the following tables. Selections available vary depending on installed equipment. Data Field Type ACTV WPT - Active Waypoint B/D APT - BRG/DIS from Dest APT 1 BRG - Bearing to Current Waypoint DIS - Distance to Current Waypoint DIS to Dest - Distance to Destination 2 MSA - Minimum Safe Altitude OAT (static) - Static Air Temperature OAT (total) - Total Air Temperature RAD ALT - Radar Altimeter Time - Current Time DTK - Desired Track Time to TOD - Time to Top of Descent ESA - Enroute Safe Altitude ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival ETA at Dest - ETA at Destination ETE - Estimated Time Enroute ETE to Dest - ETE to Destination Fuel Flow - Total Fuel Flow GS - GPS Ground Speed GSL - GPS Altitude Generic Timer - Timer Display TKE - Track Angle Error TRK - Track Trip Timer - Timer Display VOR/LOC - Tuned VOR/LOC Info VSR - Vertical Speed Required Wind - Wind Speed and Direction XTK - Cross Track Error OFF - Do Not Display Data Field Table 16-7 Data User Field Selections Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-41 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 41 7/9/2015 2:08:46 PM Note 1:
Note 2:
B/D APT is the straight line distance. Dist to DEST is the distance along the ight plan. Function Field Type CDI - Course Deviation Indicator Flap Override - Flap Override1 GPWS Inhibit - GPWS Inhibit1 G/S Inhibit - G/S Inhibit1 HTAWS RP Mode - HTAWS RP Mode2 Passenger Address - PA Toggle Playback - Play Last Recording TAWS Inhibit - TAWS Inhibit Gen Timer - Generic Timer Control WX RDR Controls - Weather Radar Controls OBS/Suspend/Unsuspend Button OFF - Do Not Display Data Field On Scene - "On Scene" Mode Toggle Table 16-8 Function User Field Selections Note 1:
Note 2:
With TAWS-A enabled. With HTAWS enabled. Map Page Field Type Charts - Charts Page Fuel PLAN - Fuel Planning Page Flight Plan - Flight Plan Page SCHED MSG - Scheduled Messages Map - Map Page Nearest - Nearest Page Trip PLAN - Trip Planning Page VCALC - VCALC Page NEAR APT - Nearest Airport Page User FREQ - User Frequencies PROC - Procedures Page Approach - Approach Page Arrival - Arrival Page Departure - Departure Page Services - Services Page Trafc - Trafc Page Terrain - Terrain Page Utilities - Utilities Page Checklist - Checklist Page WPT INFO - Waypoint Information Weather - Weather Page CNXT WX - Connext WX Page FIS-B WX - FIS-B Weather Page Stormscope - Stormscope Page WX Radar - Weather Radar Page SiriusXM WX - Sirius XM WX Page OFF - Do Not Display Page Field Table 16-9 Page User Field Selections Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-42 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 42 7/9/2015 2:08:46 PM 16.8 Audio The Audio Settings allows the adjustment of the volume the click sound when controls are touched. 1. While viewing the System page, touch Audio key. Touch The Arrow Keys To Adjust Click Volume Touch To Select Voice Call Outs
(Optional) Touch To Select Voice
(TAWS Only) Figure 16-56 System Audio Selection 2. Touch the Arrow keys to adjust the Key Click Volume. 3. Touch the Male or Female key to select the audio voice type. 4. When HTAWS is installed, a Voice Call Outs option may be available. Touch the Voice Callouts key to select the Max Voice Call Out value. NOTE: VCOs are available down to 100 feet above terrain when HTAWS is installed and use GSL above terrain to generate callouts (no radar altimeter required). If a radar altimeter is interfaced to the GTN, alerts are available down to 50 feet and the height above terrain from the radar altimeter is used to generate the callouts. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-43 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 43 7/9/2015 2:08:46 PM 5. Touch the MAX Voice Callout key to select the value. Touch To Select Max Voice Callout Touch To Select Voice Call Out Value Figure 16-57 Select Voice Call Out Value 6. Touch Back when complete. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-44 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 44 7/9/2015 2:08:46 PM 16.9 Backlight Settings The backlighting of the display and bezel keys can be adjusted automatically or manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting adjustment) uses photocell technology to automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-congured to optimize display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. A manual offset creates a deviation form the normal curve. Manual adjustments may be made from
+100% to -10%. The negative adjustment is limited to prevent the backlight from being accidently decreasing the backlight to the point where the display of information could not be seen. The backlight offset function is not available when a dimmer input is active. The GTN is capable of accepting lighting inputs from the built-in photocell, aircraft dimmer bus, or both. If the lighting is not satisfactory, contact the installer to adjust the curves. Manual backlighting adjustment can be accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimmer bus or the following procedures. 1. While viewing the System page, touch the Backlight key. 2. Touch the Arrow keys to adjust the Backlight level. Touch The Arrow Keys For Manual Offset Figure 16-58 Backlight Level Selection 3. After making the desired selections, touch the Back key to return to the System page. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-45 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 45 7/9/2015 2:08:46 PM 16.10 Connext Setup - GSR 56 This page provides information about the GSR 56 and the Connext Registration page. See section 16.3.3 GSR 56 Status for more details. 1. While viewing the System page, touch Connext Setup to access the GSR 56 LRU Status page. 2. Touch Connext Registration to set up the Connext account. Follow the information provided in 16.3.3 GSR 56 Status. 16.11 Connext Setup - Flight Stream 210 The GTN can interface with the Flight Stream 210 Bluetooth transceiver. Using the Flight Stream 210 and the GTN, ight plans can be sent and received over Bluetooth. In addition, GPS position is provided from the GTN and attitude can be forwarded from a connected GDU. The GTN can also congure the Flight Stream's Bluetooth. Touch To Set The Bluetooth Name Touch To Enable Flight Plan Import Touch To Manage Paired Devices Figure 16-59 Connext Setup for Flight Stream 210 NOTE: Turning Flight Plan imports off will remove the ability of the GTN to receive ight plans from the Flight Stream 210. This could be used if there are repeated erroneous attempts by a portable device application to send ight plans to the GTN. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-46 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 46 7/9/2015 2:08:47 PM 16.11.1 Operation Data output from the GTN and Flight Stream 210 occurs automatically and requires no pilot action (such as, ight plan, GPS position, and attitude). Additionally, ADS-B trafc and weather can be output from the Flight Stream when connected to a GDL 88 and XM WX and SiriusXM satellite radio information can output when connected a GDL 69. From the Connext Setup page, the pilot can enable/disable ight plan importing, change the Flight Stream Bluetooth name, and manage paired devices. The device status indicates if the portable device is connected and communicating with the Flight Stream. The Auto-Reconnect setting determines if the Flight Stream will automatically connect to up to four devices when in range. When this setting is disabled, the pilot must initiate the connection from the device. Removing a device from this page by pressing Remove will require the device to be paired again before transferring data. NOTE: If the pairing is removed from either device (portable device or GTN) it must be removed on the other device before a new pairing to that same device is established again. Essentially, pairing must be removed on both devices before repairing. Touch To Automatically Connect To The Device When In Range Touch To Remove The Device Device Is Connected And Communicating Device Is Not Connected Or Communicating Figure 16-60 Managing Paired Devices Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-47 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 47 7/9/2015 2:08:47 PM 16.11.2 Pairing a Device New devices can only be paired with the Flight Stream when it is in Pairing Mode. The Flight Stream will be in pairing mode when the GTN is navigated to the Connext Setup page and/or the Manage Paired Devices page. The pairing must be initiated by the portable device. Pop-ups displayed on the portable device and GTN will be displayed to conrm the pairing. Figure 16-61 Conrm Pairing With A New Device Selecting Manage Paired Devices opens a page that lists all of devices paired to the Flight Stream 210. 16.12 Connext Setup GMA 35c NOTE: This feature is available in software version 6.00 or later. The GTN can interface with the GMA 35c Bluetooth audio panel. Using the GMA 35c and the GTN, audio or telephone calls from a portable device can be streamed over Bluetooth to the GMA. The GTN can also congure the Bluetooth functions of the GMA 35c. Touch To Enable Bluetooth Touch To Manage Paired Devices Touch To Set Bluetooth Name Figure 16-62 Connext Setup for GMA 35c Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 16-48 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 48 7/9/2015 2:08:47 PM From the Connext Setup page, the pilot can enable/disable Bluetooth, change the GMA 35c Bluetooth name, and manage paired devices. On the Paired Devices page, the device status indicates if the portable device is connected and communicating with the GMA 35c. Only one portable device can be connected to the GMA 35c at a time. To connect a different device when one is already connected, the existing connection must be ended by removing the portable device pairing from the GMA 35c or by disconnecting or disabling Bluetooth on the portable device. Removing a device from this page by pressing Remove will require the device to be paired again before streaming audio. NOTE: If the pairing is removed from either device (portable device or GMA) it must be removed on the other device before a new pairing to that same device is established again. Essentially, pairing must be removed on both devices before repairing. New devices can only be paired with the GMA 35c when it is in Pairing Mode. The GMA will be in pairing mode when on the Connext Setup page or the Manage Paired Devices page. The pairing must be initiated by the portable device. A pop-up will be displayed on the portable device to conrm the pairing. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 16-49 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 49 7/9/2015 2:08:47 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 16.13 Voice Command NOTE: This feature is available in software version 6.00, or later. The Voice Command page allows controlling the voice command function and viewing the voice command status and recent commands. Voice Commands are only available when connected to a compatible Garmin audio panel and when enabled by the installer. Touch To Activate Voice Commands Touch To View Recently Spoken Commands Installed Voice Command Grammar Version Voice Command Tone Status Figure 16-63 Voice Command Setup 1. While viewing the System page, touch the Voice Commands key. 2. Touch the Voice Commands key to toggle activation. A green bar will appear when Voice commands are active. 3. Touch the Command History key to open a list of recently spoken commands. Command Name Command Status Crew Member Who Issued Command Time Command Was Issued Figure 16-64 Voice Command History Index 16-50 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 50 7/9/2015 2:08:47 PM 17 MESSAGES When a Message has been issued by the unit, the Message (MSG) key/
annunciator in the lower left of the display will blink. Touch the MSG key to view the messages. After viewing the messages, touch the Back key to return to the previously viewed page. The Messages provide an aid to troubleshooting system operation. System messages are not crosslled between GTN units. Each GTN will display messages based on data received by that unit. This may result in duplication of messages between units, however the pilot should view messages on both GTN units when more than one is installed to ensure all messages are received. Message List Message Key -
Touch To Toggle Message Display Figure 17-1 Message Display Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Message ABORT APPROACH -
GPS approach no longer available. AIRSPACE ALERT -
Inside airspace. AIRSPACE ALERT -
Airspace within 2 nm and entry in less than 10 minutes. AIRSPACE ALERT -
Airspace entry in less than 10 minutes. AIRSPACE ALERT -
Within 2 nm of airspace. APR GUIDANCE AVAILABLE -
Press Enable APR Output before selecting APR on autopilot. Description This message is triggered outside the MAP if the GTN system can no longer provide approach level of service. Vertical guidance will be removed from the external CDI/HSI display. The aircraft inside an airspace type for which alerts are congured. The aircraft is within 2 nm and predicted to enter an airspace type, within 10 minutes, for which alerts are congured. The aircraft is predicted to enter an airspace type, within 10 minutes, for which alerts are congured. The aircraft is within 2nm of an airspace type for which alerts are congured. The GTN is congured for KAP140/KFC225 autopilot, and approach guidance is now available. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Action Initiate a climb to the MSA or other published safe altitude, abort the approach, and execute a non-
GPS based approach. No action is necessary; message is informational only. No action is necessary; message is informational only. No action is necessary; message is informational only. No action is necessary; message is informational only. Press the Enable APR Output key on the GTN, this will cause the autopilot to go into ROL mode. Engage the autopilot into approach mode. See section 6.14 for additional information. Index 17-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Action Continue to y the approach using published LNAV minimums. Abort the approach, and execute a non-GPS based approach. Contact dealer for service. Remove power from the GMA 35 audio panel by pulling the circuit breaker labeled Audio. The pilot will be able to communicate with the Com 2 radio. Contact dealer for service. Select the appropriate CDI source for approach. Message APPROACH DOWNGRADE -
Approach downgraded. Use LNAV minima. APPROACH NOT ACTIVE -
Do not continue GPS approach. AUDIO PANEL -
Audio panel needs service. AUDIO PANEL -
Audio panel is inoperative or connection to GTN is lost. CDI SOURCE -
Select appropriate CDI source for approach. Description Approach has been downgraded from LPV or LNAV/VNAV, to an LNAV approach. Vertical guidance will be removed from the external CDI/HSI display. GPS approach could not transition to active
(e.g., the GTN is on an approach and did not have the required HPL/VPL to get into at least LNAV, so is still in TERM). The GMA 35 is reporting to the GTN that it needs service. The audio panel may continue to function. The GTN is congured for Garmin audio panel control (GMA 35) and the GTN cannot communicate with the GMA 35. No control of the GMA 35 will be possible. Aircraft is on a GPS approach but CDI is set to VLOC, or aircraft is on VLOC approach and CDI is set to GPS and aircraft is less than 2 nm from the FAF. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Message CDI/HSI FLAG -
Main lateral/
vertical ag on CDI/HSI is inoperative. COM RADIO -
Com radio needs service. COM RADIO -
Com radio may be inoperative. Description The Main Lateral Superag or Main Vertical Superag output has been turned off due to an over-
current condition. The com radio is reporting that it needs service. The com radio may continue to function. The com radio is not communicating properly with the system. Com radio is in overtemp or undervoltage mode and transmitting power has been reduced to prevent damage to the com radio. Radio range will be reduced. Com radio is locked to 121.5 MHz. COM RADIO -
Com overtemp or undervoltage. Reducing transmitter power. COM RADIO -
Com locked to 121.5 MHz. Hold remote com transfer key to exit. Action Verify course guidance is valid and correct by crosschecking with the GTN on-screen CDI and other navigational equipment. Contact dealer for service. Cycle the power to the COM radio. Contact dealer for service. Press and hold the volume knob or the external com remote transfer
(COM RMT XFR) switch, if installed this will force the com radio to 121.5 MHz. Contact dealer for service. Decrease length of com transmissions, decrease cabin temperature and increase cabin airow (especially near the GTN). Check aircraft voltage and reduce electrical load as necessary. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. The external com remote transfer
(COM RMT XFR) switch has been held and the com radio is tuned to 121.5. To exit this mode, hold the com remote transfer (COM RMT XFR) switch for two seconds. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 17-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Message Description Action CONFIGURATION
- Terrain/TAWS conguration is invalid. GTN needs service. CONFIGURATION MODULE -
GTN conguration module needs service. COOLING -
GTN overtemp. Reducing backlight brightness. COOLING FAN -
The cooling fan has failed. TAWS is inoperative due to a conguration problem with the GTN. This message will be accompanied by a TER FAIL annunciation. The GTN cannot communicate with its conguration module. The GTN may still have a valid conguration. Backlight brightness has been reduced due to high display temperatures. The backlight level will remain high enough to be visible in daylight conditions. The GTN cooling fan is powered, but it is not turning at the desired RPM. CROSSFILL ERROR -
Crossll is inoperative. See CRG for crosslled items. Crossll is not working due to loss of communication with other GTN or due to one GTN needing service. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Decrease cabin temperature and increase cabin airow (especially near the GTN). Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Decrease cabin temperature and increase cabin airow (especially near the GTN) to prevent damage to the unit. Contact dealer for service. See section 16.4.1.4 for a list of crosslled items that will no longer be crosslled. Contact dealer for service. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Message CROSSFILL ERROR -
GTN software mismatch. See CRG for crosslled items. CROSSFILL ERROR - GTN Navigation DB mismatch. See CRG for crosslled items. CROSSFILL STATUS - Crossll is turned off. DATABASE -
Chart function unavailable. DATABASE -
Chart database valid until [DATE]. DATABASE -
A procedure has been modied in a cataloged ight plan. Description Action Crossll is congured on but is not working due to software mismatch. See section 16.4.1.4 for a list of crosslled items that will no longer be crosslled. Contact dealer to have software versions updated. The navigation databases do not match between GTNs resulting in a loss of communication between two units. Crossll is turned off. The GTN is congured for ChartView or FliteCharts and chart verication has failed. The GTN is congured for ChartView or FliteCharts and the chart database has or is about to expire. A new database update caused a procedure to be truncated because the ight plan now has too many waypoints or removed a procedure because it no longer exists in the database. Check the specied database version of both GTNs and ensure it is up-to-date. Update the specied database if needed. No action. Contact dealer for service. Verify chart database expiration date on the System System Status page. Update chart database if necessary for operations. Verify stored cataloged ight plans and procedures. Modify stored ight plans and procedures as necessary to include the current procedures by re-loading those procedures to the stored ight plan routes. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 17-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Message DATABASE -
Verify user-
modied procedures in stored ight plans are correct. DATABASE -
Verify airways in stored ight plans are correct. DATABASE -
Terrain or Obstacle database not available. DATABASE -
Terrain display unavailable for current location. DATACARD ERROR -
SD card is invalid or failed. DATACARD REMOVED -
Reinsert SD card. DATALINK -
ADS-B fault: UAT receiver. DATALINK -
ADS-B fault: 1090 receiver. Description A stored ight plan contains procedures that have been manually updated, and a navigation database update has occurred. A stored ight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent with the current navigation database. The terrain or obstacle database is missing or corrupt. The aircraft is outside the terrain database coverage area. External data card has an error and the unit is not able to read the databases. External data card was removed. The GDL 88 has detected a UAT receiver fault. The GDL 88 has detected a 1090 receiver fault. Action Verify that the user-modied procedures in stored ight plans are correct. Verify that the airways in stored ight plans are correct. Modify stored ight plans as necessary to include the current airways by re-
loading those airways to the stored ight plan routes. Re-load these databases on the external data card. Terrain and TAWS functions will be unavailable. If terrain coverage is desired in the area, load appropriate coverage area on the external data card. ChartView, FlightCharts, and Terrain databases will not be accessible by the unit. Contact dealer for service. Reinsert data card. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Message Description Action DATALINK - GDL 69 is inoperative or connection to GTN is lost. DATALINK -
GDL 88 ADS-B failure. Unable to transmit ADS-B messages. DATALINK -
GDL 88 ADS-B fault. DATALINK -
GDL88 ADS-B fault. Pressure altitude input is invalid. DATALINK -
GDL88 ADS-B is not transmitting position. Check GPS devices. DATALINK -
GDL88 ADS-B trafc has failed. The GTN is congured for a Garmin datalink
(GDL 69 or 69A) and the GTN cannot communicate with the datalink. Data from the datalink will not be available. GDL 88 is not able to transmit an ADS-B message due to a failure with the GDL 88 system or antenna(s). The GDL 88 has detected a fault with one of the GDL 88 UAT/1090 antennas. The GDL 88 has lost communication with the pressure altitude source. The GDL 88 has detected a position input fault. GDL 88 may have lost GPS position. The GDL 88 has detected an internal failure. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 17-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Description The GDL 88 has detected a conguration module fault. The GDL 88 has lost communication with the transponder. The GDL 88 is reporting to the GTN that the CSA application has failed. Trafc alerting on ADS-B trafc is unavailable. The GDL 88 is reporting that the external trafc system has a low battery. The aircraft is airborne and the GDL 88 is reporting that the external trafc system has been in standby for more than 60 seconds. The GDL 88 has detected a TAS/TCAS input fault. Message DATALINK -
GDL88 conguration module needs service. DATALINK -
GDL88 control input fault. Check transponder is in correct mode. DATALINK -
GDL88 CSA failure. DATALINK -
GDL88 external trafc system has a low battery. DATALINK - GDL 88 external trafc system has been in standby for more than 60 seconds. DATALINK -
GDL88 external trafc system inoperative or connection lost. Action Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Ensure the aircraft has a clear view of the sky. If the problem persists. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Set the TAS/TCAS/TCAD trafc device to operate on the trafc page if trafc alerts are desired. Contact dealer for service. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Message DATALINK -
GDL 88 is inoperative or connection to GTN is lost. DATALINK -
GDL88 needs service. DATALINK -
GSR56 is inoperative or connection to GTN is lost. DATALINK -
GSR56 data services inoperative;
registration required. DATA LOST -
Pilot stored data was lost. Recheck settings. DATA SOURCE -
Pressure altitude source inoperative or connection to GTN lost. Description The GTN is congured for a Garmin datalink
(GDL 88) and the GTN cannot communicate with the datalink. Data from the datalink will not be available. GDL 88 has detected an internal fault. The GTN is congured for a Garmin GSR 56 and the GTN cannot communicate with the GSR 56. GSR Weather, Position Reporting, and Phone Services will be unavailable. The GSR 56 is not registered. GSR Weather, Position Reporting, and Phone Services will be unavailable. User settings such as map detail level, nav range ring on/off, trafc overlay on/off, and alert settings have been lost. The GTN is congured to receive pressure altitude but is not receiving it from any source. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Action Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Close the GSR 56 circuit breaker and ensure the GSR 56 is receiving power. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Recheck settings. If the GTN is being used to forward pressure altitude to a transponder, the transponder will not be receiving pressure altitude from the GTN while that message is present. Contact dealer for service. Index 17-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Message Description Action DATA SOURCE -
Heading source inoperative or connection to GTN lost. DATA SOURCE -
Radar Altimeter source inoperative or connection to GTN lost. DEMO MODE -
Demo mode is active. Do not use for navigation. FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT - Flight plan import failed. Catalog is full. FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT - Flight plan import failed. FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT - New imported ight plan(s) available for preview. The GTN is congured to receive heading information but is not receiving it from any source. The GTN is congured to receive radio altitude information but is not receiving it from any source. The GTN is in Demo Mode and must not be used for actual navigation. The ight plan catalog is full and the requested ight plan could not be imported. The requested ight plan could not be imported because the GTN was unable to decode the contents of the ight plan. The GTN has received a new ight plan that is available for preview by the pilot. Heading up map displays will not be available. Contact dealer for service. 50 foot aural annunciation is unavailable for HTAWS installations. Contact dealer for service. Do not use for navigation. Power cycle the GTN to exit demo mode. Also ensure that the Direct-To key is not stuck. Edit the ight plan catalog to remove unneeded ight plans. Check for proper operation of the needed components. If the problem persists. Contact dealer for service. No action is necessary; message is informational only. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Message Description Action A stored ight plan waypoint is no longer in the current navigation database. Verify stored cataloged ight plans and procedures. Modify stored ight plans as necessary to include waypoints that are in the current navigation database. FPL WAYPOINT LOCKED -
Stored ight plan waypoint is not in current navigation database. FPL WPT MOVED -
Stored ight plan waypoint has changed location. GLIDESLOPE -
Glideslope receiver needs service. A stored ight plan waypoint has moved by more than 0.33 arc minutes from where previously positioned. The glideslope board is indicating that it needs service. The glideslope board may continue to function. GLIDESLOPE -
Glideslope receiver has failed. GNS CROSSFILL -
GTN user waypoint(s) replaced with GNS user waypoints. GNS CROSSFILL -
Catalog full; not all GNS waypoint(s) transferred. The glideslope board is not communicating property with the system. A user waypoint from the GNS replaced one or more existing waypoints on the GTN. A user waypoint from the GNS could not be created because the user waypoint catalog is full. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Verify stored cataloged ight plans and procedures. Modify stored ight plans as necessary to include waypoints that are in the current navigation database. Verify glideslope deviation indications with another source and crosscheck nal approach x crossing altitude. If another glideslope source is not available for verication, y a GPS based approach. Contact dealer for service. Fly an approach that does not use the glideslope receiver (VOR, LOC, GPS). Contact dealer for service. Ensure that the waypoints on the GNS have unique names before transferring to the GTN to avoid overwriting existing waypoints. Remove some of the waypoints from the catalog to make room for the waypoints from the GNS. Index 17-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Message GNS CROSSFILL -
Waypoint transfer failed. GPS NAVIGATION LOST -
Insufcient satellites. Use other navigation source. GPS NAVIGATION LOST -
Erroneous position. Use other navigation source. GPS RECEIVER -
GPS receiver has failed. Check GPS coax for electrical short. GPS RECEIVER -
Low internal clock battery. GPS RECEIVER -
GPS receiver needs service. Description Waypoint transfer failed/incomplete. Action The data transfer should be reattempted. GPS position has been lost due to lack of satellites. GPS position has been lost due to erroneous position. Wait for GPS satellite geometry to improve. Ensure the aircraft has a clear view of the sky. Use a different GPS receiver or a non-
GPS based source of navigation. Contact dealer for service. Use a different GPS receiver or a non-GPS based source of navigation. Contact dealer for service. Internal communication to the SBAS board is inoperative. Use a different GPS receiver or a non-GPS based source of navigation. Contact dealer for service. The GPS module indicates that its clock battery is low. Almanac data may have been lost. The unit will function normally, but may take a longer than normal period to acquire a GPS position. The GPS module is reporting that it needs service. The GPS module may continue to function. Contact dealer for service. Use a different GPS receiver or a non-GPS based source of navigation. Contact dealer for service. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Description The GPS module is acquiring position and may take longer than normal. This message normally occurs after initial installation or if the unit has not been powered for several weeks. The GTN has lost calibration data that was set by Garmin during manufacturing. The selected Expect Further Clearance (EFC) time for a user-dened hold has passed. The terrain database is of insufcient resolution for use with HTAWS. GAD 42 indicates a conguration error. Action No action is necessary; message is informational only. Contact dealer for service. No action is necessary; message is information only. Load HTAWS specic terrain database on the external SD card. Verify all input/output data from/
to the GAD 42 Interface Adapter. Contact dealer for service. GAD 42 indicates it needs service. The GAD 42 may continue to function. Internal SD card has an error. This card is not accessible by the user. Verify all input/output data from/
to the GAD 42 Interface Adapter. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Message GPS SEARCHING SKY -
Ensure GPS antenna has an unobstructed view of the sky. GTN -
GTN needs service. HOLD EXPIRED -
Holding EFC time has expired. HTAWS -
Invalid Terrain Database. INTERFACE ADAPTER -
GAD 42 conguration needs service. INTERFACE ADAPTER -
GAD 42 needs service. INTERNAL SD CARD ERROR -
GTN needs service. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 17-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Description Internal SD card was removed or failed. This card is not accessible by the user. The HOME key has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This key will now be ignored. The Direct-To key has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This key will now be ignored. The Volume knob has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This knob press will now be ignored. The dual concentric inner knob has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This knob press will now be ignored. The user is trying to activate a ight plan that contains a locked waypoint. Message INTERNAL SD CARD REMOVED -
GTN needs service. KEY STUCK -
HOME key is stuck. KEY STUCK -
Direct-To key is stuck. KNOB STUCK -
Volume knob is stuck in the pressed position. KNOB STUCK -
Dual concentric inner knob is stuck in the pressed position. LOCKED FLIGHT PLAN Cannot activate a ight plan containing a locked waypoint. Action Contact dealer for service. Verify the HOME key is not pressed. Press the Home key again to cycle its operation. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the Direct-To key is not pressed. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the volume knob is not pressed. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the dual concentric knob is not pressed. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Unlock the ight plan by modifying stored ight plans as necessary to include waypoints, procedures, and airways that are in the current navigation database. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:08:48 PM Description Antenna may be shaded from satellites. The GPS module has reported a loss of integrity. The NAV angle is not set to Magnetic and a magnetic approach is loaded. Action Make sure the aircraft is clear of hangars, buildings, trees, etc. Use a different GPS receiver or a non-
GPS based source of navigation. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Change NAV angle setting to Magnetic. MagVar is agged as unreliable in the MagVar database. This normally occurs when operating at high latitudes that do not support a Nav Angle of Magnetic. Mark on target waypoint creation has failed because of missing GPS position. Verify that the geographical region supports navigation based on magnetic variation. Wait for GPS satellite geometry to improve. Ensure the aircraft has a clear view of the sky. Reattempt waypoint creation. Contact dealer for service. Nav angle is set to True. No action is necessary; message is informational only. Message LOSS OF INTEGRITY (LOI)-
Verify GPS position with other navigation equipment. MAGNETIC NORTH APPROACH -
Verify NAV angles are referenced to magnetic north (magnetic variation). MAGNETIC VARIATION -
Aircraft in area with large mag var. Verify all course angles. MARK ON TARGET -
Waypoint creation has failed. MOT requires GPS position. NAV ANGLE -
NAV Angles are referenced to True North (T). Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 17-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM Message Description Action NAV ANGLE -
NAV Angles are referenced to a User set value (U). NON-WGS84 WAYPOINT -
See CRG. Location may be different than where surveyed for [WPT]. OBS -
OBS is not available due to dead reckoning or no active waypoint. PARALLEL TRACK -
Parallel track not supported past IAF. PARALLEL TRACK -
Parallel track not supported for turns greater than 120 degrees. PARALLEL TRACK -
Parallel track not supported for leg type. Nav angle is set to User. No action is necessary; message is informational only. The active waypoint is not referenced to the WGS84 datum. See Note 1 at the end of the table. OBS requires an active waypoint and is not supported in dead reckoning mode. Parallel track is not supported on approaches. Parallel track is not supported for turns greater than 120 degrees due to the acute angle. Parallel track is not supported on current leg type. No action is necessary; message is informational only. No action is necessary; message is informational only. No action is necessary; message is informational only. No action is necessary; message is informational only. No action is necessary; message is informational only. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM Action Verify the OBS MODE SEL key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the CDI SRC SEL key/switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the Push To Talk key/switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the COM RMT XFR key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Message REMOTE KEY STUCK -
Remote OBS key is stuck. REMOTE KEY STUCK -
Remote CDI key is stuck. REMOTE KEY STUCK -
Com push-to-talk key is stuck. REMOTE KEY STUCK -
Com remote transfer key is stuck. Description The remote OBS (OBS MODE SEL) key/switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. The remote CDI (CDI SRC SEL) key/switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. The Push To Talk key/
switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored and the com radio will no longer transmit. The remote com transfer (COM RMT XFR) key/switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 17-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM Action Verify the COM CHAN UP key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the COM CHAN DN key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the NAV RMT XFR key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Message REMOTE KEY STUCK -
Com remote frequency increment key is stuck. REMOTE KEY STUCK -
Com remote frequency decrement key is stuck. REMOTE KEY STUCK -
Nav remote transfer key is stuck. Description The remote com frequency increment
(COM CHAN UP) key/
switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. The remote com frequency decrement
(COM CHAN DN) key/
switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. The remote nav transfer
(NAV RMT XFR) key/
switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM Action Verify the RMT GO ARND key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the TAWS INHIBIT key/switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the ALRT ACK key/switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Verify the RP MODE key/switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Message REMOTE KEY STUCK -
Remote go around key is stuck. REMOTE KEY STUCK -
TAWS inhibit key is stuck. REMOTE KEY STUCK -
Alert Acknowledge key is stuck. REMOTE KEY STUCK -
RP Mode key is stuck. Description The remote go around
(RMT GO ARND) key/
switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. The TAWS INHIBIT discrete input has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. The remote TAWS alert acknowledge
(ALRT ACK) key/switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. The remote RP MODE key/switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 17-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM Message REMOTE KEY STUCK -
Pilot/Co-Pilot voice command push-
to-command key is stuck. SELECT FREQUENCY -
Select appropriate NAV frequency for approach. SET COURSE -
Set course on CDI/
HSI to [current DTK]. STEEP TURN -
Aircraft may overshoot course during turn. STORMSCOPE -
StormScope is inoperative or connection to GTN is lost. Description The remote push-to-
command key/switch has been in pressed position for at least 30 seconds. This input will now be ignored. This input is not available in all installations. Correct NAV frequency is not set in the active NAV frequency for the approach procedure. The selected course on the CDI/HSI does not match the current desired track. Flight plan contains an acute course change ahead which will require a bank in excess of normal to follow the guidance. If coupled to the autopilot, the autopilot may not be able to execute the steep turn needed to follow the course guidance. The GTN is congured for a WX-500 StormScope but is not receiving data from it. Action Verify the push-to-command key/
switch is not stuck. Contact dealer for service if this message persists. Insert the correct frequency into the active navigation frequency window. Set the CDI/HSI selected course to the current desired track. No action is necessary; message is informational only. If desired, slow the aircraft to shallow the turn. Close the Stormscope circuit breaker and ensure Stormscope is receiving power. Contact dealer for service. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-21 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 21 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM Message Description Action The WX-500 StormScope reports that it has an invalid heading source. The TAWS Audio Inhibit discrete input has been active for at least 30 seconds. This input is active in all installations. TAWS audio may be heard at the same time as other audio alerts. A user-congured timer has expired. The GTN is congured for a trafc device but is not receiving data from it. Trafc will not be displayed on the GTN. The GTN is airborne and the trafc device has been in standby for more than 60 seconds. The TCAD system has indicated that its battery is low. STORMSCOPE -
Invalid heading received from StormScope. TAWS AUDIO INHIBITED -
TAWS audio inhibit input is stuck. TIMER -
Timer has expired. TRAFFIC -
Trafc device is inoperative or connection to GTN is lost. TRAFFIC -
Trafc device has been in standby for more than 60 seconds. TRAFFIC -
Trafc device battery low. Trafc device user cong settings not saved. GTN StormScope data is correct and may be used. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. No action is necessary; message is informational only. Contact dealer for service. Set the trafc device to operate on the trafc page if trafc alerts are desired. Contact dealer for service. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 17-22 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 22 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM Message Description Action TRANSPONDER -
Transponder 1 and 2 Mode S addresses do not match. TRANSPONDER 1 OR 2 Transponder 1 or 2 needs service. TRANSPONDER 1 OR 2 Transponder 1 or 2 is inoperative or connection to GTN is lost. TRANSPONDER 1 OR 2 ADS-B is not transmitting position. TRUE NORTH APPROACH -
Verify NAV Angles are referenced to True North (T). The GTN is congured for two transponders and their Mode S addresses do not match. This message is intended to assist installers and will not occur in a properly congured system. The transponder is reporting to the GTN that it needs service. The transponder may continue to function. The GTN is congured for transponder 1 or 2 but is not able to communicate with the transponder. Contact dealer for service. Verify squawk code and altitude with ATC. Contact dealer for service. Verify squawk code and altitude with ATC. Contact dealer for service. The transponder has insufcient data to support ADS-B. Ensure the aircraft has a clear view of the sky. Contact dealer for service. Verify the Nav Angle is set to True North. A procedure is loaded that is referenced to true north and the active leg has a published true north reference. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-23 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 23 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM Message USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User waypoints were imported successfully. USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User waypoint import failed. USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User waypoint import failed. User waypoint database is full. USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User waypoints imported successfully -
existing waypoints reused. VCALC -
Approaching top of descent. VCALC -
Arriving at VCALC target altitude. Description All user waypoints were imported successfully. Action No action is necessary; message is informational only. User Waypoint import failed due to improper le format. Ensure the media has the correct le format. If the problem persists. Contact dealer for service. User Waypoint catalog is full and the requested user waypoints could not be imported. Edit the User Waypoint catalog to remove unneeded user waypoints. No action is necessary; message is informational only. No action is necessary; message is informational only. No action is necessary; message is informational only. User waypoints imported and existing waypoints are used instead of creating duplicate waypoints. User has congured a vertical descent calculation, and the aircraft is within 60 seconds of the calculated top of descent. User has congured a vertical descent calculation, and the aircraft is approaching the target altitude. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 17-24 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 24 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM Action Use GPS based navigation. Contact dealer for service. Use GPS based navigation. Contact dealer for service. No action is necessary; message is informational only. Check weather radar. See Section12.4.8.2 for more information. Contact dealer for service. Contact dealer for service. Description The nav radio is reporting that it needs service. The nav radio may continue to function. The nav radio is not communicating property with the system. User has congured the arrival alarm and is within the specied distance. The weather radar system is indicating the presence of severe weather ahead. The GTN is congured for a weather radar but is not receiving data from it. Weather Radar will not be displayed on the GTN. Weather radar is reporting a system fault. Message VLOC RECEIVER -
Navigation receiver needs service. VLOC RECEIVER -
Navigation receiver has failed. WAYPOINT -
Arriving at [wpt name]. WX ALERT -
Possible severe weather ahead. WX RADAR FAIL -
Weather radar is inoperative. WX RADAR SERVICE -
Weather radar needs service. Return unit for repair. Table 17-1 Messages Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 17-25 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 25 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM Note 1:
There are several reference datums that waypoints can be surveyed against. TSO-C146 normally requires that all waypoints be referenced to the WGS84 datum, but allows for navigation to waypoints that are not referenced to the WGS84 datum so long as the pilot is notied. Certain waypoints in the navigation database are not referenced to the WGS84 datum, or their reference datum is unknown. If this is the case, this message is displayed. Garmin cannot determine exactly how close the non-WGS84 referenced waypoint will be to the WGS84 datum that the GTN uses. Typically, the distance is within two nautical miles. The majority of non-WGS84 waypoints are located outside of the United States. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 17-26 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 26 7/9/2015 2:08:49 PM 18 SYMBOLS The following tables describe the symbols that are found on the Map display. 18.1 Map Page Symbols Symbol Description Unknown Airport Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport Towered, Non-serviced Airport Non-towered, Serviced Airport Towered, Serviced Airport Soft Surface, Serviced Airport Soft Surface, Non-serviced Airport Private Airport Heliport Intersection LOM (compass locator at outer marker) NDB (Non-directional Radio Beacon) VOR VOR/DME ILS/DME or DME-only VORTAC TACAN Table 18-1 Map Page Symbols Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 18-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:08:50 PM 18.2 SafeTaxi Symbols Symbol Description Helipad Airport Beacon Under Construction Zones Unpaved Parking Areas Table 18-2 SafeTaxi Symbols Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 18-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:08:50 PM 18.3 Trafc Symbols TIS Symbol Description Non-Threat Trafc Trafc Advisory (TA) Trafc Advisory Off Scale Table 18-3 TIS Symbols TAS Symbol Description Non-Threat Trafc
(intruder is beyond 5 NM and greater than 1200 ft vertical separation) Proximity Advisory (PA)
(intruder is within 5 NM and less than 1200 ft vertical separation) Trafc Advisory (TA)
(closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria) Trafc Advisory Off Scale Table 18-4 TAS Symbols Symbol Description Imminent Trafc Non-Imminent
(Trafc within 500 feet AND 1.0 NM; OR no altitude AND within 1.0 NM) Trafc Trafc Closing Vertically Trafc Diverging Vertically Trafc not Closing or Diverging Vertically Table 18-5 9900B TCAD Symbols Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 18-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:08:50 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Symbol Description Trafc Advisory Proximity Advisory
(color may be congured as cyan) Other Trafc
(color may be congured as cyan) Out-of-Range Trafc Advisory Symbol Table 18-6 9900BX (TCAS) Symbols Description Basic Non-Directional Trafc Basic Directional Trafc Basic Off-scale Selected Trafc Proximate Non-Directional Trafc Proximate Directional Trafc Proximate Off-scale Selected Trafc Non-Directional Alerted Trafc Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Trafc Directional Alerted Trafc Off-Scale Directional Alerted Trafc Non-Directional Surface Vehicle Directional Surface Vehicle Table 18-7 ADS-B Trafc Symbols NOTE: Color of basic and proximate trafc is dependent on conguration
(cyan or white) and airborne/on-ground status of target (target is brown when on the ground, see the surface vehicles). Index 18-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:08:51 PM 18.4 Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than 1000 ft AGL) Terrain Obstacle Symbols Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less than 1000 ft AGL) Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than 1000 ft AGL) Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than 1000 ft AGL) Table 18-8 Obstacle Altitude/Color Correlation Tower Windmill Windmill in Group Power Line Table 18-9 Obstacle Icon Types Projected Flight Path Threat Location 100 ft Threshold Unlighted Obstacle Terrain above or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude (Red) 1000 ft Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow) Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black) Figure 18-1 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation 18.5 HTAWS Obstacle Symbols Obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude (Red) 250 ft Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow) Obstacle is 250 ft, or more, below the aircraft altitude (White) Figure 18-2 HTAWS Obstacle Altitude Correlation Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 18-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:08:52 PM Terrain is more than 250 ft above the aircraft altitude (Red) Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft above the aircraft altitude
(Orange) 250 ft 250 ft 500 ft Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow) Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Green) Terrain more than 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black) Figure 18-3 HTAWS Altitude/Color Correlation 18.6 Basemap Symbols Symbol Description Interstate Highway State Highway US Highway National Highway - 2-digit drawn inside Small City or Town Medium City Large City Table 18-10 Basemap Symbols Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 18-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:08:52 PM 18.7 Map Tool Bar Symbols Symbol Description Terrain Proximity Enabled and Available Indicator Terrain Proximity Enabled and Not Available Indicator Point Obstacle Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later) Point Obstacle Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later) Wire Obstacles Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later) Wire Obstacles Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software version 5.12 and later) StormScope Ownship is receiving TIS-B and ADS-R services
(Software version 5.11 or earlier) Possible incomplete trafc picture ownship is not receiving one (or both) of the TIS-B or ADS-R services (Software version 5.11 or earlier) Trafc Enabled and Available Indicator Trafc Enabled and Not Available Indicator Table 18-11 Map Tool Bar Symbols 18.8 Miscellaneous Symbols Symbol Description Low-Wing Prop (Default Ownship) High-Wing Prop Kit Plane Turboprop Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 18-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:08:53 PM Symbol Description Twin-Engine Prop Single-Engine Jet Business Jet 2-Blade Rotorcraft 3-Blade Rotorcraft 4-Blade Rotorcraft Non-directional ownship is shown if there is no heading or ground track. This typically only occurs during start-up. In helicopters without a heading source, the non-directional ownship symbol will also appear below 15 kts. Parallel Track Waypoint Restricted/Prohibited/Warning/Alert TFR (Temporary Flight Restrictions) MOA Class B Airspace Class C Airspace Class D Airspace User Waypoint Table 18-12 Miscellaneous Symbols NOTE: Ownship icons are congured by the installer and can be colored magenta for enhanced visibility (Software version 5.12 or later). Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 18-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:08:53 PM 18.9 Stormscope Symbols Symbol Time Since Strike (Seconds) 6 60 120 180 Table 18-13 Stormscope Symbols Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 18-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:08:53 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index 18-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:08:53 PM 19 APPENDIX 19.1 ACT, ACTV ACT ADC ADF ADI AFM AFMS AGL AIM AIRMET ALT AP APR APT ARINC ARSPC ARTCC AS ASOS ATC ATCRBS ATIS AUX AWOS BARO BC Bearing BRG C C CDI CHNL Glossary active, activate Altitude Compensated Tilt Air Data Computer Automatic Direction Finder Attitude Direction Indicator Airplane Flight Manual Airplane Flight Manual Supplement Above Ground Level Airmans Information Manual Airmans Meteorological Information altitude autopilot approach airport, aerodrome Aeronautical Radio Incorporated airspace Air Route Trafc Control Center airspeed Automated Surface Observing System Air Trafc Control ATC Radar Beacon System Automatic Terminal Information Service auxiliary Automated Weather Observing System barometric setting backcourse The compass direction from the present position to a destination waypoint bearing center runway degrees Celsius Course Deviation Indicator channel Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 19-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:08:53 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages CLD CLR CNXT CONFIG Course Crosstrack Error CRS CRSR CTA CTAF CTRL CUM DALT DB, DBASE DCLTR, DECLTR deg DEP Desired Track (DTK) DEST DFLT DIS Distance DME DP DPRT DSBL DTK EDR EGNOS Symbols Appendix ELEV EMI ENR Index 19-2 cloud clear Connext conguration The line between two points to be followed by the aircraft The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either direction, left or right course cursor Control Area Common Trafc Advisory Frequency control The total of all legs in a ight plan density altitude database declutter degree departure The desired course between the active from and to waypoints destination default distance The great circle distance from the present position to a destination waypoint Distance Measuring Equipment Departure Procedure departure disabled Desired Track Excessive Descent Rate Provides SBAS service for most of Europe and parts of North Africa elevation Electromagnetic Interference en route Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:08:54 PM En Route Safe Altitude ERR ESA ETA ETE F FAA FCC FCST FD FIR FIS-B FISDL FLTA FPL FREQ FRZ FSS ft The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles left or right of the desired course on an active ight plan or direct-to error En route Safe Altitude Estimated Time of Arrival Estimated Time En Route degrees Fahrenheit Federal Aviation Administration Federal Communication Commission forecast ight director Flight Information Region Flight Information Services-Broadcast Flight Information Service Data Link Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance ight plan frequency freezing Flight Service Station foot/feet GCS GDC GDL GEO GLS GMA GMT GMU GPS GPSS Ground Speed Ground Track GRS GS G/S, GS Ground Clutter Suppression Garmin Air Data Computer Garmin Satellite Data Link geographic Global Navigation Satellite Landing System Garmin Audio Panel System Greenwich Mean Time Garmin Magnetometer Unit Global Positioning System GPS Roll Steering The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a ground position see Track Garmin Reference System Ground Speed glideslope Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 19-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:08:54 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix GTX Garmin Transponder HDG Heading HFOM Hg hPa HPL HSDB HSI HTAWS Hz IAF ICAO IFR IGRF ILI ILS IMC IOI INFO in HG INT INTEG ITI L LAT LCD LCL LED Leg LIFR LNAV LOC heading The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set directional gyro Horizontal Figure of Merit mercury hectopascal Horizontal Protection Level High-Speed Data Bus Horizontal Situation Indicator Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System Hertz Initial Approach Fix International Civil Aviation Organization Instrument Flight Rules International Geomagnetic Reference Field Imminent Line Impact Instrument Landing System Instrument Meteorological Conditions Imminent Obstacle Impact information inches of mercury intersection(s) integrity (RAIM unavailable) Imminent Terrain Impact left, left runway latitude Liquid Crystal Display local Light Emitting Diode The portion of a ight plan between two waypoints Low Instrument Flight Rules Lateral Navigation localizer Index 19-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:08:54 PM LOI LON LPV LRU LT LTNG MAG MAG VAR MapMX MAX MAXSPD MDA METAR MGRS MIN Minimum Safe Altitude MKR MOA MOT MOV mpm MSA MSAS MSG MSL MT mV MVFR NAV NAVAID NCR NDB NEXRAD loss of integrity (GPS) longitude Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance Line Replacement Unit left lightning Magnetic Magnetic Variation A proprietary data format used to forward navigation information between Garmin units maximum maximum speed (overspeed) barometric minimum descent altitude Aviation Routine Weather Report MIlitary Grid Reference System minimum Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within ten miles of the aircraft present position marker beacon Military Operations Area Mark On Target movement meters per minute Minimum Safe Altitude Provides SBAS service for Japan only message Mean Sea Level meter millivolt(s) Marginal Visual Flight Rules navigation NAVigation AID Negative Climb Rate Non-Directional Beacon Next Generation Radar Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 19-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:08:54 PM OAT OBS PA PC PDA P. POS PTK Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Outside Air Temperature Omni Bearing Selector Proximity Advisory personal computer Premature Descent Alert Present Position parallel track Direct-To QTY quantity Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix R RAIM RAM REF REQ REV RLC RMI RNG RNWY ROC RT RTC SAR SBAS SCIT SD SFC SIAP SID SIGMET SLP/SKD SMBL SPD SRVC, SVC right, right runway Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring random access memory reference required reverse, revision, revise Reduce Required Line Clearance Radio Magnetic Indicator range runway Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance right Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Search and Rescue Satellite-Based Augmentation System Storm Cell Identication and Tracking Secure Digital surface Standard Instrument Approach Procedures Standard Instrument Departure Signicant Meteorological Information slip/skid symbol speed service Index 19-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:08:54 PM STAR STATS STBY STD SUA SUSP SW SYS T TA TACAN TAF TAS TAS TAT TAWS TCA TCAS TEMP TERM TFR T HDG TIS TMA Topo Track TRK TRSA UNAVAIL USR UTC UTM/UPS V, Vspeed VAR Standard Terminal Arrival Route statistics standby standard Special Use Airspace suspend software system true Trafc Advisory Tactical Air Navigation System Terminal Aerodrome Forecast True Airspeed Trafc Advisory System Total Air Temperature Terrain Awareness and Warning System Terminal Control Area Trafc Collision Avoidance System temperature terminal Temporary Flight Restriction True Heading Trafc Information System Terminal Maneuvering Area topographic Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground position; also Ground Track track Terminal Radar Service Area unavailable user Coordinated Universal Time Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal Polar Stereographic Grid velocity (airspeed) variation Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 19-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:08:54 PM VFR VHF VLOC VMC VNAV, VNV VOR VORTAC VS VSI WAAS WGS-84 WPT WX XPDR XTK Visual Flight Rules Very High Frequency VOR/Localizer Receiver Visual Meteorological Conditions vertical navigation VHF Omni-directional Range very high frequency omnidirectional range station and tactical air navigation Vertical speed Vertical Speed Indicator Wide Area Augmentation System World Geodetic System - 1984 waypoint(s) weather transponder cross-track Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 19-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:08:54 PM 19.2 SD Card Use and Databases The GTN 7XX System uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic ight operations, SD cards are required for database storage as well as database updates. Database Name Navigation SafeTaxi Terrain Obstacle Function Airport, NAVAID, Waypoint, and Airspace information Airport surface diagrams Topographic map, Terrain/TAWS Obstacle information for map, and TAWS Basemap Boundary and road information FliteCharts ChartView FAA-published terminal procedures Jeppesen terminal procedures Where Stored Internal GTN memory Internal GTN memory SD card Internal GTN memory Internal GTN memory SD card SD card Update Cycle 28 days (on Thursdays) 56 days (on Thursdays) Provider Notes y.garmin.com Updates installed via SD card and copied into internal memory y.garmin.com Updates installed via SD card and copied into internal memory As required y.garmin.com 56 days (on Thursdays) As required 28 days (on Thursdays) 14 days (on Fridays) y.garmin.com Updates installed via SD card and copied into internal memory y.garmin.com Updates installed via SD card and copied into internal memory y.garmin.com Disables 180 days Contact Jeppesen after expiration date. Optional feature that requires Garmin dealer enablement. Disables 70 days after expiration date. Table 19-1 Database List More information about databases and updates can be found at:
https://y.garmin.com/y-garmin/support. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 19-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:08:54 PM 19.2.1 Jeppesen Databases The navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. Navigation database updates are provided by Garmin and may be downloaded from the Garmin web site y.garmin.com onto a Garmin provided Supplemental Data card. Contact Garmin at y.garmin.com for navigation database updates and update kits. The Navigation database is stored internally and the data card is only used to transfer the database into the unit. The optional ChartView database is updated on a 14 day cycle. The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen. com) for ChartView subscription and update information. An enablement card that is purchased from Garmin is separate from the Jeppesen database and is required to enable ChartView. NOTE: Garmin requests that the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information. These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure, incorrectly identied terrain, obstacles and xes, or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go to FlyGarmin.com and at the bottom of the page select Aviation Data Error Report. Updating the Jeppesen navigation database 1. With the GTN 7XX System OFF, insert the SD card containing the navigation database update into the card slot of the GTN 7XX to be updated (label of SD card should face to the right). 2. Turn the GTN 7XX System ON. 3. Verify the correct update cycle is loaded during power-up. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 19-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:08:54 PM 19.2.2 Garmin Databases NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data. The Supplemental Data Card should not be removed except to update the Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl databases stored on the card. The data cards cannot be moved between units. Com/Nav SD Card Figure 19-1 SD Card Database Location The Garmin databases can be updated by following the instructions on y. garmin.com. Once the updated les have been downloaded from the web site, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards. The following equipment is required to perform the update:
Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000, XP, Vista, or Windows 7 recommended) SanDisk SD Card Reader, P/Ns SDDR-93 or SDDR-99 or equivalent card reader Updated database obtained from the Garmin web site Existing Garmin Supplemental Database SD Card It may be necessary to have the system congured by a Garmin authorized FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 19-11 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:08:55 PM service facility in order to use certain database features. Common Problems/Troubleshooting Tips for Databases SD Cards
- The supplied SD cards, and most commercially available SD cards, have a small sliding tab located on the top left of the card (when viewing the card label-side up).
- When the sliding tab is in the Down position (as in farther away from the gold contacts on the back of the card), you will not be able to write data to the card, as it will be write protected.
- The tab must be in the Up position to work correctly. Card Programmer
- If a card programmer is having trouble nding or writing data to the SD cards, you may have to upgrade to a High Capacity SD card programmer.
- SD cards with a capacity of 4GB are considered high capacity.
- Most non-high capacity card programmers will not work with a high capacity SD card. High capacity card programmers can be easily purchased at a consumer electronics store.
- Ensure that your card programmer is not plugged into a USB hub, your computer screen, or your keyboard.
- Make sure it is plugged directly into your computer (the back of the computer, if using a desktop computer). If you accidentally place a le onto the wrong card, call Garmins Aviation Product Support team to look at the les and delete the proper les.
- Do not format the cards Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 19-12 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:08:55 PM Insert Navigation Database SD card in the slot of the GTN 7XX. Updating Garmin Databases 1. Download the data to the data cards from the appropriate web site. 2. 3. Apply power to the GTN 7XX System. View the power-up splash screen. Check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the splash screen. Some databases can take up to 15 minutes to update. 4. The database update page will prompt to either Update or Continue. Touch the Update key to update the database(s). Touch the Continue key to continue to normal operation without updating a database. This process will repeat for each database that is available on the card for updating. 5. After the database(s) have completed the update process, touch OK to continue the normal progression of start-up displays. 6. From the Home page, touch the System key. Then, touch the System Status key. 7. Check that all databases are current and there are no errors. If a database is highlighted in yellow, it is either expired or the GTN 7XX can not determine the date. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 19-13 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 13 7/9/2015 2:08:55 PM 19.3 Demo Mode The GTN product contains a Demo mode that allows simulation of all operations of the product to allow practice and familiarization while staying on the ground. WARNING: Do not use the GTN to navigate while Demo mode is active. Do not use or enter Demo mode while airborne. 1. Press in and hold the Direct-To key and then apply power to the unit. Touch To Continue Figure 19-2 Demo Mode Start Up Display 2. Touch the Continue key and Fuel keys as normally needed to start operations. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 19-14 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 14 7/9/2015 2:08:55 PM 3. Touch the Demo key in the lower part of the display to reach the Demo Setup functions. Touch For GPS Settings Touch For NAV Settings Touch For Date And Time Settings Figure 19-3 Demo Mode Setup 4. Touch the GPS key to reach the Demo GPS Settings page. The Position Error values (Horizontal Protection Level Fault Detection [HPL FD], HPL SBAS, and Vertical Protection Level
[VPL] SBAS) may be adjusted to reect errors induced by naturally occurring conditions, but are normally not adjusted for most Demo mode operations. Touch To Select GPS Solution Touch To Select Lat/
Lon Coordinates For Current Position Touch To Select HPL FD Values, If Desired Touch For HPL SBAS Settings Touch To Select Current Position From A Wpt In The Database Touch For VPL SBAS Settings Figure 19-4 Demo Mode GPS Settings Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 19-15 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 15 7/9/2015 2:08:55 PM 5. Touch the Nav key to reach the Demo Navigation Settings page. Touch To Select Vertical Speed Touch To Select Airspeed Touch To Select Track Mode Touch To Select Altitude Figure 19-5 Demo Mode Navigation Settings 6. Touch the Date/Time key to reach the Demo Date/Time Settings page. Touch To Set Date Touch To Set Time Figure 19-6 Demo Mode Date/Time Settings 7. After completing the settings for Demo mode, touch the HOME key or Back key to get started with operating the GTN. Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 19-16 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 16 7/9/2015 2:08:56 PM 19.4 Glove Qualication Procedure This procedure is used to qualify a specic glove for use with the GTN system by guiding the user through a variety of tasks that use the touchscreen. Due to differences in nger size, glove size, and touchscreens between the 6XX or 7XX unit, the qualication granted by this procedure is specic to the pilot/glove and 6XX or 7XX combination. GTN 7XX and 6XX units must be evaluated separately. The GTN touchscreen uses capacitive touch technology to sense the proximity of skin to the display. A glove increases the distance between skin and the display glass and may reduce the ability of the GTN to detect touches. Therefore, when selecting a glove for use with the GTN, thinner gloves tend to work better than thicker gloves. Leather gloves and gloves designed to work specically with capacitive touchscreen devices are often found to be acceptable. Additionally, altering your touch technique to use the pad of your nger to touch the unit rather than the tip will increase the touchscreen sensitivity while using gloves. This qualication must be completed on the ground. Performing this procedure in ight is not authorized. Table 19-1 contains tasks that are required to qualify a glove. Table 19-2 contains tasks that are not required to qualify a glove, but may limit the manner in which some functions are accessed while a glove is worn. 1. Sit in the pilots seat. 2. Start the GTN in Demo mode by pressing and holding the Direct To key during power up. 3. Perform the tasks listed in Table 19-1 and Table 19-2 with an non-gloved hand. You do not need to record any results for this step. 4. Perform the tasks listed in Table 19-1 and Table 19-2 with a gloved hand. For each task, determine whether the operation is the same or worse as it was without the glove. Record the results in Table 19-1 and Table 19-2. Items that may cause the operation to be worse include, but are not limited to:
5. a. Multiple attempts to select a key b. Unintentional selection of adjacent keys c. Excessive force on the touchscreen to select a key If all applicable tasks in Table 19-1 respond in the same way with and without a glove then the glove used to complete these tasks may be used by the pilot Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 19-17 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 17 7/9/2015 2:08:56 PM who performed this evaluation on the unit (6XX or 7XX) that was used during this procedure. Pilot: _______________________________________ Glove Description: ______________________________ GTN (circle one): 6XX or 7XX Task Operation With Glove Navigate to the Home Screen. Touch the Demo key. Touch the GPS key. Touch the Waypoint key. Type KSLE using the touchscreen, then touch Enter. Navigate to the Home Screen (Press HOME). Touch the Flight Plan key. Enter the following waypoints using the Add Waypoint key at the bottom of the list of ight plan waypoints:
KSLE KMMV KONP BTG Select BTG, then touch the Load Airway key to load the following airway: V23 ALFOR. While viewing the ight plan page, touch the Up/
Down arrow keys to scroll up and down to view the ight plan waypoints. Touch the Back key to return to the Home screen. Touch the COM standby frequency to activate the com frequency entry keypad (Task applicable to 635/650/750 only). Enter a valid com frequency and touch the Enter key
(635/650/750 only).
(circle one) NA Same Same Same Same Same Same Worse Worse Worse Worse Worse Worse NA Same Same Same Same Worse Worse Worse Worse Same Worse Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Index 19-18 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 18 7/9/2015 2:08:56 PM Task Operation With Glove
(circle one) Touch the active com frequency to ip/op the com frequencies. (635/650/750 only). Touch the active nav frequency to ip/op the nav frequencies (750 only). Touch the Menu key (650 only). Same Table 19-2 Tests Required for Glove Qualication Same Same Worse Worse Worse Task Operation With Glove Navigate to the ight plan page. While viewing the ight plan page, touch the list and drag up/down to view the ight plan waypoints. While viewing the ight plan page, touch and ick the list to view the ight plan waypoints. Navigate to the map page. Touch the Map to enter Pan mode, then touch the Graphically Edit FPL key. Remove KONP from the ight plan graphically by touching KONP and dragging it to an area without any waypoints (Pan and zoom in/out as necessary to accomplish the task). Insert KSPB between KMMV and BTG by dragging the leg between KMMV and BTG to KSPB.
(circle one) NA Same Same Same Same Worse Worse Worse Worse NA Same Worse Table 19-3 Tests Not Required for Glove Qualication Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 19-19 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 19 7/9/2015 2:08:56 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index 19-20 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 20 7/9/2015 2:08:56 PM INDEX Symbols 3D Audio 2-11 3D navigation 16-16 A Abbreviations 8-14 About this guide xxvii Above Ground Level 11-11 Acquiring satellites 16-14, 16-16 ACT 12-54 Activate ight plan 4-33 Activate leg 4-6 Activating XM 14-3 Active ight plan page 4-4 Active leg 4-6, 6-15, 6-17, 6-23 Add User frequency 3-11 ADF 19-1 ADIZ 9-33 ADS-B 2-5, 10-18 Age 12-6, 12-62 Aircraft symbol 9-1 AIREP 12-28 AIRMETs 12-7, 12-17, 12-62, 12-70, 12-
73, 12-86 Airport beacon 18-2 Airport diagram 7-16, 16-5 Airport frequencies 8-8 Airports 12-82 Airspace 13-10 Airspace altitude buffer 16-33 Airways 4-12, 9-5, 9-33 Alerts 1-13, 10-9, 11-5, 11-15, 11-16, 11-18, 11-22, 16-32, 11-51 ALT 15-28 Altimeter ii, 11-10 Altitude 6-15, 11-5, 16-13, 16-15 Altitude buffer 16-32 Altitude Display Mode 10-6, 10-15 Altitude mode 10-27 Altitude reporting 2-3 Altitude type 15-5 Angle of incidence 12-37 Annunciations 1-6, 1-21, 6-2, 10-10, 10-11, 10-16, 10-17, 11-9, 11-15, 11-22, 11-62 Anonymous mode 2-5 Answering a phone call 14-14 Antenna 12-75 Antenna stabilization 12-54 Antenna tilt 12-34, 12-35, 12-39, 12-48, 12-52, 12-53 Approach Channel 6-12 Approaches 7-2, 7-16, 19-1, 11-19, 11-52 Select 1-20 Approach operations 6-2 Approach shield 10-33 Approach with hold 6-15 Arc 11-7, 11-13, 11-14 Arrivals 7-16 ARTCC 13-1, 13-13 ASOS 13-17 ATCRBS 10-7 ATIS 13-17 Attitude 19-1 Audio panel 2-8 Audio split mode 2-15 Aural message 11-11, 11-15, 11-17, 11-
20, 11-22, 11-58 Automatic CDI switching 6-24 Autopilot 6-14, 6-19, 6-23, 6-24, 6-25 Auto-pilot output 6-25 Auto squelch 2-20 Auto zoom 9-16 AUX - System Status Page 16-3 Aviation map data 9-23 AWOS 13-17 B Backcourse 6-24 Backlighting 16-45 Baro-corrected altitude 6-1, 11-10 Barometric pressure 15-28 Basemap 16-5 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide Index-1 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 1 7/9/2015 2:08:56 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Basemap symbols 18-6 Basic approach operation 6-2 Beacon 18-1, 18-2 Blind Alley 12-42 Bluetooth 16-46 C Calibrated gain 12-50 Call suppression 14-15 Catalog 4-2 Category 14-5 Cautions iii, 9-33, 11-11, 11-16, 11-42, 11-43, 12-44, 12-46, 11-12 CDI 9-42 Ceiling 13-12 Cell movement 12-7, 12-16 Channel 14-2, 14-5, 14-8 Channel spacing 1-12 Chart airport info 7-9 Chart airport selection 7-4 Chart Color Scheme 9-23 Chart detail Approaches 7-6 Arrivals 7-8 Departures 7-7 Information 7-5 Chart full-split screen 7-10 Chart info 4-1, 6-1, 7-5 Chart invert colors 7-14 Chart layers 7-12 All 7-12 Header 7-12 Minimums 7-13 Plan 7-12 Prole 7-13 Charts 7-1, 7-16, 9-9 ChartView 1-4, 7-1, 8-10, 16-5, 19-10 ChartView database 1-4, 7-15, 16-5, 19-10 ChartView subscription 7-15, 16-5, 19-10 Checklists 15-36 Circle of uncertainty 16-18 City 9-33, 12-7, 12-37 City forecast 12-7, 12-23 Class B airspace 18-8, 9-33 Class C airspace 18-8, 9-33 Class D airspace 18-8, 9-33 Clean screen 15-33 Clearance recorder 2-16 Cloud tops 12-7, 12-15 Cloudy 12-8 Com 1-17, 3-1 Channel spacing 1-12, 16-25 Frequency monitoring 3-15 Tuning 3-3 Window 3-3 Combined NEXRAD 12-78 Connext 4-39, 16-46 Connext weather 12-55 Contacts 14-21 Continental US NEXRAD 12-77 Controlled airspace 9-44, 13-10 Controls 1-4 CONUS 12-77 Conventions xxviii, 1-2 Copy ight plan 4-35 County warnings 12-7, 12-18 Creating a ight plan 1-19, 4-2 Creating user waypoints 8-16, 9-37 Crossll 1-12, 1-15, 16-28 CTAF 8-8 Customer service i, 12-61, 14-3 Customizing maps 9-14 Cycle number 1-6, 7-16, 7-19 Cyclone 12-7, 12-21 D Database 1-4, 1-6, 3-5, 3-18, 7-16, 7-19, 11-1, 11-5, 11-22, 12-66, 16-3, 16-4, 19-9, 19-11 Database SYNC 16-4, 16-7, 16-11 Database verication 1-7 Data card 1-4 Data link 10-3, 12-62 Data Link Receiver troubleshooting 14-9 Data request 12-58 Data user eld 16-41 Date 7-15, 7-16, 7-19, 15-11, 15-12, Index Index-2 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 2 7/9/2015 2:08:57 PM 16-4, 16-24 Date/Time 19-16 DCLTR soft key 9-32 Dead reckoning 1-21 Declutter 9-27 Delete ight plan 4-36, 4-37 Demo mode 19-14 Density altitude 15-28 Departures 6-3, 7-16, 11-19, 11-52 Departure time 15-10 Destination proximity 16-33 Direct-To 1-5, 1-16, 5-1 Direct-To Fpl Wpt 5-3 Direct-To Nrst Airport 5-4 Distance 9-16 DME 18-1 DME Arc 6-16 Don't sink 11-17, 11-20, 11-58 DP 7-16 Dual installation 1-15 E Echo tops 12-7, 12-14 Edit ight plan 4-34, 9-38 Edit FPL data elds 4-30 EGNOS 16-17 Emergency frequency 3-13 Enablement card 7-2, 7-15, 19-10 ENR 6-3 EPU 16-14, 16-16 European airways 9-27 Excessive Closure Rate 11-54 Excessive descent rate alert 11-17, 11-18, 11-51 Expiration time 12-62 Exposure level 12-38 Extended squitter 2-7 External LRU 16-19 F Facility name 13-13, 13-15, 13-17 Failed text message 14-18 FastFind 1-22 FDE 16-16 Field elevation 10-29 Find Com frequency 3-5 FIR 13-1 FIS-B 12-71 Five-hundred aural alert 11-17 Flap Override 11-57 Flight ID 2-5 Flight Into Terrain 11-56 Flight phase 11-19, 11-52 Flight plan 1-19, 4-1, 9-16, 15-19, 15-26 Flight plan frequency 3-9 Flight plan import 4-43, 16-46 Flight plan menu 4-25 Flight Stream 4-39, 16-46 Flight timers 15-10 FliteCharts 7-16, 16-5 FliteCharts database 7-16 Flood 12-8 y.garmin 11-2, 12-56, 16-5, 16-6, 19-9, 19-10, 19-11 Fog 12-8, 12-36 Forward looking terrain avoidance 11-18, 11-33, 11-52 Freezing level 12-7, 12-19, 12-48 Frequency Flight plan 3-9 Monitoring 3-15 Nearest 3-6 New user 3-11 Recent 3-6 Frequency nding 3-5, 3-18 FSS 13-1, 13-15 Fuel planning 15-22 Fuel settings 1-7, 16-34 Function user eld 16-42 G GBT 12-64, 12-71 GDC 74A ii GDL 69/69A 14-2, 14-3, 14-9, 16-19 GDL 69/69A status 16-19 GDL 69 troubleshooting 14-9 GDL 88 2-5, 16-21 Geo-reference 7-14 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide Index-3 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 3 7/9/2015 2:08:57 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix Getting started 1-1 Glideslope 3-16 Glossary 19-1 GMT 16-24 GPS 19-15 GPS altitude ii, 11-5, 11-10 GPS status 16-13 Graphically editing ight plan 4-39, 5-8, 9-38 Graphical Weather 12-71 Ground 2-3 Ground Clutter Suppression 12-54 Ground return 12-37, 12-39, 12-53 Ground speed 11-22, 11-62 GSL 11-5, 11-10 GSR 56 12-55, 14-1, 14-11, 14-20, 16-22 GTN 725 1-1 GTN 750 1-2 GWX Radar 12-44 H Hail 12-11, 12-36, 12-41, 12-43 Haze 12-8 HDOP 16-14 Heading 10-5, 10-14, 11-13 Helipad 8-10, 18-2 Heliport 18-1 HFOM 16-14, 16-16 Hold 6-15 Home page 1-5 Horizontal scan 12-33, 12-51, 12-52 Hot spots 7-17, 7-18 HSI 9-42 HSI annunciation 6-19 HTAWS 11-23, 18-5, 18-6 Hurricanes 12-75 I Icing 12-26, 12-70 Ident 2-2, 3-16 IFR 1-20, 12-20, 12-67, 12-70, 12-82 ILS 18-1 ILS Approach 2-13, 6-18 ILS CDI Selection 6-24 Imminent Line Impact 11-18, 11-52 Imminent obstacle impact 11-18, 11-47, 11-48, 11-52 Imminent terrain impact 11-18, 11-52 Import user waypoints 8-21 Infra-Red 12-66 Insert after 4-9 Insert before 4-7 Intercom 2-17 Intersection 8-11, 13-4, 9-23, 18-1, 9-33 Invert colors 7-14 Invert ight plan 4-26, 4-33 Iridium 12-55, 14-1, 14-11, 14-19 J Jeppesen 19-10 Jeppesen database 19-10 K King autopilot 6-25 Knobs 1-2, 1-5 L Land data 9-5, 9-25 Legend 12-4, 12-69 Level 11-16, 11-19, 12-41, 11-52 Lighting 16-45 Lightning 9-33, 12-7, 12-22, 12-65, 12-66 Limitations 10-7, 11-9, 12-11, 12-75 LNAV 6-3, 6-19 LNAV+V 6-3, 6-19 LNAV/VNAV Approach 6-3 Load procedures in FPL 4-10 Localizer 3-16, 6-24 Local offset 16-24 Lock activation 16-20 Locking screw 1-3 Low alt 6-3 LP approach 6-3, 6-19 LP +V 6-3, 6-19, 6-21 LPV Approach 6-3, 6-19 L/VNAV 6-19 Index Index-4 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 4 7/9/2015 2:08:57 PM M Magnetic variation 16-34, 16-35 Making a phone call 14-12 Manual mag var 16-35 Map 9-1 Symbols 9-44 Map controls 9-37 Map Detail 9-32 Map menu 9-3 Map orientation 9-16, 12-60 Map overlay 9-4 Map panning 9-34 MAPR 6-3 Map range 7-17, 9-16, 10-15, 11-13 Map setup 9-13 Map symbols 18-1, 18-6 Map toolbar symbols 18-7 Marker beacon 2-13 Marker Hi Sense 2-14 Mark on target 8-17 Mean Sea Level 11-5 Message 11-17, 11-22, 17-1 METARs 12-7, 12-20, 12-62, 12-66, 12-
73, 12-82 MGRS 16-38 Mic selection 2-10 Military grid reference system 16-38 Minimum runway length 1-12 Miscellaneous symbols 18-7 Missed Approach 6-14 MOA 9-33, 18-8 Model descriptions 1-1 Monitor 2-11 Monitoring frequency 3-15 Morse code 3-17 Motion vector 10-20, 10-21, 10-27 Mountains 12-75 Moving map 1-3 MPEL 12-38 MSAS 16-17 MSL 11-10 Music 2-22, 14-1, 14-4 Mute 14-7 N NACO 7-16 National Weather Service 12-9, 12-70 Nav angle 16-34, 16-35 Navigation database 16-5, 19-10 Navigation map 7-17 Navigation source iii Nav Radio 1-17 Nav range ring 9-18 NDB 8-13, 13-8, 9-23, 18-1, 9-33 Nearest airport 1-12, 1-16, 13-2, 16-26 Nearest airspace 13-10 Nearest ARTCC 13-13 Nearest frequency 3-6 Nearest FSS 13-15 Nearest intersection 13-4 Nearest NDB 13-8 Nearest User Wpt 13-9 Nearest VOR 13-6 Nearest waypoint 13-1 Nearest weather 13-17 Negative climb rate 11-17, 11-20, 11-58 NEXRAD 9-8, 12-7, 12-9, 12-76 Limitations 12-11 NEXRAD Canada 12-12 Next airspace 9-35 Non-directional ownship 18-8 North up 9-16, 12-1 NOTAM 8-10 O OBS 9-43, 19-6 Obstacle data 11-5, 11-10, 11-22, 16-4, 19-11 Obstacles 9-5, 9-20, 9-25, 10-9, 11-1, 11-5, 11-8, 11-9, 11-10, 11-11, 18-5 Obstructions 11-8, 11-9 OCN 6-3 On scene mode 10-25 Operating distance 12-38 Overview 1-3 Ownship 18-7 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide Index-5 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 5 7/9/2015 2:08:57 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix P Page menus 9-14, 9-23, 9-27, 9-28 Page user eld 16-42 Pairing 16-47, 16-48 Panning 9-34 Parallel track 4-27, 18-8 Parking area 18-2 Part Sun 12-8 Passenger address 2-11 Phone call 14-12 Phone volume 14-16 Photocell 16-45 Pilot controls 1-4 PIREP 12-28, 12-68, 12-83 Point obstacle 9-20 Point-to-Point 15-14, 15-23 Position format 16-38 Position reporting 14-19 Position reporting status 14-20 Power 12-76 Power line 9-22 Power-up 7-15, 7-16, 7-19, 10-10, 11-1, 19-10, 11-11, 11-22, 19-13, 11-62 Precipitation 12-11, 12-33, 12-35, 12-36, 12-45, 12-47, 12-52, 12-53, 12-
64, 12-66 Precipitation intensity levels 12-41, 12-50 Premature descent alerting 11-19, 11-52 Preset 14-8 Preview ight plan 4-34, 4-38 Procedures 1-20, 6-1 Procedure turn 6-14 Product age 12-6, 12-62 Product description 1-3 Product Support vii Proximity advisory 10-5 R Radar 9-12, 10-7, 10-9, 12-9, 12-11, 12-
33, 12-44, 12-64, 12-71, 12-75, 12-76 Radar gain 12-50 RAIM 15-11 Rain 12-64 Rainy 12-8 Range ring 9-18, 10-5, 10-15, 10-18, 10-
22, 10-27, 10-31, 10-35, 11-13, 12-53 Recent frequency 3-6 Record of Revisions vii Reduced protection 11-28 Reduced required obstacle clearance 11-
18, 11-52 Reduced required terrain clearance 11-18, 11-52 Reectivity 12-9, 12-10, 12-11, 12-36, 12-43, 12-76 Regional NEXRAD 12-78 Register with GFDS 12-61 Registration vii Remote frequency control 1-18, 3-14 Remove FPL waypoint 4-9 Reverse frequency look-up 3-14, 16-25 Revisions vii RLC 11-18, 11-52 RNAV 6-19 ROC 11-47, 11-48 Roll steering 6-14, 6-23 Rotorcraft trafc page orientation 10-25 Route options 4-32 Runway 16-26 Runway extension 9-23 Runway length 1-12, 16-27 Runways 8-7 Runway surface 1-12, 16-27 Ryan TCAD 10-26 S SafeTaxi 7-17, 7-19, 9-16, 9-23, 16-5, 18-2 SafeTaxi symbols 18-2 Satellite telephone 14-11 SBAS 16-17 Scale 9-19, 10-13, 18-3 Scheduled messages 15-34 Search and Rescue (SAR) 4-5, 4-18 Sector scan 12-33, 12-51 Index Index-6 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 6 7/9/2015 2:08:57 PM Secure Digital (SD) card 1-3, 1-4, 19-9 Select approach 6-10 Select arrival 6-7 Select departure 6-4 Selected Altitude 12-69 Self-test 1-7 Sensor data 15-14, 15-22 Serial numbers 14-9, 16-4 Service Class 14-3 Services 12-71, 14-1 Setup 16-23 Shield setup 10-33 SIDs 1-20 SIGMET 12-7, 12-17, 12-62, 12-70, 12-
73, 12-86 Smart Airspace 9-26 SMS 14-16 Snow 12-8, 12-11, 12-36 Software version 14-9, 16-3 Sort alpha 4-13 Special Use Airspace 13-1 Speed 11-19, 11-52 Squawk code 2-4 Squelch 1-4, 2-20, 3-2 Standby 2-2 Standby database 16-4, 16-7, 16-11 STAR 6-7, 7-16 STARs 1-20 Start-up 1-6 Status 14-20, 16-13, 16-19 Store ight plan 4-26 Storm cell 12-47 Stormscope 9-11, 12-29, 18-9 Stuck microphone 3-14 Sunny 12-8 Sunrise/Sunset 15-12 Support vii Suppress Visuals 14-15 Surface analysis 12-23 Surface winds 12-70 Symbols 9-44, 10-4, 10-13, 12-6, 11-16, 18-1, 12-8, 18-3, 11-42 System ID 16-4 System power 1-6 System setup values 1-11, 1-12 System status 10-10, 10-16, 16-3, 11-22, 16-3, 11-62 T TACAN 18-1 TAF 12-66 Target altitude 15-5 Target offset 15-7 Target waypoint 15-7, 15-8 TAS 10-3, 10-12, 10-13, 15-28 TAWS-A 11-1, 11-40 TAWS-A alerts 11-44, 11-46 TAWS-B 11-1, 11-9, 11-40 TAWS-B alerts 11-10, 11-16 TAWS failure alert 11-22 TAWS system test 11-11, 11-22, 11-62 TCAD 10-26 TCAD 9900B 10-31 TCAD 9900BX 10-26, 10-35 TCAS 10-4 Telephone 2-23 Telligence 2-25 Temperature 12-8, 16-34 Temporary 8-17 TERM 6-3 Terrain 1-4, 9-5, 9-25, 10-9, 11-1, 18-5, 11-9, 12-37, 11-47, 11-48, 11-49, 11-47, 11-47 Terrain alerts 11-1, 11-20, 11-58 Terrain Awareness and Warning System 11-40 Terrain data 9-7, 11-8, 11-9, 16-4 Terrain limitations 11-8 Terrain obstacle symbols 18-5, 11-12, 11-43 Terrain proximity ii, 11-5, 18-7 Text 12-71 Text messaging 14-17 TFR 9-23, 12-81, 18-8 Thunderstorm 12-75 Thunderstorms 12-8, 12-36, 12-40, 12-
41, 12-43 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Time 12-7, 12-62, 12-73, 16-15, 16-17, Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide Index-7 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 7 7/9/2015 2:08:58 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts 16-24 Time format 1-12 Time until transmit 14-20 TIS 10-3, 10-4, 10-7, 10-9 Topo data 9-5 Topo scale 9-19 Tornadoes 12-8, 12-43 Tornados 12-75 Touchscreen 1-2, 1-6 Track vector 10-8 Trafc 9-12, 10-1 Trafc Advisory 9-27, 10-3, 10-4 Trafc audio 10-29, 10-32 Trafc Pop-Up 10-1 Trafc symbols 10-4, 10-13, 10-19, 18-3 Trafc test 10-2 Transponder 2-1, 10-3, 10-7, 10-9, 10-10, 10-13 Wpt Info Trip planning 15-12 Trip planning - point-to-point 15-12, 15-
Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 13, 15-14, 15-17 Troubleshooting 17-1, 19-12 Turbulence 12-27, 12-33, 12-36, 12-41, 12-70 Turbulence Detection 12-54 U Under construction 18-2 Units 1-13, 16-34 Universal Transverse Mercator 16-38 User-dened hold 4-16, 5-8 User elds 9-29, 16-40 User frequency 3-11 User waypoint 8-14, 8-16, 9-37, 13-9 UTC 1-12, 16-24 Utilities 15-1 UTM 16-38 V VCALC 15-3, 15-4 Vector Duration 10-24 Vector motion 10-21 Vector-To-Final 6-17 Version 1-6, 7-19, 11-1, 11-11 Vertical Calculator 15-3 Vertical scan 12-33, 12-41, 12-42, 12-47 Vertical speed 15-6 VFOM 16-14, 16-16 VFR 2-3, 12-20, 12-67, 12-82 View catalog 4-32 VNV 19-8 Voice alert 10-9 Voice call out 11-17, 11-22, 11-34, 11-
35, 11-42, 11-49, 11-61, 16-43 Voice command 2-25, 16-50 Voice recognition 2-25 Volume 1-4, 3-2, 14-2, 14-7 VOR 3-16, 8-12, 11-13, 9-23, 13-6, 18-1, 13-6, 9-33 VOR-based approach 6-24 VORTAC 18-1 W WAAS 16-17 Warnings ii Warranty i WATCH 12-35, 12-52 Waypoint information 4-11, 8-1 Waypoint options 4-5 Weather 8-9, 9-28, 12-1, 12-55 Weather alert 12-53 Weather forecast 12-23 Weather legend 12-4 Weather mapping 12-40 Weather product 12-62, 14-3 Weather radar 9-12, 12-44 Wind 9-1, 12-7, 12-8, 12-62, 12-66, 12-
69, 12-70, 12-73 Winds 15-28 Winds aloft 12-7, 12-25, 12-62, 12-69, 12-73, 12-85 Winds aloft altitude 12-69 Wire obstacle 9-22 WX-500 9-11, 12-29 X XM 14-2 XM channel categories 14-5 Index Index-8 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 8 7/9/2015 2:08:58 PM XM radio activation 14-3 XM radio channel presets 14-8 XM radio channels 14-6 XM radio volume 14-7 XM Satellite Radio 14-2 XM troubleshooting 14-9 XM weather 12-2 Z Zulu 16-24 Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix 190-01007-03 Rev. J Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide Index-9 Index 190-01007-03-Final.indb 9 7/9/2015 2:08:58 PM Foreword Getting Started Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl Com/Nav FPL Direct-To Proc Charts Wpt Info Map Trafc Terrain Weather Nearest Services/
Music Utilities System Messages Symbols Appendix This page intentionally left blank Index Index-10 Garmin GTN 725/750 Pilots Guide 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 10 7/9/2015 2:08:58 PM 190-01007-03-Final.indb 11 7/9/2015 2:08:58 PM 2015 Garmin Corporation Garmin International, Inc. 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A. Tel. 913/397.8200 or 866/739.5687 Fax 913/397.8282 Garmin AT, Inc. 2345 Turner Rd., S.E., Salem, Oregon 97302, U.S.A. Tel. 503/581.8101 or 800/525.6726 Fax. 503/364.2138 Garmin (Europe) Ltd. Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9LR, U.K. Tel. +44 (0) 87 0850 1243 Fax +44 (0) 23 8052 4004 Garmin Singapore Pte. Ltd. 46 East Coast Road
#05-06 Eastgate Singapore 428766 Tel. (65) 63480378 Fax (65) 63480278 www.garmin.com Part Number 190-01007-03 Rev. J 190-01007-03-Final.indb 12 7/9/2015 2:08:58 PM
1 2 | Label | ID Label/Location Info | 412.42 KiB |
GMA 35c p/n 011-02299-40 eT ee) RUSLAN GMN-00831 UTE RMAC k oe eo) TSO-C139 FCC: IPH-0163700 IC: 1792A-0163700 SUS Wel Ul colg LeRoi]
Additional Appliance Approvals Assembled in the USA 14/28 Vdc
(| eooeo50e [
. Place Label Here ececsoe |
@e e oe.
<7 Gro tuse ssn ol ete rete) following two conditions: (1) This device ee cee) Lert tare) Re red pares nnnehcornnr GMA 350c p/n 011-02385-40 Garmin, Olathe, KS USA GMN-00871 MOD LEVEL@ @OOOOOOO aloneak ie FCC: IPH-0163700 IC: 1792A-0163700 See Installation Manual for IC M/N: GMN-00871 Additional Appliance Approvals Assembled in the USA 14/28 Vdc Gro tuse ssn ol ete rete) following two conditions: (1) This device ee cee) Lert tare) Re red pares nnnehcornnr
1 2 | Agent Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 188.93 KiB |
A GARMIN. June 15, 2015 Federal Communications Commission Industry Canada Equipment Approval Services 3701 Carling Avenue Post Office Box 358315 PO Box 11490, Station H Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15215-5315 Ottawa, Ontario Canada K2H 882 To Whom It May Concern:
Pursuant to 47 CFR 2.911, Garmin International, Inc. (Garmin) has authorized the following Garmin International Associates to act on Garmins behalf for the sole and express purpose of processing applications to the Federal Communication Commission (FCC) and Industry Canada
(IC) for equipment authorization or certification. Mr. Kyle Grabill, Director Product and Process Quality Mr. Doug Kealey, Manager Environmental & Regulatory Affairs Mr. John Farley, Lead Compliance Engineer, Maritime Products Mr. David Utt, Lead Compliance Engineer, Wellness & Fitness Products As such, the Garmin Associates listed above are authorized to: 1) sign Form 731, 2) sign letters of application, 3) request confidentiality, and 4) exchange data and information with the FCC, IC and/or authorized TCBs on behalf of Garmin. In addition, these individuals shall be considered authorized individuals to act on Garmins behalf where an authorized individuals attestation is necessary or preferred. This authorization remains in effect until notified to the contrary by Garmin. Director, Quality Assurance and Certification ce by email: Scot Rogers, Rogers Labs, Inc.
1 2 | Authorization Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 159.10 KiB |
Garmin International, Inc. 4 2 Sist GARMIN. | Olt, tas 913 00 F September 25, 2008 Federal Communications Commission Equipment Approval Services Post Office Box 358315 Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15215-5315 To Whom It May Concern:
Pursuant to 47 CFR 2.911, Garmin International, Inc. (Garmin) has authorized Mr. Scot Rogers of Rogers Labs, Inc. to act on Garmins behalf for the sole and express purpose of processing applications to the FCC for equipment authorization. As such, Mr. Rogers is authorized to: 1) sign Form 731 2) sign letters of application, 3) request confidentiality, and 4) to exchange data and information with the FCC on behalf of Garmin. This authorization is not assignable to others beyond Mr. Scot Rogers. This authorization is in effect until notified to the contrary by Garmin. Director, Quality Assurance and Certification cc byemail: Scot Rogers, Rogers Labs, Inc. Doug Kealey, Garmin International
1 2 | Confidentiality Request Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 181.66 KiB |
ROGERS LABS, INC. 4405 West 259th Terrace Louisburg, KS 66053 913 837-3214 November 12, 2015 Timco Engineering Inc. 849 NW State Road 45 Newberry, FL 32669 Applicant:
Garmin International, Inc. 1200 East 151st Street Olathe, KS 66062 Re: Confidentiality for submittal information regarding FCC ID number IPH-0163700 PRODUCT: Receiver operated under 47CFR Section 15B Dear Sirs:
Garmin International, Inc. requests that the material in the Schematics, Block Diagram, and Operational Description be withheld from public disclosure pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules following grant of the application. In support of this request, Garmin International, Inc. submits the following information. CONFIDENTIAL FILES 0163700 Conf BlkDia.pdf 0163700 Conf OpDes.pdf 0163700 Conf Schem.pdf 1. Identification of the specific information for which confidential treatment is sought:
The materials set forth in the Operational Description, block diagram, parts list, and Schematics, which are segregated, from the non-confidential exhibits of the application, are those for which confidentiality is sought. 2. Identification of the Commission proceeding in which the information was submitted or a description of the circumstances giving rise to the submission:
The proceeding is that involving the application for equipment authorization (certification) under FCC ID: IPH-0163700 3. Explanation of the degree to which the information is commercial or financial, or contains a trade secret or is privileged:
This material includes a detailed theory of operation, circuit diagrams, and schematic. As such, this material is treated as highly confidential business information. Page 1 of 2 4. Explanation of the degree to which the information concerns a service that is subject to competition:
The material for which confidentiality is sought is employed in the design and manufacture of this transmitting equipment that is offered on a highly competitive basis. Customers for this equipment have a variety of competing sources. 5. Explanation of how disclosure of the information could result in substantial competitive harm:
Disclosure would, in effect, give away the fruits of the labors of Garmin International, Inc.s engineering personnel, who have designed the equipment and the manufacturing process. Disclosure would also offer competitors additional unwarranted insight into the state of the product development, thereby allowing competitors an advantage, not available to Garmin International, Inc. 6. Identification of any measures taken by the submitting party to prevent unauthorized disclosure:
The information for which confidential treatment is sought is kept confidential by Garmin International, Inc. and not made available to third parties except pursuant to non-disclosure agreements. 7. Identification of whether the information is available to the public and the extent of any previous disclosure of the information to third parties:
To the knowledge of those preparing this application, the information has not been disclosed publicly heretofore. While the general theory of operation of this equipment has been the subject of numerous disclosures in industry and standards groups as well as in rule making proceedings of the FCC, the protection sought is narrowly drawn and pertains to certain specific implementations of this radio technology. 8. Justification of the period during which the submitting party asserts that the material should not be available for public disclosure:
This material should not be disclosed for at least 25 years. While improvements in design are made relatively frequently, disclosure of the design information would lead to insights into both design and manufacturing techniques that could have an adverse competitive effect for many years to come. As such, it is important that the design not be made available to unauthorized persons who might attempt to use knowledge of the design to compromise the applications for which the equipment will be employed. Should you require any further information, please contact the undersigned. Thank you for your consideration in this matter. Sincerely, Scot Rogers Page 2 of 2
1 2 | Confidentiality Request Letter Short Term | Cover Letter(s) | 22.97 KiB |
ROGERS LABS, INC. 4405 West 259th Terrace Louisburg, KS 66053
+1 913 837-3214 November 16, 2015 Timco Engineering Inc. 849 NW State Road 45 Newberry, FL 32669 Applicant:
Garmin International, Inc. 1200 East 151st Street Olathe, KS 66062 Re: Short-term Confidentiality request for submittal information regarding FCC ID: IPH-0163700 FCC Rules: Parts 2 and 15B Dear Sirs:
Garmin International, Inc. requests that the following information be withheld from public disclosure pursuant to CFR47 paragraphs 0.457 and 0.459, and KDB 726920 until 45 days after the Grant of Equipment Authorization. Disclosure of information would offer competitors additional unwarranted insight into the state of the product development. File 0163700 Short Term Conf ExtPho.pdf 0163700 Short Term Conf IntPho.pdf 0163700 Short Term Conf TSup.pdf 0163700 Short Term Conf UserMan.pdf 0163700 Short Term Conf UserMan 1.pdf 0163700 Short Term Conf UserMan 2.pdf 0163700 Short Term Conf UserMan 3.pdf Short-term confidential files Exhibit External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos User Manual User Manual User Manual User Manual Should you require any further information, please contact the undersigned. Thank you for your consideration in this matter. Sincerely, Scot Rogers
1 2 | Tune Up Procedure | Parts List/Tune Up Info | 5.21 KiB |
Transmitter tune-up procedure Each transmitter is configured and tuned during production. Units are tested during production against the manufacturer defined a pass or fail criteria. The design offers no provision for user tuning. The radio must be returned to manufacturer (or representative) for tuning. Rogers Labs, Inc. 4405 West 259th Terrace Louisburg, KS 66053 Phone/Fax: (913) 837-3214 Revision 1 Garmin International, Inc. Model: GMN-00946 Test #: 121030 Test to: CFR47 Parts 2, 87 File: TunPro GMN00946 SN: 2F8000042 FCC ID: IPH-0181200 Date: December 28, 2012 Page 1 of 1
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2015-11-17 | 75 ~ 75 | CXX - Communications Rcvr for use w/ licensed Tx and CBs | Original Equipment |
2 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 | Effective |
2015-11-17
|
||||
1 2 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Garmin International Inc
|
||||
1 2 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0005088588
|
||||
1 2 | Physical Address |
1200 E. 151st. Street
|
||||
1 2 |
Olathe, 66062
|
|||||
1 2 |
Olathe, Kansas 66062
|
|||||
1 2 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
1 2 |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
|||||
1 2 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
1 2 |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
|||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 | Grantee Code |
IPH
|
||||
1 2 | Equipment Product Code |
0163700
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 | Name |
D******** K******
|
||||
1 2 | Title |
Manager Environmental and Regulatory Affairs
|
||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
91344********
|
||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
913 3********
|
||||
1 2 |
d******@garmin.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 01/01/2016 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Equipment Class | CXX - Communications Rcvr for use w/ licensed Tx and CBs | ||||
1 2 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | Receiver used w/Pt 15 Transmitter | ||||
1 2 | Spread Spectrum Digital Transmission 2402-2480 MHz | |||||
1 2 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 | Grant Comments | Professional installation required No determination has been made by the FCC as to the capability of this device to meet other than FCC requirements. Users should check with the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) to determine compliance with any applicable FAA requirements. | ||||
1 2 | Power listed is conducted. Professional installation required. No determination has been made by the FCC as to the capability of this device to meet other than FCC requirements. Users should check with the Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) to determine compliance with any applicable FAA requirements. | |||||
1 2 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 | Firm Name |
Rogers Labs, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 |
TUV SUD America, Inc.
|
|||||
1 2 | Name |
S******** R******
|
||||
1 2 |
S****** W********
|
|||||
1 2 | Telephone Number |
913-8********
|
||||
1 2 |
678-3********
|
|||||
1 2 | Fax Number |
913-8********
|
||||
1 2 |
678-3********
|
|||||
1 2 |
r******@pixius.net
|
|||||
1 2 |
s******@tuvam.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B | 75.00000000 | 75.00000000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0010000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC